Mathematical: Principles

THE
MATHEMATICAL
PRINCIPLES OF
NATURAL
PHILOSOPHY
Sir Isaac Newton
Digitized by Google
Digitized by Google
Digitized by Google
Digitized by Google
THE O/ P-/
MATHEMATICAL
PRINCIPLES
OF
Natural Philofophy.
By Sir ISAAC NEWTON.

Tranflated into ENGLL
Vol. II.
<
>
LONDON:
Printed for B e n j a m n Motte,
i at the Middle-
TtmpU'Gate, in Fleet firttt.
mdcgxxix.
jyiTl
Digitized by Google
The References to the Plate are omitted in the printed Part
of the firft Sheet* but are f-applied by the Schemes tbem-
jtlvesy which refer to the Pages to which they belong.
Digitized by Googl
i
THE
MOTION .OS
OF
BODIES.
BOOK II
SECTION I.'
Of the Motion of Bodies that are re*

ftfied in the ratio of the Velocity.
Proposition I. Theorem I.
If a body is refifted in the ratio of its velocity y

the motion loft by refiflance is as the fpace
gone over in us motion.
O R. fince the motion loft in each equal
particle of time is as the velocity, that
is, as the of fpace gone over ;
particle
thexij by corr.pofition, the motion loft in
the whole time will be as the whole fpace gone
over. QÊ. P,
Vol. II. B Cor.
2 Mathematical ^Principles Book II.
Cor. Therefore if the body, deftitute of all gravity,
move by its innate force only in free fpaces, and there
be given both its whole motion at the beginning, and
alfo the motion remaining after lome part of the way
is gone over ; there will be given alfo the whole fpace
which the body can defcribe in an infinite time. For

that fpace will be to the fpace now defcribed, as the
whole motion at the beginning is to the part loft of
that motion.
Lemma I.
Quantities proportional to their differences are

continually proportional.
Let Abe to A—B

as B to C and C to C— D,
&c. and, by converfon, will be to A B as Bto C
and C to D, &c. QÊ.D.
m
Proposition II. Theorem II.
If a body is rejiftei in the ratio of its velocity

and moves, by its vis infita only, through a
fimilar medium, and the times be taken equal ;
the velocities in the beginning of each of the
times are in a geometricalprogreffon, and the
fpaces defcribed in each of the times are as
the velocities.
Case Let the time be divided into equal particles;

i.
and if atthe very beginning of each particle we fup-
pofe the refiftance to aft with one fingle impulfe
which is as the velocity ; the decrement of the velo-
city in each of the particles of time will be as the fame
velocity. Therefore the velocities are proportional to
their differences, and therefore (by Lem. I. Book *.)
con-
^_ — . *
Digitized by Googl
Sett. I. of Natural Thilofophy. 3
continually proportional. Therefore if out of an equal
number of particles there be compounded any equal

portions of time, the velocities at the beginning of
thofe times will be as terms in a continued progrtdion,
which are taken by intervals, omitting every where
an equal number of intermediate terms. But the ra-
tio's of thefe terms are compounded of the equal ratio's
of the intermediate terms equally repeated ; and there-

fore are equal. Therefore the being pro-
velocities,
portional to thofe terms, are in geometrical progi eflion.
Let thofe equal particles of time be diminifhed, and
their number increafed in infinitum* fo that the impulfe
of refiftance may become continual ; and the veloci-
ties at the beginnings of equal times, always continu-
ally proportional, will be alfo in this cafe continually
proportional. O. E. D.
Case 2. And, by divifion, the differences of the
velocities, that is, the parts of the velocities loft in
each of the times, are as the wholes : But the fpaccs
defcribed in each of the times arc as the loft parts of
the velocities, (by Prop. r. Book 2.) and therefore are
alfo as the wholes. O. E. D.
Corol. Htnceif to the re&angular afymptotes'^C,
CH, the Hyperbola B G is defcribed, and AB> be DG
drawn perpendicular to the afymptote C, and both A
the velocity of the body, and the refiftance of the me-
dium, at the very beginning of the motion, be ex-
prefs'd by any given line AC, and after fome time is
elapfed, by the indefinite line DC; the time may be
exprefs'd by the area ABGD, and the fpace defcri-
bed in that time by the line For if that area, AD.
by the motion of the point D, be uniformly increafed
in the fame manner as the time, the right line will DC
decreafe in a geometrical ratio in the fame manner as
the velocity, and the parts of the right Ijne AC, de*
times, will decreafe in the fame ratio.
B a. :.. :
fr*-°z
Digitized by Google
4 Mathematical 'Principles Book II.
Proposition III. Problem I.
To define the motion of a body which, in a

fimilar medium-, afcends or defcends in a right
line, and is refifled in the ratio of its velocity,
and aftcd upon by an uniform force ofgravity*
The body afcending, let the gravity be expound-
ed by any given rc&angle BA CH; and the rcfiftance
of the medium, at the beginning of the afcent, by the
rectangle BADE, taken on the contrary fide of the
right line AB. Through the point B, with the
rcdhngular afymptotes AC, CH, defcribe an Hyperbola,
cutting the perpendiculars DE, de, inG,g; and the
body afcending will in the time DG gd defcribe the
fpace EGge; in the time DGBA, the fpace of the
whole afcent EGB ; in the time ABKJ, the fpace of
defcent B FK; and in the time IKkJ the fpace of de-
fcent KFfkj and the of the bodies (propor-
velocities
tional to the refifhnce of the medium,) in thefc pe-
riods of time, will beABED, ABed, o, ABFf,
ABfi refpeftivcly ; and the greatcft velocity which
the body can acquire by defcending, will be BACH.
For let the rectangle BACH
be refolved into innu-
merable re&angles Akj A7, L m, Mn, &c which
fhall be as the increments of the velocities produced in
lb many equal times; then will o, Ak^ Al, Am, An %
&c. be as the whole velocities, and therefore (by fup-
pofirionj as the refinances of the medium in the be-
ginning of each of the equal times. Make to AC
AK, or ABHCto ABkJC as the force of gravity
to the refinance in the beginning of the fecond time ;
then from the force of gravity fubdudt the refiftances*
and ABHC }
Kl^HC, LIHC, MmHC,
&c. will be
as the abfolute forces with which the body is a&ed
upon in the beginning of each of the times, tnd there-
fore
Digitized by Google
Sea. I. of Natural Thtlofoph. 5
fore (by Law 2) as the increments, of the velocities,
that is, as the rectangles Akj A7, Lw, Mn> txc. and
therefore (by Lem. 1. Book 2.) in a geometrical pro-
greflion. Therefore if the right lines Kk,j LI, Mm,
Nn> tec. produced fo as to meet the Hyperbola in
are
fy**s>t)(trc. the areas ABqK, Kqr L, LrsAi, MstN,
tec will be equal, and therefore analogous to the equal
times and equal gravitating forces. But the area ^4 ft q K
(by Corol. 3. Lem. 7 &
8. Book 1.) is to the area Bl^q
as Kq to ~ kq* or AC to f AK, that is as the force
of gravity to the refiftance in the middle of the firft
time.And by the like reafoning the areas qKLr %
rLMs, sMNt, dec. are to the areas qk^lr, rims,

smnt) &c. as the gravitating forces to the refiftances
in the middle of the fecond, third, fourth time, and
fo on. Therefore fince the equal areas BAKq, qKL r,
rLMs t sMNt, &c. are analogous to the gravitating
forces, the areas Bk$> qkjr, rims, smnt, &c. will
be analogous to the refiftances in the middle of each of
the times, (by fuppofition) to the velocities,
that is
and fo to the fpaces defcribed. Take the fums of the

analogous quantities, and the areas Bkq> Blr, Bms y
Bnt, &c. will be analogous to the whole fpaces defcri-
bed ; and alfo the areas
q AB K,ABrUABsM,ABtN>
&c Therefore the body, in defcending,
to the times.
will in anytime ABr
L, defcribe the fpace Blr, and
in the time L r t N
the fpace r Int. QÊ. D. And
the like demonftration holds in afcending motion.
Corol. 1. Therefore the greateft velocity that the

body can acquire by falling, is to the velocity acquired
in any given time, as the given force of gravity which
perpetually a&s upon it, to the refitting force which

eppofes it end of that time.
at the
Corol. 2. But the time being augmented'in an arith-
metical progreflion, the fum of that greateft velocity
and the velocity in the afecat, and alfo their difference
in the defcent, decreafes in a geometrical progreflion.
— - - - - —- — _a * * _ _ «
B 3 Cor.
Digitized by Google
& Mathematical Trinciples Book II.
;
Corol. 3. Alfo the differences of the fpaces, which
afe defcribed in equal differences of the times, decreafe
in the fame geometrical progreffion.
Couol. 4. The fpace defcribed by the body is the
difference of two whereof one is as the time
fpaces,
^taken from the beginning of the defcent, and the other
as the velocity ; which [fpaces] alfo at the beginning
of the defcent are equal among themfelves.
. Proposition IV. Problem II.
Sup'pojjrjg the force ofgravity in any fimilar me-

dittm to be uniform, and to tend perpendicu-
larly to the plane of the horizon ; to define
the motion of a projectile therein, which fuf-
fers refinance proportional to its velocity.
projeftile go from any place D in the di-

Let the
f efhonof any right line D P, and let its velocity ac
the beginning of the motion be expounded by the
length DP. From the point P let fall the perpendicu-
lar PC on the horizontal line DC, and cut DC in A,
fo that DA may AC
as the refiftance of the me-
be to
dium arifing motion upwards at the begin-
from its
ning, to the force of gravity : or (which comes to the

fame) fo that the reftangle under and DA
P may D
be to that under AC
and CP, as the whole re-
fiftance at the beginning of the motion to the force of
gravity. With the afymptotes DC, CP defcribe any
Hyperbola GTB S cutting the perpendiculars DG, AS
in G and B compleat the parallelogram DGKC, and
;
let its fide cut GK in jO. AB

Take a line in N
the fame ratio to QJB as D
C is in to CP ; and from
any point R of the right line DC, ereft R perpen- T
dicular to it, meeting the Hyperbola in T, and the right
lines EH) GK, DP in I,t, and V m
, in that perpendi-
cular
Digitized by Googl
Sea. I. of Natural Thilofiphy. 7
t GT
cular take Vr equal to ~ VT or, which > is the fame
N
G
to —
TIE
thing, take Rr equal — ; and the projefiile in
the time DRTG will arrive at the point r, defcri-

bing the curve line DraF, the locus of the point r ;
thence it will come to its greateft height a in the per-

pendicular A
B ; and afterwards ever approach to
the afymptote P C. And its velocity in any point r
will be as the tangent r L to the curve. O. E. I.
For N DC
is to OB is DR
to CP or to Rr, and
therefore R f
DR *Q B
equal to is anc R y j ( thit is,
N
9Jf — Try
Ry rr or
BRxQB—tGT\
=~ .
is equal to
J
DRxA B — RDGT . Now
.
let
.
the time be expounded

^.
by the area RDGT, and (by Laws Cor, 2 ) diftinguifli
the motion of the body into two others, one of afcenr,
the other lateral. And fince
the refiftancc is as the
motion, let that alio be diftinguilhcd into two parts
proportional and contrary to the parts of the motion :
and therefore the length defcribed by the lateral motion,
will be (by Prop. i. Book 1.) astheline DR> and the
height (by Prop. 3. Book 2.) as the area DRxAB—-
RDGT, that is, as the linear. But in the very be-
ginning of the motion the area RDGT is equal to
thereftangle DRxAO, and therefore that line Rr
DRxAB
— — DRxAO\
s ... m
(
< or
^ ) will
,
then be to DR as
— AOov QJ to N, that is, as to C; and CP D

wefore as the motion upwards to the motion length-
*hc at the beginning. Since therefore R r is always as
™e height, and DR
always as the length, and Rr is to
at the beginning, as the height to the length : it
B 4 follows,
Digitized by Google
S Mathematical Principles Book If.
follows, that Rr is always to DR as the height to the
length ; and therefore that the body will move in
the line DraF, which is the locus of the point r-
O. E. D.
Cor. i. Therefore Rr is equal to

N
—
RDGT——— ; and therefore if RT be produced to X> fo
that RX may be equal to îat ^ ^ c P a" * s*
iallelogram ACPT be compleated, and D T cutting CP iti
Z be drawn, and RZfbc produced meets D Tin X; Xr till it
'^R D G T
will be equal —~— and therefore proportional to
'
to' j
the time.
Cor. 2. Whence if innumerable lines CR, or,
which is the fame, innumerable lines ZX y be taken
in a geometrical progreffion ; there will be as many
lines Xr in an arithmetical progreffion. And hence
the curve DraF is eafily delineated by the Table of
Logarithms.
Cor. 3. If a Parabola be conftru&ed to the vertex D,
and the diameter D G, produced downwards, and its
latus reftum is to 2 D
P as the whole refiftanceat the be-
ginning of the motion to the gravitating force : the
velocity "with which the body ought to go from the
place D, in the direftion of the right line DP> fo as in
an uniform refilling medium to defcribe the curve
DraF, will be the fame as that with which it ought
to go from the fame place D, in the dire&ion of the
fame right line DP, fo as to defcribe a Parabola in a
non-refifting medium. For the latus reftum of this
Parabola, at the very beginning of the motion,
—
is
J>V % tGT DRxTt ^

7>" 5
rr
™d rr
. .
is or — But
.
a right
,
line.
Digitized by Googlfc
Sc£L L of Natural Thilofophy. 9
line, which, if drawn, would touch the Hyperbola
GTS in G, is parallel to DK> and therefore Tt is
CKxDR
— JVT QBxDC
^ — .
r
and N
.
. ,
, is : And therefore /^r is
JD C C/
equal to
. DR*xCKxCP
—
zDC xQB—
— — -
2
, that is, (becaufe
r w*m
D R and
*
^ ^ rr Jnn D X
—
CKx CP
Tand DP
t, ,
DC>D are proportionals) to
,
and the lams

- _
re&um
- D/^
—
J
-
J^r
— comes out —
— xQB
zDP
CKx—CP
2
f=*-t
that i?, (becaufe jgfi and Ctf, and ^C are pro-
portional)
2
—
—D P 2 x DA -pr^-» and therefore is to zD />, as
DPxDA to CPxAC; that is, as the refiftance to the

gravity. Q.E.D.
Cor. 4. Hence if a body be proje&ed from any
place D, with a given velocity, in the direftion of
a right line D P given by pofition and the refiftance ,*
of the medium, at the beginning of the motion, be

given : the curve DraF> which
de- that body will
scribe, may be found. For the velocity being given,
the latus re&um of the parabola is given, as is well
known. And taking 1 D
P to that latus re&um, as the
force of gravity to the refilling force, P is alio given. D
Then cutting DC
in A> fo that CP x may be AC
to D P x DA
in the fame ratio of the gravity to the
refiftance, the point will be given. A
And hence the
curve DraF is alfo given.
Cor. And on
the contrary, if the curve
y. DraF
be given, there willbe given both the velocity of the
body, and the refiftance of the medium in each of the
places r. For the ratio of CP x to x AC DP DA
being given, there is given both the refiftance of the
medium at the beginning of the motion, and the latus
reftum of the parabola ; and thence the velocity at the
bcgin-
Digitized by Google
io Mathematical Principles Book II.
beginning of the motion is given alfo. Then from

the length of the tangent rL> there is riven both the
velocity proportional to it, and the renftance propor-
tional to the velocity in anyplace r.
CoR.tf. But fince the length is to the latus iDP
re£tum of the parabola as the gravity to the refiftance
in Dy and, from the velocity augmented, the refiftance
is augmented in the fame ratio, but the latus reftum of
the parabola is augmented in the duplicate of that ra-

tio ; it is plain that the length iDP is augmented in
that fimple ratio only and is therefore always propor-
tional to the velocity ; nor will it be augmented ordi-
miniflied by the change of the angle 3 unlefs the CDP
velocity be alfo changed.
Cor. 7. Hence method of determining

appears the
the curve DraF, from the phenomena, and
nearly,
thence collecting the refiftance and velocity with which
the body is projefted. Let two fimilar and equal bo-
dies be projefted with the fame velocity, from the
place D y in different angles CDPy CDp ; and let the
places F where they upon the horizontal plane
fall
DC, be known. Then taking any length for DP or

Dp, fuppofe the refiftance in D to be to the gravity
in any ratio whatfoever, and let that ratio be ex-
pounded by any length S M. Then by computation,
from that affumed length DP y find the lengths F> D
Ff
Df; and from the ratio
jjj;,
found by calculation, fub-
duft the fame ratio as found by experiment ; and let

the difference be expounded by the perpendicular MN.
Repeat the fame a lecond and a third time, by affuming
always a new ratio SM
of the refiftance to the gra-
vity, and collefting a new difference Draw the MN.
affirmative differences on one fide of the right line SM,
and the negative on the other fide ; and through the
points N, jY, N draw a regular curve NNN> cutting
the
by Google
*
Scft. I. :
§f Natural Thilofophy. 1
the right line S MMM in X, and SX will be the

true ratio of the refiftance to the gravity, which was
to be found. From this ratio the length DF is to be
collefted by calculation; and a length, which is to the
affumed length DP, as the length DF known by ex-
periment to the length DF juft now found, will be
the true length DP* This being known, you will
have both the curve lineDr*iF which the body de-
fcribes, and alfo the velocity and refiftance of the body
in each place.
Scholium.
But yet that the refiftance of bodies is in the ratio
of the velocity, is more a mathematical hypothefis
than a phyfical one. In mediums void of all tenacity,
the refiftances made to bodies are in the duplicate ratio
of the velocities. For by the adion of a fwifter body,
a greater motion, in proportion to a greater velocity, is
communicated to the fame quantity of the medium, in

a lefs time; and in an equal time, by reafon of a greater
quantity of the difturbed medium, a motion is com-

municated in the duplicate ratio greater ; and the re-
fiftance (by Law z and 3.) is as the motion communi-
cated. Let us therefore fee what motions arife from
this law of refiftance.
SEC-
Digitized by Google
Mathematical Principles Book II.
SECTION II.
0
Of the Motion of Bodies that are refifled

in the duplicate ratio of their V ?locit?es.
Proposition V. Theorem III.
If a body the duplicate ratio of

is refifled in
its velocity, and moves by its innate force
only through a Jimilar medium and the times
be taken in a geometrical progreffian, proceed-
w& rom kfs to greater terms : I fay that
f
the velocities at the beginning of each of the
times are in the fame geometrical progrefjion
inverfely j and that the /paces are equal,
which are deferibed in each of the times.
4
For fince the r#fiftanceof the medium i$ proportional

to the fquare of the velocity, and the decrement of the
velocity is proportional to the refiftance ; if the time be
divided into innumerable equal particles, the fquares of
the velocities at the beginning of each of the times will
be proportional to the differences of the fame velocities.
Let thofe particles of time btAK, KL, LM, &c. taken
in the right line CD ; and ereft the perpendiculars A
B,
Kkj LI, Mm, ice. meeting the Hyperbola Bhjm G% de-
fcribed with the centre C, and the re&angular afymptotes
CD, CH> iuB,kchm, &c. then jtB will be to Kk?
Digitized by Google
Scft. II.of Natural Thilofiphy. \ 5
as CKtoCA, and, by divifion, AB Kk^ to AT^ as —

AK to CA, and, alternately, AB Kk^ to AK as —
K{\o CA, and therefore as AB x Kk to >4£ x CA.
Therefore fince -îCand ABx CA are given, -42? — A ^
will ABxKk^', and laftly, when AB and ^coin-
be as
cide, as AB 2
. And, by the like reafoning, Kk. LI, —
LI— Mm, dec. will be as K k?, L/ 2 , &c. There-
fore the fquarcs of the lines AB, Kl^ LI, Mm, dec.
are as their ; and therefore, fince the

differences
fquares of the were (hewn above to be as
velocities
their differences, the progreffion of both will be alike.
This being deraonftrated, it follows alfo that the areas
defcribed by thefe lines are in a like progreffion with
the fpaces defcribed by thefe velocities. Therefore if
the velocity at the beginning of the firft time AK be
expounded by the line AB, and the velocity at the be-
ginning of the fecond time KL
by the line Kk^ and
the length defcribed in the firft time by the area AKkJB;
all the following velocities will be expounded by the
following lines LI, Mm,
dec. and the lengths defcri-
bed, by the areas Kl, Lm, &c. And, by compofi-
tion, if the whole time be expounded by the AM,
fumof its parts, the whole length defcribed will be ex-
pounded by AMmBthe fum of its parts. Now con-
ceive the time-^^fto be divided into the parts AK,
KL LM,
y dec. fo that CA, CK, CL,CM,
&c. may
be in a geometrical progreffion ; and thofe parts will be
in the fame progreffion, and the velocities AB, K\>
LI, Mm, Sec. will be in the fame progreffion in verfly,
and the fpaces defcribed Akj Kl, Lm, &c. will be
equal. 0. E. D.
Cor. 1. Hence it appears, that if the time be ex-
pounded by any part AD of the afymptote,
and the
velocity in the beginningof the time by the ordinate
AB \ the velocity at the end of the time will be ex-
pounded by the ordinate D G ; and the whole fpace de-
fcribed, by the adjacent hyperbolic area ABOD;
and
14 Mathematical Principles Book II.
and the fpace which any body can defcribe in the

fame time AD, with the fifft velocity AB, in a non-
refifting medium, by the reftangle ABxAD.
Cor. 2. Hence the fpace defcribed in a refifting me-
dium is given, by taking it to the fpace defcribed with
the uniform velocity A3 ih a non-refifting medium,
as the hyperbolic area ABGD to the reftangle
ABxAD.
Cor. 5. The refiftance of the medium is alfo given,
by making it equal, in the very beginning of the mo-
tion, to an uniform centripetal force, which could ge-
nerate, in a body falling thro* a non-refifting medium,
the velocity ABy time AC.in For if
the be BT
drawn touching the hyperbola in B, and meeting the
afymptote in T; the right line ^Twill be equal to
AC, and will exprefs the time, in which the firft re-
fiftance uniformly continued, may take away thewhole
velocity AB.
Cor. 4. And thence is alfo given the proportion of
this refiftance to the force of gravity, or any other
given centripetal force.
Cor. 5. And vice verfa, if there is given the pro-
portion of the refiftance to any given centripetal force;
the time^fC is alfo given, in which a centripetal force
equal to the rtfiftance may generate any velocity as
AB ; and thence is given the point B y through which
the hyperbola, having CH, CD

for its afymptotes, is
to be defcribed; as alfo the fpace which a ABGD,
body, by beginning its motion with that velocity AB,
can defcribe in any time AD, in a fimilar refifting me-
dium.
•
• «
% .
* • it
, Pro-
Digitized by Google
Scd. II. of Natural Thibfophy.
'Proposition VI. •
Theorem IV.
Homogeneous and equal fpkerical bodies, op-
posd by re/iftances that are in the duplicate
ratio of the velocities, and moving on by
their innate force only, will, in times which
are reciprocally as the velocities at the begin-
ning, defcribe equal /paces, and lofe parts of
their velocities proportional to the wholes.
To the re<5bmgu!ar afymptotes CD, CH defcribe any

hyperbola BbEe, cutting the perpendiculars B, ab, A
DE,de, in B,b, E,c ; let the initial velocities be ex-
pounded by the perpendiculars AB, DE, and the
times by the lines Aa, Dd. Therefore as Aa is to
Dd, (by thehypothefis) is
fo DE toAB, and fo (from
the nature of the hyperbola) is CA to CD , and, by
compofition, fo is C* to Cd. Therefore the areas
ABba, DEed, that is, the fpaces defcribed, are equal
among themfelves, and the firft velocities AB, DE are
proportional to the laft*£, dc; and therefore, by di-
vifion, proportional to the parts of the velocities loft,
AB—ab, DE—dc. Q.E.D.
Proposition VII. Theorem V-

If fpherical bodies are refifted in the duplicate
ratio of their velocities, in times which are
as the firft motions dire£lly and the firft re-
ftjlances inverfely, they will lofe parts of their
'
motions proportional to the wholes, and will

defcribe fpaces proportional to thofe times
and the firft velocities conjunctly.
For the parts of the motions loft are as the refiftancefc

and times conjun&ly. Therefore, that thofe parts may
•
be
—
*-
m
Digitized by Google
1 6 Mathematical Principles Book EL
be proportional to the wholes, the refiftance and time
conjunctly ought to be as the motion. Therefore the
time will be as the motion direftly and the refiftance
inverfely. Wherefore the particles of the times being
taken in that ratio, the bodies will always lofe parts of
their motions proportional to the wholes, and there-
fore will retain velocities always proportional to their
firft velocities, And becaufe of the given ratio of the
velocities, they will always defcribc fpaces, which are
as the firft velocities and the times conjundly. Q. E. D.
Cor. i. Therefore if bodies equally fwift are re-
fitted in a duplicate ratio of their diameters : Homo-
geneous globes moving with any velocities whatfoever,
by defcribing fpaces proportional to their diameters,
will lofe parts of their motions proportional to the
wholes. For the motion of each globe will be as its
velocity and mafs conjunctly, that is, as the velocity
and the cube of its diameter ; the refiftance (by fup-
pofition) will be as the fquare of the diameter and the
fquare of the velocity conjunctly; and the time (by
this propofition) is in the former ratio dire&ly and
in the latter inverfely, that is, fas the diameter di-
redly and the velocity inverfely ; and therefore the
fpace, which is proportional to the time and velocity,
is as the diameter.
Cor. 2. If bodies equally fwift are refitted in a fef-
quiplicate ratio of their diameters: Homogeneous globes,
moving with any velocities whatfoever, by defcribing
fpaces that arc in a fefquiplicate ratio of the diameters*
will lofe parts of their motions proportional to the
wholes.
Cor. 3. And univerfally, if equally fwift bodies arc
refitted in the ratioof any power or the diameters :
the fpaces, in which homogeneous globes, moving with
any velocity whatfoever, will lofe parts of their mo-
tions proportional to the wholes, will be as the cubes of
the diameters applied to that power. Let thofe di-
ameters
Digitized by Google
Diq [le
Digitized by Google
Sccl IL of Natural Thilofophy. 1
ameters applied to that power. Let thofe diameters be

D and E ; and if the refiftances, where the velocities
are fuppofed equal, are as D* and E" : the fpaces in
which the globes, moving with any velocities whatfo-
cver, will lofe parts of their motions proportional to
the wholes, will be as " and E 3 D 3—
*. And there- ~
fore homogeneous globes, in defcribing fpaces propor-
tional to D
and E 3
3 "
will retain their velocities
in the one another as at the beginning.
fame ratio to
Cor. 4. Now if the globes are not homogeneous,
the fpace dcfcribed by the denfer globe muft be aug-
mented in the ratio of the derifity. For the motion,

with an equal velocity, is greater in the ratio of the
denfity, and the time (by this Prop.) is augmented in
the ratio of motion diredly, and the fpace defcribed
in the ratio of the time.
Cor. f.
And if the globes move in different me-
diums, the fpace, in a medium which, uteris fmbus,
refifts muft be diminifhed in the ratio of
the moft,
the greater refiftance. For the time (by this Prop.)
will be diminifhed in the ratio of the augmented re-
fiftance, and the fpace in the ratio of the time.
"Lemma II. t
The moment of any Genitum is equal to the

moments of each of the generating (ides drawn
into the indices of the powers of thofe fides,
and into their coefficients continually.
*
I call any quantity a Gentium, not made which is

addition or fubduflion of divers parts, but is gene-
rated or
produced in arithmetic by the multiplication, di-
vifion, or extraction ot
the root of any terms whatfoever;
Jn
geometry by the invention of contents and fides, or of
the extreams
and means of proportionals Quantities of
* V
Voi.. II. -
c this
Digitized by Google
i$ Mathematical Principles Book II
this kind are produfts, quotients, roots, re&angles,fquares,

cubes, fquareand cubic (ides, and the like. Thefe quanti-
and indetermincd, and in-
ties I here confider as variable
creafing or decreafine as it were by a perpetuafmotion
or flux ; and I under/land their momentaneous increments
or decrements by the name of Moments; fo that the
increments may be cfteem'd as added, or affirmative mo-
ments j and the decrements as fubdufted, or negative
ones. But upon finite particles as
take care not to look
fuch. Finite particles are not moments, but the very
quantities generated by the moments. We are to conceive
tnem as the juft nafcent principles of finite magnitudes.
Nor do we in this Lemma regard the magnitude of the
moments, but their firft proportion as nafcent. It will
be the fame thine, if, inlteadof moments, we ufeeither
the Velocities ot the increments and decrements (which
may alfo be called the motions, mutations, and fluxions
of quantities) or any finite quantities proportional to
thole velocities. The coefficient of any generating
fide is the quantity which arifes by applying the
Genitum to that fide.
Wherefore thefenfe of the Lemma is, that if the mo-
ments of any quantities A, B, C, &c. increafing or de-
creasing by a perpetual flux, or the velocities of the
mutations which are proportional to them, be called
by c, &c. the moment or mutation of the generated
re&angle AB will be *B-|-£A; the moment of the
generated content ABC will be *BC + bAC -|-
cAB: and the moments of the generated powers, AS

A A 4 AS AS AS AS A~ S A
3
, , A * will *,
-
be iaA,
—
j*AS 4*AS i«A *, **A* 9 jaA~
**A
— * , — *A~ — iaA— 3 — i*A~*
2
, ,
relpe&ively. And in general, that the moment of any
power A"S" will be — 4A~" . Alfo that the moment
* of
Digitized by Google
Scd. of Natural Thilofophy.
II. x 9
of the generated quantity A B will be i a A B~(~£ A ;

2 2
the A B 4 C 2 will
moment of the generated quantity 3
be 4A B*C -f
3
4Â
2
B C 2
-|-2cA
2
B^C; and 3 5 3
A — 3
the moment of the generated quantity or A B~ 2 3
will be $*A 2 B- 2 — 2*A 3

B- 3
* and fo on. The
Lemma is thus demonflrated.
Case i. Any re&angle as augmented by a per-* AB
petual flux, when, of the fides
as yer, there wanted
A and B half their moments \ a and $b, was A \* —
into B—
\b y or ±a& AB —
* b A -\-%*b ; but —
as foon as the fides A and B are augmented by the
other half moments ; the rectangle becomes A -|- \ a
intoB-|-4* orAB +
t*B+**A-l-i*fc From
this reftangle fubduft the former re&angle, and there
will remain the excefs aJS ~\~b A. Therefore with the
whole increments a and b of the fides, the i#crement
*B-\~bAo{ the reftangle is generated. O.E. D.
Case 2. Suppofe AB always equal toG, and then
the moment of the content A B C or G C (by Cafe 1.)
willbe^C- cG, that is, (putting AB and aB-\~b A

j
for G and^) 4BC ~|- b A C -|- c A B. And the rea-

foning is the fame for contents under never fo many
fides. O. E. D.
Case 5. Suppofe the fides A, B, and C, to be al-
ways equal among themfelves ; and the moment aB
-\-b A, of A 2 , that is, of the reftangle AB, will be
24 A; and the moment aBC-\-b A C ~\-c Ah of
A 3
, that is, of the content ABC, will be 3 a A2 .
And by the fame reafoning the moment of any power

-" 1
A* is na A" . Q.E.D.
Case 4. Therefore fince ~ into A is 1, the moment
1
A
of i. drawn into A, together with ~ drawn into a9
will be the moment of 1, that is, nothing. There-

C 1 fore
Digitized by Google
zo Mathematical Principles Book II.
fore the moment of ~ or of A"" 1

is And ge-
nerally fince ~ into A" is i, the moment of ~

"" 1
drawn into A" together with ^ into na A*1
will be
nothing. And therefore the moment of ~ or A""*
will be— toV OE.D.

± j.
Case*. And A into Afince

2 1
is A, the moment
of A 2 drawn into a A will be a

2 (by Cafe and
y 5 :)
therefore the moment of A will be

2 —
1 Ax
r or \a A
—2 ±
And generally, putting A w

equal to B, then A will
be equal to B», and therefore maAm " 1

equal to
nbB*~~ l
, mak" equal toaiB^ or»£A *
and
1 1
;
m— n
m
and therefore — a A n equal to b, that equal to
is is,
M
the moment of A" . Q. E. D.
Case 6. Therefore the moment of any generated
quantity Am B* is moment of A m drawn into B", to-
the
gether with the moment of B* drawn into A", that is,
~*
ma A™"" 1
B"-|-*£ B n x A w ; and that whether the
indices m and * of the powers be whole numbers or
fraftions, affirmative or negative. And thereafoningis
the fame for contents under more powers. O.E.D.
^
Cor. i. Hence in quantities continually propor-
tional, if one term is given, the moments of the reft
of the terms will be as the fame terms multiplied by
2 the
Digitized by Google
I
Sect. II. of Natural Thilofophy. 2
the number of intervals between them and the given

term. Let A, B, C, D, E, F, be continually propor-
tional; then if the term C
is given, the moments of the
reft of the terms will be among themfelves, as 2 A, —

— B, D, 2E, *F.
Cor. 2. And if in four proportionals the twomeans
are given, the moments of the extremes will be as thole
extremes. The fame is to be underftood of the fides
of any given re&angle.
Cor. 3. And if the fum or difference of two fquares
is given, the moments of the fides will be reciprocally
as the fides.
Scholium.
In of mine to Mr.
a letter Collins, dated Decem-
J.
ber 10. 1572. having defcribed a method of Tangents,
which 1 fufpefted to be the fame with Slufius's method,
which at that time was not made publick ; I fubjoin-
ed thefe words ; This is one particular, or rather a co-
rollary, of a general method, which extends itfelf, without
any troublefome calculation, not only to the drawing of Tan-
gents to any Curve lines, whether Geometrical or Mechanical*
or any how refp:U 'mg right lines or other Curves, bm alfi
to the refolving other abftrufer kinds of Problems about the
crookednefs, areas, lengths* centres of gravity of Curves, 8cc.
nor is it (as HuddenV method de Maximis & Minimis)
limited to equations which are free from furd quantities.
This method I have interwoven with that other of working
in equations, by reducing them to infinite Jeries. So far
that letter. And thele laft words relate to a Treatife I
compofed on that fubjeft in the year 1671. The
foundation of that general method is contained in the
preceding Lemma.
C 3 Pro-
Digitized by Google
zz Mathematical Trine iples Book II.
Proposition VIII. Theorem VI.

If a body in an uniform medium, being uniformly
ailed upon by the force of gravity, afcends or
defcends in a right line 5 and the whole fpace
defcribed be dtfiinguijhed into equal parts,
and in tbe beginning of each of the parts,
{by adding or fub duffing the refifling force of
the medium to or from the force of gravity,
when the body afcends or defcends) you collect
the abfolute forces / fay that thofe abfo-
5
lute forces are in a geometrical progrejfion.

PL 2. Fig. 1.
For let the force ofgravity be expounded by the given

line AC ; the force of refiftance by the indefinite line
AK; the abfolute force in the defcent of the body, by
the difference KC ; the velocity of the body by a
line AP> which (hall be a mean proportional between
AK and AC> and therefore in a fubduplicare ratio of
the refiftance ; the increment of the refiftance made in
a given particle of time by the lineola L, and the con- K
temporaneous increment of the velocity by the lineola
; and with the centre C, and redhngular afymptotes
H
CA, C y defcribe any Hyperbola BJVS, meeting the
ere&ed perpendiculars AB, KN, in B> y and O. LO N
Becaulc AK
is as AP*> the moment of the one KL
will be as the moment 1 APOot the other, that is, as
APxKC; for the increment P Qof the velocity is
(by Law 2.) proportional to the generating force KC.
Let the ratio of KL be compounded with the ratio of
KJV, and the reftangle KLxKN
will become as
APxKCxKN; that is, (becaufe the re&angle KC
X KJV is given) 2sA P. But the ultimate ratio of the
hyperbolic area K NO L to the reftangle KLxKN
becomes, when the points K and L coincide, the ratia
Digitized by Goc
Sea. II. of Natural Thilofophy. zi
of equality. Therefore that hyperbolic evanefcent area
is as A P. Therefore the whole hyperbolic area
ABOL is compofed of particles KNOL
which are
always proportional to the velocity ; AP
and therefore
is itfelf proportional to the fpace defcribed with that
velocity. Let that area be now divided into equal

parts, as ABMI, IMNK, KNOL, &c. andtheab-
folute forces AC, IC, KC, LC, &c. will be in a
geometrical progreflion. CKE.D. And by a like
reafoning, in the afcent of the body, taking, on the
contrary fide of the point A, the equal areas ABmi,
imnl^, knoly &c. it will appear that the abfolute fortes
AC, iC, kjC^ IC, &c. are continually proportional.
Therefore if all the fpaces in the afcent and defcent are
taken equal ; all the abfolute forces IC, ^C, iC9 AC,
IC, KC, LC, &c. will be continually proportional.
Q.E.D.
Cor. i. Hence if the fpace defcribed be expound-
ed by the hyperbolic area^ZJjVX; the force of gra-
vity, the velocity of the body, and the refi fiance of
the medium, may be expounded by the lines AC, AP 9

and AK refpeftively ; and vice verfa.
Cor. 2. And the greateft velocity, which the body
can ever acquire in an infinite defcent, will be expound-
ed by the line AC.
Cor.j. Therefore if the refiftance of the medium
anfwering to any given velocity be known, the greateft
velocity will be found, by taking it to that given ve-
locity in a ratio fubduplicate of the ratio which the
force of gravity bears to that known refiftance of the
tedium.
C 4 Pro-
Digitized by Google
24. Mathematical Trinciples Book If.
Proposition IX. Theorem VII.

Suppofing what is above demonflrated, I fay
that if the tangents of the angles of the fetfor
of a circle, and of an hyperbola, be taken
proportional to the velocities, the radius be-
ing of a fit magnitude \ all the time of the
afcent to the highefl place will be as the
fettor of the circle, and all the time of de-
scending from the highefl place as the jfector
of the hyperbola. PI. 2. Fig. 2.
To the right line^C, which exprefles the force of

gravity, let AD be drawn perpendicular and equal.
From the centre D
with the femidiameter dcfcribe AD
as well the AtE of a Circle; as the reftangular
quadrant
Hyperbola AfZ, whofe axe is AX, principal vertex
A] and afymptote DC. Let Dp, be drawn; and DP
the circular feftor At D
will be as all the time of the
afcent to the higheft place; and the hyperbolic feftor
ATD as all the time of defcent from the higheft place :
If fobe that the tangents Ap, AP
of thofe fe&ors be as
the velocities. Fig. 2.
Case i. Draw Dvq cutting off the moments or
leaft particles tDv and qDp, dcfcribed in the fame time,
of the ieftor ADt and of the triangle AD p. Since
thofe particles (becaufe of the common angle D) are in
a duplicate ratio of the fides, the particle tDv will be
*
as —
qDpxtD
yjji
1
,
.
that
..
is,
,
(becaufe
r _
tD is
.
given)
x
as
cjDp
y^.
But pD AD 2
2
is -\-Ap % , that is, AD*-\-ADx
Ak<> m ADxCkj and q Dp is -ADxpq. There-
fore tDv, the particle of the feftor, is > that
Digitized by Google
Seft. II. of Natural Thilofophy. 25
is, astheleaft decrement/?^ of the velocity dire&Iy, and
the force Ckj which diminiihcs the velocity, inverfe-

ly ;and therefore as the particle of time anfwering to
the decrement of the velocity. And, by compofition,
the fum of all the particles tDv in the fe&or ADt,
will be as the fum of the particles of time anfwering to
each of the loft particles /><y, of the decreafing velocity

Af % till that velocity, being diminiftied into nothing,
vanifhes; that is, the whole fector ADt is as the
whole time of afcent to the higheft place. 0. E. D.
Case 2. Draw D QV cutting off the lealt particles
TDT and PDO of die fedor DAT, and of the tri-
angle DAQ^'y an3 thefe particles will be to each other
as DT 2
to(if TX DPAP 2
, that is, and are parallel;
zsDX 2 to DA
TX toAP and, by divifion,
2
or 2 2
DX —TX to DA — AP
;
2 2 2 2
as But, from the na-
of the hyperbola, DX — TX
.
ture AD and, 2 2
is
2
;
by the fuppohtion, AP ADxAK. Therefore 2

is
the particles are to each other as AD to AD — 2 2
ADxAK; that is, as AD to AD — AK or AC

to CK : and therefore the particle TDVoi the fe&or is
P^DQx AC ^ therefore (becaufe AC and ^Dare
CK
PO
given) as that is, as the increment of the velo-
city dire&ly, and as the force generating the increment

inverfely ; and therefore as of the time an-
the particle
fwering to the increment. And, by compofition, the
fum of the particles of time, in which nil the particles
?Q_ of the velocity AP
are generated, will be as the
fum of the particles of the feftor ; that is, the ATD
whole time will be as the whole fe&or. O. E. D.
Cor. 1. Hence if AB be equal to a fourth part of
-^C, the fpace which a body will defcribe by falling in
any time will be to the fpace which the body could
defcribe, by moving uniformly on in the fame time
*
with
Digitized
26 Mathematical Trineiples Book II.
with its greateft velocity AC, as the area ABNKy

which expreffes the fpace defcribed in falling, to the
area^TD, which expreffes the time. For fince ^4C
is A? as A? to AK, then (by Cor. Lem. 2. of
to i.
this Book) LK to P 0 as zAK to AP that is,

is y
as 2 AP to -^C, and thence L K to £ P as ^ P is
to $ AC or AB and if TV to AC or
; AB is
to CK; and therefore, ^/w, LKNO to DP <?.*:
as -rfP to CX But DP Q was to DTTzs CK to

>4C. Therefore, <egw0, LKNO is to DTV as
to -^C; that is, as the velocity of the falling bo-
dy to the greateft velocity which the body by falling
can acquire. Since therefore the moments LKNO
and DTVot the areas ABNK and ATD are the as
velocities, all the parts of thofe
the areas generated in
fame time, will be as the fpaces defcribed in the fame
time ; and therefore the whole areas and ABNK AD T
generated from. the beginning, will be as the whole
ipices defcribed from the beginning of the deicent.
Q. E. D.
Cor. 2. The fame is true alfoof the fpace defcribed
in the afcent. That is to fay, that all that fpace is to
the fpace defcribed in the fame time with the uniform
velocity AC, as the area ABnh^ is to the fe&or
ADt.
Cor. 3. The velocity of the body, falling in the
time ATD 7
is to the velocity which it would acquire
in the fame time in a non-refifting fpace, as the tri-
angle APD to the hyperbolic feftor ATD. For the
velocity in a non-refifting medium would be as the
time ATD,and in a refitting medium is as AP,
that
is, as the triangle^ PP. And thofe velocities at the
beginning of the defcent, are equal among themfelves,
as well as thofe areas ATD, APD.
Cor. 4. By the fame argument, the velocity in
the afcent is to the velocity with which the body in
the fapae time, in a non-refifting fpace, would lofe
all
Digitized by Google
Seft. II. of Natural Thilofophy. 27
all its motion of afcenr, as the triangle ApD to the
circular feftor AtD; or as the right lineup to the
arc At.
Con. 5. Therefore the time in which
a body by fall-
ing in a medium, would acquire the velocity
refifting
AP, is to the time in which it would acquire its great-
eft velocity AC
by falling in a non- refiftiiig fpace,
as the feftor ADT to the triangle ADC: and the
time in which it would lofe its velocity Ap by af-
cending in a refifting medium, is to the time in which
it would lofe the fame velocity by afcending in a non-
refifling fpace, as the arc A t to its tangent Ap.
Cor. 6. Hence from the given time there is given
the fpace defcribed in the afcent or defcent. For the
greateft velocity of a body defcending in infinitHm is
given (by Corol. 2 and 3, Theor. 6. of this Book)

and thence the time is given in which a body would
acquire that velocity by falling in a non-refifting fpace.
And taking the feftor AD T or ADt to the triangle
ADC in the ratio of the given time to the time juft
now found ; there wi.l be given both the velocity
A
A? or j>, and the area ABNK
or ABnk^ which
is to the le£tor ADT, or ADt, as the fpace fought
to the fpace which would, in the given time, be uni-
formly defcribed with that greateft velocity found juft
before.
Cor. 7. And by going backward, from the given
fpace of afcent or deicent ABnkôx ABNK, there
will be given the time ADt or ADT.
Pro*
28 Mathematical ^Principles Book II.
Proposition X. Problem III.
Suppofe the uniform force of gravity to tend

airettly to the plane of the horizon, and the
refinance to be as the aenfityofthe medium and
the fquare of the velocity conjunctly : it is
propofed to find the denfity of the medium in
each place, ^hich fha/l make the body move
in any gi ven curve line 5 the velocity of the
body, and the refijlance of the medium in
each place. PI. 2. Fig. 3.
Let ?0 be a plane perpendicular to the plane of

the fcheme itfelf
; PFHQ
a curve line meeting that
plane in the points P and Oî G> H, I, K four places
of the body going on in this curve from F to Oî and
GBj HC y
ID, KE four parallel ordinates let fall
from thefc points to the horizon, and (landing on the
horizontal line P Q^zt the points B, C,D,E; and let
the diftancesB C, CD, D E, of the ordinates be equal
among themfelves. From the points G and let the H
right lines GL, HN, be drawn touching the curve
in G and H, and meeting the ordinates CH, D /, pro-
duced upwards, in L and N; and compleat the paral-
lelogram HCD M. And the times, in which the bo-
dy defcribes the arcs G H HI, will be in a fubdupli-
9
cate ratio of the altitudesLH, NI, which the bo-
dies would defcribe in thofe times, by falling from the
tangents and the velocities will be as the lengths de-
;
ferred G H, HI
direftly and the times inverfely. Let
the times be expounded by T
and t, and the velocities
by Tjr and
^ 5 aod the decrement of the velocity
pro-
Digitized by Google
StOt. II. of Natural Thilofophy. 29
GH
—
produced in the time t will be expounded by
HI
— t
. This decrement arifes from the refiftance which
retards the body, and from the gravity which accelerates

if. Gravity, in a falling body, which in its fall de-
fcribes the Ipace NI, produces a velocity, with which
it would be able t© defcribe twice that fpace in the
fame time, as Galileo has demonftrated ; that is, the ve-
locity - : but if the body defcribes the arc HI,

it augments that arc only by the length HI — HN
or —jj/^* 5 anc* therefore generates only the velo-
*
city , , j « Let this velocity
*
be added to the
txHI
beforementioned decrement, and we lhall have the de-
crement of the velocity arifingfrom the refiftance alone,
1
that is,
GH ——
-— — HI, iMIxNI f r
Therefore fince
T t
~ txHI
.
in the fame time, the aftion of gravity generates, in a
falling body, the velocity —NI

2
— ; the refiftance will be
, . GH
— HI . iMIxNI iNI
—
to the gravity
& as h 7nr~ t0
7
T t txHI t
txGH 2 MI x NI
or as —— HI-\
... ,
In
— to 2 NI.
Now for the abfeiffa's CB, CD, CE put —

For the ordinate put P; and for CH MI
put any feries
Qj -j- Ro a
-J-
S o l &c. And all
the terms of the feries after the firft, that is, o
%
-|- R
So -|~ Sec. will be TV/; and the ordinates DI,
3
EK
and BG will be P Q* Ro a So 3 — &c. P —— — ~ —
4R0* 8 S* 3 —
&c. and P-|-Q* Ko* —
"f s '3 — &c. rcfpedively. And by fquaring the
dif—
Digitized by Google
50 Mathematical TrincipUs Book 1 1.
differencesof the ordinates BG — CH and

9 CH—DI
and to the fquares thence produced adding the fquares
of B C and CD themfelves, you will have oo-\~QJXpo
— 2 QRo* +
&c. and oo -|- Qflpo -|- z QKo* -|-
&c. the fquares of the arcs GH, ; whofe roots HI
Wi+aa- vT"—
l^v^ i -|-
) and # vi -j- aa-h
-are the arcs GH and HI. Moreover, if
i
from the ordinate CH

there be fubdufted half the fum
of the ordinates BG and DI, and from the ordinate
VI there be fubdu&ed half the fum of the ordinates
CH and E K% there will remain R o o and R o o -|- 5 S 0 *
the verfed fines of the arcs G I and K. And thefe H

are proportional to the lineolae LH
and NI> and there-
fore in the duplicate ratio of the infinitely fmall times
R- S
T and t : and thence the ratio ^ is y/
* - or
:
Md
-T ST-' *
fubftituting the values of ^, Gft BI$ MI and JV/
juft found, becomes —-v
5 S 0 0
1 -|-
_
QQ. And fince zNI
is zRoo, the refiftance will be now to the gravity as
î-hQA t0 2 R **> that is > as

3
s ^1 +
to4 RR.
And
the velocity will be fuch, that a body go-
ing off therewith from any place H% in the dire&ion
of the tangent HN,
would defcribe, in vacuo, a Pa-
rabola, whofe diameter is HC, and its latus reftum
Ni
And
Digitized by GoogI
Scd. II. of Natural Thilofophy. } x
And the refiftance

the denfity of the medium
is as
and the fquare of the velocity conjun&ly; and
there-
fore the denfity of the medium is as the
refiftance di-
re&ly, and the fquare of the velocity inverfely ; that
* « ^ 4 rr^ d ™a] Y ™* -^îaverfe.

S
ly ; that is, as O. E. I.
Cor. i. If the tangent HN be produced both

ways, fo as to meet any ordinate AF in T: will
AC
be equal to Vi Q^Q, and therefor e in what has
gone before may
be put for *J~i -|- Q. Q By this means
the refiftance will be to the gravity as $SxHT to
4RR xAC ; the velocity will be as , and

A C ^ R.
l
the denfity of the medium will be as
Sx AC
KxHT
Cor. 2. And hence, if the curve line PFHO^ be
defined by the relation between the bafe or abfcifla^C
and the ordinate CH, as is ufual; and
the value of the
ordinate be refolved into a converg ng feries: The pro-
blem will be expeditioufly folved by the firft terms
of
the feries ; as in the following examples.
Example i. Let the line PF HO^ be a femi-circle
defcribed upon the diameter P O to find the den-
fry of the medium make
that ftiall a proje&ile move
tothat line.
Bifed the diameter P 0\n A\ and call A O, n
a; CHy e; and CD, 0 : then DP or AO? — ;
4D 2 — nn — an — zao — 00, or ee zao 00 ; — —

a&d the
root being extraded by our method, will give
*"
00 aaoo ao i a} 0*
^
* ZC ZC* Zl 3 ZC*
A. &C.
Digitized by Google
3 1 Mathematical Principles Book II.
&c. Here put nn for ee -{-aa, and D I will become

e ze* z* 5
Such feries I diftinguifh into fucceffive terms after
this manner : I call that die firft term, in which the
infinitely fmall not found ; the fecond,
quantity o is
in which that quantity is of one dimenfion only ; the
third, in which it arifes to two dimenfions ; the
fourth, in which it is of three ; and fo ad infinitum.
And the firft term, which here is e> will always de-
note the length of the ordinate CH> (landing at the
beginning of the indefinite quantity o. The fecond
term, which here is — , will denote the difference be-
tween CH and DN; that is, the lineola MN which

is cut off by compleating the parallelogram HCDAf;
and therefore always determines the pofition of the tan-
gent HN; as, in this cafe, by taking MN to HMz$
a
—
t
o
to o, or a to e. The third term, which here is
n
~£y will reprefent the lineola IN> which lies be-
tween the tangent and the curve; and therefore deter-

mines the angle of contad I HN^ or the curvature
which the curve line has in H. If that lineola is IN
of a finite magnitude, it will be exprefs'd by the third
term together with thofe that follow in infinitum. But
if that lineola be diminilhed in infinitum^ the terms fol-
lowing become infinitely lefs than the third term, and
therefore may be negleded. The fourth- term deter-
mines the variation of the curvature ; the fifth, the
variationof the variation and fo on. Whence, by
the way, appears no contemptible ufe of thefe feries in
the fohnion of problems that depend upon tangents,
and the curvature of curves.
Now
Digitized by Google
Seft. n. of Natural Thilofophy.
Now compare the feries c — a — 1^11 °
— &c. with the feries P — Qo — Koo — So — &c. 3
and for P, Q, R. and S put e, — , an d "\ and
for Vt-1-dQ.put
/ 1
7** or -1; and the den-
%of the medium will come out as —

ne
77 rT
, that is, (be-
caufe „ is given) as — , or —
AC
, that is, as that
length HT, which is terminated at the
of the tangent
lemidiameter AF
{landing perpendicularly on p Q •
and the refinance will

be to the gravity as a to Tn
that is, as AC
to the diameter />
r,
?
of the circle O •'
and the velocity will be

as JCH.
"Therefore if the
body goes from the place F,
with a due velocity, in the
direction of a line parallel to
P O, and the denfity of
the medium in each
the tangent HT,
of the places is as the length
of H
and the refiftance alfo in any place
» to the force of gravity as ÂCtoPO,
H
that body
will defcribe the quadrant FHO^ of a circle. O.E. I.
But if the fame body lhould go from the~p~!ace t
.
in the direction
P
of a line perpendicular to O, and P
Jould begin to move in an arc of the femTcircle
rFQ, we rauft take A C or a on the contrary fide of
the centre A and therefore its fign muft be changed,
and we muft put
;
—a for -(- a. Then the denfity of

the medium would come out as — ~. But nature does
not ad it m
of a negative denfity, that is, a denfity
which accelerates the motion
of bodies ; and therefore it
cannot naturally come
to pafs, that a body by afcendine
{torn ? mould defcribe the quadrant PF of a circle,
a o produce fuch an e£Fe<3, a
body ought to be acce*
yoi.II. D lerated
Digitized by Google
3+ Mathematical Trinciples Book II.
lerated by an impelling medium, and not impeded by

a refitting one.
Example 2. Let the line PFO^ be a Parabola,
having its axis AF perpendicular to the horizon P O ;
to find the denfity of the medium, which willmakTa

proje&ile move in that line. Fig. 4.
From the nature of the Parabola, the rectangle P D Q_
is equal to the redangle under the ordinate DI and
fomc given right line : that is, if that right line be
called^; PC,a; PQ,c;
redangle into c a
y e; and CD, 0;
0 or ac aa
the
1 ao-\- — —CH — —
co —
00 is equal to the re&anglc b into DI, and
r ,x r - 1 *c — aa — za — c
1
therefore DI is equal j to ^
,
J
0
°
2 *
V* Now the fecond term . fl of this feries is to
b b
00
be put for Qo> and the third term -j for Koo. But
fince there are no more terms, thfc coefficient S of the

fourth term will vanifti ; and therefore the quantity
- —z S
= .
, to which the denfity of the medium is
proportional, will be nothing. Therefore, where the

medium is of no denfity, the projeftile will move in a
Parabola ; as Galileo hath heretofore demonftrated.
O.E.I.
Example 3. Let the line A' be an Hyperbola, AG
having afymptote
its NX
perpendicular to the horizon-
tal plane AK\
to find the denfity of the medium,
that will make a projectile move in that line. Fig. 5.
Let MX be the other afymptote, meeting the ordi-
nate DG produced in V\ and from the nature of the
Hyperbola, the rectangle of XV\wx.o G will be gi- V
ven. There is alfo given the ratio of to y DN VX
and therefore the re&angle of into is given. DN VG
Let that be bb : and, compleati&g the parallelogram
1 DNXZ,
Digitized by Qoogle
Se&. II. of Natural Thilofophy. 3 5
DNXZ ; let BAT be called a ; BD t o; NX, c ; and
let the given ratio of VZ to ZX or DN be - . Then
n
DN will be equal to a— VG o, equal to
^
—
—
a
LL
,
1 VZ
equal to-x„— „, and G D or NX—fZ—FG
,
equal toe-
,m
-4+_ m .--If-.
bb
«
Let the term
,bb
» a — o
——
a o
be refolved into the converging feries — JU — 0 JL
« bb
*
^
-ôoJ^—o* &c. ,
and GD will become equal toe—

m bb m bb hb
^ bb
m bb
bb
fecond term -o „ of this feries is to be ufed for
t2
44
/I /i
^f> the third with its fign changed for R*%

bb
and the fourth — with its fign changed alfo for
S* 3 , and their
coefficients ? - h± %
±
h
and - are
**.
Which
put for
being
^
done,
R
the
and S in the former Rule.
denfity of the medium
bb
*
come out as or
bb *J
— v i _i
mm zmbb ,
— £+
a* nn naa a*
mm 2.mbb
. . 5 > that is, if in VZ
Va, , b+
nn n 1
a*
D z you
Digitized by Google
you take VT equal to VG> as —

I
.
_
For 4* and
. m
— a2
imbb
are t he fquares of JTZand ZT. But
n
the ratio of the refinance to gravity is found to be
thatof 3 AT to iTG ; and the velocity is that with
which the body would defcribe a Parabola, whofe ver-
XT 2
tex is <7, diameter DG, latus re&um Suppofe
therefore that the denfities of the medium in each of

the places G the diftances XT, and
are reciprocally as
that the refiftance in any place G is to the gravity as
3 XT to i TG ; and a body let go from the place A>
with a due velocity, will defcribe that Hyperbola AGK.
O.E.I.
Example 4. Suppofe indefinitely, the line AGK
to be an Hyperbola, defcribed with the centre X, and
the afymptores y MX NX
y fo that, having conftru&ed
theredangle XZDN>
whofe fide cuts the Hyper- ZD
bola in G and itsafymptote in y fG may be recipro- V
cally as any power DN" of the line ZXor DJV,
whofe index is the number n: To find the denfity of
the medium in which a proje&ed body will defcribe
this curve. Fig. 5.
For BJV.BDy NX put A, O, C refpefrively, and
let VZ be to XZ or DNzsd to e, and VG be equal
—bb— A — O, VG —
to
•
bb
A — O,"
; then
VZ- d—A
'
D N will be
— equal to
— O, and CD ot NX— VZ
4 d
— VG equal to C A-I- — bb
O — ===-. Let
* • A—
,
the term
bb
A — Oj
be refolved into an infinite feries —
bb
A"
.+
Digitized by Google
Scft. II. of Natural Thilofophy. 3 7
A»+«
1
2A' + i 1
6A»+J
xÔ }
&c. and —— A— GD will be equal to C
+ i 0 - ^-O - ±^pH O* -
**
"*"" ? 1 *
"jV+!'^" ^0» &c. The fecond term
— O— r O of this fenes is to be uled lor

t A" + '
72 Yl ~" i~ 72
Qo, the third :

*
££0 2 for the fourth
1 "
~-~ bb O 3
for S 0 3 . And thence the den-
6A" + 3
Cty of the medium — , in any place G,
will be : — > and
therefore if in VZ you take VT equal to » x /^C7, that

dd
denfity is reciprocally as XT For A 2 and — A 2 —
are the fquares of XZ and zr.
fAw 1
A2S
But the refiftance in the fame place G is to the force
of gravity as 3 Sx —
XT
to 4RR, that is, as XT to
***>\-%n
yQ A ^ vc ] oc j t y ^txt ;s t he fame
wherewith the proje&ed body would move in a Pa-

rabola,wbofe vertex is G> diameter GD, and latus
Of - - *
• !/• Cf /•
» j ScH O-
Digitized by Google
3S Mathematical Principles Book II-
Scholium.
In the fame manner that the denfitjr of the medium
comes out to be as - —Mi
—
lv x
, in Corol. i. if the re-
fiftance is put as any power V" of the velocity V,

the dcnfity of the medium will come out to be as
R ——
4 n X
HT
Ft?. 2.
% 5
And therefore if a curve cm be found, fuch that

S S>
the ratio of
R
_
— AC
JZT; to or of T>
4-« to
Iv
1
i -J- QOT may be given : the body, in an uni-
form medium, whofe refilhnce is as the power V* of
the velocity V, will move in this curve. But let us
return to more fimple curves.
Becaufe there can be no motion in a Parabola except
in a non-refifting medium, but in the Hyperbola's here
defcribed 'tis produced by a perpetual reliftance; it is
evident that the line which a pr©je&ile defcribes in
an uniformly refilling medium, approaches nearer to
thefe Hyperbola's than to a Parabola. That line is cer-
tainly of the hyperbolic kind, but about the vertex it
is more diftant from the afymptotes, and in the parts
remote from the vertex draws nearer to them, than
thefe Hyperbola's here defcribed. The difference how-
ever is not fo great between the one and the other, but
that thefe latter may be commodioufly enough ufed in
pra&ice inftead bf the former. And perhaps thefe may
prove more ufeful, than an Hyperbola that is more ac-
curate, and at the fame time more compounded. They
may be made ufe of then in this manner. Fig. 5.
Com;
Digitized by Google
Seel II. of Natural Thilofophy. 19
Compleat the parallelogram XTGT, and the right
line T
G will touch the hyperbola in G, and there-
fore the denfity of the medium in G is reciprocally as
GT 2
the tangent GT, and the velocity there, as V-^^t
and the refiftance is to the force of gravity as GTto
n- - l
x GK
'herefore if a body projected from the place A in
thedire&ion of the right line AH, {Fig. 6.) defcribes
the A G K, and AH produced meets the
Hyperbola
afymptoteNX H, and AI drawn in to parallel it
other afymptote MX
meets the I the denfity of the in ;
medium A be
in AH, and the ve-
will reciprocally as
lo:iryof the body

A H
— and the as *J
2
- , refiftance
Al
there to the force of gravity as AH to ft
1
— I— 2
*AI. Hence the following rules are deduced.
Rule If the denfity of the medium at A, and
i.
the velocity with which the body is projected remain
the fame, and the angle NAH
be changed ; the lengths
AH, A I, HX will remain. Therefore if thofe lengths,
inany one cafe, arefound, the Hyperbola may afterwards
determined from any given ar^le
be eafily NAH.
Rule i. If the angle NAH,
and the denfity of
the medium at A
remain the fame, and the velocity
with which the body is proje&ed be changed, the
kngth AH
will continue the fame ; and I will be A
changed in a dup icate ratio of the velocity recipro-
cally.
Rule 3 . If the angle NAH, the velocity of the

body at and the accelerative gravity remain the
fame, and the proportion of the refiftance at to the A
motive gravity be augmented in any ratio ; the propor-
tion of AH A
to I will be augmented in the fame ratio,
4 D the
Digitized by Google
40 Mathematical Principles Book If.
the latus reftum of the abovementioncd Parabola re-
A H-2
maining the fame, and alfo the length propor-
A
tional to it; and therefore AH will be diminilhed in
the fame ratio, and A I will be diminifhed in the dupli-
cate of that ratio. But the proportion of the refiftance
to the weight augmented, when either the fpecific
is
gravity is made lefs, the magnitude remaining equal,

or when the denfity of the medium is made greater, or
when, by diminifhing the magnitude, the reliftance be-
comes diminilhed in a lefs ratio than the weight.
Rule 4. Becaufe the denfity of the medium is
greater near the vertex of the Hyperbola, than it is in
the place A\ that a mean denlity may be preferv'd,
the ratio of the leaft of the tangents to the tangent GT
AH ought to be found, and the denfity in aug- A
mented in a ratio a little greater than that of half the
fum of thofe tangents to the leaft of the tangents GT.
Rule 5. If the lengths AH, I art given, and A
the figure AGK is to be defcribed produce HIV to :
X, fo that HX A
may be to I as n-\- 1 to 1 ; and with
the centre X, and the afymptotes MX, defcribe NX
an Hyperbola thro* the point At fuch that I may be A
to any of the lines VG as XV" to XI".
Rule <5. By how much
the greater the number n
is, fo much more accurate are thefe Hyperbola's in
the
the alcent of the body from A, and lefs accurate in its
defcent to K ; and the contrary. The Conic Hyper-
bola keeps a mean ratio between thefe, and is more iim-
ple than the reft. Therefore if the Hyperbola be of
this kind, and you are to find the point K> where the
projected body falls upon any right line AN palling
thro' the point A AN produced meet the afymp-
.* let
totes AlXj NX'm M and N> and take NK equal to

AM.
Rule 7. And hence appears an expeditious method
of determining this Hyperbola from the phenomena.
Let
Digitized by Google
Scft. II. of Natural <P hilofop hy. 4
Let two and equal bodies be proje&ed with the
fimilar
fame velocity, in different angles HrfK, hAk, {Fig. 6.)
and let them fall upon the plane of the horizon in K
and kj and note the proportion of AKzo Ak- Let it
be as d to r. Then ere&ing a perpendicular I of any A
length, afTumc any how the length ox Ah^ and AH
thence graphically, or by fcale and compafs, colleft the
lengths AK, Ak^ (by Rule 6.) If the ratio of AK
to A{ be the fame with that of d to c> the length of
AH was rightly afTumed. If not, take on the indefinite

right line SA4 y (Fig.y.) the length SM equal to the af-
fumed AH; and ereft a perpendicular M JV> equal to
the difference —r -of the ratio's drawn into any

given right line. By the like method, from feveral af-
fcmed lengths A H, you may find feveral points N;
aud draw thro* them all curve
a regular NNXN>
cut-
ting the right line SMMM in X. Laftly, aflume
A //'equal to the abfeiffa SX, and thence find again the
length AK\ and the lengths, which are to the affumed
length A I and this laft AH> as the length A K known
by experiment, to the length AK
found, will be laft
the true lengths A /and AH> which were
to be found.
But thefe being given, there will be given alfo the re-
filling force of the medium in the place A* it being to
the force of gravity as to zA /. AH

Let the denfity
of the medium be increafed by Rule 4. and if the re-
Ming force juft found be increafed in the fame ratio,

it will become ftill more accurate.
Rule 8.The lengths AH, HX
being found ; let
there be now required the pofition of the line AH %
according to which a projeftile thrown with that gi~
>en velocity, (hall fall upon any point K. At the
points A and K>
{Fig 6.) ereft the lines AC, per- KF
pendicular to the horizon ; whereof let be drawn AC
downwards, and be equal to A
I or f HX. With the
atymptotes A K, KF, defcribe an Hyperbola, whofe
COfl-
Digitized by Google
4* Mathematical 'Principles Book II.
conjugate (hall pafs thro* the point C; and from the

centre Ay with the interval AHy defcribe a circle cut-
ting that Hyperbola in the point ; H
then the pro-
jedile thrown in the djreftion of the right line AH
will fall upon the point JC Q. E. /. For the point
Hy becaufe of the given length AHy rauft be fome-
where in the circumference of the defcribed circle.
Draw CH meeting AK
and KF in E and F; and be-
caufe CHy MX we parallel, and AC, A I equal, A E
will be equal to A My and therefore alfo equal to KN.
But CE is to AE FH to KN> and therefore CE
as
and /7 // Therefore the point //falls upon
are equal.
the hyperbolic curve defcribed with the afymptores
A Ky KF, whofe conjugate pafles thro' the point C;
and is therefore found in the, common interfe&ion of
this hyperbolic curve and the circumference of the de-
fcribed circle. <9. E. D. It is to be obferved that this
operation is the"fame, whether the right line A KN
be parallel to the horizon, or inclined thereto in any
angle > and that from two inter fed ions //,//, there
arife two angles NAHy NAH; and that in mechani-
cal praftice it is once to defcribe a circle,
fufficient
then to apply a ruler CHy of an indeterminate length,
fo to the point C, that its part F Hy intercepted be-
tween the circle and the right line y FK
may be equal
to its part CE placed between the point Cand the right
line AK.
What of Hyperbola's may be eafily
has been faid
Applied to Parabola's. For if (Fig.8.) a Parabola be
reprefented by XAGKy touched by a right line XV
in the vertex X; and the ordinates IA, VG be as any
powers XI«> XV* of the abfcifTa's XI, draw XV
XT, GT, AHy whereof let XT
be parallel to rG,
and let GT, AH
touch the Parabola in G and A; and
a body projefted from any place A, in the d:re&ion
of the right line AHy with a due velocity, will de-
fcribe this Parabola if the denfity of the medium in
each
Digitized by Google
5eft. IL of Natural Thilofophy. 4J
each of the places G, be reciprocally as the tangent
GT. In that cafe the velocity in G will be the fame
as would caufe a body, moving in a non-refifting fpace,
to defcribe a Conic Parabola, having G for its ver-
tex, VG produced downwards for its diameter, and

iG f*
^ i ts iatus refhun. And the refitting
force in G will be to the force of gravity, as GT to

inn— i*jr NAK reprefent an ho-
G Therefore if
n—z
rizontal line,and, both the denfity of the medium at
A and the velocity with which the body is pro-
jefted, remaining the fame, the
angle be any NAM
how ; the
alter'd lengths AH, Ah HXmll
remain i,
and thence will be given the vertex Jf of the Parabola,

and the pofi{ion o? the right line XL
and by taking
A
VG to I as XV* to XI", there will be given all the
points G of the Parabola, thro* which the projcaifc
will paf*
SEC-
Digitiz
44 Mathematical Trinciples Book II.
SECTION III.
Of the Motions of Bodies which are re-

.
fifled partly in the ratio of the Ve-
and partly
locities^ in the duplicate of
the fame ratio.
- . —
% •
Proposition XI. Theorem VIII.
If a body be rejifted partly in the ratio, and

partly in the duplicate ratio of its veloci-
ty, and moves in a fimilar medium by its
innate force only \ and the times be taken in
arithmetical progrejfion : then quantities reci-
procally proportional to the velocities, in-
creafed by a certain given quantity, will be
in geometrical progrejfion. PI. 3. Fig- 1.
With the centre C, and the re&angular afymptotes

CJDd and C/^defcribe an Hyperbola £Ee, and let
jiB,DE 9 de, be parallel to the afymptote C H. In the
afymptote CD
let A, G be given points : And if the
time be expounded by the hyperbolic area ABED

uniformly increafing ; I fay that the velocity may be
exprefs'd by the length DF, whofe reciprocal GD to-
gether with the given line CG, compofe the length
CD increafing in a geometrical progreffion.
% For
Digitized by Google
t
>
Digitized by Google
Sea. UL of Natural Thilofophf. 45
For let the areola DEtd be the leaft given incre-
ment of the time, and Dd will be reciprocally as 9 DE
and tberefore dire&ly as CD. Therefore the decre-
ment of — 1
, which (by Lem- 1. Book z.) is —Dd
—
vill be alfo as —CD —CG4-GD
- or 7
,
'
;
- , that
.
is, a$
— JL GD
GD 1
.
%
. Therefore the time ABED uniform-
ly increaGng by the addition of the given particles
EDde, it follows th$ ~D

Gr
decrcafes in the fame ratio
v/ith the velocity. For the decrement of the velocity

is as the refiftance, thatis, (by the fuppofition; as the
fum of two quantities, whereof one is as the velocity,

and the other as the fquare of the velocity ; and the
decrement of ^ is as the fum of the quantities —

and , whereof the firft is
^ it felf, and the
hft ~ is as
^ : therefore ^ is as the veloci-
ty, the decrements of both being analogous. And if
the quantity G Z>, reciprocally proportional to — , be
augmented by the given quantity CG; the fum C D,

the time ABED uniformly increafing, will increafe in
a geometrical progreflion. CKE.D.
Cor. 1. Therefore, if, having the points^ and G
expounded by the hyperbolic area
given, the time be
ABED y the velocity may be expounded by grg the
reciprocal of GD. .
Cor. i. And by
taking to GA
as the recipro- GD
cal of the velocity at the beginning, to the reciprocal
Digitized by Google
\6 Mathematical Principles Book It
of the velocity at the end of any time A BED, the
point G will be found. And that point being found,
the velocity may be found from any other time given.
Proposition XII. Theorem IX.

The fame things being fuppofed, I fay, that if
the [paces defer ibed are taken in arithmetical
progreffion,the velocities augmented by a
certain given quantity will be in geometrical
,
progrejfion. PI. 3. Fig. 2.
In the afymptote CD let there be given the point
R, and ere&ing the perpendicular R S meeting the Hy-

perbola in S, let the fpace defcribed be expounded by
the hyperbolic area RSED ; and the velocity will be
as the length GD, which, together with the given
line C G, compofes a length C D decreafing in a geo-
metrical progreflion, while the (pace RSED increafes in
an arithmetical progreflion.
For, becaufe the increment EDde of the fpace is
given, thelineola Dd, which is the decrement of GD,

will be reciprocally as£D, and therefore direftly as
D D
C ; that is, as the fum of the fame G and the given
Jength C<?« But the decrement of the velocity, in a
time reciprocally proportional thereto, in which the
given particle of fpace DdeE is defcribed, is as the re-
iiftance and the time conjunctly, that is, dire&iy as the
fum of two quantities, whereof one is as the velocity,
the other as the fquare of the velocity, and inverfely
as the velocity ; and therefore direftly as the fum of
two quantities, one of which is given, the other is as
the velocity. Therefore the decrement both of the
velocity and the line G D, is as a given quantity and a
decreafing quantity conjunftly and, becaufe the de-
,*
crements we analogous, the decreafing quantities will

always
Digitized by Google
Sett. III. of Natural Thilofophy.
always be analogous ; viz.. the velocity, and the line
GD. O.E.D.
Cor. i . If the velocity be expounded by the lengtfr
G D, the fpace defcribed will be as the hyperbolic area
DESR.
Cor. 2. And if the point R be affumed any how,
the point G will be found, by taking G
R to GD, as
the velocity at the beginning to the velocity after any
fpace R SED is defcribed. The point G being given,
the fpace is given from the given velocity : and the
contrary.
Cor. j. Whence fmce (by Prop. 1 .) the velocity
isgiven from the given time, and (by this Prop.) the
fpace is given from the given velocity ; the fpace will
be given from the given time and the contrary.
:
Proposition XIII. Theorem X.

Suppofng that a body attracted downwards by
an uniform gravity afcends or defcends in a
right line ; and that the fame is refifled,
partly in the ratio of its velocity, and partly
in the duplicate ratio thereof: I fay that, if
right lines parallel to the diameters of a Circle
and an Hyperbola be drawn thrd the ends of
the conjugate diameter s, and the velocities be
as fome fegments of thofe parallels drawn
from a given point 5 the times will be as the
[effors of the areas, cut offby right lines drawn
from the centre to the ends of the fegments >
and the contrary. PI. 3. Fig. 3.
Case i. Suppofe firft that the body is afcending,

and from the centre D, with any femidiameter D2?, dc-
fcribe a quadrant BETF of a circle, and thro' the
end
Digitized by Google
4$ Mathematical Trincipks Book ir.
end B of the femidiameter DB draw the indefinite line

BAP, parallel to the femidiameter D F. In that line
let there be given the point A, and take the fegmenc
AP proportional to the velocity. finceone part And
of the refifhnce is as the velocity, and another part as
the fquare of the velocity ; let the whole refiftancebe
as AP 2
-|- 2 BAP. Join DA, DP cutting the circle
in E and T, and let the gravity be expounded by DA 2
,
fo that the gravity (hall be to the refiftance in P, as
DA* to A %
-\-zBAP ; and the time of the whole
afcent will be as the feftor EDT of the circle.
For draw DVQ, cutting off the moment P of
the velocity AP, and the moment 2)77^ of the lector
DET anfwering to a given moment of time ; and that
decrement P Q
of the velocity will be as the fum of the
forces of gravity 1
DA
andot refiftance-^? 3 -\-zBAP^
that is, (by iz Prop, z Book Elem.) as DP
2
Then .
the area DP
O, which is proportional toPQ, is as
DP 2
> and the area DTP, which is to the area P as D Q
DT 2
to 2
DP
, is as the given quantity
2
. Theref ore D
the area E DTdecreafes uniformly according to the
rate of the future time, by fubduftion of given parti-
cles DTP, and is therefore proportional to the time of
rhe whole afcent. O. £D.
Case 2. If the velocity in the afcent of the body
be expounded by the length AP and the re-
as before,
lifiance be made as AP 2 ~|- zBAP, and force
if the
of gravity be lefs than can be exprefTed by 2
DA
take
AB — BD Z
;
BD C%.40 of fuch a length, that %
may be proportional to the gravity, and DF be per-

let
pendicular and equil to DB,
and thro' the vertex F
aefcribe the Hyperbola FTPE, whofe conjugate femi-
diameters are DB
and DF, and which cuts in 9 DA E 1
and DP, D
OjnT and P; and the time of the whole
afcent will be as the hyperbolic fe&or TDE.
For the decrement P Qof the velocity produced in
o given particle of time, is as the fum of the refiftance
AP*
Digitized by Google
5cft.HI. of Natural Thilofophy. 49
A? A-iBAP
2
and of the gravity AB 2
— BD*>
that is, as BP 2 — BD*. But the area DTK is to
the area DPQ as DT- to DP 2
; and therefore, if
GT be drawn perpendicular to DF> as GT* or CD 2
— DF 2
to BD*> and as to/??*, and, by di-
vifion, as DF 1
to BP 1
—BD 2
Therefore iince the
—BD
.
2
area 7J/>0 is as P O, that is, as BP' \ the
area DTK will be as the given quantity DF 1
. There-
fore the area E DT decreafes uniformly in each of the
equal particles of time, by the iubduflion of fo many
given particles DTK and therefore is proportional to
the time. £KE. D.
Case 5. Let AP be the velocity in the defcent of
the body, and AP 2
-\-zBAP the force of refin-
ance, and B D 1 — AB 2
the force of gravity, the
angle DBA being a right one. And ifwith the cen-
to 2), and the principal vertex B, there be defcribed
s rc&angular Hyperbola BETK {Fig. 5.) cutting
Dj D ?,t and D
produced in £, T, and K ; the
fefior DET of this Hyperbola will be as the whole
time of defcent.
For the increment P of the velocity, and the
DP Q
—ofA
aea proportional to it, is as the excefs the
above the refiftance, that
gravity is, as BD 2 x
— AP — BP*.
W
-1BAP
therefore as
2
or
is
2
to the area
GT 2-
D P O, DT
orGD — B D
BD
2
as
%
2
to
to
And
DP
BP and as %
,
the area
%
; and
GZ) 2 to BD Z , and, by divifion, as BD to BD*2
-BP\ Therefore fince the area D is as BD*

~-BP 2 , the area DTK vj'iW be as the given quantity
BD % . Therefore the area ED 7"increafes uniformly
m the feveral equal particles of time by the addition of
as many given particles and therefore is pro- DTK
portional to the time of the defcent. O. E. D.
Cor. If with the centre and the femidiameter D
Ti'A there be drawn thro' the vertex an arc At fimi- A
"» to the arc E T, and fimilarly fubtending the angle
Vol. II. E ADT:
Digitized by Google
$o Mathematical Principles Book II.
ADT: the velocity AP will be to the velocity,

which the body in the time EDT, in a non-refifting-
fpace, can lofe in its afcent, or acquire in its defcenr,
as the area of the triangle DAP
to the area of the fe<5tor
DAt ; and therefore is given from the time given.
For the velocity in a non-refifting medium, is propor-
tional to the time, and therefore to this ledor ; in a
refitting medium it is as the triangle ; and in both me-
diums, where it is leaft, it approaches to the ratio of
equality, as the fcftor and triangle do.
Scholium.
One may demonftrate alfo that cafe in the afcent of
the body, where the force of gravity is lefs than can be
exprefs'd by
2
DA
or 2
AB
-|-i?D% and greater than
can be exprefs'd by AB 2 —
DB 2 , and muft be ex-
prefs'd by AB 2
. But I haften toother things.
Proposition XIV. Theorem XI.

Thefame things being fuppofed, I fay y that the
fpace defer ibed in the afcent or defcent* is as
the difference of the area by which the time
isexprefsdj and offome other area which is
augmented or diminijhed in an arithmetical
progrejfion if the forces compounded of the
reliance and the gravity be taken in a geo-
metrical progreffion. PI. 3 . Fig. 5, 6, 7.
Take AC (in the three laft figures) proportional to

the gravity, and AKto the refiftance. But take them
on the fame fide of the point y if the body is de- A
fending, otherwife on the contrary. Ereffc Ab>
which make to DBzsDB 2 to 4.BAC: and to the
reftangular afymptotes CK, CH, defcribe the Hyger-
Digitized by Google
Seft. III. of Natural Thilofophy. 5
hohbN, and erefting -KTjV perpendicular to CK, the

ixtiAbNK will be augmented or diminifhed in an
arithmetical progreflion, while the forces CK are taken
in a geometrical progreflion. I fay therefore that the
dilhnce of the body from its greateft altitude is as the
excefsof the area AbNK above the area DE T.
For fince AKis as the reiiftance, that is, as AP %
\zBAP \ aflurne any given quantity Z, and put
Ak equal to ; then (by Lem. 2. or
this Book) the moment KL of AK will be equal to

zAPO -L iBJx PO zBPO
— 1
^ or — -— , and
.
the
.
mo -
raent KLON of the zxt*AbNK> will be equal to
iBPQxLO BPOxBD 1
Z zZ xCKx A B>
Case i. Now if the body afcends, and the gravity
beas^B* -\-BD\ BET, (in Fig. 5.) being a circle,
the line AC y which is proportional to the gravity,
AB* A-
1 BD
z
will be , and DP* or -i*P* + l&^P
-\-BD* will be ^/Cx Z -|^4Cx Z or C*fx Z
and therefore the area D7T"will be to the area DP O ~
asflr* or DB* xoCKxZ.
Case z. If the body afcends, and the gravity be
xAB*—BD\ the line AC (in Fig. 6.) will be
AB* —= BD*>and DT Z
will be to DP 2
as BP or
DB» BP* — BD*

to or AP ^zBAPÂB^—
Z
SDS that is, to AKx Z -\-ACxZ or Ci^xZ.

And therefore the area £>r^ will be to the area DP O
vDB* to CKxZ.
Case 3. And by the fame reafoning, if the body de-
fends,and therefore the gravity is as BD % AB % 9 —
and the line AC
(in f>>. 7. ) becomes equal to
E j W
Digitized by Google
'5i Mathematical Principles Book II-
„
L
i the area DTP will be to the area
DPQjx D B to C*Tx Z : as above.

1
Since therefore thefs areas are always in this ratio ;

if for the area DTf,
by which the moment of the
time, always equal to itlelf, is expreffed, there be put
any determinate rectangle, as BDxm, the area D P O,
that is, \BD x P 0, will be to BDxmzs CKxZ to
BD 2
. And thence P OjxB D* becomes equal to
zBDxmxCKxZ, and the moment KLON of the
BDxm
area AbNK, found before, becomes
AB
From the area DET fubduft its moment DT V or
^ Px
BD x m, and there will remain ^ xm
of)
t There-
fore the difference of the moments, that is, the moment

r i t nr
of the difference of the
r i •
areas is equal to
i
APxBDxtn — ;
and therefore (becaufe of the given quantity

jjgj
as the velocity AP > that is, as the moment of the
fpace which the body defcribes in its afcent or defcent.
And therefore the difference of the areas, and that fpace,
incrcafing or decreafing by proportional moments, and
beginning together or vanifhing together, are propor-
tional. O. E. D.
Cor. if the length, which arifes by applying the
area DET to the line B 2), be called ; and another M
length Vbe taken in that ratio to the length Af, which
the line DA has to the line : the fpace which a DE
body, in a refitting medium, defcribes in its whole
afcent or defcent, will be to the fpace, which a body,
in a non refifting medium, falling from reft can de-
fcribe in the fame time, as the difference of the afore-
B DxV %
— —
faid areas to ; and therefore is given from
the
digitized by Google
Seel. III. of Natural Thilofophy .
5
the time given. For the fpace in a non-refifting me-
dium is in a duplicate ratio of the time, or as V* ; and,
B D x V*
hecaufe BD and AB are given, as . This
area is equal to the area —

DA xB—
— DA
JD
2
jfc x
x Al 2
jt>~"> anc* tnern°-
merit of M
m and therefore the moment of this area
is ;
15
DE x A
—
hA x BDx zMxrn _
— ~. But this moment to the
2
2
.
is
moment of the difference of the aforefaid areas DET

mAbNK,, „.
viz,, to
APxBDxm
—
Ad , as
DA* —
xBDxM
DE
DA
—
2
^-BDxAPy or as —
DE*
into DET to DAP; and
therefore, when the areas DET and DAP are lead, in
the ratio of equality. Therefore the area
the difference of the areas DET and AbJVK,

when all thefe areas are leaft, have equal
; and moments
ire Therefore fince the velocities, and
therefore equal.
therefore alfo the fpaces in both mediums defcribed to-
gether, in the beginning of the deicent, or the end of
the afcent, approach to equality, and therefore are then
BDx—V 1
AB—
one to another as the area , and the difference
°f the areas DET and A bNK; and moreover fince

the fpace,
in a non-refifting medium, is perpetually as
BDx y %
"^j — , and the fpace, in a refitting medium, is per-
petually as the difference of the areas T&ndAb DE NK:

neceflarily follows, that the fpaces, in both mediums,
J
defcribed in any equal times, are one to another as that
BDx V
w ~~
AB
— x
> and the difference of the areas DET

KdAbNK. O.ED.
^ E j Scho-
Digitized by Google
5+ Mathematical Trinctyles Book II.
Scholium.
The refinance of fphaerical bodies in fluids arifes
partlyfrom the tenacity, partly from the attrition, and
partly from the denfity of the medium. And that part
of the refiftance, which arifes from the denfity of the
fluid, is, as I faid, in a duplicate ratio of the velocity ,
the other part, which arifes from the tenacity of the
fluid, is uniform, or as the moment of the time and :
therefore we might now proceed to the motion of bo-

dies, which are refitted partly by an uniform force, or
in the ratio of the moments of the time, and partly in
the duplicate ratio of the velocity. But it is iufficienc
to have cleared the way to this fpeculation in the 8 th
th
and 5> Prop, foregoing, and their Corollaries. For
in thofe Propofitions, inftead of the uniform refiftance
made to an afcending body from its gravity, one
arifing
may fubftitute the uniform which arifes from
refiftance
the tenacity of the medium, when the body moves by
its vis infra alone; and when the body afcends in a
right line, add this uniform refiftance to the force of

gravity, and fubdu£t it when the body defcends in a
right line. One might alfo go on to the motion of
bodies which are refilled in part uniformly, in part in
the ratio of the velocity, and in part in the duplicate
ratio of the fame velocity. And I have opened a way
to this in the 13 th and 14 th Prop, foregoing, in which
the uniform refiftance arifing from the tenacity of the
medium, may be fubftituted for the force of gravity,
or be compounded with it as before. But I haften to
other things.
SEC-« .
»* • . .
Digitized by Google
r IF
^ &
Digitized by Google
Digitized by Google
.
Sed. IV. of Natural "Philosophy. $$
SECTION IV.
s
Of the circular motion of bodies in
refijiing mediums
Lemma a
III.
Let P QR be a fpiral cutting all the radii S P,

SQ, SR, &c. in equal angles, 'Draw the
right line P T touching the fpiral in any point
P, and cutting the radius SQîn T draw ;
P O, QO
perpendicular to the fpiral, and
meeting in O, and join SO. 1 fay, that if
the points P and (âpproach and coincide, the
angle P S O will become a right angle, and
the ultimate ratio of the reElangle T Qj< 2 P S
to PQ^ will be the ratio of equality. PI. 4.
Fig. 1.
For from the right angles OP CK O QJZ, fubduft

the equal angles SP S QR, and there will remain
the equal angles OTs 9 0(JS. Therefore a circle
which pafles thro' the points O, P, will pafs alfo
thro* the point O. Let the points P and coincide,
and this circle will touch the fpiral in the place of coin-
cidence P Qfand will therefore cut the right line 0 P
perpendicularly. Therefore O P will become a dia-
meter of this circle, and the angle OS P, being in a
femicirde, becomes a right one. O. £. P.
4 E * I> raw
Digitized by Google
5 6 Mathematical Principles Book 1 1.
Draw OD, SE perpendicular to OP, and the ulti-
mate rations of the lines will be as follows ; TO^ to
PD TS or PS to P E, or
as z PO to 2 PS ; and
P/J to PQas PQto z PO ; and, ex itqtto pertrtrbath,
TO^xo P7l^$ P(J to i PS. Whence PO? becomes

equal to T Ox zPS. Q.E.D.
Proposition XV. Theorem XIL

If the denfity of a medium in each place there-
of be reciprocally as the diftance of the places
from an immoveable centre, and the centripe-
tal force be in the duplicate ratio of the aen-
jity : I fay, that a bedy may revoke in a
JJpiral which cuts all the radii drawn from
that centre in a given angle. PI. 4- Fig.
Suppofe every thing to be as in the foregoing Lem-

ma, and produce S<0 to V, fo that may be equal SV
to S P. In any time let a body, in a refilling medium,
defcribe the leaft arc P Q, and in double the time, the
leaft arc PR ; and the decrements of thofe arcs arifing
from the refinance, or their differences from the arcs
which would be defcribed in a non-refifting medium in
the fame times, will be to each other, as the fquares of
the times in which they are generated Therefore the :
decrement of the arc P O^ 'is the fourth part of the de-

crement of the arc PR. Whence alfo if the area QSv
be taken equal to the area P SO, the decrement of the
arc P O^ will be equal to half the lineola R r ; and
therefore the force of refinance and the centripetal force
are to each other as the lineola's ±Rr and TO^ which
they generate in the fame time. Becaufe the centripe-
tal force with which the body is urged in P, is reci-
procally as SP>, and (by Lem. 10. Book 1.) the li-
neola TO, which is generated by that force, is in a ra-
• . . . #,
Digitized by Google
Sea. IV. of Natural <Phikfophy, 57
tio compounded of the ratio of this force and the du-
plicate ratio of the time in which the arc PO is de-
scribed, (for in this cafe I negleft the refiftance! as be-
ing infinitely lefs than the centripetal force,) it follows,
that TQx SP 2 , that is, (by the laft Lemma) $ PQ*
xSP, will be in a duplicate ratio of the time, and
therefore the time is as P Ox </SP; and the velocity
of the body, with which the arc POîs defcribed in
thattime
PO 0f 1
'
35
POx^SP JSP'
that
* in the fui>
duplicate ratio oF SP reciprocally. And by a like rea-

ligning, the velocity with which the arc QJR is defer i-
bed, is in the fubduplicate ratio of S reciprocally.
Now thofe arcs P jând OR are as the deferring ve-
locities to each other ; that is , in the fu bduplicate ratio
of SO_ to S P, or as S <0 to \ZsPxS<0 ; and, becaufe

of the equal angles S fg> SOr, and the equal areas
PS a, O^r, the arc P (3 is to the arc Or as S 0 to
SP. Take the differences of the proportional conse-
quents, and the arc Pj9_will be to the arc Rr as SQ
to SP— */SPxSQ or ± ro. For the po ints P and
(? coinciding, the ultimate ratio of SP — *JsPxSQ_
to \ VQ^ is the ratio of equality. Becaufe the decre-
ment of the arc P <9 arifing from the refiftance, or its
double R r, is as the refiftance and the fquare of the
Rr
time conjunftly ; the refiftance will be as .
^
But PC^ was to Rr,
O^ to as S \VO, and thence
— Rr^ ,
\VQ ^ \OS ,
becomes as ^ or as •
PfrxSP PQxSPxSO OPxSP*
For the points P and ^coinciding, and £ ^coin- SP
cide alfo, and the angle P V'£) becomes a right one
and, becaufe of the fimilar triangles PVQ* PSO,
P% becomes to asOP to ±OS. Therefore
OS
is a * the refiftance, that is, in the ratio of
O p xS p>
the
Digitized by Google
5$ Mathematical Trinciples Book
the denfity of the medium in P and the duplicate ra-
tio of the velocity conjunctly. Subdu<9: the duplicate
ratio of the velocity, namely the ratio —^ , and there

S Jr
will remain the denfity
'
of the medium. in P as
— OS
— -
O Px SF* -7^-
Let the fpiral be given, and, becaufe of the given ratio
of OS to OP, the denfity of the medium in P will
be as —p* Therefore in a medium whofe denfity is
reciprocally as SP the diftance from the centre, a body

will revolve in this fpiral. j£. E. D.
Cor.i. The velocity in any place P, is always
the fame wherewith a body in a non-refifting medium
with the fame would revolve in a cir-
centripetal force
cle, at the fame diftance SP
from the centre.
Cor. 2. The denfity of the medium, if the diftance
SP be given, is as
—
O
U
S
- ,
Jr
but if that diftance is not
0S
ted to any denfity of the medium.

Cor. 3. The force of the refiftance in any place P,
is to the centripetal force in the fame place as \ O S to
O P. For thofe forces are to each other as \ R r and
TO or as * ^* P ° and that is, as \VQ_

and PQy or \ oTand O P. The fpiral therefore be-
ing given, there is given the proportion of the refinance
to the centripetal force ; and vice verfa, from that pro-
portion given the fpiral is given.
Cor.4. Therefore the body can't revolve in this
fpiral, except where the force of refiftance is lets than
half the centripetal force. Let the refiftance be made
equal to half the centripetal force, and the fpiral will
coincide with the right line P
S> and in that right line
the
Digitized by Google
Sc& IV. of Natural Thilcfophy. '
59
the body will defcend to the centre with a velocity,
that is with which it was proved be-
to the velocity,
fore in the cafe of the Parabola, (Theor. 10. Book i.)
the clefcenr would be made in a non-reflfling medium,
in the fubdtiplicate ratio of unity to the number two.
And the times of the defcent will be here reciprocally
as the velocities, and therefore given.
Cor. f . And becaufe at equal diftances from the
centre, the velocity is the fame in the fpiral POR
as it
is in the right line S P> and the length of the fpiral is
to the length of the right line P S, in a given ratio,
namely in the ratio of O P to O S ; the time of the de-
fcent in the fpiral will be to the time of the defcent
in the right line SP in the fame given ratio, and there-
fore given.
Cor. If from the centre S with any two given inter-
6.
vals, two ; and thefe circles remaining,
circles are defcribed
the angle which the fpiral makes with the radius PS be
any how changed ; the number of revolutions which the
body can compleat in the fpace between the circumfe-
rences of thofe circles, going round in the fpiral from
PS
one circumference to another, will be as or as
the tangent of the angle which the fpiral makes with

the radius PS ; and the time of the fame revolutions
OP
will be as , that is, as the fecant of the fame angle,
(Jo
or reciprocally as the denfity of the medium.
Cor. 7. If a body, in a medium whofe denfity is
reciprocally as the diftances of places from the centre,

revolves in any curve AEB
{JFig* J.) about that cen-
tre, and cuts the firft radius AS
in the fame angle in
B as it did before in J, and that with a velocity, that
fliall be to its firft velocity in A
reciprocally in a fub-
duplicate ratio of the diftances from the centre (that is,
*AS to a mean proportional between AS and BS)
Digitized by Google
60 Mathematical Principles Book II-
that body will continue to defcribe innumerable fimilar
revolutions BFC> CGD> &c. and by its interferons
will diftinguifti the radius ^£ into parts AS, B
CS, DS, &c. that are continually proportional, Buc
the times of the revolutions will be as the perimeters of~
the orbits AE B,BFC> CGD,
&c. direflly, and the
velocities at the beginnings J, B> C of thofe orbits, in-
verfely; that is, as AS*, B S*, CS*. And the whole

time in which the body will-arrive at the centre, will
be to the time of the firft revolution, as the fum of
X X X
all the continued proportionals AS* BS* CS
9 3
2
, go-
X
ing on ad infinitum* to the firft term AS 2
; that is, as the
firft term AS* to the difference of the two firflr
x x
AS* — BS Z ) or toas ±ASvery nearly* AB m
Whence the whole time may

be eafily found.
.Cor. 8. From hence alfo may be deduced, near
enough, the motions of bodies in mediums whofe den-
fity is either uniform or obferves any other affigned
law. From the centre S, with intervals SA, SB* SC>
&c. continually proportional, defcribe as many circles
and fuppofe the time of the revolutions between the pe-
rimeters of any two of thofe circles, in the medium
whereof we treated , to be to the time of the revo-
lutions between the fame in the medium propofed, as
the mean denfity of the propofed medium between
thofe circles, to the mean denfity of the medium where-
of we treated, between the fame circles, nearly : And
that the fecant of the angle in which the fpiral above de-
termined, in the medium whereof we treated, cuts the
radius AS> is in the fame ratio to the fecant of the
angle in which the new fpiral, in the propofed medium,
cuts the fame radius : And alfo that the number of
all the revolutions between the fame two circles is
nearly as the tangents of thofe angles. If this be done
every where between every two circles, the motion
will
Digitized by Google
Sed. IV- of Natural Thilofophy. 61
will be continued thro' all the circles. And by this means
one may without difficulty Conceive at what rate and
inwhat time bodies ought to revolve in any regular
medium.
Cor. 9. And altho thefe motions becoming excen-
tricalfhould be performed in fpirals approaching to an
oval figure ; yet conceiving the feveral revolutions of
thofe fpirals to be at the fame diftances from each other,
and to approach to the centre by the fame degrees as the
fpiral above defcribed, we may alfo underftand how the
motions of bodies may be performed in fpirals of that
kind.
Proposition XVI. Theorem XIIL

If the den(Ity of the medium in each of the pla-
ces be reciprocally as the dijlance of the places
from the immoveable centre, and the centri-
petal force be reciprocally as any power of
the fame dijlance, I fay y that the body may
revolve in a fpiral interfering all the radii
drawn from that centre in a given angle.
PI. 4. Fig. 2.
This demonftrated in the fame manner as the fore-

is
going propofition. For if the centripetal force in P

be reciprocally as any power SP"+ l of the diftance SP
whofe index is n -|- 1 : it will be colle&ed as above,
that the time in which the body defcribes any arc P
Q>
will be as PQxPS^* j and the refiftance in P as
Rr x-i»xrq and thcrefore

PQ 2
xSP*' PO xSP*xSO*
a -r —
OPxSP»+*
— , that is, (becaufe £
OP
is a
givea
Digitized by Google
6z Mathematical Principles Book II.
given quantity) reciprocally as SP' * 1 .

1
And there-
iW
fore, fince the velocity is reciprocally as SP > the
deniity in P
will be reciprocally as SP.
Cor. i. The refinance is to the centripetal force as
T^^tx OS to OP.
Cor. 2. If the centripetal force be reciprocally as
S P3 , 1 —7n will be =o ; and therefore the refiftance
and denfity of the medium will be nothing, as in Prop. 9.
Book 1.
Cor. 3. If the centripetal force be reciprocally as
any power of the radius SP, whofe index is greater
rhan the number 5, the affirmative refiftance will be
changed into a negative.
Scholium.
This Propofition and the. former which relate to me-
diums of unequal denfity, are to be underftood of the
motion of bodies that are lb fmall, that the greater
denfity of the medium on one fide of the body, above
thac on the other, is not to be conlider'd. I fuppofe
be proportional to
alfb the refiftance, ceteris paribus, to
its denfity. Whence in mediums whofe
force of re-
fiftance is not as the denfity, the denfity muft be fo
much augmented or diminished, that either the excefs
of the refiftance may be taken away, or the defeftlup-
plied.
Proposition XVII. Problem IV.

To find the centripetal force and the refifting
force of the medium, by which a body, the
law of the velocity being given, JJjall revolve
in a given fpiral. PL 4. Fig. 4.
Let that fpiral be P Q^R. From the velocity, with

which the body goes over the very fmall arc P the Q
~time
Digitized by Google
Scd. IV. of Natural Thilofophy.
time will be given ; and from the altitude TO, which
is as the centripetal force, and the fquare of the time,
that force will be given. Then from the difference
RSr, of the areas PS and QJ>R defcribed in equal
particles of time, the retardation of the body will be
given ; and from the retardation will be found the re-
filling force and denfity of the medium.
Proposition XVIII. Problem V.

The law of centripetal force being given, to
find the denfity of the medium in each of the
places thereof by which a body may defer ibe a
given fpiral.
From the centripetal force the velocity in each place

muft be found ; then from the retardation of the velo-
city, the denfity of the medium is found, as in the
foregoing Propofition.
But I have explain'd the method of managing thefe
Problems in the tenth Propofition and fecond Lemma
of this Book ; and will no longer detain the reader in
thefe perplex'd difquifitions. I lhall now add fome
things relating to the forcesof progreflive bodies, and
to the denfity and refiftanceof tnofe mediums in which
the motions hitherto treated of, and thofe akin to them,
are performed.
SEC-
Digitized by Google
6* Mathematical Trinciples Book If.
SECTION V.
The Definition of a Fluid.
A fluid is any body whofe parts yield to any
force impreffed on it, andy by yielding, are

eafily moved among themfelves.
Proposition XIX. Theorem XIV.

Ml the parts of a homogeneous and unmoved
fluid included in any unmoved vejfel, and
compreffed on every fide\ {fetting afide the
confideration of condenfatton, gravity\ and
all centripetal forces) will be equally preffed
on every fide and remain in their places with-
>
out any motion arifing from that prefjure.

PI- 4- Fig. 5-
Case i. Let a fluid be included in the fphaerical

vefTel jiBCmd uniformly compreffed on every fide :
I fay, that no part of it will be moved by that pref-

fure. For if any part, as 2>, be moved, all fuch parts
at the fame diftance from the centre on every fide, muft
neceffarily be moved at the fame time by a like motion;
becaufethe preffure of them all is fimilar and equal; and
all other motion is excluded that does not arife from
that
«
Digitized by Google
Seft. V. of Natural <Phi!ofophy. 6$
that preflure. But if thefe parts come all of them
nearerto the centre, the fluid muft be condenfed to-
wards the centre, contrary to the fuppofition. If they
recede from it, the fluid muft be condenfed Towards
the circumference ; which is alfo contrary to rhe tup-
pofition. Neither can they move in any one direSion
retaining their diftance from the centre, becaufe lor the
fame reafon they may move in a contrary direction
butthe fame part cannot be moved contrary ways at the
fame time. Therefore no part of the fluid will be
moved from its place. O.E.D.
Case z. I fay now, that all the fprmical parts of
this fluid are equally prefled on every fide. For let
EF be a fphxrical part of the fluid ; if this be not
prefled equally on every fide, augment the lefTer pref-
fare till it be prefled equally on every fide ; and its

parts (by Cafe i.) will remain in their places. But
before the increafe of the preflure, they would remain
in their places, fby Cafe u) and by the addition of a
new preflure, they will be moved, by the definition of

a fluid, from thofe places. Now thefe two cendufions
contradift each other. Therefore it was falfe to lay,
that the fphere EF
was not prefled equally on every fide.
OE.D.
Case I fay befides, that different fplmical parts
3.
have equal preflures. For the contiguous fphazrical parts
prefs each other mutually and equally in the point of
contaft, (by Law 3.) But (by Cafe 1.) they are
preffed on every fide with the fame force. Therefore
any two fphaerical parts not contiguous, fince an inter-
mediate fphaerical part»can touch both, will be prefled
with the fame force. <?. E. D.
Case 4. I fay now, that all the parts of the fluid

are every where prefled equally. For any two parts
fray be touched by fphaerical parts in any points what-
ever ; and there they will equally prefi thofe iphxrical
Vol. iu ' F parts,
parts, (by Cafe 3.) and arc, reciprocally, equally prefled

by them, (by Law j.) CKE.D.
Case 5. Since therefore any part GHI of the fluid
isinclofed by the reft of the fluid as in a veflel, and is
equally prefled on every fide and alfo its parts equally
prefs one another, and are at reft among themfelves ; it
is manifeft that all the parts of any fluid as GHI y
which is prefled equally on every fide, do prefs each
other mutually and equally, and are at reft among them-
felves. O. E. D.
Case Therefore if that fluid be included in a
6.
veflel of not rigid, and
a yielding fubftance, or that is
be not equally orefled on every fide ; the fame will
give way to a ftronger prefTure, by the definition of
fluidity.
Case 7. And therefore in an
inflexible or rigid vef-
fel, not fuftain a ftronger preffure on one
a fluid will
fide than on the other, but will give way to it, and
that in a moment of time ; becaufe the rigid fide of
the veffel does not follow the yielding liquor. But the
fluid, by thus yielding, will prefs againft the oppofirc
fide, and fo the preffure will tend on every fide toequa-
lity. And becaufe the fluid, as foon as it endeavours to
recede from the part that is moft prefled, is withftood
by the refiftance of the veflel on the oppofitefide; the
preffure will on every fide be reduced to equality, in a
moment of time, without any local motion : and from
thence the parts of the fluid, (by Cafe 5.^ will prefs
each other mutually and equally, and be at rjeft among
themfelves. O.E.D.
Cor. Whence neither will a motion of the parts
of the fluid among themfelves, be changed by a pref-
fure communicated to the external fuperhcies, except fo
far as either the figure of the fuperficies may be fome-
where alter'd, or that all the parts of the fluid, by prefling
one another more intenfely or remifsly, may Aide with
more or lefs difficulty among themfelves.
Pro-
Digitized by Google
Scft. V- of Natural Thilofophy.
Proposition XX. Theorem XV-

If all the parts of a fpharical fluid, homoge-
neous at equal diftances from the centre, lying
on afpharical concentric bottom, gravitate to-
wards the centre of the whole the bottom 5
will fufiain the weight of a cylinder, whofe

bafe is equal to the fuperficies of the bottom,
and whofe altitude is the fame with that of
the incumbent fluid. PI. 4. Fig. 6.
Let DHM be the fuperficies of the bottom, and

AEl the upper fuperficies of the fluid. Let the fluid
be diftinguifhed into concentric orbs of equal thicknefc,
by the innumerable fphaerical fuperficies BFK,CGL;

and conceive the force of gravity to aft only in the up-
per fuperficies of every orb, and the anions to be equal
on the equal parts of all the fuperficies. Therefore
the upper fuperficies AE
is prefTed by the fingle force
of its own gravity, by which all the parts of the upper

orb, and the fecond fuperficies B FK
will, (by Prop. 19.)
according to its meafure, be equally prefTed. The fe-
cond fuperficies BFK\s prefTed likewife by the force
of its own gravity, which added to the former force,
makes the prefTure double. The third fuperficies CGL
is,according to its meafure, afted on by this prefTure
and the force of its own gravity befides, which makes
its prefTure triple. And in like manner the fourth fu-
perficies receives a quadruple prefTure, the fifth fuper-
ficies a quintuple, and fo on. Therefore the prefTure
afting on every fuperficies, is not as the folid quanti-
ty of the incumbent fluid, but as the number of the
orbs reaching to the upper furface of the fluid; and is
equal to the gravity of the loweftorb multiplied by the
number of orbs : that is, to the gravity of a folid
F z whofe
Digitized by Google
68 Mathematical Trtnciptes Book Hi
whofe ultimate ratio to the cylinder abovementioned
(when the number of the orbs is increafed and their
thicknefs diminifhed ad infinitum^ fo that the aftion of
gravity from the loweft fuperficies to the uppermoft
may become continued) is the ratio of equality. There-
fore the loweft fuperficies fuftains the weight of the cy-
linder above-determined. Q.E.D. And by a like
reafoning the Propofition will be evident, where the
gravity of the fluid decreafes in any affigned ratio of
the diftance from the centre, and alfo where the fluid is
more rare above and denfer below. CK E. D.
Cor. i. Therefore the bottom is not prefled by the
whole weight of the incumbent fluid, but only fuftains
that part of it which is defcribed in the Propofition ;
the reft of the weight being fuftained archwife by the
fphaerical figure of the fluid.
Cor. 2. The quantity of the prefTure is the fame
always at equal diftances from the centre, whether the
fuperficies prefTed be parallel to the horizon, or perpen-
dicular, oroblique; or whether the fluid, continued
upwards from the comprefTed fuperficies, rifes perpen-
dicularly in a rectilinear direction, or creeps obliquely
thro* crooked cavities and canals,whether thofe paflages
be regular or irregular,wide or narrow. That the
prefTure is not alter'd by any of thefe circumftances,
may be collected by applying the demonftration of this
Theorem to the feveral cafes of fluids.
Cor. 3. From the fame demonftration it may alfo be
collected, (by Prop. 19.) that the parts of an heavy
fluid acquire no motion among themfelves, by the pref-
fure of the incumbent weight; except that motion
which arifes from condenfation.
Cor. 4. And therefore if another body of the fame
fpecific gravity, incapable of condenfation, be im-
merfed in this fluid, it will acquire no motion by the
prefTure of the incumbent weight it will neither dc-
:
fcend, nor afcend, nor change its figure. If it be

fphxrical*
Digitized by Google
Digitized by Google
Digitized by Google
;
Scft. V. of Natural Thilofophy. 69

fohxrical, it will remain fo notwithftanding the pref-
fure ; if it be fquare, it will remain fquare : and that
whether be fofr, or fluid ; whether it fwims freely in
it
the fluid, or lies at the bottom. For any internal part

of a fluid is in the fame ftate with the fubmerfed body
and the cafe of all fubmerfed bodies that have the fame
magnitude, figure, and fpecific gravity, is alike. If
a fubmerfed body retaining its weight, fliould diflblve
and put on the form of a fluid, this body, if before it
would have afcended, defcended, or from any preffure
afTume a new would now likewife afcend, de-
figure,
fend, or put on new figure; and that becaufe its gra-
a
vity and the other caufes of its motion remain. But
(by Cafe 5. Prop, ip.) it would now be at reft and re-
tain its figure. Therefore alfo in the former cafe.
Con. Therefore a body that is fpecifically hea-
5.
vier than a fluid contiguous to it, will fink, and that
which is fpecifically lighter will afcend, and attain fo
much motion and change of figure, as that excefs or
defeft of gravity
is able to produce. For that excels
or defeft the lame thing as an impulfe, by which a
is
body, otherwife in eqmlibrio with the parts of the fluid,

is afted on ; and may be compared with the excefs or
defedr. of a weight in one of the fcales of a balance.
Cor. 6. Therefore bodies placed in fluids have a
twofold gravity ; the one true and abfolute, the other
apparent, vulgar and comparative. Ablblute gravity
is the whole force with which the body tends down-
wards : relative and vulgar gravity is the excefs of gra-
vity with which the body tends downwards more than
the ambient fluid. By the firft kind of gravity, the
parts of all fluids and bodies gravitate in their proper
places ; and therefore their weights taken together, corn-
pofe the weight of the whole. For the whole taken
together is heavy, as may be experienced in veflels full
of liquor ; and the weight of the whole is equal to the
weights of all the parts, and is therefore compofed of
F 3 them.
Digitized
(
70 Mathematical Principles Book IL

them. By do not
the other kind of gravity bodies
gravitate in their places, that compared with one
is,
another, they do not preponderate, but hindering one

another's endeavours to defcend, remain in their pro-
per places, as if they were not heavy. Thofe things
which are in the air and do not preponderate, are com-
monly looked on as not heavy, Thofe which do pre-
ponderate are commonly reckoned heavy, in as much
as they are not fuftained by the weight of the air. The
common weights are nothing elfe but the excefs of the
true weights above the weight of the air. Hence alfo
vulgarly thofe things are called light, which are lefs
heavy ; and by yielding to the preponderating air,
mount upwards. But thefe are only comparative-
ly light, and not truly fo, becaufe they defcend in va-
cuo. Thus in water, bodies which, by their greater
or lefs gravity, defcend or afcend, are comparatively
and apparently heavy or light, and their comparative
and apparent gravity or levity is the excefs or defedfc
by which their true gravity either exceeds the gravity
of the water or is exceeded by it. But thofe things
which neither by preponderating defcend, nor, by
yielding to the preponderating fluid, afcend, altho' by
their true weight they do increafe the weight of the
whole, yet comparatively, and in the fenfe of the vul-
gar, they do not gravitate in the water. For thefe
cafes are alike demon ftra ted.
Cor. Thefe things which have been demonftra-
7.
ted concerning gravity, take place in any other centri-
petal forces.
Cor. Therefore if the medium in which any
8.
body moves be afted on either by its own gravity, or
by any other centripetal force, and the body be ur-
ged more powerfully by the fame force ; the difference
of the forces is that very motive force, which in the
foregoing Propofitions I have confider'd as a-eentripe-
tal fqr^. JJut if the body be more lightly urg'd by
that
Digitized by Google
Scft.V. of Natural Thilofophy. 71
that force, the difference of the forces becomes a cen-
trifugal force, and is to be confider'd as fuch.
Cor. 9. But fince fluids by preffing the included
bodies do not change their external figures, it appears
alfo, (by Cor. Prop. 19.) that they will not change
the fituation of their internal parts in relation to one
another ; and therefore if animals were immerfed there-
in, and that all fcnfation did arife from the motion of
their parts; the fluid will neither hurt the immerfed bo-
dies, nor excite any fenfation, unlefs fo far as thofe
bodies may be condenfed by the compreflion. And the

cafe is the fame of any fyftem of bodies encompafled
with a comprefling fluid. All the parts of the fyftem

will be agitated with the fame motions, as if they were
placed in a vacuum, and would only retain their com-

parative gravity ; unlefs fo far as the fluid may fome-
what refift their motions, or be requifite to congluti-
nate them by compreflion.
oposition XXI. Theorem XVI.

Let the denjity of any fluid be proportional to
the comprejfion, and its parts be attracted
downwards by a centripetal force reciprocally
proportional to the diflances from the centre:
I fay j that, if thofe diflances be taken con-
tinually proportional, the denfities of the fluid
at the fame diflances will be alfo continually
proportional. PI. 5. Fig. 1.
Let A ^denote the fphaerical bottom of the fluid,

S the centre, SA $ SB, SC, SD, SE, SF, dec. diflances
continually proportional. Ere<3 the perpendiculars %AH
BI, CK, DL, EM, FN, &c. which fliall be as the
denfities of the medium in the places A, B,C, D,E,F}
and the fpeciflc gravities in thofe places will be
* F 4 as
Digitized by Google
7i Mathematical Trinciples Book II",
as —
AH ,
BICK
— — , , &c. or,
.
which
.
,
is all one,
&c. Suppofe firft thefe gravities to
be uniformly continued from to B, from B to C, A

from C to A
&c. the decrements in the points B, C,D>
Sec. being taken by fteps. And thefe gravities drawn
into the altitudes AB, BC, CD, Sec. will give the
prefTures AH, B I, CK, Sec. by which the bottom
ATV'is ailed on, ("by Theor. 15.) Therefore the
particle A fuftains all the prefTures AH, BI, CK, D L 9
&c. proceeding in infinitum and the particle B fuftains
;
the prefTures of all but the

firft i AH
and the particle
C all but the two firft AH, B I; and fo on : and
therefore the denfiry A
Hoi the firft particle is to A
thedenfity B I of the fecond particle B as the fum of
all AH-\- BT-U CK-\- DL, in infinitum, to the fum
of all BI-\-CK-\-DL, Sec. And BI the denfity of
the fecond particle B is to CK thedenfity of the third C,
as the fum of all B I-\- CK-\- D L, Sec. to the fum of all
CX-|- D L, &c. Therefore thefe fums are proportional to
their differences AH, BI, CK, &c.and therefore continu-
ally proportional, (byLem. 1. of this Book) and there-
fore the differences AH, B I, CK, Sec. proportional to
the fums, are alfo continually proportional. Wherefore
fince the denfities in the places A,B, C, Sec. are as AH,
BI, CK, dec. they will
be continually proportional.
alfo
Proceed intermilTively, and, ex * quo, at the diftances
SC,SE continually proportional, the denlities AH, CK,
M
E will be continually proportional. And by the fame
reafoning, at any diftances SA, SD> SG continually
proportional, the denfities AH, DL, GO will be con-
tinually proportional. Let now
A,B, C, D,E, the points
Sec. coincide, fo that of the fpecific
the progreffion
gravities from the bottom A
to the top of the fluid
may be made continual; and at any diftances SA, SD,
SG
\
Digitized by Google
X
Seft. V. of Katural Thilofophf. 7f

S G continually proportional, the dcnfi ties AH, DL,GQ
being all along continually proportional, will ftill re-
main continually proportional. Q. E.D.
Cor Hence if the denfity of the fluid in two pla-
ces as A and E be given, any other place
its cjenfity in
<?may be collected. With the centre S, and the rec-
tangular afymptotes SO> SXdefcribe (Fig.i.) an Hy-
perbola cutting the perpendiculars AH, EM, OT in
a, e, and^f, as alfo the perpendiculars HX, MT, TZ
let fall upon the afymptotc SX in h, m, and /. Make
the area TmtZ to the given area TmbX as the given
^rea EcqOjo the given area EeaA; and the YmcZt
produced will cut off the line OT proportional to the
denfity. For if the lines 3 SA S E, SQ are continu-
ally propon ional, the areas Eeq 0>EeaA will be equal,
and thence the areas TmtZ, XhmY
proportional to
them will be alfo equal, and the lines S y ST, SZ,
that is, AH, EM, OT
continually proportional as
they ought to be. And if the lines y SE, S SA
ob-
tain any (other order in the feries of continued propor-
tionals, the lines AH, EM,
OT, becaufe of the pro-
portional hyperbolic areas, wiffobtain the fame order in
another feries of quantities continually proportional.
Proposition XXII. Theorem XV1L

Let the denfity of any fluid be proportional tp
the comprejfion, and its parts be attracted
downwards by a gravitation reciprocally pro-
portional to the Jquares of the diftances from
the centre : I fay, that, if the diftances be
taken in harmonic progrejfion, the denfities
of the fluid at thofe diftances will be in a
geometrical progrejfion. PI. 5. Fig. 3.
Let S denote the centre, and SA> SB,SC> y SD
i
S £, the diftances in Geometrical progreflion. Ere&
-
* the
Digitized by Google
74 Mathematical Principles Book IL
the perpendiculars AH, BI9 CK, (hall be Sec. which
asthe denfities of the fluid in the places A, B, C, D, E,
&c. and the fpecific gravities thereof in thofe places
will be as Sec. Suppofe thefe
gravities to be uniformly continued, the firft from A

to By the fecond from £ to C, the third from C to D,
&c. And thefe drawn into the altitudes AB,BC, CD,
D$, Sec. or, which is the fame thing, into the dis-
tances SA, SB, S C, Sec. proportional to thofe alti-
. .„ AH BJ CK ,
tudes, will give -<rjy j£> &c. the exponents
of the prefTures. Therefore fince the denfities are as

the fums of thofe preflures, the differences B /, A H—
BI—-CK, &c. of the denfities will be as the differences
of thofe fums ^f, Sec. With the centre
&A SB SC
S, and the afy mptotes SA, S x, defcribe any Hyper-
bola, cutting the perpendiculars AH, Bl, CK, &c. in
4, b> c, &c. and the perpendiculars Ht^ In, let fall Kw
upon the afymptote Sx, in by i, kj and the differences
of the denfities tu, uw, &c. will be as

AH
— — B— ,
oA oB
&c. And the reftangles tuxtb, uwxui, Sec. or
tf,uq, &c. as —
AHxth Blxui
— SB , ,
m
Sec.
.
that is, as
Aa,Bb, dec. For, by the nature of the Hyperbola,

SA to is AH or St9 as tb to A a, and therefore
A
—Hx tb — is equal to A a. And, by a like reafoning,
Blxui
- - is equal to &c. But Bb,Cc, &c.
are continually proportional, and therefore proportional
to their differences A* — Bb, Bb — Cc, Sec. and
therefore the reftangles t p, ufr Sec. are proportional
4 to
Sea. V. of Natural Thilofophy. 7s
to thofe differences ; fums of the re&angles
as alfo the
tp-\-*q or tp-\- nq-\-wr to the fums of the diffe-
rences A —
Cc or a Dd.A —
Suppofe feveral of
thefe terms, and the fum of all the differences, as
Aa —Ff, will be proportional to the fum of all the
reftangles, as z,thn. Increafe the number of termr,
and diminifli the diftances of the points A, B, C, dec. im
infinitum, and thofe rectangles will become equal to
the hyperbolic area*,/ Aw, and therefore the difference
A a —Ff is proportional to this area. Take now any
diftances as SA, SD, SF in harmonic progreffion, and
the differences a A —
Dd, Dd —
F/ will be equal;
and therefore the areas tblx> xlnz, proportional to
thofe differences will be equal among themfelves, and
the denfities St, Sx, Sz>, that is, AH, DL, FN
continually proportional. Q. E. D.
Cor. 2. Hence if any two denfities of the fluid, as
AH and B 1 be given, the thin, anfwering to
area
their difference tn will be given and thence the den-
;
fity FN will be found any height S F, by taking

at
the area thnz, to that given area*/?/* the difference as
A a — Ff to the difference A a — Bb.

Scholium.
By a like reafoning, it may be proved, that if the
gravity of the particles of a fluid be diminiihed in a
triplicate ratio of the diftances from the centre ; and
the reciprocals of the fquares of the diftances SA
SB, SC, &c. (namely ~, — , — ) be taken
9
in an Arithmetical progreffion, the denfities AH, Bit

CK, 8cc. will be in a Geometrical progreffion. And if
the gravity be diminiflied in a quadruplicate ratio of

the diftances, and the reciprocals of the cubes of the
diftances
, SA*
(as— , ——
SA*
,
SA* . ,
&c.; be taken
.
in
Arich*
Digitized by Google
Arithmetical progreffion, the denfities AH, B /, CKy
&c. will be in Geometrical progreffion. And fo in
infinitum. Again, if the gravity of the particles of the
fluid be the fame at all diftances, and the diftances be in
Arithmetical progreffion, the denfities will be in a
Geometrical progreffion, as Dr. Halky has found. If
the gravity be as the diftance, and the fquares of the
diftances be in Arithmetical progreffion, the denfities
will be in Geometrical progreffion. And fo in infinitum.
Thefe things will be fo, when the denfity of the fluid
condenfed by compreffion is as the force of compreffion,
or, which is the fame thing, when the fpace pofleffed
by the fluid is reciprocally as this force. Other laws
of condenfation may be fuppofed, as that the cube of
the compreffing force may be as the biquadrate of the
denfity ; or the triplicate ratio of the force the fame
with the quadruplicate ratio of the denfity : In which
gravity be reciprocally as the fquare of the
cafe, if the
diftance from the centre, the denfity will be recipror
cally as the cube of the diftance. Suppofe that the
cube of the compreffing force be as the quadrato-cube
of the denfity ; and if the gravity be reciprocally as
the fquare of the diftance, the denfity will be recipro-
cally in a fefquiplicate ratio of the diftance. Suppofe
the compreffing force to be in a duplicate ratio of the
denfity, and the gravity reciprocally in a duplicate ratio
of the diftance, and the denfity will be reciprocally as
the diftance. To run over all the cafes that might be
offer'd, would be tedious. But as to ourôwn air, this
is certain from experiment, that its denfity is either
accurately or very nearly at leaft as the compreffing
force ; and therefore the denfity of the air in the at-
mofphere of the earth is as the weight of the whole
incumbent air, that is, as the height of the mercury ia
the barometer.
*
Pro-
Digitized by Google
ScO. V. of Natural miofophyl 77
Proposition XXIII. Theorem XVIII.

If a fluid be compofed of particles mutually fly.
ing each other, and the denfity be as the com-
preJJiony the centrifugal forces of the parti-
cles will be reciprocally proportional to the
diftances of their centres. And vice vcrfa,
particles flying each other with forces that
are reciprocally proportional to the diftances
of their centres , compofe an elaflic fluid,
.
whofe denfity is as the compreflion. PL 5*
Fig. 4.
Let the fluid be fuppofed to be included in a cubic

fpaces C£, and then to be reduced by compreflion
into a lefler cubic fpace ace; and the diftances of the
particles retaining a like fituation with refpeft to each
other in both the fpaces, will be as the fides By ab of A
the cubes ; and the denfities of the mediums will be re-
ciprocally as the containing fpaces A
B 3 , a b* . In the
plane fide of the greater cube B A CD
take the fquarc
DP equal to the plane fide db of the lefler cube : and,
by the fuppofitiop, the preflure with which the fqtiare
DP urges the inclofed fluid, will be to the preflure
with which that fquare db urges the inclofed fluid, as
the denfities of the mediums are to each other, that is*
as ab 3 to A£ J
. But the preflure with which the fquare
D B urges the included fluid, is to the preflure with which
the fquare DP urges the fame fluid, as the fquare D B to
the fquare DP,that is, as %
AB
to ab 2 . Therefore,
tx tqtiOy the preflure with which the fauare urges DB
the fluid is to the preflure with whicn the fquare db
urges the fluid as a h to AB.
,*
Let the planes Ff, FG
fg bybe drawn thro* the middles of the two cubes, and
divide the fluid into two parts. Thefe parts will
Digitized
7S Mathematical Trinciptes Book II.
prefs each other mutually with the fame forces with

which they are themfelves preffed by the planes AC,
ac, that is, in the proportion of db to AB: and there-
fore the centrifugal forces by which thefe preflures arc
fuftained, are in the fame ratio. The number of the
particles being equal, and the fituation alike, in both
cubes, the forces which all the particles exert, according
to the planes FGH* fgh> upon all, are as the forces
which each exerts on each. Therefore the forces which
each exerts on each according to the plane FGH
'm the
greater cube, are to the forces which each exerts on each
according to the plane fgb in the leffer cube, as a b to
A By that is, reciprocally as the diftances of the parti-
cles from each other. O. E. D.
And, vice verft, if the forces of the fingle particles
are reciprocally as the diftances, that is, reciprocally as
the fides of the cubes AB, db; the fums of the forces
will be in the fame ratio, and the prelTures of the fides
D By db as the fums of the forces ; and the preflure
of the fquare DP
to the prefTure of the fide DB
as ab
%
to AB*. And, ex aquoy the preflure of the fquare

DP to the prelTureof the fide db as ab 5 to 3
AB
> that
is, the force of compreffion in the one to the force of
compreffion in the other, as the denfity in the former

to the denfity in the latter. QE.D.
Scholium.
By a like reafoning, if the centrifugal forces of the
particles are reciprocally in the duplicate ratio of the
diftances between the centres, the cubes of the com-
prefling forces will be as the biquadrates of the denfi-
ties. If the centrifugal forces be reciprocally in the
triplicate or quadruplicate ratio of the diftances, the
cubes of the compreffing forces will be as thequadrato-
cubes, or cubo-cubes of the denfities. And univer-
fally, if Dbe put for the diftance, and E for the den-
fity
Digitized by Google
Scd. V. of Natural Thilofophy. 79
fity of the compreflcd fluid, and the centrifugal forces
be reciprocally as any power D" of the diftance, whofe
index is the number n ; the compreffing forces will be
as the cube roots of the power E*
+1 , whofe index
is
the number n-4- : and the contrary. All thefc things
are to be underftood of particles whofe centrifugal forces
terminate in thofe particles that are next them, or are

diffufed not much further. We
have an example of
this in magnetical bodies. Their attraftive virtue is
terminated nearly in bodies of their own kind that arc
next them. The virtue of the magnet is contra&ed
by the interpofition of an iron plate ; and is almoft ter-
minated at it. For bodies further off are not at-
trafted by the magnet fo much as by the iron plate.
If in this manner particles repel others of their own
kind that lie next them, but do not exert their virtue on
the more remote, particles of this kind will compofe
fuch fluids as are treated of in this propofition. It the
virtue of any particle diffufe itfelf every way m infini-
tum, there will be required a greater force to produce
an equal condenfation of a greater quantity of the fluid.
But whether elaftic fluids do really confift of particles
fo repelling each other, is a phyfical queftion. We
have here demonftrated mathematically the property of
fluids confiding of particles of thi* iciqd, that hence
philofophers may take occafion to difcufs that queftion.
SEC-
Digitized by Google
:
to Mathematical Trinctês Book II,
SECTION VI.
Of the motion and refiflance of fune-

pendulous bodies.
Proposition XXIV. Theorem XIX.

The quantities of matter in funependulous bo-
dies, whofe centres of ofdilation are equally
diftant from the centre of fufpenfion, are in
a ratio compounded of the ratio of the weights
and the duplicate ratio of the times of the
oscillations in vacuo.
For the velocity, which a given force can generate

in a given matter in a given time, is as the force and
the time direfily, and the matter inverfely. The

greater the force or the time is, or the lefs the matter,
the greater velocity will be generated. This is mani-
feft from the fecond law of motion. Now if pendu-
lums are of the fame length, the motive forces in places
equally diftant from the perpendicular are as the weights
and tnerefore if two bodies by ofcillating defcribe equal
arcs, and thofe arcs are divided into equal parts ; fince
the times in which the bodies defcribe each of the cor-
refpondent parts of the arcs are as the times of the whole
ofcillations, the velocities in the correfpondent parts of
the
Digitized by Google
Sett. VI. of Natural Thlhfophf. %i
the ofcillations will be to each other, as the motive
forces and the whole times of the ofcillations dire&ly,
and the quantities of matter reciprocally : and therefore
the quantities of matter are as the forces and the times
of the ofcillations dire&ly and the velocities recipro-
cally. But the velocities reciprocally are as the times,
and therefore the times direflly and the velocities reci-
procally are as the fquares of the times and therefore
the quantities of matter are as the motive forces and
the fquares of the times, that is, as the weights and the
fquaresof the times. 0~E. D.
Cor. i. Therefore if the times are equal, the quan-
of matter in each of the bodies are as the weights.
tities
Cor. z. If the weights are equal, the quantities of

matter will be as the fquares of the times.
Cor. 3. If the quantities of matter are equal, the
weights will be reciprocally as the fquares of the
times.
Cor. 4. Whence
fince the fquares of the times,
uteris paribus, are as the lengths of the pendulums ;
therefore if both the times and quantities of matter are
equal, the weights will be as the lengths of the pendu-
lums.
Cor. 5. And univerfally, the quantity of matter in
the pendulous body is as the weight and the fquare of
the time dirc&ly, and the length of the pendulum in-
verfely.
Cor* 6. But in a non-refifting medium, the quan-
tity of matter in the pendulous body is as the compa-
rative weight and the fquare of the time direftly, and
the length of the pendulum inverfely. For the com-
parative weight is the motive force of the body in any
heavy medium, as was ftiewn above 5 and therefore
does the fame thing in fiich a non-refifting medium, as
the abfolute weight does in a vacuum.
Cor. 7. And hence appears a method both of com-
paring bodies one among another, as to the quantity of
Vol. II. O nutter
Digitized by Google
Mathematical "Principles Book II.
matter in each ; and of comparing the weights of the

fame body in different places, to know the variation of
its gravity. experiments made with the greateft
And by
accuracy, I have always found the quantity of matter
in bodies to be proportional to their weight.
Proposition XXV. Theorem XX.

Funipendulous bodies that are, in any medium,
refilled in the ratio of 'the moments of time9
and funipendulous bodies that move in a non-
refifting medium of the fame /pec ifc gravity,
perform their ofcillations in a cycloid in the
fame time, and defcribe proportional parts of
arcs together. PL 5 « Fig. S •
Let AB be an arc of a cycloid, which a body D,

by vibrating in a non-refilling medium fhall defcribe in
any time. C may be the
Bifeft that arc in C, fo that
loweft point thereof ; and the accelerative force with
which the body .is urged in any place D
or d or £ will
be as the length of the arc CD
or Cd or CE. Let
that force be expreffed by that fame arc ; and fince the re-
fi fiance is as the moment of the time, and therefore gi-
ven, let it be exprefs'd by the given part CO of the

cycloidal arc, and take the arc Od in the fame ratio to
the arc CD that the arc OB has to the arc CB : and
the force with which the body in d is urged in a re-
fitting medium, being the excefs of the force Cd above
the refiflance CO, will be exprefTed by the arc Od, and
will therefore be to the force with which the body
D is urged in a non-refifling medium in the place D,
as the arc O^to the arc ; CD

and therefore alfo in the
place B, as the arc OB
to the arc CB. Therefore if
two bodies D,d go from the place B, and are urged by
thefe forces fince the forces at the beginning are as the
* arcs
Digitized by Google
Scft. VX of Natural Thtlofophy. %j
arcs CB and OB, firft velocities and arcs firft de-

the
fcribed will be in thefame ratio. Let thofe arcs be BD
and Bd, and the remaining arcs CD, Od, will be in
the fame ratio* Therefore the forces, being proportional
to thofe arcs CD,Od, will remain in the fame ratio
as at the beginning, and therefore the bodies will con-
tinue defcribing together arcs in the fame ratio. There-

fore the forces and velocities and the remaining arcs
CD, Ody will be always as the whole arcs CB> OB,

and therefore thofe remaining arcs will be defcri-
bed together. Therefore the two bodies and d D
will arrive together at the places C and O; that
which moves in the non-refifting medium, at the place
C, and the other, in the refilling medium, at the place
0. Now fince the velocities in C and O are as the
arcs CB, OB, the arcs which the bodies' defcribe when
they go farther, will be in the fame ratio. Let thofe
arcs be C£andO*. The force with which the body
D in a non-refifting medium is retarded in E is as CE9
and the force with which the body d in the refilling
medium is retarded in e, is as the fum of the force Ce
and the refiflance CO, that is, as Oe; and therefore
the forces with which the bodies are retarded, are as the
arcsCZ?, OB, proportional to the arcs CE,Oe; and
therefore the velocities, retarded in that given ratio, re-
main in the fame given ratio. Therefore the velocities
and the arcs defcribed with thofe velocities, are always
to each other in that given ratio of the arcs CB and
OB, and therefore if the entire arcs ABâB are ta-
ken in the fame ratio, the bodies D
and d will defcribe
thofe arcs together, and in the places and a vail A
lofe all their motion together. Therefore the whole ofcil-
lations are ifochronal, or are performed in equal times*

and any parts of the arcs, as B D, B d, or BE, B e, that
are defcribed together, are proportional to the whole
*rcsBA,B«. £.E.D.
Gz Cor*
Digitized by Google
Cor. Therefore the fwifteft motion in a refitting

medium does not fall upon the loweft point but is C
found in that point O, in which the whole arc defcri-
bed B a is bife&ed. And the body proceeding from
thence to a, is retarded at the fame rate with which it
was accelerated before in its defcent from B to O.
Proposition XXVX Theorem XXL

Funifendulous bodies, that are refified in the
ratio of the velocity, have their ofcillations
in a cycloid ifochrmal.
For if two bodies, equally diftant from their centres

of fufpenfion, defcribe, in ofcillating, unequal arcs,
and the velocities in the correfpondent parts of the arcs
be to each other as the whole arcs ; the refiftances, pro-
portional to the velocities, will be alfo to each other as
the fame arcs. Therefore if thefe refiftances be fub-
dufted from or added to the motive forces arifing from
gravity which are as the fame arcs, the differences or
fums will be to each other in the fame ratio of the arcs
and fince the increments and decrements of the velocities
are as thefe differences or fums, the velocities will be
always as the whole arcs : Therefore if the velocities
are inany one cafe as the whole arcs, they will remain
always in the fame ratio. But at the beginning of the
motion, when the bodies begin to defcend and defcribe
thofe arcs, the forces, which at that time are propor-
tional to the arcs, will generate velocities proportional
to the arcs. Therefore the velocities will be always as
the whole arcs to be defcribed, and therefore thofe arcs
"will be defcribed in the fame time. Q. E. D.
Pro-
Digitized by Google
Sed. VI. of Natural Thilofophf.
Proposition XXVII. Theorem XXIL

If funipendulous bodies are refifted in the dupli-
cate ratio of their velocities, the differences
between the times of the ofcillations in a re-
filling medium, and the times of the ofcilla-
tions in a non-refijling medium of the fame
fpecific gravity, will be proportional to the
arcs defcribed in ofcillating nearly.
For let equal pendulums in a refitting medium de-

scribe the unequal arcs A, B
and the refifhnce of the
;
body in the arc A will be to the refifhnce of the bo-

dy in the correfpondent part of the arcB in the dupli-
cate ratio of the velocities, that is, as AA to BB nearly.
If the refifhnce in the arc B were to the refifhnce in
the arc A as AB to AA ; the times in the arcs A and
B would be equal (by the laft Prop.) Therefore the re-
fifhnce A A in the arc A, or A B in the arc B, caufes
the excefs of the time in the arc A above the time in a
non-refifting medium ; and the refifhnce B B caufes
the excefs of the time in the arc B above the time in a
non-refifting medium. But thofe excefles are as the
efficient forces AB and BB nearly, that is, as the arcs
AandB. Q.E.D.
Cor. i. Hence from the times of the ofcillations in
unequal arcs in a refitting medium, may be known the
times of the ofcillations in a non-refitting medium of
the fame fpecific gravity. For the difference of the
times will be to the excefs of the time in the letter arc
above the time in a non-refifting medium, as the diffe-
rence of the arcs to the letter arc.
Cor. 2. The more ifochro-
lhorter ofcillations are
*al, and very ftiort ones are performed nearly in the
G j \ fame
Digitized by Google
t6 Mathematical Principles Book II.
fame times as in a non-refifting medium. But the

times of thofe which are performed in greater arcs are
a little greater, becaufe the reliftance in the defcent of
the body, by which the time is prolonged, is greater, in
proportion to the length defcribed in the defcent, than
the refiftance in the fubfequent afcent, by which the
time is contracted. But the time of the ofcillations,
both and long, feems to be prolonged in fome
fliort
meafure by the motion of the medium. For retar-
ded bodies are rcfifted fomewhat lefs, in proportion
to the velocity, and accelerated bodies fomewhat more,
than thofe that proceed- uniformly forwards ; becaufq
the medium, by the motion it has received from the
bodies, going forwards the fame way with them, is
more agitated in the former cafe, and lefs in the latter
and fo confpires more or lefs with the bodies moved.
Therefore it refills rlie pendulums in their defcent more*
and in their afcent lefs, than in proportion to the ve-
locity ; and thefe two caufes concurring prolong the
time.
Proposition XXVIII. Theorem XXIII.

If a funipendulous body, ofcillating in a cy-
cloid, be rejifled in the ratio of the moments
of the time, its refiftance will be to the force
of gravity as the excefs of the arc defcribed
in the whole defeent above the arc defcribed
in the fubfequent afcent, to twice the length
of the pendulum. PI. 5. Fig. 5.
Let BC reprefent the arc defcribed in the defcenri

Ca the arc defcribed in the afcent, and A
a the difference
of the arcs : andihings remaining as they were confbu&eol
and demonftrated in Prop. 2 j. the force with which the
ofcillating
Digitized by Google
Scd. VI. of Natural Thilofophy. %7
ofcillating body is urged in any place D, will be to the

force of refinance as the arc CD to the arc CO, wh'ch
is half of that difference Aa.
Therefore the force
with which the ofcillating body is urged at the begin-
ning or the higheft point of the cycloid, that is, the
force of gravity,
will be to the refiftan.ee as the arc of
the between that higheft Jpoint and lo weft
cycloid,
point C, is to the arc CO; rhat is, (doubling thofe
arcs) as the whole cycloidal arc, or twice the length of
the pendulum, to the arc a. O. £. D. A *
Proposition XXIX. Problem Yl.

Suppofing that a body ofcillating in a cycloid is
refijled in a duplicate ratio of the velocity : to
find the reffiance in each place. PI. 5 Fig. •
Let Ba
be an arc defcribed in one entire ofcillation,
C the loweft point of the cycloid, and half the CZ
whole cycloidal arc, equal to, the length of the pendu-
lum ; and let it be required to find the refiftance of thr
body in any place D. Cut the indefinite right line O <9
in the points O, S, P, 0, fo that (erefiing the perpen-
diculars OK)ST,PI>OE> and with the centre O f

and the afymptotes OAT, O <9 defcribing the hyperbola
TIGE cutting the perpendiculars 5*7*, ?/, in T, QE
I and Ej and thro' the point / drawing 9 parallel to KF
the afvmptote O
Q> meeting the afymptote in 9
OK K
and the perpendiculars £7"* and in L and F) theQE
hyperbolic area PIEQ
may be to the hyperbolic
trap ITS as the arc BC, defcribed in the defcent q(
the body, to the arc Ca defcribed in the afcent and ;
tjiat the area IE F may be to the area ILTas O j? to

OS. Then with the perpendicular MN cut off"the
hyperbolic area P INM> and let that area be to the
hyperbolic area PIEO as the arc CZ to the arc
*G 4 *C
BCdefcribed in the defcent. And if the perpendicu-
lar #G cut off the hyperbolic area PIGR, which
jhall be to the area PIEQ as any arc CD to the arc
SC de fcribed in the whole defcent j the refiftance in
any place D will be to the force of gravity, as the area
— IEF—IGHxo the area PINM.

For fince the forces arifing from gravity with which
the body is urged in the places Z, £, D, a, are as the
arcs CZ, CB, CD, Ca, and thofe arcs are as the areas
PINM, PIEO, PIGR, PITS ; let thofe areas be
the exponents both of the arcs and of the forces re-
fpe&ively. Let Dd
be a very fmall fpace defcribed by
the body in ; and let it be expreffed by the
its defcent
very fmall area RGgr comprehended between the paral-
lels RG, rgl and produce rg to h, fo that GHhg, and
RGgr may be the contemporaneous decrements of the

areas IGH, PIGR. And the increment GHhg —
~ÎEF> or RrxHG — ^JEF, '
of the area
OQ^ 00_
OR
*—IEF — IGH will be to the decrement RGgr,
or RrxRG, of the area PIGR, as HG -—

to RG ; and therefore as O R x HG ——
OR
IE F to
ORxGR or OPxPI, that is (becaufe~of the c-

qual quantities O Rx HG, ORxHR — ORxGR ,
ORHK — OPIK, PIHR znd P IG R -\- IG H) as
OR
PIGR -|- IGH— QgJEF to OP IK. Therefore
if the area — IEF—IGH

Vo
be called Y, and RGgr
the decrement of the area PIG R be given, the incre-
ment of the area Y will be as PIGR — Y.
Then
zed by Google
5cft. VI. of Natural Thilofophy. s9
Then if V the force arifing from the gra-
reprefent
vity, proportional to the arc CD
to be defcribed, by
which the body is a&ed upon in D> and R
be put for
the refiftance; V— Rwill be the whole force with
which the body is urged in D. Therefore the incre-
ment of the velocity is as V— R
and the particle of
time in which it is generated conjun&ly. But the ve-
locity itfelf is as the contemporaneous increment of the
fpace defcribed direftly and the fame particle of time
inverfely. Therefore, fince the refiftance is, by the
fuppofition, as the fquare of the velocity, the incre-
ment of the refiftance will (byLem. z.) be as the ve-
locity and the increment of the velocity conjunctly*
that is, as the moment of the fpace and V— R
con-
junctly ; and therefore, if the moment of the fpace be
given, as V— R ; that is, if for the force V
we put
its exponent PIG R> and the refiftance R
beexprefTed
by any other area Z, as PIG R Z. —
Therefore the area PIGR
uniformly decreafing by
the fubduftion of given moments, the area Y
increafes
in proportion of PIG R—Y,
and the area Z in pro-
portion of PIGR —
Z. And therefore if the areas Y
and Z begin together, and at the beginning are equal,
thefe, by the addition of equal moments, will continue
to be equal ; and in like manner decreafing by eaual
moments will van fh together. And, viceverfa, if they

;
together begin and vanilh, they wilj^have equal moments

and be always equal and that, bâuie if the refiftance Z
:
be augmented, the velocity together with the arc Ca,

defcribed in the afcent of the body, will be diminifhed
and the point in which all the motion together with
the refiftance ceafes, coming nearer to the point C, the
refiftance vaniflies fooner than the area Y. And the
contrary will happen when the refiftance is diminifhed.
Now the area Z begins and ends where the refiftance
is nothing, that is, at the beginning of the motion'
yherethe arc CDis equal to the arc CB> and the right
Digitized by Google
90 Mathematical Trinclples Book IF.
line RG upon the right line
fells ; and 0£ at the encJ
of the motion where the arc CD is equal to the arc
Ca y and RG falls upon the right line *ST. And the
OR
area Y or ÎEF— IGH begins and ends alfb
where the refinance is nothing, and therefore where

OR IGH
q-qJEF anc * are equal ,* that is, (by the con-
ftrudion) where the right line falls fucceflivcly RG

upon the right lines j?£ and ST. Therefore thofe
areas begin and vanilh together, and are therefore al-
0R — IG H
ways equal. Therefore the area -p— IEF is
up
equal to the area Z, by which the reliftance is expreffed,
and therefore is to the area P INM by which the gra-
vity is expreffed as the refiftance to the gravity.
O. E. D.
^Cor. i. Therefore the refiftance in the loweft place
OP
C is to the force of gravity, as the area^-^/£F to
the area PINM.

Cor. 2. But it becomes greateft, where the area
PIHR is to the area IEF as OR0 0. For in
to
that cafe its moment (that is, PIGR-*- Y) becomes
nothing.
Cor. j. alfo may be known the velocity in
Hence
each place being in the fubduplicate ratio of the re-
: as
fiftance, and at the beginning of the motion equal to
the velocity of the body ofcillating in the fame cycloid
without any refinance.
However, by reafon of the difficulty of the calcu-
lationby which ths. refiftance and the velocity are
found by this Propofmon, we have thought fit to fub-
join the Pi opofition following.
Pro-
Digitized by Google
\
>ogle
Sect. VI. of Natural Thilofcphy. 91
• »
Proposition XXX. Theorem XXIV,

If aright linea3 (PI. <5. Fig. i.) be equal to
the arc of a cycloid which an ofiliating body
defer ibes, and at each of its points D the per-
pendiculars DK be ere£tedy which fhall be to
the length of the pendulum as the refiftance
cf the body in the correfponding points
of the
the force of gravity : I fay, that the
arc to
difference between the arc defcribed in the
whole defcent and the arc defcribed in the
whole fubfequent afcent drawn into half the
fum of the fame arcs, will be equal to the area
BKa which all thofeperpendiculars take up*
a
•
Let the arc of the cycloid, defcribed in one entire

be exprefled by the right line 4 B, equal to
ofcillation,
it, which would have been defcribed im
and the arc
WHO, by the length AB. Bifeft A
£ in C, and the
point C will represent the loweft point of the cycloid,
and CD will be as the force arifing from gravity, with
which the bo^y in D
is urged in the direction of the
tangent of the cycloid, and will have the fame ratio :a

the length of the pendulum as the force in has to D
the force of gravity. Let that force therefore be ex-
prefled by that length CD, and the force of gravity by
the length of the pendulum, and if in DE
you take
in the fame ratio to the length of the pendulum. as
the refiftance has to the gravity, DK will be the ex-
ponent of the refiftance.*' From the centre C with the
interval CA or CB defcribe a femi circle BEeA. Let
the in the leafttime, the fpace Dd> and
body defcribe,
the perpendiculars DE, de> meeting the cir-
erefting
cumference in E and e, they will be as the velocities

which
Digitized by Google
pz Mathematical Trinciples Book IL
which the body defcending m vacuo from the point B
would acquire in the places D and d. This appears by
Prop. f 2.Book X. Let therefore thefe velocities be
txpreffed by thofe perpendiculars D E> de; and let DF
be the velocity which it acquires in D by falling from
B in the refitting medium. And if from the centre C
with the interval CF we defcribe the circle FfM meet-
ing the right lines de and A B in / and M, then At
will be the place to which it would thenceforward,
without farther refiftance, afcend, and df the velocity
itwould acquire in d. Whence alfo if Fg reprefent
the moment of the velocity which the body Z>, in de-
ferring the leaft fpaceD^, lofes by the refiftance of
the medium \ and CN be taken equal to Cg : then
will JVbe the place to which the body, if it met no
farther refiftance, would thenceforward afcend, and
MN will be the decrement of the afcent arifing from
the lofs of that velocity. Draw Fm perpendicular to
Jfi and the decrement Fg of the velocity Degene-
rated by the refiftance DK
will be to the increment
fm of the fame velocity generated by the force CD, as
fhe generating force DK
to the generating force CD.
But becaufe of the fimilar triangles Fmfi Fhg, FDC 3
fm is to Fm or Dd as CD to DF; and, ex <eqtto> Fg
to Dd as DK to DF. Alfo Fb to Fg as DF to is
CF; and, ex aquo fcrturbate, FhovMNto Ddzs

DK to CF ox CM; and therefore the fum of all
the MNxCM will be equal to the fum of all the
DdxDK. At the moveable point At fuppofe always
a re&angular ordinate erefted equal to the indeterminate
CM, wnich by a continual motion is drawn into the
whole length A
a ; and the trapezium defcribed by that
motion, or its equal, the re&angle Aax\aB, will be
equal to the fum of all the MNx
CM, and therefore
to the fum of all the DdxDK, that is, to the area
BKrr*. Q.E.D.
Co*
Digitized by Google
Sea VI. of Natural Thiloftphy: 93
Cor. Heoce from the law of refiftance and the dif-
ference ^4 of the arcs Ca, CB may be colle&ed the
proportion of the refiftance to the gravity nearly.
For if the DK
be uniform, the figure
refinance
BKTa will be a Ba and
refiangle under and DK;
thence the rcftangle under \ Ba and a will be equal A
to the red angle under Ba and DK, and DA" will be
equal to * A
a. Wherefore fince DK
is the exponent of
the refiftance, and the length of the pendulum the ex-

ponent of the gravity, the refiftance will be to the
gravity as i A'a to the length of the pendulum ; alto-
gether as in Prop. 28. is demonftratcd.
If the refiftance be as the velocity, the figure BKTa
will be nearly an ellipfis. For if a body, in a non-
refifting medium, by one entire ofcillation, Ihould de-
fcribe the length BA, the velocity in any place D
would be as the ordinate D
E of the circle defcribed on
the diameter A
B. Therefore fince Ba in the refitting
medium, and BA
in the non-refifting one, are defcri-
bed nearly in the fame times ; and therefore the veloci-
ties in each of the points of B a, are to the velocities in
the correfpondent points of the length nearly as BaBA

is to BA
; the velocity in the point D
in the refitting
medium will be as the ordinate of the circle or ellipfis
defcribed upon the diameter Ba; and therefore th*
figure BKVTa will be nearly an ellipfis. Since the
refiftance is fuppofed proportional to the velocity, let
OV be the exponent 0/ the refiftance in the middle point
0; and an ellipfis BRVSa defcribed with the centre
0, and the femiaxes OB,Or will be nearly equal to
the figure BKVTa, and to its equal the reftangle
AaxB O. Therefore A a x B O is to 0 Fx B 0 as the
area of this ellipfis to OVx A
BO ; that is, a is to or
as the area of the femicircle to the fquare of the radius,
or as 11 to 7 nearly ; and therefore tt-**" is to }hc
length of the pendulum, as the refiftance of the ofcilla-
ting body in 0 to its gravity.
Digitized by Google
94
s
Mathematical Principles Book \\.
Now if the refinance D K be in the duplicate ratio

of the velocity, the figure BKPTa will be almoft a
Parabola having V
for its vertex and fox its axis, OF
and therefore will be nearly equal to the reftanglc un-
der f Ba and OP. Therefore the reftangle under
•J
Ba and A
a is equal to the re&angle f BaxOP">
and therefore 'is equal Of
to^^*; and therefore the
refiftance in 0 made to the ofcillating body is to its
gravity as -J
A a to the length of the pendulum.
And I take thefe conclufions to be accurate enough
for prafHca! ufcs. For fince an Ellipfis or Parabola
BR PS a falls in with the figure BKf^Ta in the mid-
dle point that figure, if greater towards the part
BRôy VSa, than the other, is hfs towards the con-
trary part, and is therefore nearly equal to it.
Proposition XXXL Theorem XXV*

If the refinance made to an ofcillating body in
each of the proportional parts of the arcs
defcribed be augmented or diminifhed in a
given ratio 5 the difference between the arc
defcribed in the defcent and the arc defcribed
in the fubfequent a/cent, will be augmented
or diminifhed in the fame ratio.
For that difference arifes from the retardation of

the pendulum by the refiftance of the medium, and
therefore is as the whole retardation, and the retarding
refiftance proportional thereto. In the foregoing Pro-
pofition the re&angle under the right line \ aB and
the difference A
a of the arcs CB 9 Ca was equal to
the area BKTa. And that area, if the length a B re-
mains, is augmented or diminifhed in the ratio of the
ordinates DK; that is, in the ratio of the refiftance,
and is therefore as tjie length a B and the refiftance con-
junftly*
zed by Google
Scd. VI, of Natural Tbilofophf.
junSIy. And therefore the re&angle under jia and
* a£ is as aB and the refinance conjundly, and there*
fore Aa 'iszs the refiftance. O- E. D.
Cor. i. Hence if the refiftance be as the velocity;
the difference cf the arcs in the fame medium will be
as the whole arc defcribed : and the contrary.
Cor. 2. If the refiftance be in the duplicate ratio
of the velocity, that difference will be in the duplicate
ratio of the whole arc : and the contrary.
Cor. j. And univerfally, if the refiftance be in the
triplicate or any other ratio of the velocity, the diffe-
rence will be in the fame ratio cf the whole arc : and
the contrary.
Cor.4. If the refiftance be partly in the fimple ra-
tio of the velocity, and partly in the duplicate ratio of
the fame, the difference will be partly in the ratio of
the whole arc, and partly in the duplicate ratio of it :
and the contrary. So that the law and ratio of the re-
fiftance will be the fame for the velocityt as the law
and ratio of that difference for the length of the arc.
Cor. 5. And therefore if a pendulum defcribc fuc-
ceffively unequal arcs, and we can find the ratio of the
increment or decrement of this difference for the length
of the arc defcribed ; there will be had alfo the ratio of
the increment or decrement of the refiftance for a
greater or lefs velocity.
General Scholium.
From thefe Propcfitions, we may find the refiftance
of mediums by pendulums ofcillacing therein. I found
the refiftance of the air by the following experiments. I
fufpended a wooden globe or ball weighing 57*, ounces
Averdupois, its diameter 6* London inches, by a fine
thread on a firm hook, fo that the diftance between
the hook and the centre of ofcillation of the globe was
io£ foot. I marked on the thread a point 10 foot and
Digitized by Google
9<S Mathematical Principles Book XL
i inch diftant from the centre of fufpenfion ; and even
with that point I placed a ruler divided into inches, by
the help whereof I obferved the lengths of the arcs
defcribed by the pendulum. Then I number'd the
ofcillations, inwhich the globe would lofe % part of
its motion.If the pendulum was drawn aiide from
the perpendicular to the diftance of z inches, an<J
thence let go, fo that in its whole defcent it defcribecj
an arc of two inches, and in thefirft whole ofcillation,
compounded of the defcent and fubfequent afcent, an
arc of almoft four inches: the fame in 164 ofcillations
loft i part of its motion, fo as in its lalt afcent to de-
fcribe an arcof 1 \ inches. If in the firft defcent ic
defcribed an arc of 4 inches ; it loft \ part of its mo-
tion in 121 ofcillations, fo as in its laft afcent to de-
fcribe an arc of 3^ inches. If in the firft defcent ic
defcribed an arc of 8,16,} 2, or £4 inches ; it loft £
part of its motion in 69, 35^, i8£, ?j ofcillations,
refpeftively. Therefore the difference between the
arcs defcribed in the fir ft defcent and the laft afcenr,
was in the i ft 2 d d th th ch cafe,

, 6 1,2,4, 8
, ,
, j 3 , 4
inches, refpeftively. Divide thofe differences by the
number of ofcillations in each cafe, and in one mean
ofcillation, wherein an arc of 3}, 7*, if, 30, tfo, no
inches was defcribed, the difference of the arcs de-
fcribed in the defcent and fubfequent afcent will be
5? k 5P 1? 5 *ms of m inch *
refP eaive, )r -
But thcfe differences in the greater ofcillations are in

the duplicate ratio of the arcs defcribed nearly, but in
leffer ofcillations fomething greater than in that ratio ;
and therefore (by Cor. 2. Prop. 31. of this Book) the
refiftance of the globe, when it moves very fwift, is
in the duplicate ratio of the velocity f nearly ; and
when it moves flowly, fomewhat greater than in that
ratio.
¥-ec
gitized by Google
Scft. VI. of Natural Thilofophy. 97
Now let V reprefent the greateft velocity in any of-
cillation, and let A, B, and C
be given quantities, and
let us fuppofe the difference of the arcs to be AV-4-
BV^j-CV Since the greateft velocities are in the

.
cycloid ± the arcs defcribed in ofcillating, and in the

as
circle as * the chords of thofe arcs ; and therefore in
equal arcs are greater in the cycloid than in the circle>
in the ratio of \ the arcs to their chords ; but the times
in the circle are greater than in the cycloid, in a reci-r
procal ratioof the velocity ; it is plain that the diffe-
rences of the arcs (which are as the refiftance and the
fquare of the time conjunctly) are nearly the fame, in
both curves : for in the cycloid thofe differences muft
be on the one hand augmented, with the refiftance, in
about the duplicate ratio of the arc to the chord, be-
caufe of thevelocity augmented in the fimple ratio of
the fame and on the other hand diminiftied, with the
;
fquare of the time, in the fame duplicate ratio. There-

fore to reduce thefe obfervations to the cycloid, we
muft take the fame differences of the arcs as were ob-
ferved in the circle, and fuppofe the greateft velocities
analogous to the half, or the whole arcs, that is, to the
numbers 7, 1, 1, 4, 8, io\ Therefore in the z d , 4 th ,
andtf ch cafe, put 1,4 and 16 for V
; and the difference
x
of the arcs in the i d cafe will become
121
= A-l-B 1
+Ci in the 4
th
cafe-^ = 4A -|- 8B 16C ; in
552
the tf* cafe —8 =10- A -(-648^- 2 5 6*0. Thefe equ*-'
tions reduced give A=o,oooooitf, B=o,ooio847>

and C = 0,0029558. Therefore the difference of
the arcs is as 0,0000915 V -\- 0,0010847 V* -|-

0,00295 8 Va :and therefore fince (by Cor. Prop. 30.
applied to this cafe; the refiftance of the globe in the
Vol. II. H middle
98 Mathematical Trinciples Book IL
roiddk of the arc defcribed in ofcillating, where the ve-
locity
#
is V, is to its weight as A AV+ *
0 B V*-|-
iCV* to the length of the pendulum; if for A, B,
and C the numbers found, the refiftance of
you put
the globe will be to its weight, as 0,0000585 V-!-
0,0007593V 2 -I- 0,0022169V*

to the length of the
pendulum between the of fufpenfion and the ru-
centre
ler, that is, to 1 2 1 inches. Therefore fince V in the
th
2 d cafe reprefents 1, in the 4 cafe 4, and in the 6 cafe
th
i6[: the refiftance will be to the weight of the globe,

d cafe as 0,0050345 to 121, in the th
in the 2 4 as
th
0,041748 to 121, in the 6 as 0,61705 to 121.
The arc which the point marked in the thread de-
g
fcribed in the 6 th cafe , was of 120 or 119/9
9f
inches. And therefore fince the radius was 121 inches,
and the length of the pendulum between the point of
fufpenfion and the centre of the globe was 126 inches,
the arc which the centre of the globe defcribed was
124 3A, inches. Becaufe the greatelt velocity of the of-
cillating body, by reafon of the refiftance of the air,
does not fall on the loweft point of the arc defcribed,
but near the middle place of the whole arc : this velo-
if the globe in its whole
city will be nearly the fame as
dekent in a non-refifting medium Ihould defcribe
61 * inches the half of that arc, and that in a cycloid,
to which we have above reduced the motion of the
pendulum : and therefore that velocity will be equal
to that which the globe would acquire by falling per-
pendicularly from a height equal to the verfed nne of
that arc. But that verfed fine in the cycloid is to that
arc 61 &
as the fame arc to twice the length of the
pendulum 252, and therefore equal to ^278 inches.
Therefore the velocity of the pendulum is the fame
which a body would acquire by falling, and in its fall
dc-
Digitized by Google
Sett. VI. of Natural ThHofophf. 99
defcribing a fpacc of 15,278 inches. Therefore with
fuch a velocity the globe meets With a refiftance, which
is to its weight as 0,61705 to ill, or (if we take
that part only of the refinance which is in the dupli-
cate ratio of the velocity) as 0,56752 to 121.
I found by an hydroftatical experiment* that the
weight of this wooden globe was to the weight of a
globe of water of the fame magnitude as 55 to 5)7 2 and
therefore fince 121 is to 213,4 * n the fame ratio, the
refiftance made to this globe of water moving forwards
with the abovementioned velocity, will be to its weight
3*0,56752 to 213,4, thatis, as 1 toij6 \. Whence
s
fince the weight of

globe of water, in the time in
a
which the globe with a velocity uniformly continued
defcribes a length of 30,556 inches, will generate all
that velocity in the falling globe ; it is manifeft that
the force of refiftance uniformly continued in the fame
time will take away a velocity, which will be lefs than
the other in the ratio of 1 to $76 fa that is, the
—^-j- part of the whole velocity. And therefore in the
time that the globe,with the fame velocity uniformly con-

tinued, would defcribe the length of its femi-diameter*
or 3 jJ6 inches, it would lofe the nVl Part °' ics m°-
I alfo counted the ofcillations in which the pendulum
loft
J part of its motion. In the following table the
upper numbers denote the length of the arc defcribed ill
the firft defcent, expreffed in inches and ports of an
inch ; the middle numbers denote the length of the
arc defcribed in the laft afcent ; and in the loweft place
are the numbers of the ofcillations. I give an account
of this experiment, as being more accurate than that in
which only f part of the motion was loft. I leave the
calculation to fuch as are difpofed to make it.
Digitized
ioo Mathematical Principles Book II.
Firft defcent
•
z 4 8. 16 31 64
Laftafcent if 3 12 24 48
N*mh.ofofiiU.m 272 83f 41* zif
I afterwards fu(pended a leaden globe of 2 inches in
diameter, weighing 16 \ ounces Averdupois by the fame
thread, fo that between the centre of the globe and the
point of fufpenfion there was an interval of 10 £ feet,
and I counted the ofcillations in which a given part of
the motion was loft. The firft of the following tables
exhibits the number of ofcillations in which $ part of
the whole motion was loft ; the fecond the number of
ofcillations in which there was loft % part of the fame.
Firfl defcent 1 2 4 8 1 6* 32, 6*4
Lafl afient * i %l 7 H 28 5*
Numb.ofofciH. iz6 228 103 140 oq£ j-j 30
Firft defcent I 2 4 8 16 32 64
Laftafcent * ij 3 24 48 12
NHmb.ofofeilL 510 518 420 318 204 121 70
Sele&ing in the firft table the 3 d , and 7 th
obfervation, and exprefling the greateft velocities in
thefe obfervations particularly by the numbers 1, 4, 1 6
refpeftivdy, and generally by the quantity as above V
there will come out in the 3 d obfervation — =A -I-
B-f-C, in the 5
th
obfervation — - =4A -|- 8B-f-
16 C, in the 7 h obfervation —8 = i$A -|- fyB 4-

1 56 C. Thefe equations reduced give 0,00 14 14, A=
B— 0,000207, 0 =
0,000879. And thence the re-
fiftance of the globe moving with the velocity V will
be to its weight zC\ ounces, in the fame ratio as
0,9000V + 0,000208V* -J- 0,000659V to 121

inches
Digitized by Google
V
Sea. VI. of Natural Thilofophy. i oi

inches the length of the pendulum. And if we regard
that part only of the refiftance which is in the duplicate
ratio of the velocity, it will be to the weight of the
globe as 0,000659 x to 121 inches. But this part
of the refiftance in the i a experiment was to the weight
of the wooden globe of 57/3 ounces as 0,002217V*
to 121; and thence the refiftance of the wooden globe
is to the refiftance of the leaden one (their velocities
being equal) as 57 a2a into 0,002217 to i6\ into

0,000659, that is, as 77 to 1. The diameters of
the two globes were 6 § and 2 inches, and the fquares
of thefe 47 £ and 4, or 1 iff and
are to each other as
j, nearly. Therefore the reliftances of thefe equally
fwift globes were in lefs than a duplicate ratio of the
diameters. But we have not yet confider'd the re-
fiftance of the thread, which was certainly very con-
fiderable, and ought to be fubdufted from the remittance
of the pendulums here found, I could not determine
this accurately, but I found it greater than a third part
of the whole refiftance of the Ieffer pendulum ; and
thence I gathered that the refiftances of the globes,
when the refiftance of the thread is fubdu&ed, are
nearly in the duplicate ratio of their diameters. For
theratioof y\ —
f to 1
—
j, or to \ to 1 is not very
different from the duplicate ratio of the diameters, nf £
to 1.
Since the refiftance of the thread is of lefs moment
in greater globes, I tried the experiment alfo with a
globe whofe diameter was 18^ inches. The length of
the pendulum between the point of fufpenfion and the
centre of ofcillation was 122 £ inches, and between the
point of fufpenfion and the knot in the thread 109 i
inches. The arc defcribed by the knot at the firft de-
fcent of the pendulum was 52 inches. The arc de-
fcribed by the fame knot in the laft afcent after five
ofcillations was 28 inches. The fum of the arcs or the
whole arc defcribed in one mean ofcillation was 60
Digitized by Google
loz Mathematical Principles Book It
inehes. The difference of the arcs 4 inches. The
f9 part of this, or the difference between the defcent
and afcent in one mean ofcillation is f of an inch. Then
as the radius iop } to the radius 1 zz { lb is the whole
arc of 60 inches defcribed by the knot in one mean of-

cillation to the whole arc of 6j £ inches defcribed by
the centre of the globe in one mean ofcillation ; and fo
is the difference f to a new difference 0,4475. If the
length of the arc defcribed w.ere to remain, and the
lengrh of the pendulum (hould be augmented in the ra-
tio of iz6 to nz*i the time of the ofcillation would
be augmented, and the velocity of the pendulum would
be diminifhed in the fubduplicate of that ratio ; fo that
the difference 0,4475 of the arcs defcribed in the de-
fcent and fubfequent afcent would remain. Then if
the arc defcribed be augmented in the ratio of n^fi
to (£7$, that difference 0,4475 would be augmented
in the duplicate of that ratio, and fo would become
1,5105. Tbefe things would be fo upon the fuppofi-
tfion, that the reliftance of the pendulum were in the
duplicate ratio of the velocity. Therefore if the pen-

dulum defcribe the whole arc of 124*, inches, and its
length between the point of fufpenfion and the centre of
ofcillation be 12 inches, the difference of the arcs de-
fcribed in the defcent and fubfequent afcent would be
i>52p5 inches. And this difference multiplied into the
weight of the pendulous globe, which was 208 ounces*
produces 518,136*. Again in the pendulum above-
mentioned* made of a wooden globe, when its centre of
ofcillation, being 116 inches from the point of fuf-
penfion, defcribed the whole arc of 1145*1 inches, the
difference of the arcs defcribed in the defcent and af*
cent was
126*
— 8
into — . This multiplied into the weight
©f the globe, which was 57 *4 ounces, produces 4$, $96*.
But I multiply thefe differences into the weights of
the globes, in order to find their rcfiftances. For the
Digitized by Google
Sea. VI. of Natural Thilofophy] i o*
differences arife from the reiiftances, and are as the re-
fiftances dire&ly and the weights inverfely. Therefore
the refiftances are as the numbers
18,136 and 49,396.
5
But that part of the refiftance of the lefler globe, which
is in the duplicate ratio of the velocity, was to the
whole refiftance as 0,56752 to 0,61675, that is, as
4f»455 to 49>35>^> whereas that part of the refiftance
of the greater globe is almoft equal to its whole refif-
tance; and fo thofe parts are nearly as 318,156 and
45,45 3, that is, as 7 and 1. But the diameters of the
globes are i8£ and 6| ; and their fquares 351^ and
47^ areas 7,438 and 1, that is, as the refinances- of

the globes 7 and 1, nearly. The difference of thefe
ratio's is fcarce greater than may arife from the re-
fiftance of the thread. Therefore thofe parts of the

rcfiftances which are, when the globes are equal, as the
fquares of the velocities ; are alio, when the velocities
are equal, as the fquares of the diameters of the globes*
But the greateft of the globes, I ufed in thefe ex-

periments, was not perfe&ly fphaerical, and therefore in
this calculation I have, for brevity's fake, neglefted
fome little being not very follicitous for an
niceties ;
accurate calculus, in an experiment that was not very

accurate. So that I could wifli, that thefe experiments
were tried again with other globes, of a larger fize>
more in number, and more accurately formed ; fince
the demonftration of a vacuum depends thereon. If
the globes be taken in a geometrical proportion, as fup-
pofewhofe diameters are 4, 8, 16, 3 z inches; one may
colled:from the progreflion obferved in the experiments
what would happen if the globes were ftill larger.
In order to compare the refiftances of different fluids
with each other, I made the following trials. I pro*
cured a wooden veffel 4 feet long, 1 foot broad, and
1 foot high. This veffel, being uncover'd, I filTd
with fpnng- water, and having immerfed pendulums
therein* I made them ofcillate in the water. And I
104 Mathematical Principles BookU.
found that a leaden globe weighing 166 % ounces, and
in diameter 3* inches, moved therein as it is fee
down in the following table ; the length of the pen-
dulum from the point of fufpenfion to a certain point
marked in the thread being 116 inches, and to the
centre of ofcillation 134I inches.
The arc defiribed in

the firft defient bji
a point marked in>6\ . 32, . 16. 8 . 4 . Z . I .. 7 .
£
the thread, was'
inches
The arc defiribed in
the lafl afeent, wasâfi • 24 • 1 * .<?•;• i»
inches
The difference of the
arcs proportional tof r< Q A ^ r x , x
the mot ton loft, was\
1
inches
The number of the
0fc illations in wa-<f f£-if-J*7«n+- I2'f* I 53
ter
n* number ,f tbe^
; g
' '
ofctllattons tn atr. \
In the experiments of the 4 th column, there were

equal motions loft in 535 ofcillations made in, the air,
and if in water. The ofcillations in the air were in-
deed a little fwifter than thofe in the water. But if
the ofcillations in the water were accelerated in fuch a
ratio that the motions of the pendulums might be equal-
ly fwifc in both mediums, there would be ftilLthe fame
number if of ofcillations in the water, and by thefe
the fame quantity of motion would be loft as before ;
becaufe the refiftance is increafed and the fquare of the
time diminifhed in the fame duplicate ratio. The pen-
dulums therefore being of equal velocities, there were
Digitized by Google
Scd. VI. of Natural Thilofophy. i 0f
equal motions loft in 535 ofcillations in the air, and if
in the water ; and therefore the refiftance of the pendu-
lum in the water is to its refiftance in the air as 535 to
if. This is the proportion of the whole refiftances in
the cafe of the 4 th column.
Now let AV~|-C V 2 reprefent the difference of the
arcs defcribed in the defcent and fubfequent afcent by
the globe moving in air with the greateft velocity V ;
and fince the greateft velocity is in the cafe of the th

4
column to the greateft velocity in the cafe of the i ft
column as 1 to 8 ; and that difference of the arcs in the
th
cafe of the
4 column to the difference in the cafe of
the i
ft
column, as 10 or as t0 4 2 ô :
gjl'
put in thefe cafes and 8 for the velocities, and 85*
1
and 4280 for the differences of the arcs, and A4-G

will be=z85|, and iA-\-6^C =4280 or A-|-8C
= 535 ; and then, by reducing thefe equations, there
will come out 7C == 449* and 64^ and =* C= A
21 f : and therefore the refiftance, which is as A AV
-|-AC-V*. Willbecomeas 13 AV-|-4«&V\; There-
fore in the cafe of the 4 th column, where the velocity
was 1, tht wh6le*efiftance is to its part proportional to
the fquare of the velocity, as 13 £ -I-485V or tfif
f
to 48^,* and therefore the refiftance of the pendulum in
water is to that part of the refiftance in air, which js pro-
portional to the fquare of the velocity, and which in fwifc
motions is the only part that deferves confideration, as
^ iff to 48 5^ and 535 to tj conjun&ly, that is, as 571
to 1. If the whole thread of the pendulum ofcillating in
the water had been immerfed, its refiftance would have
been ftill greater ; fo that the refiftance of the pendu-
lum ofcillating in the water, that is, that part which is
proportional to the fquare of the velocity, 'and which
only needs to be confider'd in fwift bodies, is to the
refiftance of the fame whole pendulum, ofcillating in air
with
1*6 Mathematical Principles Book IL
with the fame velocity, as about 8jo to I, that is, as
thedenfity of water to thedenfity of air, nearly.
In this calculation, we ought alfo to have taken in
that part of the refiftance of the pendulum in the wa-
ter, which was as the fquare of the velocity, but I
found (which will perhaps feem ftrange) that the re-
fiftance in the water was augmented in more than a du-
plicate ratio of the velocity. In fearching after the
caufe, I thought upon this, that the vefTel was too nar-
row for the magnitude ofcthe pendulous globe, and by
its narrownefs obftrufted the motion of the water as it
yielded to the ofcillating globe. For when I immerfed
o pendulous globe* whofe diameter was one inch only ;
the refiftance was augmented nearly in a duplicate ratio
of the velocity. I tried this by making a pendulum
of two globes, of which the leffer and lower ofcillated
in the water, and the greater and higher was faftened to
the thread juft above the water, and by ofcillating in
the air, affifted the motion of the pendulum, and con*
tinued it longer. The experiments made by this con-
trivance proved according to the following table.
jtrc defer* infirft defcent 16.8.4.2.1.^. \

jirc defer. in loft afient II • 6» J • if * % •
f •
&
arcs, proport.l
Pjf. of , x x #
M
to mot. £4 • * • * • 5 • * • • l *
loft
Number ofofcillaiions j| . 6\ .1 1% • 2 1 • 34 • J 3 ' 6l i
In comparing the of the mediums with

refiftanccs
each other, I pendulums to ofcillate in
alfo caufed iron
quickfilver. The length of the iron wire was about
3 feet, and the diameter of the pendulous globe about
f of an inch. To the wire, juft above the quickfilver,
there was fixed another leaden globe of a bignefs fuflS-
cient to continue the motbn of the pendulum fot fomc
time. Then a vefTel, that would hold about 3 pounds
qf quickfilver, was filled by turns with quickfilver and
common
z
zed by Google
Sett. VI. of Natural Thtlofophj. 107
common water, that by making the pendulum ofcil-
late fucceflively in thefe two different fluids, I might
find the proportion of their refiftances : and the refif-
tance of the quickfilver proved to be to the refiftance
of water as about 13 or 14 to 1 ; that is, as the den-
fity of quickfilver to the denfitv of water. When I
made ufe of a pendulous globe fomething bigger, as of
one whofe diameter was about \ or f of an inch, the refif-
tance of the quickfilver proved to be to the refiftance
of the water as about 11 or 10 to 1. But the former
experiment is more to be relied on, becaufe in the latter
the veflel was too narrow in proportion to the magni-
tude of the immerfed globe : For the veflel ought to
have been enlarged together with the globe. I intend*
ed to have repeated thefe experiments with larger veflels*
and in melted metah, and other liquors both cold and
hot : but I had not leifure to try all ; and befides, front
what is already defcribed, it appears fufEciently that the
refiftance of bodies moving fwiftly is nearly proportional
to the denfities of the fluids in which they move. I
don't fay accurately. For more tenacious fluids, of
equal denfity, will undoubtedly refift more than thofe
that are more liquid, as cold oil more than warm, warm
oil more than rain-water, and water more than fpirit of
wine. But in liquors, which are fenfibly fluid enough,

as in air, in fait and frefli water, in fpirit of wine, of
tufpentine and falts, in oil cleared of its faeces by diftil-

lation and warmed, in oil of vitriol and in mercury, and
melted metals, and any other fuch like, that are fluid
enough to retain for fome time the motion imprefled
upon them by the agitation of the veflel, and which
being poured outareeafily refolv'd into drops : I doubt
not but the rule already laid down may be accurate
enough, efpecially if the experiments be made with lar-
ger pendulous bodies, and more fwiftly moved.
Laftly, fince it is the opinion of fome, that there is
% certain ethereal medium extremely rare and fubtile,
which
»- _
Digitized
i o3 Mathematical Principles Book II.
which freely pervades the pores of all bodies ; and from
fuch a medium fo pervading the pores of bodies, fome !
refiftancemuft needs arife: in order to try whether the

refiftance, which we experience in bodies in motion,
be made upon their outward iuperficies only, or whe-
ther their internal parts meet with any confiderable re-
fiftance upon their fuperficies ; I thought of the fol-
lowing experiment. I fufpended a round deal box by
a thread 1 1 feet long, on a fteel hook by means of a
ring of the fame metal, fo as to make a pendulum of the
aforefaid length. The hook had a (harp hollow edge
on its upper part, fo that the upper arc of the ring
prefling on the edge might move tne more freely : and
the thread was fattened to the lower arc of the ring.
The pendulum being thus prepared, I drew it afide
from the perpendicular to the diftance of about 6 feet,
and that in a plane perpendicular to the edge of the hook,
left the ring, while the pendulum ofcillated, (hould
Hide to and fro on the edge of the hook : For the point
of fufpenfion, in which the ring touches the hook,
ought to remain immoveable. I therefore accurately
noted the place, to which the pendulum was brought,
and letting it go, I marked three other places, to which
it returned at the end of the i ft , z\ and d ofcillation.
3
This might find thofe places as
I often repeated, that I
accurately as poflible. ThenI failed the box with lead
and other heavy metals, that were near at hand. But
firft I weighed the box when empty, and that part of
the thread that went round it, and half the remaining
part extended between the hook and the fufpended box.
For the thread fo extended always a&s upon the pen-
dulum, when drawn afide from the perpendicular, with
half its weight. To this weighc I added the weight of
the air contained in the box. And this whole weight
was about 7\ of the weight of the box when filled with
the metals. Then becaufe the box when full of the
metals, by extending the thread with its weight, in-
z creafed
zed by Google
Sea. VI. of Natural Thilofophy. 109
creafed the length of the pendulum, I Ihortened the
thread fo as to make the length of the pendulum, when
ofcillating, the fame as before. Then drawing afide the
pendulum to the place firft marked, and letting it go,
I reckoned about 77 ofcillations, before the box re-
turned to the fecond mark, and as many afterwards be-
fore it came to the third mark, and as many after that,
before it came to the fourth mark. From whence I
conclude that the whole refiftance of the box, when
full, had not a greater proportion to the refiftance of
the box, when empty, than 78 to 77. For if their re-
flftances were equal, the box, when full, by reafon of
its vis wfita, which was 78 times greater than the vis
infita of the fame when empty, ought to have conti-

nued its ofcillating motion fo much the longer, and
therefore to have returned to thofe marks at the end of
78 ofcillations. But it returned to them at the end of
77 ofcillations.
Let therefore A reprefent the refiftance of the box
upon its external fuperficies, and B the of the
refiftance
empty box on its internal fuperficies j and if the re-
of bodies equally fwift be
fiftances to the internal parts
as the matter, or the number of particles that are re-
fitted : then 78B will be the refiftance made to the in-

ternal parts of the box, when full ; and therefore the
whole refiftance A-|-B of the empty box will be to
the whole refiftance A -I-78B of the full box as 77 to
78, and, by divifion, A -|- B to 77B, as 77 to i, and
thence A-|-B B as 77x77 to 1, and, by divifion
to
again, A to B $928 to 1. Therefore the refiftance
as
of the empty box in its internal parts will be above
5000 times lefs than the refiftance on its external fuper-
ficies. This reafoning depends upon the fuppofition
that the greater refiftance of the full box arifes, not from
any other latent caufe, but only from the aftion of
fome fubtile fluid upon the included metal.
This
Digitized by Google
1 1 o Mathematical Trincipks Book II.
-
This experiment is related by memory, the paper

'
being loft, in which I had defcribed it ; fo that I have
been obliged to omit fome fractional parts, which are
*
flipt out of my memory. And I have no leifure to

try it again. The firft time 1 made it, the hook
being weak, the full box was retarded fooner. The
caufe I found to be, that the hook was not ftrong enough
to bear the weight of the box ; fo that as it ofcillated
to and fro, the hook was bent fometimes this and fome-
times that way. I therefore procured a hook of fuffi-
cient ftrength, fo that the point of fuipenfion might
remain unmoved, and then all things happened as is
above defcribed.
SEC-
Digitized by Google
Se<2.VII. of Natural Thilofophyl
SECTION VII.
Of the motion of fluids and the reftf*
tame made to projeBed bodies.
Proposition XXXII. Theorem XXVI.

Suppofe two Jimilar fyftems of bodies confifting
of an equal number of particles, and let the
correfpondent particles be Jimilar and propor-
tional, each in one fyftem to each in the other%
and have a like fit nation among them/elves,
and the fame given ratio of denfity to each
other 5 and let them begin to move among
themfelves in proportional times, and with
like motions, {that is, thofe in one fyftem
among one another, and thofe in the other
among one another.) And if the particles
that are in the fame fyftem do not touch one
another, except in the moments of reflexion ;
nor attraft, nor repel each other, except with
accelerative forces that are as the diameters
of the correfpondent particles mverfely, and
the fquares of the velocities direttly : I fay,
that the particles of thofe fyftems will con-
tinue to move among themfelves with like
motions and in proportional times.
Like bodies in like fituations are faid to be moved
among themfelves with like motions and in proportional
times*
Digitized by Google
ii2 Mathematical Principles Book II.
times> when end of thofe times

their fituations at the
are always found alike in refpeft of each other: as fup-
pofe wc compare the particles in one fyftem with the
correfpondent particles in the other. Hence the times
will be proportional, in which fimilar and proportional
parts of fimilar figures will be defcribed by correfpon-
dent particles. Therefore if we fuppofe two fyftems
of this kind, the correfpondent particles, by reafon of
the fimilitude of the motions at their beginning, will
continue to be moved with like motions, fo long as
they move without meeting one another. For if they
are afted on by no forces, they will go on uniformly in
right lines by the i law.
ft
But if they do agitate one
another, with fome certain forces, and thofe forces are
as the diameters of the correfpondent particles inverfely
and the fquares of the velocities diredly ; then becaufe
the particles are in like fituations, and their forces are
proportional, the whole forces with which correfpon-
dent particles are agitated, and which are compounded
of each of the agitating forces, (by Corol. 2. of the
Laws) will have like direftions, and have the fame ef-
fe<S as if they refpefted centres placed alike among the
particles; and thofe whole forces will be to each other
as the feveral forceswhich compofe them, that is, as
the diameters of the correfpondent particles inverfely,
and the fquares of the velocities direftly : and there-
fore will caufe correfpondent particles to continue to de-
fcribe like figures. Thefe things will be fo (by Cor. 1
and 8. Prop. 4. Book I.) if thofe centres are at reft.
But if they are moved, yet by reafon of the fimilitude
of the tranflations, their fituations among the particles
of the fyftem will remain fimilar ; fo that the changes
introduced into the figures defcribed by the particles will
ftill be fimilar. So that the motions of correfpondent
and fimilar particles will continue fimilar till their firft
meeting with fcach other ; and thence will arifc fimilar
colliiions, and fimilar reflexions \ which will again beget
fimilar
Digitized by Google
Cor. i. Hence if any two bodies, which are fimi-
lar and in like fituations to the correspondent particles
of the fyftems, begin to move amongft them in like
manner and in proportional times, and their magnitudes
and denfities be to each other as the magnitudes and
denfities of the correfponding particles : thefe bodies
will continue to be moved in like manner and in pro-
portional times. For the cafe of the greater parts of
both fyftems and of the particles is the very fame.
Cor. 2. And if all the fimilar and fimilarly fituated
parts of both fyftems be at reft among themfelves : and
two of them, which are greater than the reft, and mu-
tually correfpondent in both fyftems, b°gin to move in
lines alike pofited, with any fimilar motion whatfoever;
they will excite fimilar motions in the reft of the parts
of the fyftems, and will continue to move among thofe
parts in like manner and in proportional times ; and will
therefore defcribe fpaces proportional to their diame-
ters.
Proposition XXXIII. Theorem XX VH.'

The fame things being fuppofed, I fay that the
their velocities, and the duplicate ratio of their

diameters, and the Jimple ratio of the denfity
of the parts of the fyftems.
For the from the centripetal or

refiftance arifes partly
centrifugal forces with which the
particles of the fyftem
mutually aft on each other, pattly from the collifions
and reflexions of the particles and the greater parts*
Yoh. II. i 7H
Digitized by Google
ii4 Mathematical Principles Book II.
The refiftances of the firft kind are to each other as
the whole motive forces from which they arife, that is,
as the whole accelerative forces and the quantities of
matter in correfponding parts ; that is, (by the fuppo-
fition) the fquares of the velocities
as direftly, and the
diftances of the correfponding particles inverfely, and
the quantities of matter in the correfpondent parts di—
reflly : and therefore fince the diftances of the particles
in one fyftem are to the correfpondent diftances of the
particles of the other, as the diameter of one panicle or
part in the former fyftem to the diameter of the cor-
refpondent particle or part in the other, and fince the
quantities of matter are as the denfities of the parts and
the cubes of the diameters ; the refiftances are to each
other as the fquares of the velocities and the fquares of
the diameters and the denfities of the parts of the fy-
ftems. Q. E. D. The refiftances of the latter fort are
as the number of correfpondent reflexions and the forces
of thofe reflexions con/un&ly. But the number of the
reflexions are to each other as the velocities of the cor-
responding parts dire&ly and the fpaces between their
reflexions inverfely. And the forces of the reflexions
are as the velocities and the magnitudes and the denfi-
ties of the correfponding parts conjun&ly j that is, as
the velocities and the cubes of the diameters and the
denfities of the parts. And joining all thefe ratio's,
the refiftances of the correfponding parts are to each
other as the fquares of the velocities and the fquares of
the diameters and the denfities of the parts coniundUy.
Q.E.D.
Cor. i. Therefore if thofe fyftems are two elaftic
fluids, like our air, and their parts are at reft among
themfelves ; and two fimilar bodies proportional in mag-
nitude and denfity to the parts of the fluids and firai-
larly fituated amon^ thofe parts, be any how proje&ed
in the direction of lines fi mi larly pofited ; ana the ac-
celerative forces with which the particles of the fluids
mutually
Digitized by Google
Sed. VII. of Natural Thilofoph/. .
nj
mutually aft upon each other, are as the diameters of
the bodies projcfted inverfely and the fquares of
their
velociries direftly : thofe bodies will excite fimilar mo-
tions in the fluids in ppportional times, and will
de*
fcribe fimilar fpacesand^proportional to their diameters*
Cor. 2. Therefore in the fame fluid a projefted bo-
dy moves fwiftly meets with a refiftance that is
that
in the duplicate ratio of its velocity, nearly.
For if
the forces, with which diftant particles aft mutually
up-
on one another, Ihould be augmented in the duplicate
ratio of the velocity, the projeded body
would be re-
filled in the fame duplicate ratio accurately ; and there-
fore in a medium, whofe parts when at a diftance do
not aft mutually with any force on one another,
the
refiftance is in the duplicate ratio of the velocity
accu-
rately. Let there be therefore three mediums A, B, C
9
conhfting of fimilar and equal parts regularly difpofed
at
and
equal diftances.
B
Let the parts of the mediums
recede from each other with forces that are among
A
themfelves as rand V\ and let the parts of the medium
C be entirely deftitute of any fuch forces. And if four
equal bodies D
y £, F, G
move in thefe mediums, the
two firft D
and E
in the two firft A
and B, and the
other two F
and G
in the third C; and if the velocity
of the body D
be to the velocity of the body and E 9
the velocity of the body F to the velocity of the body
G in tfie fubduplicate ratio of the force T to the force
V: the refiftance of th^body D to the refiftance of the
body £, and the refiftance of the body F to the refif*
tance of the body G will be in the duplicate ratio
of the
velocities ; and therefore the refiftance of the body D
will be to the refiftance of the body as the refiftance
of the body £ to the refiftance of the body G. Let
the bodies D and F be equally fwift, as alfo the bodies
E and G; and augmenting the velocities of the bodies
D and Fin any and diminifhing the forces of the
ratio,
7ides of the medium B in the duplicate of the fame
m
I z
Digitized by Google
1 1 5 Mathematical Principles Book II.
ratio, the medium B will approach to the form and

condition of the medium C at pleafure ; and therefore
the refiftances of the equal and equally fwift bodies E
and G in thefe mediums will perpetually approach to
equality, fo that their difFefienc^ will at laft become
lefs than any given. Therefore'lilkre the refiftances of
the bodies D
and F are to each other as the refiftances
of the bodies E and G, thofe will alfo in like manner
approach to the ratio of equality. Therefore the bodies
D and i 7
, when they move with very great fwiftnefs,
meet with refiftances very nearly equal ; and therefore
fince the refiftance of the body F is in a duplicate ratio
of the velocity, the refiftance of the body D will be
nearly in the fame ratio.
Cor. The refiftance of a body moving very fwifc
in an elaftic fluid is almoft the fame as if the parts
of the were deftitute of their centrifugal forces,
fluid
and did not fly from each other if Co be that the elas-
:
ticity of the fluid arife from the centrifugal forces of

the particles, and the velocity be fo great as not to al-
low the particles time enough to ad.
Cor. 4. Therefore fince the refiftances of fimtlar
and equally fwift bodies, in a medium whofe diftant
ports do not fly from each other, are as the fquares of
the diameters ; the refiftances made to bodies moving
with very great and equal velocities in an elaftic fluid,
will be as the fquares of the diameters, nearly.
Cor. y. And and equally fwift
fince fimilar, equal,
bodies, moving thro* mediums of the fame aenfity,
whofe particles do not fly from each other mutually,
will ttrike againft an equal quantity of matter in equal
times, whether the particles of which the medium con-
fifts be more and fmaller, or fewer and greater, and
therefore imprefs on that matter an equal quantity of

motion, and in return (by the } d law of motion) fuf-
fer an equal re-aftion from the fame, that is, are equal-
ly refilled : it is raanifeft ajfo, that in elaftic fluids of
Digitized by Google
Scd. VII. of Natural Thilofophy. 117
the fame denfity, the bodies move with extreme
when
fwiftnefs, their refiftances are nearly equal ; whether
the fluids confift of grofs parts, or of parts never fo
fubtile. For the refinance of pro je&iles moving with

exceeding great celerities, is not much dinninifhed by
the fubtilty of the medium.
Cor. 6. All thefe things are fo in fluids, whofe
elaftic force takes its rile from the centrifugal forces of
the particles. But if that force arife from fome other
caufe, as from the expanfion of the particles after the
manner of wool, or the boughs of trees, or any other
caufe, by which the particles are hindered from moving
freely among themfelves ; the refiftance, by reafon of
the lefler fluidity of the medium, will be greater than
in the corollaries above. »
Proposition XXXI V.TheoremXXVUL

If in a rare medium, confijling of equal particles
freely difpofed at equal diflances from each
other, a globe and a cylinder defcribed on
equal diameters move with equal veloci-
ties, in the direction of the axis of the cy-
linder: the refiftance of the globe will be but
half fo great as that of the cylinder.
For fince the action of the medium upon the body

is the fame (by Cor. 5. of the laws) whether the bo-
dy move in a quiefcent medium, or whether the par-
ticles of the medium impinge with the fame velocity
upon the quiefcent body : let us confider the body as
it it were quiefcent, and with what force it would
fee
be impelled by the moving medium. Let therefore
ABKI (PL 6. Fig. 2.) reprefent a fphxrical body de*
fcribed from the centre C with the femidiameter C/»
and let the particles of the medium impinge with a gi-
1 3 y«
Digitized by Google
i 1 8 Mathematical Trinciples Book II.
vcn velocity upon that fphxrical body, in the dire&ions

of right lines parallel to AC', and let FB
be one of
thofe right lines. In FB take LB equal to the femi-
diameter CB* and draw BD touching the fphere in B.
JJpon KC and BD let fall the perpendiculars BE, LD3
and the force with which a particle of the medium, im-
pinging on the globe obliquely in the dire&ion FB,
would ftrike the globe in B, will be to the force with
which the fame particle, meeting the cylinder ONG O
defcribed about the globe with the axis ACT, wouicT
ftrike it perpendicularly \xib, as to LB or BE tQ LD
B C. Again, the efficacy of this force to move the
globe according to the direftion of its incidence FB
or AC, is to the efficacy of the fame to move the
globe according to the direction of its determina-
tion, that is, in the direftion of the right line BC in
which it impels the globe direftly, as BE to BC.
And joining thefe ratio's the efficacy of a particle,
falling upon the globe obliquely in the direction of
the right line FB, to move the globe in the direSion
of its is to the efficacy of the fame particle
incidence,
fame line perpendicularly on the cylinder,
falling in the
tomoveit in the fame diredion,as BE toBC\ There- 7,
fore if in bE, which is perpendicular to the circular

bafe of the cylinder NAO, and equal to the radius
BE
AC, we take bH equal to ——
CB
2
then bH will be to
b E as the effeft of the particle upon the globe to the

effedt of the particle upon the cylinder. And there-
fore thefolid which is formed by all the right lines bJEf
will be to the folid formed by all the right lines bE as

the efFeft of all the particles upon the globe to the ef-
feft of all the particles upon the cylinder. But the
former of thefe folids is a paraboloid whofe vertex is
Cm its axis CA and latus reftum CA; and the lat-
ter folid is a cylinder circumfcribing the paraboloid t
and
Digitized by Google
Sc&. VII. of Natural Thilofophf. 1 1 >
and it is known that a paraboloid is half its circum-
feribed cylinder. Therefore the whole force of the
medium upon the globe is half of the entire force of
the fame upon the cylinder. And therefore if the par-
ticlesof the medium are at reft, and the cylinder and
globe move with equal velocities, the refiftance of the
globe will be half the refiftance of the cylinder. O. E. D.
Scholium.
By the fame method other figures may be compared to-
gether as to their refiftance; and thofe may be found
which aremoft apt to continue their motions in refifting
mediums. As if upon the circular bafe {Pi 6. CEBH
Fig. j.) from the centre O, with the radius 9 and OC
the altitude OD, one would conftrufl: a fruftum CB G B
of a cone, which fhould meet with lefs refiftance than
any other fruftum conftrufted with the fame bafe and
altitude, and going forwards towards in thedireftion D
of its axis : bifeft the altitude OD
in 0, and produce
£
O to fo that <2S may be equal to <2 C, and S will
be the vertex of the cone whofe fruftum is fought.
Whence by the bye, fince the angle CSB is always
acute, it follows, that if the folid AD B E (PL 6. Fig. 4.)
be generated by the convolution of an elliptical or oval
figure AD B E about its axe AB> and the generating
figure be touched by three right lines in FG, GH> HI
the points F, B, and /, fo that GH
be perpendi- (hall
cular to the axe in the point of con tad B> and FG, HI
may he inclined to GH in the angles FGB, BHI of
1 j 5 degrees ; the folid arifing from the convolution of
the figure AD FG HIE about the fame axe AS, will
be le(s refifted than the former folid; if fo be that both
move forward in the direftion of their axe B> and A
that the extremity B of each go foremoft. Which
propofition I conceive may be ot ufc in the building of
fhips.
i 4
Digitized by Google
120 Mathematical "Principles Book II.
If the figure DNF
G be fuch a curve, that if from any
point thereof as N
the perpendicular NMbe
let fall on
the axe AB, and from the given point G
there be drawn
the right line GR parallel to a right line touching the
figure in N, and
cutting the axe produced in R, Ad JV
becomes to GR
as G 3
to + BR x G % ; the folid de-
scribed by the revolution of this figure about its axe
AB) moving in thebeforementioned rare medium from
A towards B, will be lefs refilled than any other circular
folid whatfoever,defcribedof the fame length and breadth.
The demon/!ration of tbefe curious Theorems being omitted by the
author y the analyfis thereof communicated by a friend, is
added at the end if this volume.
Proposition XXXV. Problem VIL

If a rare medium confijl of 'very fmall quiefcent
particles of equal magnitudes and freely dif-
pofed at equal diftances from one another : to
find the refifiance of a globe moving uniform-
ly forwards in this medium.
Case t. Let a cylinder defcribed with the lame di-

ameter and altitude be conceived to go forward with
the fame velocity in the direction ol its axis, thro' the
•
fame medium. And let us fuppofe that the particles of
the medium, on which the globe or cylinder falls, fly
back with of reflexion as poffible. Then
as &reat a force
fince the refinance of the globe (by the laft Propofi-
tion) is but half the refinance of the cylinder, and
fince the globe is to the cylinder as 2 to 5, and fince
the cylinder by falling perpendicularly on the particles,
and refie&ing them with the utmoft force communi-
cates to them a velocity double to its own : it follows
that the cylinder, in moving forward uniformly half
the length of its axis, will communicate a motion to the
particles, which is to the whole motion of the cylinder
as
Digitized by Google
Plate VUM.TL.P. HO .
Digitized by Google
Digitized by Google
Seft, VII. of Natural Thilofophy. 12
as the denfity of the medium to the denfity of the cy-
linder and that the globe, in the time it defcribes one
;
length its dkmeter in moving uniformly forwards,

of
will communicate the fame motion to the particles
and in the time that it defcribes two thirds of its dia-
meter, will communicatea motion to the particles, which
is to the whole motion of the globe as the denfity of
the medium to the denfity of the globe. And there-
fore the globe meets with a refiftance, which is to the
force by which its whole motion may be either taken
away or generated in the time in which it defcribes two
thirds of its diameter moving uniformly forwards, as
the denfityof the medium to the denfity of the globe.
Case 2. Let us fuppofe that the particles of the me-
dium incident on the globe or cylinder are not refleft-
ed ; and then the cylinder falling perpendicularly on
the particles will communicate its own fimple velocity
to them, and therefore meets a refiftance but half fa
great as in the former cafe, and the globe alfo meets
with a refiftance but half fo grear.
Case j. Let us fuppofe the particles of the medium
to fly back from the globe with a force which is nei-
ther the greateft nor yet none at all, but with a certain
mean force ; then the refiftance of the globe will be in
the fame mean ratio between the refiftance in the firft
cafe and the refiftance in the fecond. ChE.I.
Cor. i* Hence if the globe and the particles are in-
finitely hard, and deftitute of allelaftic force, and there-
fore of all force of reflexion x the refiftance o* the globe
will be to the force by which its whole motion may be
deftroyed or generated, in the time that the globe de-
fcribes four third parts of its diameter, as the denfity of
the medium to the denfity of the globe.
Cor. 2. The refiftance of the globe, ceteris paribus,
is in the duplicate ratio of the velocity.
Cor. 5. The refiftance of the globe, ctttris paribus,
is in the duplicate ratio of the diameter.
Cor.
uz Mathematical ^Principles Book II.
Cor* 4* The refiftance of the globe is, atteris paribus^

as the denfity of the medium*
Cor. 5. The refiftance of the globe is in a ratio
compounded of the duplicate ratio of the velocity, and
the duplicate ratio of the diameter, and the ratio 'of the
denfity of the medium.
Cor. 6. The motion of the globe and its refiftance
may be thus expounded* Let AB
{PL 7. Fig. 1.)
be the time in which the globe may, by its refiftance
uniformly continued, lofe its whole motion. Ere<&
A
AD, B C perpendicular to B. Let B C be that whole.
motion, and thro* the point C, the afymptotes being

A
AD, By defcribe the hyperbola CF. Produce AB
to any point E. Ereft the perpendicular meeting EF
the hyperbola in F. Compleat the parallelogram 3 CBEG
and draw AF
meeting BCmH.
Then if the globe
in any time B £, with its firft motion B C uniformly
continued, defcribes in a non-refifting medium the fpace
CBEG expounded by the area of the parallelogram,
the fame in a refilling medium will defcribe the fpace
CBEF expounded by the area of the hyperbola ; and
itsmotion at the end of that time will be expounded
by E F the ordinate of the hyperbola there being loft ,*
of its motion the part FG. And its refiftance at the

end of the fame time will be expounded by the length
£H; there being loft of its refiftance the part CAT-
AD thefe things appear by Cor* 1 and 5. Prop. 5.
Book z.
Cor. 7. Hence if the globe in the time by the T
refiftance R
uniformly continued, lofe its whole mo-
tion M
: the fame globe in the time t in a refifting me-
dium, wherein the refiftance R
decreafes in a duplicate
ratio of the velocity, will lofe out of its motion M
the part —
M t
* the part —TM remaining ; and will
j
defcribe a fpace which is to the fpace defcribed in the

fame
gitized by Google
1
Sea. VII. of Natural Thilofophy. 121
fame time r with the uniform motion M, as the loga-
rithm of the number - ^! - multiplied by the number
t
2, 302.^850925)5)4 is to the number— , becaufe the
hyperbolic area BCFE is to the re&angle BCGE in

that proportion.
• • •
Scholium.
I have exhibited in this Propofition the refiftance
and retardation of fphaerical projefhles in mediums that
are not continued, and fhewn that this refiftance is to
the force by which the whole motion of the globe
may be deftroyed or produced in the time in which the
globe can defcribe two thirds of its diameter* with a
velocity uniformly continued, as the denfity of the
medium to the denfity of the globe, if fobe the globe
and the particles of the medium be perfeftly elaftic,
and are indued with the utmoft force of reflexion : and
that this force, where the globe and particles of the
medium are infinitely hard and void of any reflefting
force, is diminiftied one half. But in continued me-
diums, as water, hot oil, and quickfilver, the globe
as it palTes thro them does not immediately ftrike againft
all the particles of the fluid that generate the refiftancb
made to it, but prefTes only the particles that lie next
to it, which prefs the particles beyond, which prefs
other particles, and fo on; and in thefe mediums the re-
fiftance is diminilhed one other half. A globe in thefe
extremely fluid mediums meets with a refiftance that is
to the force by which its whole motion may be de-
ftroyed or generated in the time wherein it can defcribe,
with that motion uniformly continued, eight third
parts of its diameter, as the denfity of the medium to
the denfity of the globe. This I Hull endeavour to
fliew in what follows. " Pro-
Digitized
1 24. Mathematical Principles Book II.
Proposition XXXVI. Problem VIII.

To define the motion of water running out of
a cylindrical vejjel thro a hole made at
the bottom.
«
Let ACDB (PL 7. Fig. 1.) be a cylindrical veffel,

AB the mouth of it, CD the bottom parallel to the
horizon, £fa circular hole in the middle of the bot-
tom, G the centre of the hole, and GH
the axis of
the cylinder perpendicular to the horizon. And fup-
pofe a cylinder of ice A? OB
to be of the fame breadth
with the cavity of the veffel, and to have the lame axis,
and to defcend perpetually with an uniform motion,
and that its parts as foon as they touch the fuperficies
AB diffolve into water, and flow down by their weight
into the vefTel, and in their fall compote the cataraft
or column of water tWF AB EM,
pafling thro* the
hole EF, and filling up the fame exaCtly* Let the
uniform velocity of the defcending ice and of the con-
tiguous water in the circle AB
be that which the wa-
ter would acquire by falling thro* the fpace ; and IH
let IHand HG
lie in the fame right line, and thro* the
point / let there be drawn the right line parallel to KL

the horizon, and meeting the ice on both the fides
thereof in K
and L. Then the velocity of the water
xunning out at the hole EF
will be the fame that it
would acquire by falling from / thro* the fpace IG.
Therefore, by Galileo's Theorems, IG will be to IH
in the duplicate ratio of the velocity of the water that
runs out at the hole to the velocity of the water in
the circle AB, that is, in the duplicate ratio of the
circle AB to the circle; EF
thofe circles being reci-
procally as the velocities of the water which in the
fame time and in equal quantities pafTes feverally thro*
z each
Digitized by Google
Sed. VII. of Natural Thilofophy. zf i
each of them, and compleatly them both. We are

fills
now confidering the velocity with which the water

tends to the plane of the horizon. But the motion pa-
rallel to the fame bv which the' parts of the falling wa-
ter approach to each other, is not here taken notice of;

fince it is neither produced by gravity, nor at all
changes the motion perpendicular to the horizon

which the gravity produces. We
fuppofe indeed that
the parts of the water cohere a little, that by their co-
hefion they may in falling approach to each other with
motions parallel to the horizon, in order to form one
fingle cataraft, and to prevent their being divided into
feveral : but the motion parallel to the horizon arifing
from this cohefion does not come under our prefenc
confideration.
Case i. Conceive now the whole cavity in the vef-
fel,which encompafles the falling water AB NFEM,to
be full of ice, fo that the water may pafs thro* the ice as
thro* a funnel. Then if the warer pafs very near to
the ice only, without touching it ; or, which is the
fame thing, if, by reafon of the perfect fmoothnefs of
the furface of the ice, the water, tho' touching it, glides
over with the utmoft freedom, and without the leaft
it
refiftance ; the water will run thro* the hole with EF

the fame velocity as before, and the whole weight of
the column of water ABNFE M will be all taken up
as before in forcing out the water, and the bottom of
the veflel will fuftain the weight of the ice encompaffing
that column.
Let now the ice in the veflel diflblve into water ; yet
will the efflux of the water remain, as to its velocity,
the fame as before. It will not be lefs, becaufe the ice
now difTolved will endeavour to defcend ; it will not
be greater, becaufe the ice now become water
cannot de-
fcend without hindering the defcent of other water
equal to its own defcent. The fame force ought al-
ways to generate the fame velocity in the effluent water.
But
r is Mathematical Trinciples Book IL
But the hole at the bottom of the veffel, by reafon
of the oblique motions of the particles of the effluent
water, muft be a little greater than before. For now
the particles of the water do not all of them pafs thro'
the hole perpendicularly ; but flowing down on all
parts from the fides of the veffel, and converging to-

wards the hole, pafs thro' it with oblique motions ; and
in tending downwards meet in a ftream whofe diameter
is a little fmaller below the hole than at the hole it-
felf, its diameter being to the diameter of the hole as 5
to <f> or as 5* to very nearly, if I took the mea-
sures of thofe diameters right. I procured a very thin
flat plate having a hole pierced in the middle, the dia-
meter of the circular hole being * parts of an inch.
And that the ftream of running water might not be ac-
celerated in falling, and by that acceleration become
narrower, I fixed this plate, not to the bottom, but tS
the fide of the veffel, fo as to make the water go out
in the direction of a line parallel to the horizon. Then
when the veffel was full of water, I opened the hole to
let itrun out j and the diameter of the ftream, meafured
with great accuracy at the diftance of about half an
inch from the hole, was of an inch. Therefore the
diameter of this circular hole was to the diameter of the
ftream very nearly as 25 to 21. So that the water in
pafling thro' the hole, converges on all fides, and after
it has run out of the veffel, becomes fmaller by con-
verging in that manner, and by becoming fmaller is ac-
celerated till it comes to the diftance of half an inch
from the hole, and at that diftance flows in a fmaller ftream
and with greater celerity than in the hole itfelf, and
this in the ratioof 25x25 to 21x21 or 17 to 12 very
nearly, that is in about the fubduplicare ratio of 2 to
i. Now it is certain from experiments, that the
quantity of water, running out in a given time thro* a
circular hole made in the bottom of a veffel is caual to
the quantity, which, flowing with the aforefaid velo-
Digitized by Google
Sccl. VII. of Natural Thilofophy. 1 27
city, would run out in the fame time, thro* another cir-
cular hole, whofe diameter is to the diameter of the
former as 21 to if. And therefore that running water
in paflingthro' the hole itfelf has a velocity downwards
equal to that whichheavy body would acquire
a in fal-
ling thro* half the height of the ftagnant water in the
veflel, nearly. But then after it has run out, it is ftili
accelerated by converging, till it arrives at a diftance

from the hole that is nearly equal to its diameter, and
acquires a velocity greater than the other in about the
fubduplicate ratio or 2 to1 which velocity a heavy bo-
>
dy would nearly acquire, by falling thro* the whole

height of the ftagnant water in the veflel.
Therefore in what follows let the diameter of the ftream
be reprefented by that lefler hole which we called EF.
And imagine another plane VW
above the hole EF,
(PL 7. Fig. 3.) and parallel to the plane thereof, to be placed
at a diftance equal to the diameter of the fame hole, and to
be pierced thro' with a greater hole STy of fuch a mag-
nitude that a ftream which will cxa&ly fill the lower hole
EF may pals thro* it; the diameter of which hole will
therefore be to the diameter of the lower hole as 2 5 to
n, nearly. By means the water will run perpendi-
this
cularly out at the lower hole ; and the quantity of the
water running out will be, according to the magnitude of
this laft hole, the fame, very nearly, which the folution
of the problem requires. The fpace included between the
two planes and the falling ftream may be confider'd as
the bottom of the vefTel. But to make the folution
more Ample and mathematical, it is better to take the
lower plane alone for the bottom of the vefTel, and to
fuppofe that the water which flowed thro' the ice as
thro' a funnel, and ran out of the vefTel thro' the hole
EF made in the lower plane, prefer ves its motion conti-
nually, and that the ice continues at reft. Therefore in
what follows let ST be the diameter of a circular hole
defcribed from the centre and let the ftream run out
Z of
Digitized by Google
of the veffel thro' that hole when the water in the vet
fel is all fluid. And let EF
be the diameter of the
hole which the ftream, in falling thro', exa&ly fills up,
whether the water runs out of the veffel by that upper
1
hole ST> or flows thro the middle of the ice in the
veffel, as thro* a funnel. And let the diameter of the
upper hole ST be to the diameter of the lower as EF
about 25 to 21, and let the perpendicular diftance be-
tween rhe planes of the holes be equal to the diameter
of the leffer hole E F.. Then the velocity of the water
downwards in running out of the veffel thro' the
hole ST^ will be in that hole the fame that a body
may acquire by falling from half the height IZ : and
the velocity of both the falling ftreams will be, in the
hole EF, the fame which a body would acquire by fal-
ling from the whole height IG.
Case 2. If the hole EF
be not in the middle of the
bottom of the veffel, but in fome other part thereof,
the water will Hill run out with the fame velocity as
before* if the magnitude of the hole be the fame. For
tho an heavy body takes a longer time in defcending
to the fame depth, by an oblique line, than by a per-
pendicular line ; yet in both cafes it acquires in its
defcent the fame velocity, as Galileo has demonftra-
ted.
Case 3. The ve'ocity of the water is the fame
when it runs out thro* a hole in the fide of the vef-
fel. For if the hole be fmall, fo that the interval
between the fuperficies and AB KL
may vanifh as
to fenfe, and the ftream of water horizontally if-
fuing out may form a parabolic figure : from the
Utus reftum of this parabola may be collefted, that
the velocity of the effluent water is that which a bo-
dy may acquire by falling the height IG or HG of
the ftagnant water in the veffel. For by making an
experiment, I found that if the height of the ftag-
nant water above the hole were zo inches, and the
height
Digitized by Google
;
Sea. VII. of Natural Thilofopty: x 29

height of the hole above a plane parallel to the horizon
were alfo 10 inches, a ftream of water fpringing out
from thence would fall upon the plane, at the diftance
of 37 inches, very nearly, from a perpendicular let fall
upon that plane from the hole. For without refiftance
the ftream would have fallen upon the plane at the dif-
tance of 40 inches, the latus re&um of the parabolic
ftream being 80 inches.
Case 4. If the effluent water tend upwards, it will
ftill ifTuc forth with the fame velocity. For the fmall
ftream of water fpringing upwards, afcends with a per-
pendicular motion to G H
or GI the height of theftag-
nant water in the vefTel; excepting in fo far as its ac-
cent is hindered a little by the refiftance of the air ; and
therefore it fprings out with the lame velocity that ic
would acquire in falling from that height. Every par-
ticle of the ftagnant water is equally prefled on all fides*
(by Prop. 19. Book 2.) and yielding to the preffure,
tends all ways with an equal force, whether it defcends
thro* the hole in the bottom of the vefTel, or gufhes out
in an horizontal dire&ion thro* an hole in the fide, or
paffes into a canal, and fprings up from thence thro' a
little hole made in the upper part of the canal. And it
may not only be collected from reafoning, but is mani-
feft alfo from the well-known experiments juft men-
tioned, that the velocity with which the water runs out
is the very fame that is affigned in this Propofition.
Case 5. The velocity of the effluent water is the

fame, whether the figure of the hole be circular, or
fquare, or triangular, or any other figure equal to the
circular. For the velocity of the effluent water does
not depend upon the figure of the hole, but arifes from
itsdepth below the plane KL.
Case 6. If the lower part of the vefTel B A DCbe
immerfed into ftagnaftt water, and the height of the
ftagnant water above the bottom of the veflel be G R
the velocity with which the water that is in the vefTel
Vol.- Ih
» - _ ^.
K
....
will -
Digitized by Google
i j i Mathematkal Principles Book II-
and EF to the fum of the fame circles, (by Cor. 4*>
and the weight of the whole water in the velTel is to
the weight of the whole water perpendicularly incum-
bent on the bottom as the circle AB
to the difference
of the circles AB
and£F. Therefore, ex aqno per—
turbatiy that part of the weight which prefles upon the
bottom is to the weight of the whole water perpendi-
cularly incumbent thereon as the circle A
B to the Anns
of the circles AB
and EF> or the excefs of twice the
circle AB
above the bottom.
Cor. 7. If in the middle of the hole EF
there be
placed the little circle /> defcribed about the centre
<7, and parallel to the horizon ; the weight of water
which that little circle fuftains is greater than the weight

of a third part of a cylinder of water whofe bafe is that
little circle and its height GH. For let ABNFEAf
(Pi 7. Fig. 4.) be the catarad or column of falling wa-
ter whofe axis is GH
as above, and let all the water,
whofe fluidity is not requifite for the ready and quick
defcent of the water, be fuppofed to be congealed ; as
well round about the cararad, as above the little circle*
And let PHObe the column of water, congealed above
the little circle, whofe vertex is H, and its altitude
G H. And fuppofe this catarad to fall with its whole
weight downwards, and not in the leaft to lie againft or
to prefs PHQjbut to glide freely by it without any
fridion, unlefs perhaps juft at the very vertex of the
ice where the catarad at the beginning of its fall may-
tends to a concave figure. And ss the congealed water
AM EC> BNFD lying round the catarad, is convex
in its internal fuperficies A ME, BNF towards the
falling cararad, fo this column P H^will be convex
towards the catarad alio, and will therefore be greater
than a cone whofe bafe is that little circle PO
and its
altitude GH, that is, greater than a third part of a cy-
linder defcribed with the fame bafe and altitude. Now
that little circle fuftaicy the weight of this column,
1
Digitized by Google
that is, a weight greater than the weight of the cone or
a third part of the cylinder.
Cor. 8. The weight of water which the circle P O,
when very fmall, fuftains, feems to be lefs than the
weight of two thirds of a cylinder of water whole bale
is that little circle, and its altitude HG. For, things
ftandingas above fuppofed, imagine the half of a fpha>
roid defcribed whole bafe is that little circle, and its
femi-axis or alitude HG. This figure will be equal to
two thirds of that cylinder, and will comprehend with-
in it the column of congealed water P H
the weight
of which is fuftained by that little circle. For tho* the
motion of the water tends directly downwards, the ex-
ternal fuperficies of that column muft yet meet the
bafe P Qîn an angle fomewhat acute, becaufe the water
in its fall is perpetually accelerated, and by realbn of that
acceleration becomes narrower. Therefore, fince that
angle is lefs than a right one, this column in the lower
partsthereof will lie within thehemi-lphaeroid. In the
upper parts alio it will be aaute or pointed ; becaufe,
to make it otherwife, the horizontal motion of the wa-
ter muft be at the vertex infinitely more fwift than its
motion towards the horizon. And the lefs this circle
? Qiss the more acute will the vertex of this column

be ; and the circle being diminilhed in infinitum, the
angle PHO^w'xW bediminifhed in infinitum, and there-
fore the column will lie within the hemi-fphaeroid.
Therefore that column is lefs than that hemi-fphaeroid,
or than two third parts of the cylinder whole bafe is
that little circle, and its altitude G H. Now the little
of water equal to the weight of

circle fuftains a force
this column, the weight of the ambient water being
employed in caufing its efflux out at the hole.

Cor. 9. The weight of water which the little circle
PO fuftains when it is very fmall, is very nearly equal
to the weight of a cylinder of water whofe bafe is that
httle circle, and its altitude \GH. For this weight is
K }
aa
Digitized by Google
1 3 4. Mathematical Principles Book It
an arithmetical mean between the weights of the cone
and the hemi-fphaeroid abovementioned. But if that
little circle be not very fmall, but on the contrary in-
creafed till it be equal to the hole EF; it will fuftain

the weight of all the water lying perpendicularly above
it, that is, the weight of a cylinder of water whofe
bafe is that little circle and its altitude GH.

Cor. 10. And (as far as I can judge) the weight
which this little circle fuftains is always to the weight
of a cylinder of water whofe bafe is that little circle and
its altitude \GH> as EF2 toEF —5P0 2 2
, or as the
circle EF to the excefs of this circle above half the little
circle PO> very nearly.
Lemma IV.
J[f a cylinder move uniformly forwards in the
of its length, the rejtftance made
direction
thereto is not at all changed by augmenting
or diminijhing that lengthand is therefore 5
fame with the refinance of a circle, de~

the
fcribed with the fame diameter, and moving
forwards with the fame velocity in the di-
rection of a right line perpendicular to its
plane.
For the fides are not at all oppofed to the motion 5

and a cylinder becomes a circle when its length is dir
ininiftied in infinitutu.
Pro*
Digitized by Google
ScQ:. VII. of Natural Thilofophy.
Proposition XXXVII.Theorem XXIX.

If a cylinder move uniformly forwards in a com.
prefled, infinite, and non-elaftic fluid, in the
direction of its length the refinance arifing
\
from the magnitude of its tranfiverfe fettion,

is to the force by which its whole motion may
be dejiroyed or generated, in the time that it
moves four times its length, as the denfity of
the medium to the denfity of the cylinder,
nearly.
For let the vefTel ABDC (PI. 7. Fig. 5.) touch

the furface of ftagnant water with its bottom CD, and
let the water run our of this veflel into the ftagnant wa-
ter thro* the cylindric canal EFTS
perpendicular to
the horizon and let the little circle P O^be placed pa-
;
rallel to the horizon any where in the middle of the

canal ; and produce CA to K, fo that may be to AK
CAT in the duplicate of the ratio, which the excefs of
the orifice of the canal EF
above the little circle P O,
bears to the circle AR. Then 'tis manifeft (by Cafe 5.
Cafetf. and Cor. 1. Prop. $6.) that the velocity of
the water paffing thro' the annular fpace between the
little circle and the fides of the veflel, wilt be the
very
fame which the water would acquire by falling, and in
its fall defcribing the altitude KCorlG.
And (by Cor. 10. Prop, jtf.) if the breadth of
the veflel be infinite, fo that the lineola may va- HI
nifti, and the altitudes IG, HG
become equal ; the
force of the water that flows down, and prefles upon
the circle will be to the weight of a cylinder whofe
bafe that and the altitude \IG> as % EF
to EF
is
1 — \P Q*little circle
very nearly. For the force of the

water flowing downwards uniformly thro' the whole
K 4 canal
13 6 Mathematical ^Principles Book II.
canal will be the fame upon the little circle PQ in
w hat foe ver part of the canal it be placed.
Let now the orifices of the canal Ep> ST be clofed,
and let the little circle afcend in the fluid comprefTed
on every fide, and by its afcent let it oblige the water
that lies above it to defcend thro' the annular fpacc be-
tween the little circle and the fides of the canal. Then
will the velocity of the afcending little circle be to the
velocity of the defcending water as the difference of
the circles EF
and P Q
is to the circle P Qj and the
velocity of the afcending little circle will be to the fum

of the velocities, that is, to the relative velocity of the
defcending water with which it paffes by the little cir-
cle in its afcent, as the difference of the circles £.Fand

to the circle or as i
EF, 2
to EF ~Pj0
2
. EF
LeTchat relative velocity be equal to the velocity with
.which it was (hewn above that the water would pafs
thio' the annular fpace if the circle were to remain un-
moved, that is, to the velocity which the water would
acquire by falling, and in its fall defcribing the alti-
tude IGand the force of the water upon the afcend-
5
ing circle will be the fame as before, (by cor. 5. of

the laws of motion) that is, the refiftance of the af-
cending little circle will be to the weight of a cylinder
of water whofe bafe is that little circle and its altitude
\IG> as EF 3
to EF 2 *— ±P CP nearly. But the ve-
locity of the little circle will be to the velocity which
the water acquires by falling, and in its fall defcribing
the altitude /<?, as
2
P CP to EF 2
—
. EF
Let the breadth of the canal be increafed in infini-
turn; and the ratio's between EF —-PCP
2
and EF* 9
and between EF 2
and EF 2 — *P CP will become at
lafl: ratio's of equality. And therefore the velocity of
the little circle will now be the fame which the water
would acquire in falling, and in its fall defcribing the
altitudeJG ; and the refiftance will become equal to
the weight of a cylinder whofe bafe is that little circle.
Digitized by Google
Scft. VII. of Natural Thilofofhy. i i7
and its altitude half the altitude /(?, from which the
cylinder muft fall to acquire the velocity of the amend-
ing circle. And with this velocity the cylinder in the
time of its fall will defcribe four times its length. But
the refiftance of the cylinder moving forwards with
this velocity in the diredrion of its length, is the fame
with the refiftance of the little circle, (by Lem. 4.)
and is therefore nearly equal to the force by which its
motion may be generated while it defcribes four times
its length.
If the length of the cylinder be augmented or di-
minifhed, its morion, and the time in which it de-
fcribes four times its length, will be augmented or di-

minifhed in the fame ratio; and, therefore the force by
which the motion, fo increafed or diminifhed, may be
deftroyed or generated, will continue the fame ; becaufe
the time is increafed or diminifhed in the fame propor-
tion ; and therefore that force remains ftill equal to the
refiftance of the cylinder, becaufe (by Lem. 4.) that
refiftance will alfo remain the fame. *
If the denfity of the cylinder be augmented or di-

minifhed, its motion, and the force by which its mo-
tion may be generated or deftroyed in the fame time,
will be augmented or diminifhed in the fame ratio.
Therefore the refiftance of any cylinder whatfoever will
be to the force by which its whole motion may be ge-
nerated or deftroyed in the time during which it moves
four times its length, as the denfity of the medium to
the denfity of the cylinder, nearly. Q.E.D.
A fluid muft be compreffed to become continued ; it
muft be continued and non-elaftic, that 9II the preffure
arifing compreflion may be propagated in an
from its
inftant ; a&ing equally upon all parts of the bo-

and fo
dy moved, may produce no change of the refiftance.
The preffure arifing from the motion of the body is
fpent in generating a motion in the parts of the fluid,
and this creates the refiftance. But the preffure arifing
from
Digitized by Google
fj 8 Mathematical Principles Book II.
from the compreffion of the fluid, be it never fo forci-
be propagated in an inftant, generates no
ble, if it mo-
tion in the parts of a continued fluid, produces no
change at all of motion therein ; and therefore neither
augments nor lefTens the refiftance. This is certain, that
the aftion of the fluid arifing from the compreffion can-
not be ftronger on the hinder parts of the body moved
than on its fore parts, and therefore cannot lefTen the
refiftance defcribed in this Propofition. And if its
propagation be infinitely fwifter than the motion of the
body prcfTed, it will not be ftronger on the fore parts
than on the hinder parts. But that adtion will be in-
finitely fwifter and propagated in an inftant, if the fluid
ie continued and non-elaftic.
Cor. i. The refiftances made to cylinders going uni-
formly forwards in the direftion of their lengths thro*
continued infinite mediums, are in a ratio compounded
of the duplicate ratio of the velocities and the duplicate
ratio of the diameters, and the ratio of the denfity of
the mediums.
Cor. 2. If the breadth of the canal be not infinite-
ly increafed, but the cylinder go forwards in the direc-
tion of its length through an included quiefcent me-
dium, its axis all the while coinciding with the axis of
the canal ; its refiftance will be to the force by which
its whole motion in the time in which it defcribes four
times its length, may be generated or deftroyed, in a
ratio compounded of the ratio of EF 2 to EF 1 — iPQ^'
once, and the ratio of EF 2
to EF 2 — P (P twice, and
the ratio of the denfity of the medium to the denfity of
the cylinder.
Cor. 3. The fame things fuppofed, and that a length
L is to the quadruple of the length of the cylinder in
* ratio compounded of the ratio EF 2 — \P to EF
2
once, and the ratio of EF 2 — PCP to EF tv/ice the 1

;
refiftance of the cylinder will be to the force by which

its whole motion,, in the time during which it defcribes
" • the
Digitized by Go
Sett. VII. of Natural Vhilofiphy: i 39
the length L, may be deftroyed or generated, as the
denfity of the medium to the denfity of the cylinder.
SCHOLIUM.
In this propofition we have inveftigated that refif-
tance alone which arifes from the magnitude of the
tranfverfe fe&ion of the cylinder, neglefting that part
of the fame which may arife from the obliquity of the
motions, For as in Cafe i. of Prop. jtf. the obliquity
of the motions with which the parts of the water ii\
the vefTel converged on every fide to the hole 9 EF
hindered the efflux of the water thro* the hole ; fo in
this propofition, the obliquity of the motions, with
which tie parts of the water, prefTed by the antecedent
extremity of the cylinder, yield to the preffure and di-
verge on all fides, retards their paffage, thro* the places
that lie round that antecedent extremity, towards the
hinder parts of the cylinder, and caufes the fluid to be
moved to a greater diftance ; which increafes the refif-
tance, and that in the fame ratio almoft in which it di-
miniftied the efflux of the water out of the veffel, that
is, in the duplicate ratio of 25 to 21, nearly. And af
in Cafe 1 . of that Propofition, we made the parts of
the water pafs thro* the hole EF perpendicularly and
in the greateft plenty,by fuppofing all the water in the
veffel lying round the cataradt to be frozen, and that
part of the water whofe motion was oblique and ufe-
lefs to remain without motion ; fo in this propofition,
that the obliquity of the motions may be taken away,

and the parts of the water may give the freed paffage
to the cylinder, by yielding to it with the moft direct
and quick motion poffible, fo that only fo much refit
tance may remain as arifes from the magnitude of the
tranfverfe feAion, and which is incapable of diminution,
unlefs by diminifhing the diameter of the cylinder ; we
piuft conceive thofe parts of the fluid whofe motions
Digitized
are oblique and and produce refiftance, to be at
ufelefs,
reft among both extremities of the cylin-

themfelves at
der, and there to cohere, and be joined to the cylinder.

Let A BCD (PL 7. Fig. 6.) be a reftangle, and let
AE and BEbe two parabolic arcs, defcribed with the
axis AB, and with a latus rectum that is to the fpace
H G, which muft be defcribed by the cylinder in fall-
ing in order to acquire the velocity with which it
moves, as HG
to \AB. Let CF and be two DF
other parabolic arcs defcribed with the axis CD, and a
latus rectum quadruple of the former ; and by the con-
volution of the figure about the axis E F let there be
generated a folid, whofe middle part ABDC
is the
cylinder we are here fpeaking of, and the extreme parts

ABE and CD F contain the parts of the fluid, at reft
among themfelves, and concreted into two hard bodies,
adhering to the cylinder at each end like a head and
tail. Then if this folid EACFDB move in the di-
rection of the length of its axis FE towards the parts
beyond £, the refiftance will be the fame which we
have here determined in this propofition, nearly ; that
is, it will have the fame ratio to the force with which
the whole motion of the cylinder may be deftroyed or

generated in the time that it is defcribing the length
4AC with that motion uniformly continued, as the
denfity of the fluid has to the denfity of the cylinder,
nearly. And (by Cor. 7. Prop. 3 6.) the refiftance
muft be to this force in the ratio of 2 to 5, at the
leaft.
tEMMA
Digitized by Google
Digitized by Google
Sea. VII. of Natural Vhilofophy. i 4t
/ Lemma V.
If a cylinderj a fphere,4ind a fphxroid, of equal
breadths be placed fuccejfively in the middle
of a cylindric canal, fo that their axes may
coincide with the axis of the canal $ thefe bo-
dies will equally hinder the paffage of the
9
water thro the canal.
For the
fpaces, lying between the fides of the canal,
and the cylinder, fphere, and fphaeroid, thro* which
the water pafles, are equal; and the water will pafs e-
qually thro* equal fpaces.
This is true upon the fuppofition that all the water
above the cylinder, fphere, or fphaeroid, whofe fluidity-
is not neceflary to make the paffage of the water the
quickeft poflible, is congealed, as was explained above
in Cor. 7. Prop. jtf.
Lemma VI.
The fame fuppofition remaining, the foremen*
tioned bodies are equally acted on by the wa-
ter flowing thro* the canal.
This appears by Lem. 5. and the third law. For
the water and the bodies aft upon each other mutually;
and equally.
Lemma VII.
// the water be at reft in the canal, and thefe
bodies move with equal velocity and the con-
9
trary waythro the canal, their refiflances
will be equal among themfelves.
This appears from the laft Lemma, for the relative
footions remain the fame among themfelves.
SCHO«
» - - "
Digitized by Google
Mathematical Trinciples Book H;
Scholium.
The cafe is the fame of all convex and round bodies^
whofe axes coincide with the axis of the canal. Some

difference may arife from a greater or lefs fri&ion; but
in thefe lemmata we fuppofe the bodies to be perfe&ly
fmooth, and the medium to be void of all tenacity and
fri&ion ; and that thofe parts of the fluid which by
their oblique and fuperfluous motions may difturb, hin-
der, and retard the flux of the water thro' the canal,
are at reft amongft themfelves ; being fixed like water
by froft, and adhering to the fore and hinder parts of
the bodies in the manner explained in the Scholium of
the laft Propofition. For in what follows, we confi-
der the very leaft refiftance that round bodies defcribed
with the greateft given tranfverfe fe&ions can poflibly
meet with.
Bodies fwimming upon fluids, when they move
ftraight forwards, caufe the fluid to afcend at their fore
parts and lubfide at their hinder parts, efpecially if
they of an obtufe figure ; and thence they meet
are
with a little more refiftance than if they were acute at
the head and tail. And bodies moving in elaftic fluids,
if they are obtufe behind and before, condenfe the fluid
a little more and relax the fame at
at their fore parts,
their hinder parts and therefore meet alfo with a little
;
more refiftance than if they were acute at the head and

tail. But in thefe lemma's and propofitions we are not
treating of elaftic, but non-elaftic fluids ; not of bo-
dies floating on the furface of the fluid, but deeply im-
merfed therein. And when the refiftance of bodies in
non-elaftic fluids is once known, we may then aug-
ment this refiftance a little in elaftic fluids, as our air;
and in the furfaces of flagnating fluids, as lakes and
feas.
Pap-
Scft. VH. of Natural Thilofophyl
Proposition XXXVIIL Theorem XXX.

If a globe move uniformly forward in a com*
prejfed, infinite\ and non-elaftic fluid, its re-
fiftance is to the force by which its whole
motion may be deftroyed or generated in the
time that it defer ibes eight third parts of its
diameter, as the denfity of the fluid to the
denfity of the globe, very nearly.
For the globe is to its circumfcribed cylinder as two

to three and therefore the force which can deftroy all
;
the motion of the cylinder while the fame cylinder is

defcribing the length of four of its diameters, will de-
ftroy all the motion of the globe while the globe is de-
fcribing two thirds of this length, that is, eight third
parts of its own diameter. Now the refiftance of the
cylinder is to this force very nearly as the denfity of
the fluid to the denfity of the cylinder or globe (by
Prop. 57.) and the refiftance of the globe is equal to
the refiftance of the cylinder (by Lem. 5>6>70
E. D.
Cor. i. The refiftances of globes in
infinite com-
prelTed mediums compounded of the du-
are in a ratio
plicate ratio of the velocity, and the duplicate ratio of
the diameter, and the ratio of the denfity of the me-
diums.
Cor. z. The with which a globe
greateft velocity
can defcend by its comparative weight thro* a refilling
fluid, is the fame which it may acquire by falling with
the fame weight, and without any refiftance, and in its
fall defcribing a fpace thatto four third parts of its

is
diameter, as the denfity of the globe to the denfity of

the fluid. For the globe in the time of its fall, moving
wifh the velocity acquired in falling, will defcribe a
Digitized by Google
144 Mathematical Trinciples Book it
fpacc that will be to eight third parts of its diameter
as the denfity of the globe to the denfity of the fluid ;
and the force of its weight which generates this motion,
will be to the force that can generate the fame motion
in the time that the globe defcribes eight third parts of
its diameter, with the fame velocity as the denfity of
the fluid to the denfity of the globe; and therefore
(by this Propofition) the force of weight will be
equal to the force of refiftance, and therefore cannot
accelerate the globe.
Cor. 5. If there be given both the denfity of the
globe and its velocity at the beginning of the motion,
and the denfity of the comprefled quiefcent fluid in
which the globe moves ; there is given at any time
both the velocity of the globe and its refiftance, and
the fpace defcribed by it, (by Con 7. Prop. 55.)
Cor. 4. A globe moving in a compreffed quiefcent
fluid of the fame denfity with itfelf, will lofe half its
motion before it can defcribe the length of two of its
diameters, (by the fame Cor. 7.)
Proposition XXXIX. Theorem XXXI.

9
If a globe move uniformly forward thro a fluid

inchfed and compreffed in a cylindric canal,
its refiftance is to the force by which its
whole motion may be generated or deftroyed
in the time in which it defcribes eight third
parts of its diameter\ in a ratio compounded
of the ratio of the orifice of the canal, to the
excefs of that orifice above half the great eft
circle of the globe 1 and the duplicate ratio of
the orificeof the canal, to the excefs of that
orifice above the greateft circle of the globe ;
and the ratio of the denfity of the fluid to
the denfity of the globe, nearly.
Bui?
Digitized by Google
StCt. VII. of Natural Wthfipif. i\i
This appears by cor. 2. prop. 37. and the demon-
ftration proceeds in the fame manner as in the foregoing
propofition.
Scholium.
In the two laft propofitions we fuppofe fas was done
before in lem. f .) that all the warer which precedes
the globe, and whofe fluidity increafes the refinance of
the fame, is congealed. Now
if that water becomes
fluid, it will fomewhac increafe the refiftance. But
in thefe propofitions that increafe is fo fmall, that it
may be neglefted, becaufe the convex? fuperficies of the
globe produces the very fame effeft almoft as the con-
gelation of the water.
Proposition XL. Problem IX.

To find by phenomena the refiftance of a globe
moving through a perfectly fluid comprejfed
medium.
Let A
be the weight of the glpbe in vacuo, B its
weight in the refilling medium, D
the diameter of the
globe, F a fpace which is to f D
as the denfity of the
globe to the denfity of the medium, that is, as to A

—
A B, G
the time in which the globe falling with
the weight B without refiftance defcribes the ipace F,
and H the velocity which the body acquires by that
fall. Then H with which
will be the greateft velocity
the globe can poflibly defcend with the weight B ia
the refitting medium, by cor. z. prop 38; and the
refiftance which the globe meets with, when defcending
with that velocity, will be equal to its weight B : and
the refiftance it meets with, in any other velocity, will
be to the weight B in the duplicate ratio of that velo-
city to the greateft velocity H, by cor. 1. prop. 38.
Voi. ft. t ...» this
Digitized by Google
I4<5 Mathematical Principles Book II.
is the refiftance that arifes from the inactivity
This
of the matter of the fluid. That refiftance which arifes
from the elafticity, tenacity, and fri&ion of its parts,
may be thus inveftigated.
Let the globe be let fall fo that it may d:fcend in the
fluid by the weight B ; and let P be the time of
falling, and let that time be ex pre (Ted in feconds, if the
time G be given in feconds. Find the abfolute Number
*
iP
N agreeing to the logarithm 0,43429448 iq ana
Nil and the
let L be the logarithm of the number - *
:
N — - Hj and the
velocity acquired in falling will be ^
zPF
height defcribed will be ^— 1,386-20436*1 1 F +
4,6051701861^. If the fluid be of a fufficient
depth,we may negleft the term 4,60$ 170186LF ;
and _G 1,3862043611^ will be the altitude defcri-
/
bed, nearly. Thefe things appear by prop. 9. book 2.
and its corollaries, and are true upon this fuppofition,
that the globe meets with no other refiftance but that
which arifes from the inactivity of matter. Now if
it really meet with any refiftance of another kind, the
defcent will be flower, and from the quantity of that
retardation will be known the quantity of this new re-
fiftance.
That the velocity and defcent of a body falling in a
fluid might more eafily be known, I have compofed the
following table ; the hrft column of which denotes the
times of defcent, thelecond fliews the velocities acquir'd
in falling, the greateft velocity being 100000000,
the third exhibits the fpaces defcribed by falling in
thofe times, 2.F being the ipace which the body de.
fcribes in the time G with the greateft velocity,
"
z and
Digitized by Google
and the fourth gives the fpaces defcribed with the
greateft velocity in the fame times. The numbers
2P
in the fourth column are -g , and by fubdu&ing the
number 1,58^2944 —4,605 1702L,
bers in tJjLC third column ; and thefe numbers muft be
are found the num-
multiplied by the fpace F to dbtain the fpaces defcri-

bed in falling. A
fifth column is added to all thefe,
containing the fpaces defcribed in the fame times by a
body falling in vacuo with the force of B its compara-
tive weight.
1 The fpacts
1
The Timet
VeUcitiet of the] The fpaces defcri- defenhtd The fpacts dt-
P
boay falling m bed in falling im with the fa ib c aby falling
the finid. the finid. ereatffi Tno in iMiiro
0,00 1 99999.*' 0,00000 1 F |

0,002F 0,00000 1
0,0 1 999967 0,000 1 0,02F 0,0001 F
o,iG 9966799 0,0099 8 3 4 F 0,2F 0,0 1
0,2G >9737532 C0397361F o,4F o,04F
o,3G ^9131261 0,08868 1 5F o,6F o,o9F
o,4G 37994S96 C1559070F o,8F o,i6F
o, 5 G 4621 171 0,240229oF i,oF o,25F
o,6G 53704957 o,34027o6F i9 zF o, 3 6F
o,7G 60436778 °>45454°5 F i>4F \
o,49F
o,8G 66403677 0,581 507 1 i,6F o,64F
0,9 G 71629787 C7196609F i,8F o,8iF
iG 76159416 C8675617F 2F iF
2G 96402758 2,650005 5F 4F 4?
3G 995°5475 4,6i8657oF 6F 9F
4 G 99932930 6,6i4376sF 8F 16F
5G 99990920 8,6i37964F 10F 25F
6G 99998771 io,6i37i79F 12F 36F
99999834 i2,6i37073F 14F * •
49P !
8G 99999980 14,61 37059F 16F 64F

90 99999997 16,61 37057F 18F 81F
10G 99999999! i8,6i37056F 20F 100F
L *— ScHof
———
Digitized by Google
1 4* Mathematical Principles Book U
Scholium*
In order to inveftignte the refiftances of fluids from
experiments, 1 procured a fquare wooden vefTel, whofe
length and breadth on the infide was 9 inches EngliJJy
meafure, and its depth 9 foot \ this I filled with
;
rain-water and having provided globes made up of

:
wax, and lead included therein, I noted the times of

the defcents of thefe globes, the height through which
they defcended being Hi inches, A folid cubic foot
of EngUJh meafure contains j6 pounds Troy weight
of rain-water; and a folid inch contains ounces
Troy weight or 253 j grains; and a globe of water
of one inch in diameter contains 132,545 grains in
air, or 132,8 grains in vacuo; and any other globe
will be as the excefs of its weight in vacuo above its
weight in water.
Exper. i A globe whofe weight was 156 ~ grains
•
in air, and 77 grains in water, defcribed the whole

height of 112 inches in 4 feconds. And, upon repeat-
ing the experiment, the globe fpent again the very fame
time of 4 feconds in falling.
The weight of this globe in vacuo is 1 56 grains;
and excefs of weight above the weight of the
this
globe in water is 79 3^ grains. Hence the diameter of
the globe appears to be 0,84224 parts of an inch. Then
it will be, as that excefs to the weight of the globe in
vacuo, fo is the denfity of the water to the denfity of

the globe ; and fo is j parts of the diameter of the
globe ,2,24597 inches) to the fpace iF, which
will be therefore 4,4256 inches. Now a globe fal-
ling in Vacuo with its whole weight of i5^f| grains

in one fecond of time will defcribe 193 f inches; and
falling in water in the fame time with the weight of
77 grains without refiftance, will defcribe 95*219

inches ; and in the time G
Which is to one fecond of
time
Digitized by Goog
Scd. VII. of Natural Thilofophy. 149
time in the fubduplicare ratio of the fpace F, or of
2,2128 inches to 95,210 inches, will defcribe 2,2128
inches, and will acquire the greatcft velocity H with
which it is capable of defcending in water There-
fore the time G
is o,"i5244. AnJ in this time G
with that greateft velocity H, the globe will defcribe
the fpace 2F, which is 4,4256 inches; and therefore
in 4 feconds will defcribe a fpace of 116,1245 inches.
Subduft thefpace i > 38o'2044F or 3,0676 inches, and
there will remain a fpace of 113,0560 inches, which
the globe falling thro' water in a very wide veflel will
defcribe in 4 feconds. But this fpace, by reafon of
the narrow nefs of the wooden veflel beforementioned,
ought to be diminifhed in a ratio compounded of the
fubduplicate ratio of the orifice of the veflel to the
excefs of this orifice above half a great circle of the
globe, and of the fimple ratio of the fame orifice to its
excefs above a great circle of the globe, that is, in a
ratio of 1 to 0,9914. This done, we have a fpace of
112,08 inches, which a globe falling thro* the water
in this*wooden vefTel in 4 feconds of time ought nearly
to defcribe by this theory : but it defcribed 112 inches
by the experiment.
Exper. 2. Three equal globes, whofe weights were
feverally 76 j grains in air, and 5 grains in water,
were let fall fucceffively ; and every one fell thro* the
water in 1 5 feconds of time, defcribing in its fall a
height of 112 inches.
'
By
computation, the weight of each globe in vacuo
n 76 A
grains ; the excefs of this weight above the
weight in water, is 71 grains ; the diameter of the
g!obe 0,81296 of an inch : ^ parts of this diameter
^16789 inches 5 the fpace 2F
2,3217 inches; the
is
fpace which a globe of 5
weight would
grains in
defcribe in one fecond without refiftance, 12,808
inches, and the time G
o",joio56. Therefore the
globe with the greateft velocity it is capable of receiving
L 3 from
Digitized by Google
t$o Mathematical Principles Book II.
from a weight of 5 ft
grains in its defcent thro* wa-
ter, will defcribe in the time o",30io56~ the fpace of
2,3217 inches; and in 15 feconds the fpace 11 5,678
inches. Subdue! the fpace i^S6i^^¥ or 1,609
inches, and there remains the fpace 114,069 inches;
which therefore the falling globe ought to defcribe in
the fame time, if the veffel were very wide. But be-
caufe our veflel was narrow, the fpace ought to be di-
minifhed by about 0,895 °f an ' ncn And fo the -
fpace will remain 113,174 inches, which a globe fal-

ling in this vefTel ought nearly to defcribe in 15 feconds
by the theory. But by the experiment it defcribed
in inches. The difference is not fenfible.
Exper. 3. Three equal globes, whofe weights were
feverally 121 grains and 1 grain in water, were
in air,
fucceffively and they fell thro* the water in
let fall ;
the times 46", 47", and 50", defcribing a height of

112 inches.
By the theory thefe globes ought to have fallen in
about 40". Now whether their falling more flowly
were occafion'd from hence, that in flow motions the
refinance arifing from the force of inactivity, does
really bear a lefs proportion to the refiftance arifing from
other caufes ; or whether it is to be attributed to little
bubbles that might chance to flick to the globes, or to
the rarefaftion of the wax by the warmth of the wea-
ther, or of the hand that let them fall; or, laftly, whether
it proceeded from fome infcnfible errors in weighing the
globes in the water, I am not certain. Therefore the
weight of the globe in water fliould be of feveral grains,
trrat the experiment may be certain, and to be depended
on.
Exper. 4. I began the foregoing experiments to in-
veftigate the refinances of fluids, before I was ac-
quainted with the theory laid down in the propofitions
immediately preceding. Afterwards> in order to exa-
mine the theory after it was difcovered, I procured a
wooden
Digitized by Google
Sea. VII. of Natural Thilofophy. i s r
wooden vefTel, whole breadrh on the infide was 8 f

inches, and its depth 15 feet and j. Then I made
four globes of wax, with lead included, each of which
weighed 139 \ grains in air, and 7 grains in water.
-J-
Thefe I let fall, meafuring the times of their falling in

the water with a pendulum ofcillating to half feconds.
The globes were cold, and had remained fo fome time,
both when they were weighed and when they were let
fall ; becaufe warmth rarehes the wax, and by rarefying
it diminifties the weight of the globe in the water
;
and wax, when rarefied, is not inftantly reduced by
cold to its former denfity. Before they were let fall,
they were totally immerfed under water, left, by the
weight of any part of them that might chance to be
above the water, their defcent (hould be accelerated in
its beginning. Then, when after their immerfion they
were perfectly at reft, they were let go with thegreateft

care, that they might not receive any impulfe from
the hand that let them down. And they fell fuccef-
fivelyin the times of 47^, 487, 50 and 51 ofcillations,
defcribing a height of 1 5 feet and 2 inches. But the
weather was now a little colder than when the globes
were weighed, and therefore I repeated the experiment
another day; and then the globes fell in the times of
49> 49 i> 5° and 53 ; and at a third trial in the times
of 49 i> 50, 51 and 5} ofcillations. And by making
the experiment feveral times over, I found that the
globes fell moftly in the times of 49 \ and 50 ofcilla-
tions. W
hen they fell flower, I fufpeft them to have
been retarded by ftriking againft the fides of the vefTel.
Now, computing from the theory, the weight of
the globe in vacuo is 139 * grains. The excefs of
this weight above the weight of the globe in water
iji ^
grains, the diameter of the globe 0,99868 of
an inch, § parts of the diameter 2,663 if inches, the
fpace 2F 2,8066 inches, the fpace which a globe
weighing 7 \ grains falling without refiftance defcribes
L 4 in
Digitized by Google
f<f$
- Mathematical ^Principle; Book II.
in fecond of time 9,88154 inches,
a and the time
Go",j75843. Therefore the globe with the greatefi
velocity with which it is capable of defcending thro*
the water by the force of a weight of 7 ^ grains will in
the time o", 3 76843 defcribe a fpace of 2,8066 inches,
and in one fecond of time a fpace of 7,44766 inches,
and in the time 25", or in 50 ofcillations the fpace
186,15)15 inches. Subduft the fpace 1,3 86294 F or
1.9454 inches, and therewill remain the fpace 184,246"!
inches, which the globe will defcribe in that time in a
very wide veflel. Becaufe our veffel was narrow, let
this fpace be diminiftied in a ratio compounded of the
fubduplicate ratio of the orifice of the vefTel to the ex-
cefsof this orifice above half a great circle of the globe,
and of the fimple ratio of the fame orifice to its excefs
above a great circle of the globe ; and we lhall have
the fpace of 18 1,86 inches, which the globe ought by
the theory to defcribe in this vefTel in the time of 50
ofcillations, nearly. But it defcribed the fpace of 182
inches, by experiment, in 49- or 50 ofcillations.
E::plr. 5. Four globes, weighing 154 grains in
sir, and 21^ grains in water, being let fall feveral
times, fell in the times of 28*, 29, 29 \, and 30,
and fometimes of 31, 32, and 33 ofcillations, defcri-
bing a height of 15 feet and 2 inches.
They ought by the theory to have fallen in the time
of 29 ofcillations, nearly.
Exper. 6. Five globes weighing 212 -|
grains in
air, and 79 f in water, being feveral times let fall, fell
111the times of if, 157, 16, 17, and 18 ofcillations,

dcfcribing a height of 15 feet and 2 inches.
By the theory they ought to have fallen in the time
of 1 5 ofcillations, nearly.
'
Exper. 7. Four globes weighing 293 $ grains in
?
air
?
and 35 g ains J in water, being let fall feveral
fimes, in the times of 29^, 30, 30^, J I, 32,
fell
and * ^ ofcillations, defcribing a height of 1$ feet and
1 inch and },
"* *
'
' <
1
r •
5
By
> i - i t • • t \ \
Digitized by Go
Sea. VII. of Natural Thilofophy. t 5l
of 28 ofcillations, nearly.
In fearching for the caufe that occafioned thefe globes
of the fame weight and magnitude to fall, fome Iwifter
and fome flower , I hit upon this ; that the globes,
when they were firft let go and began to fall, ofcillated
about their centres, that fide which chanced to be the
heavier defcending firft, and producing an ofcillating
motion. Now by ofcillating thus, the globe commu-
nicates motion to the water, than if it de-
a greater
scended without any ofcillations ; and by this commu-
nication lofes part of its own motion with which it
fhould defcend ; and therefore as this ofcillation is
greater or lefs it will be more or lefs retarded. Be-
iides the globe always recedes from that fide of itfelf
which js defcending in the ofcillation, and by fo re-
ceding comes nearer to the fides of the vcffel fo as even
to ftrike againft them fometimes. And the heavier
the globes are, the ftronger this ofcillation is ; and
the greater they are, the more is the water agitated
by it. Therefore to diminifti this ofcillation of the
globes, I made new ones of lead and wax, flicking
the lead in one fide of the globe very near its furface
and I let fall the globe in fuch a manner, that as near
as poflible, the heavier fide might be loweft at the be-
ginning of the defcent. By this means the ofcilla-
tions becarpe much lefs than before, and the times in
which the globes fell were not fo unequal : as in the
following experiments.
Exper.8. Four globes weighing 139 grains in air
and 6 ~ in water, were let fall feveral times, and fell
moftly in the time of 5 1 ofcillations, never in more

than 52, or in fewer than 50 ; defcribing a height of
182, inches.
By the theory they ought to fall in about the time
of 51 ofcillations.
ExPER,
Digitized by Google
1 54. Mathematical Trincipks Book II.
Expfciu 9. Four globes weighing 275 J grains in

air, and 140^ in water, being feveral times let fall,
fell fewer than 12, and never more than 15
in nevet
of 182 inches.
ofcillations, defcribing a height
Thefe globes by the theory ought to have fallen in
the time of 11 f ofcillations, nearly*
Exper. 10. Four globes, weighing 584 grains in
air and 1 ipf in water, being let fall feveral times, fell
in the times of 17 18, 18 \ 9 and ip ofcillations, de-
fcribing a height of 181 f inches. And when they
fell in the time of 19 ofcillations, I fometimes heard
them hit againft the fides of the vefTcl before they
reached the bottom.
of if 9 ofcillations, nearly.
Exper. 1 1. Three equal globes, weighing 48 grains
in the air, and
f f in water, being feveral times let
3
fall, fell in the times of 437, 44,
44 45 and 46
ofcillations, and moiHy in 44 and 45, defcribing a
height of 182 inches nearly.
By the theory they ought to have fallen in the
time of 45 ofcillations and nearly.
Exper. 12. Three equal globes, weighing 141 grains
in air and 4 J in water, being let fall feveral times,
fell in the times of 61, 62, 65, 64 and 65 ofcilla-
tions, defcribing a fpace of 182 inches.

And by the theory they ought to have fallen in
647 ofcillations, nearly.
From it is manifeft, that when the
thefe experiments
globe* flowly, as in the fecond, fourth, fifth,
fell
eighth, eleventh, and twelfth experiments, the times

of falling are rightly exhibited by the theory ; but
when the globes fell more fwiftly as in the fixth,
ninth, and tenth experiments, the refiftance was fome-
what greater than in the duplicate ratio of the veloci-
ty. For the globes in falling ofcillate a little ; and
this ofcillation, in thofe globes that are light and fall
flowly,
Digitized by Googl
'Sea. VII. of Natural Thilofophy. 15,
flowly, foon ceafes by the weaknefs of the motion ;

but in greater and heavier globes, the motion being
ftrong, it continues longer ; and is not to be checked
by the ambient water, till after fevcral ofcillations.
BeGdes, the more fwiftly the globes move, the lefs are
they preffed by the fluid at their hinder parts; and if
the velocity be perpetually increafed, they will at
lift leave an empty fpace behind them, unlefs the com-
preflion of the fluid be increafed at the fame time.
For the compreflion of the fluid ought to be increafed
(by Prop. 32 and 33.) in the duplicate ratio of the
velocity, in order to prefcrve therefiftance in the fame
duplicate ratio. But becaufe this is not done, the
globes that move fwiftly are not fo much preffed at
their hinder parts as the others ) and by the defeS of
this preffure it comes to pafs that their refiftance is a
little greater than in a duplicate ratio of their velo-
city.
So that the theory agrees with the phenomena of
bodies falling in water; it remains that we examine the
phenomena of bodies falling in air.
Exper. 13. From the top of Su Paul's Church jn
London in Juneijio. there were let fall togethertwo glafs
globes, one full of quickfilver, the other of air ; and
in their fall they defcribed a height of 220 Engliflj feet.
A wooden table was fufpended upon iron hinges on
one fide, and the other fide of the fame was fupported
by a wooden pin The two globes lying upon this table
were let fall together by pulling out the pin by means
of an iron wire reaching from thence quite down to
the ground ; fo that, the pin being removed, the ta-
ble, which had then no fupport but the iron hinges,
fell downwards ; and turning round upon the hinges,
gave leave to the globes to drop off from it. At the

lame inftant, with the fame pull of the iron wire that
took out the pin, a pendulum ofcillating to feconds
was let go, and began to efcillate. The diameters and
weights
Digitized
1 5 6 Mathematical Trinciples Book II.
of the globes, and their times of falling, are exhibited

in the following table.
The globes filled with meircury. The globe air.
Timts in T** TrlC

4 ft
rtt* jr in
Weights. Diameters. falling.
Weights.
falling
908 Gr*/>// 0,$ of an inch 510 Grains 5,1 inches 8"i

983 0,8 4— 642 8
866 0,8 4 599 5>i 8
747 °>75 4+ 5i5 5>o
808 °>75 4 4-83 5,0 a
784 o,75 4 + 641 5>2 8
Buc the times obferved muft be correfted > for the

globes of mercury (by Galileo's theory) in 4 feconds
of time, will defcribe 257 Englifo feet, and 210 feet
in only 3" 42'". So that the wooden table, when the
pin was taken out, did not turn upon its hinges fo
quickly as it ought to have done ; and the flownefs of
that revolution hindered the defcent of the globes at
the beginning. For the globes lay about the middle
of the table, and indeed were rather nearer to the axis
upon which it turned, than to the pin. And hence
the times of falling were prolonged about 1 8'" ; and
therefore ought to be correfted by fubdufting that ex-
cefs, efpecially in the larger globes, which, by reafon
of the largenefs of their diameters, lay longer upon
the revolving table than the others. This being done,
the times in which the fix larger globes fell, will come
forth 8" 12"', 7" 42"', 7" 42'", 7" 57"', 8" 12"',
and 7" 42'".
Therefore the fifth in order among the globes that
were full of air, being 5 inches in diameter, and 483
grains in weight, fell in 8" 12'", defcribing a fpace of
220 feet. The weight of a bulk of water equal to
this globe is 16600 grains; and the weight of an equal
bulk of air is £ % * grains, or 19 ^
grains ; and there-
fore the weight of the globe in vacuo is 502 grains; A
and
Digitized by Google
Scft. VII. of Natural Thilofophy. i s7
and this weight is to the weight of a bulk of air

equal to the globe as 502 to 19 and fo is 2F to
f of the diameter of the globe, that is, to 1 3 f inches.
Whence 2F becomes 28 feet 11 inches. A globe fal-
ling in vacuo with its whole weight of 502 grains,
will in one fecond of time defcribe 193 f inches as
above j and with the weight of 483 grains will de-
fcribe 185,905 inches ; and with that weight 483
grains in vacuo will defcribe the fpace or 14 feec F
f± inches, in the time of 57"' 58"", and acquire the
greateft velocity it is capable of defcending with in
the air. With this velocity the globe in 8" 12"' of
time will defcribe 245 feet and 5 f inches. Subduft
1,3 8<^3F or 20 feet and £ an inch, and there remain
225 feet* 5 inches. This fpace therefore the falling
globe ought by the theory to defcribe in 8" 12'".
But by the experiment it defcribed a fpace of 220 feet.
The difference is infenfible.
By like calculations applied to the other globes full
of air, I compofed the following table.
The times of
The fpaces which the)
The weights The diame- falling fr»m
tumid defcribe by the Thi Exteffts.
tf the glebes. ters. a height ef
theory.
2ao fft.
$10 Xr**M ^1 inches 8" 12"' - 226/"* II imhe> frfoot 1 1

inches
642 7 42 230 9 10 9
599 7 42 227 10 7 10
5i5 5 7 57 224 5 4 5
483 8 12 225 5 5 5
641 ^2 1
7 4* 230 7 10 7
Exper. 14. Anno 1719. in the month of J»}j*

Dr. Dcfagulicrt made fome experiments of this kind
again, by forming hogs bladders into fphaerical orbs
which was done by means of a concave wooden fphere,
which the bladders, being wetted well firft, were put
info. After that, being Uowp full of air, they were
.1 obliged
Digitized by Google
i 5 8 Mathematical Principles Book II,
obliged to fill up the fphaertcal cavity that

contained
them and then* when dry, were taken out. Thefe
;
were let fall from the lantern on the top of the cupola
of the fame church; namely^ from a height of zyz
feet ; and at the fame moment of time there was let
fall a leaden globe whofe weight was about z pounds
Troy weight. And in the mean time fqme perfons

ftanding in the upper part of the qhijrch where the
globes were let fall, obferved the whole times of fal-
ling ; and others ftanding on the ground obferved the
differences of the times between the fall of the leaden
weighr, and the faH of the bladder. The times were
mealured by pendulums ofcill^ting to half feconds.
And one of thofe that flood upon the ground had a
machine vibrating four times in one fecond and an- >'
other had another machine accurately made with a pen-

dulum vibrating four times in a fecond alfo. One of
thofe alfo who flood at the top of the church had a
like machine. And thefe inftruments were fo con-
trived, that their motions could be flopped or re-
newed at pleafure. Now the leaden globe fell in about
lour feconds and % of time ; and from the addition of
this time to the difference of time above fpoken of,
was colle&ed the whole time in which the bladder was
falling. The times which the five bladders fpent in
falling after the leaden globe had reached the ground
were the firft time, 14^", 12^",
H*"* I 7i"> anc*
itff" and the fecond time 14^ ", 14^', 14", 19" and
1
t6jf\ Add to thefe 4^", the time in which the leaden

globe was falling, and the whole times in which the
live bladders fell, were, the firft time 19", 17", i8|",
22" aodnV't and the fecond time, t%\\ i8£ , i8f,
23^" and 21". The times obferved at the top of the
church were, the firft time, i5>|", 175", 18*'', n\"
and 2 if; and the fecond time, 19", 18*", i8£",
24" and 2.1 %'\ But the bladders did not always fall
di-
Digitized by Google
Sea. VII. of Natural Tbilofophy. j 59
diredtly down,
but fometimes fluttered a little in the
air, and waved
to and fro as they were defcending.
And by thefe motions the times of their falling were
prolonged, and increafed by half a fecond fometimes,
and fometimes by a whole fecond. The fecond and
fourth bladder fell moft diredly the firft time, and
the firft and third the fecond time. The fifth bladder
was wrinkled, and by its wrinkles was a little re-
tarded. I found their diameters by their circumfe-
rences meafured with a very fine thread wound about
them twice. In the following table I have compared
the experiments with the theory ; making the denfity
of air to be to the denfity of rain-water as i to8<5o,
and computing the fpaces which by the theory the
globes ought to defcribe in falling.
The weights The timet of The /paces which by

The diame- The difference be-
falling from the theory tight to
•f the blad- 1
tween the theory a nr,

ders* ters. a height of have been defcribed
the experiments.
27a foot. in thoft times.
//
128 grams 5,28 >9 27 I I
iwhes 1
—— 0 foot \inck
156 SM9 17 272 +0 0!^

137-" 5*3 iS';
,
272 7 +0 7
97- 5,26 22 2 77 4 +5 4
99i 5 282 0 + 10 0
Our theory therefore exhibits rightly, within a very

little, all the refiftance that globes moving either in air
or in water meet with ; which appears to be propor-
tional to the denfities of the fluids in globes of equal
velocities and magnitudes.
In the fcholium fubjoined to the fixth fe&ion, we
fticwed by experiments of pendulums, that the refif-
tances of equal and equally fwift globes moving in air,
water, and quickfilver, are as the denfities of the fluids.
We here prove the fame more accurately by experi-
ments of bodies falling in air and water. For pendu*
terns at each ofcillation excite a motion in the fluid ai-
yay*
Digitized
160 Mathematical Principles Book II,
ways contrary to the motion^ of rhe pendulum in its
return ; and the refiftancc ariling from this motion, as
alfo the refiftance of the thread by which the pendu-
lum is fufpended, makes the whole refiftance of a pen-*
dulum greater than the refiftance deduced from the ex-
periments of falling bodies. For by the experiments of
pendulums defenbed in that fcholium, a globe of the
fame denficy as water in defcribing the length of its
femidiameter in air would lofe the— part of its mo-
tion. But by the theory delivered in this feventh
fefiion, and confirmed by experiments of falling bo-
dies, the fame globe in defcribing the fame kngth
would lofe only a part of its motion equal to -~
fuppofing the denfity of water to be to the denfity of
air as 860 to I. Therefore the refiftances were found
greater by the experiments of pendulums (for the rea-
sons juft mentioned) than by the experiments of fal-
ling globes ; and that in the ratio of about 4 to 5. But
yet fince the refiftances of pendulums ofcillating in air,
water, and quickfilver, are alike increafed by like
caufes, the proportion of the redftances hi thefe me-
diums will be rightly enough exhibited by the experi-
ments of pendulums, as well as by the experiments of
falling bodies. And from all this it may be concluded,
that the refiftances of bodies, moving in any fluids
whatfjever, tho* of the moft extreme fluidity, are,
cateris paribus, as the denfities of the fluids*
Thefe things being thus eftablifhed, we may now
determine what part of its motion any globe proje&ed
in any fluid whatfoever would nearly lofe in a given
time. Let D be the diameter of the globe, and V its
velocity at the beginning of its motion, and T the

time in which a globe with the velocity V can de-
fcribe in vacuo a (pace that is to the fpace j D as the
denfity oi the globe to the denfity of the fluid ; and
vthe globe proje&ed in that fluid will, in any other
Digitized by Google
Scd. VIL of Natural Thilofophf 1 61
time
t V
lofe the part jrj^} 9 the P art
TV
t, remain *
T~\~~t
ing ; and which may be to that
will defcribe a fpace,
defcribed the fame time in vacuo with the uni-
in
form velocity V, as the logarithm of the number
T4-
—^ 1 — multiplied by the number 2,3025 85095 is to
the number ~ 9 by cor. 7. prop. 35. In flow mo-

tions the refinance may be a little lefs, becaufe the
figure of a globe more adapted to motion than the
is
figure of a cylinder defcribed with the fame diameter.

In fwift motions the refinance may be a little greater,
becaufe the elafticity and compreflion of the fluid do
not increafe in the duplicate ratioof the velocity. Buc
no notice of.
thefe little niceties I take
And tho' air, water, quick filver, and the like fluids,
by the divifion of their parts in infinitum, fliould be
fubtilifced and become mediums infinitely fluid ; ne-
verthelefs, the refiftance they would make to proje&ed
globes would be the fame. For the refiftance confider'd
in the preceding propofitions, arifes from the inaftivity
of the matter; and the inactivity of matter is eflential
to bodies, and always proportional to the quantity of
matter. By the divifion of the parts of the fluid, the
refiftance arifing from the tenacity and friftion of the
parts may be indeed diminilhed but the quantity of
;
matter will not be at diminilhed by this divifion;

all
and if the quantity of matter be the fame, its force of

inactivity will be the fame ; and therefore the refiftance
here fpoken of will be the fame, as being always pro-
portional to that force. To diminifh this refiftance*
the quantity of matter in the fpaces thro* which the
bodies move muft be diminilhed. And therefore the
celeftial fpaces, thro* which the globes of the Planets
and Comets are perpetually pafling towards all parts,

Vol. II. M with
Digitized by Google
1 6z Mathematical Principles Book HJ
with the utmoft freedom, and without the leaft fenfible
diminution of their motion, rhuft be utterly void of
any corporeal fluid, excepting perhaps fome extremely
rare vapours, and the rays of light.
Projectiles excite a motion in fluids as they pafs thro'
them ; and this motion arifes from the excefs of the
prelTure of the fluid at the fore -parts of the pro-
jectile above the preflure of the fame at the hinder
parts ; and cannot be lefs in mediums infinitely fluid,
than it is in air, water, and quickfilver, in proportion
to trie denfity of matter in each. Now this excefs of
prefTure does, in proportion to its quantity, not only
excite a motion in the but alfo acts upon the
fluid,
projectile fo as to retard itsmotion : and therefore the
refiftance in every fluid is as the motion excited by the
projectile in the fluid ; and cannot be lefs in the mod
iubtile aether in proportion to the denfity of that aether,
than it is in air, water, and quickfilver, in proportion
to the denfities of thofe fluids.
SEC-
Digitized by Google
Seft. VIII. of Natural Thilofophy; i<j 3
SECTION VIII.
Of motion propagated thro1 fluids.
'
^
frtopositioH XLI. Theorem XXXII.

' P reIfure w* propagated thro*a fluid in
rectilinear directions, utilefs where the par-
ticles of the fluid lie in a right line. PI. S.
Fig. i.
t( the particles d 9 b, c> d, e9 lie in a right fine, the

preffure may be indeed dire&ly propagated from a to
t » but then the particle e will urge the obliquely po-
fited particles / and g obliquely, and thofe particles /

and g will not fuftain this preffure, unlefs they be fup-
ported by the particles h and lying beyond them ;
but the particles that fupport them, are alfo preffed
by them ; and thofe particles cannot fuftain that pref-
fure, without being fupported by, and prefflng upon,
thofe particles that lie ftill farther, as / and y and m
fo on in infinitum. Therefore the preffure, as foon as
it is propagated to particles that lie out of right lines,
begins to defied towards one hand and t'other, and

will be propagated obliquely in infinitum ; and after it
has begun to be propagated obliquely, if it reaches
tiore diftant particles lying out of the right line, it
defleS again on each hand ; and this it will do as

:
M
*
~~
often
Digitized by Google
1
often as it lights on particles that do not lie exactly in a

right line. O.E.D.
Cor. If any part of a prefliire, propagated thro' a
fluid from a given point, be intercepted by any ob-
ftacle; the remaining part, which is not intercepted, will

defied into the fpaces behind the obftacle. This may
be demonftrated alfo after the following manner. Let
a preflure be propagated from the point A
(PL 8. Fig*
2.) towards any part, and, if it be poflible, in re<5h-
linear directions ; and the obftacle NB CK
being per-
forated in B C, let all the preflure be intercepted but
'
the coniform part .^POpafling tnro tne circular hole

'
B C. Let the cone APQbt

divided into fruftums by
the tranfverfe planes de, fg, hi. Then while the cone
ABC, propagating the preflure, urges the conic fruftum
degf beyond it on the fuperficies de9 and this fruftum
urges the next fruftum fgih on the fuperficies fg, and
that fruftum urges a third fruftum, and fo in infi-
nitum ; it is manifeft (by the third law) that the firll
fruftum defg is, by the reaftion of the fecond fruftum
fghi, as much urged and preffed on the fuperficies
fg> as it urges and preffes that fecond fruftum. There-
fore the fruftum degf is comprefled on both fides, that
is, between the cone Ade and the fruftum fhig ; and
therefore (by cafe 6. prop. 10.) cannot preferve its

figure, unl«fs it be comprefled with the fame force on
all fides. Therefore with the fame force with which it
is prefled on the fuperficies de,
fg, it will endeavour
to break forth at the fides dfi eg ; and there (being
not in the leaft tenacious or hard, but perfectly fluid)
it will run out, expanding itfelf, unlefs there be an
ambient fluid oppoling that endeavour. Therefore,
by the effort it makes to run out, it will prefs the am-
bient fluid, at its fides df9 eg, with the fame force that
it does the fruftum fghi; and therefore the preflure
will be propagated as much from the fides df, eg into
the fpaces NO, KLthis way and that way, as it
is
Digitized by Google
ScO:. VIII. of Natural Thilofophf. 16$
is propagated from the fuperficies fg towards PC
Q. E.D.
Proposition XLII. Theorem XXXIII.

All motion propagated thro* a fluid\ diverges
from a rectilinear progrefs into the unmoved
fpaces. PI. 8. Fig. 3.
Case i. Let a motion be propagated from the

point A thro* the hole B C, and, if itbe poffible, let
itproceed in the conic fpace B CQP according to right
linesdiverging from the point A. And let us firfl fup-
pofe this motion to be that of waves in the furface of
ftanding water; and let dc, fg> hi> kj, &c. be the tops
of the feveral waves, divided from each other by as
many intermediate valleys or hollows. Then, becaufe
the water in the ridges of the waves is higher than in
theunmoved parts of the fluid KL> NO, it will run
down from off the tops of thofe ridges e y g , i, /, &c.
djfhy^y &c. this way and that way towards and KL
NO; and becaufe the water is more depreflfed in the
hollows of the waves than in the unmoved parts of the
fluid KLy NO, it will run down into thofe hollows
out of thofe unmoved parts. By the firft deflux the

ridges of the waves will dilate themfelves this way and
that way, and be propagated towards and NO. KL
And becaufe the motion of the waves from towards A
Pj2 is carried on by a continual deflux from the ridges
oPthe waves into the hollows next to them ; and
therefore cannot be fwifter than in proportion to the
celerity of the defcent ; and the defcent of the water
on each fide towards KL

and NO
muft be performed
with the fame velocity ; it follows, that the dilatation
of the waves on each fide towards KL and 7V0 will
be propagated with the fame velocity as the waves them*
M 5 felves
Digitized by Google
1 66 Mathematical principles Book H _
felvesgo forward with, direftly from to PQ. A

Artel
therefore the whole fpace this way and that way to—
wards KL and NO
will be filled by the dilated waves
rfgr> skis, tkjt, vtnnvy &c. O.E.D. That thefe

things are fo, any one may find by making the experi-
ment in ftill water.
Case 2. Let us fuppofe that dt, fg, hi, kj> mrz*
reprefent pulfes fucceffively propagated from the point
A thro' an medium. Conceive the pulfes to be
elaftic
propagated by fucceffive condenfations and rarefaftions
of the medium, fo that the denfeft part of every pulfe
may occupy a fphaerical fuperficies aefcribed about the
centre A, and that equal intervals intervene between the
fucceflive pulfes. Let the lines de,fg, hi, kj% &c*
reprefent the denfeft parts of the pulfes, propagated
thro' the hole B C ; and becaufe the medium is denfer
there, than in thefpaces on either fide towards KL arid
NO, it will dilate itfelf as well towards thofe /paces
KL, NO on each hand, as towards the rare intervals;
between the pulfes ; and thence the medium becoming"
always more rare next the intervals, and more denfenext
the pulfes, will partake of their motion. And becaufe the
progreflive motion of the pulfes arifes from the perpe-
tual relaxation of the denfer parts towards the antece-
dent rare intervals ; and fince the pulfes will relax
thernfejves on each hand towards the quiefcent parts of
the medium KL, NO, with very near the fame ce-
lerity ; therefore the pulfes will dilate themfelves on all
fides into the unmoved parts KL, NO, with almoft

the fame celerity with which they are propagated di-
rectlyfrom the centre ; A
and therefore will fill up
the whole fpace KLON.
Q.E.D. And we find
the fame by experience alfo in founds, which are heard
t ho* a mountain interpofe ; and if they come into a
charpber thro^ the window, dilate themfelves into all
the parts of the room, and are heard in every corner ;
and not as reflected from the oppbfite walls, but di-
rectly
Digitized by Google
Scd.VIII. of Natural Thilofophy. 167
refily propagated from the window, as far as our fenfe
can judge.
Case 3. laftly, that a motion of
Let us fuppofe
any kind ispropagated from A
thro' the hole B C.
Then fince tne caufe of this propagation is, that the
parts of medium that are near the centre
the difturb A
and agitate thofewhich lie farther from it ; and fince
the parts which are urged are fluid, and therefore re-
cede every way towards thofe fpaces where they are
lefs preffed, they will by confequence recede towards
all the parts of the quiefcent medium ; as well to the
parts on each hand, as KL and NO y as to thofe right
before as PQj and by this means all the motion, as
foon as it has parted thro' the hole B C, will begin to
dilate itfelf, and from thence, as from its principle
and centre, will be propagated dire&ly every way*
Q*E. Z).
Proposition XLIII. Theorem XXXIV.

Every tremulous body in an elaftic medium
propagates the motion of the pulfes on every
fide right forward > but in a non-elaftic mem
dium excites a circular motion.
Case i. The parts of the tremulous body alternated

ly going and returning, do in going urge and drive
before them thofe parts of the medium that lie neareft,
and by that impulfe comprefs and condenfe them ; and
in returning lufFer thofe comprefTed parts to recede
again and expand themfelves. Therefore the parts of
themedium that lieto the tremulous body,
neareft
move to and fro by turns, in like manner as the parts
of the tremulous body itfelf do; and for the fame
caufe that the parts ot this body agitate thefe parts of
the medium, thefe parts being agitated by like tremors,
'
Ml 4 will
Digitized by Google
168 Mathematical Principles BookIL
will in their turn agitate others next to themfelves, and
thefe others agitated in like manner, will agitate thofe
that lie beyond them, and fo on in infinitum. And
in the fame manner as the firft parts of the medium
were condenfed in going, and relaxed in returning, fo
will the other parts be condenfed every time they go, and
expand themfelves every time they return. And there •
fore they will not be all going and all returning at the
fame inftant, (for in that cafe they would always pre-
ferve determined diftances from each other, and there
could be no alternate condenfation and rarefaction ;) but
fince in the places where they are condenfed, they ap-
proach to, and in the places where they are rarefied*
recede from, each other ; therefore fome of them will
be going while others are returning; and fo on in infi-
nitum. The parts fo going, and in their going con-
denfed, are pulfes, by leafon of the progreuive motion
with which they ftrike obftacles in their way ; and
therefore the fucceflive pulfes produced by a tremulous
body, will be propagated in rediiinear directions ; and
that at nearly equal diftances from each other, becaufe
of the equal intervals of time in which the body, by
its fevcral tremors, produces the feveral pulfes. And
*tho* the parts of the tremulous body go and return in
fome certain and determinate direction, yet the pulfes
propagated from thence thro' the medium, will dilate
themfelves towards the fides, by the foreeoing propo-
rtion ; and will be propagated on all fides from that
tremulous body, as from a common centre, in fupei ficies
nearly fphaerical and concentrical. An example of this
we have in waves excited by (baking a finger in water,
which proceed not only forwards and backwards agree-
ably to the motion of the finger, but fpread themfelves
in the manner of contentrical -circles all round the fin-
ger, and are propagated on every fide. For the gravity
pf the water fupplies the place of claftic force.
•
*
Ca$1
Digitized by Google
Sea VIII. of Natural Thilofofhy. 159
Case 2. If the medium be not elaftic, then, be-
caufe its parts cannot be condenfed by the preflure ari-
fing from the vibrating parts of the tremulous body,
the motion will be propagated in an inftant towards the
parts where the medium yields moft eafily, that is, to
the parts which the tremulous body leaves for fome
time vacuous behind it. The cafe is the fame with
that of a body projected in any medium whatever. A
medium yielding to projectiles does not recede in infi-
nitum, but with a circular motion comes round to the
fpaces which the body leaves behind it. Therefore as
often as a tremulous body tends to any part, the me-
dium yielding to it comes round in a circle to the parts
which the body leaves ; and as often as the body re-
turns to the firfl: place, the medium will be driven from
the place it came round to, and return to its original
place. And tho' the tremulous body be not firm and
hard, but every way flexible ; yet if it continue of a
given magnitude, fince it cannot impel the medium by
its tremors any where without yielding to it fomewhere
elfe; the medium receding from the parts where it is

prefted, will always come round in a circle to the parts
that yield to it. Q. E. D.
Cor, 'Tis a miftake therefore to think, as fome
have done, that the agitation of the parts of flame con-
duces to the propagation of a preflure in rectilinear di-
rections thro* an ambient medium. A
preflure of that
kind muft be derived, not from the agitation only of
the parts of flame, but from the dilatation of the whole.
Pro*
Digitized by Google
i?o Mathematical Trincipks Book IL
Proposition XLIV. Theorem XXXV.

If water afcend and defcend alternately in the
eretted legs K L, MN
of a canal or pipe $
and a pendulum be conftruffed, whofe length
between the point of fufpenjion and the cen-
tre of ojcillation is equal to half the length
of the water in the canal : I fay, that the
water will afcend and defcend in the fame
times in which the pendulum ofcillates. PL 8
Fig. 4-
I mcafure the length of the water along the axes of

' the canal and its legs, and make it equal to the fum of
thofe axes ; and take no notice of the refiftance of the
water, ariling from its attrition by the fides of the
canal. Let therefore AB> CD reprefent the mean
height of the water in both legs ; and when the water
in the leg KL
afcendsto the height EF, the water will
defcend in the leg MNxo the height G H. Let P be
a pendulous body, VP the thread, J*" the point of fuf-
penfion, RPQS the cycloid which the pendulum de-
fcribes, Pits loweft point, P O^zn arc equal to the
height AE. The force, with which the motion of the
water is accelerated and retarded alternately, is the ex-
cefs of the weight of the water in one leg above the
weight and therefore, when the water in
in the other ;
the leg KLafcends to £ J, and in the other leg de-

fends to G tly that force is double the weight of the
water EABF, and therefore is to the weight of the
whole water as AE
or P<? to VP or PR. The force
alfo with which the body P is accelerated or retarded in
any place as <3 of a cycloid, is (by cor. prop. 51.)
to its whole weight, as its diftance POjvom the loweft
place P to the length P R of the cycloid. Therefore
the motive forces of the water and pendulum, defers
Digitized by Google
Sc(k. VIII of Natural Thilofophy. 17
ting the equal fpaces AE, PO^zn the weights to
as
be moved ; and therefore if the water and pendulum
are quiefcent at firft, thofe forces will move them in
equal times, and will caufe them to go and return to-
gether with a reciprocal motion. O. E.D.
Cor. i. Therefore the reciprocations of the water
in afcending and defcending, are all performed in equal
times, whether the motion be more or lefs intenfe or
remifs.
Cor. 2. If the length of the whole water in the canal
be of 6f feet of French meafure, the water will dc-
fcend inonefecond of time, and will afcend in another
fccond, and fo on by turns in infinitum for a pendu- ;
lum of 3 j\ fuch feet in length will ofcillate in one fe-

cond of time.
Cor. 3. But if the length of the water be increafed
or diminiihed, the time of the reciprocation will be
increafed or diminiihed in the fubduplicate ratio of the
length.
Proposition XLV. Theorem XXXVL

The velocity of waves is in the fubduplicate
ratio of the breadths.
This follows from the conftruftion of the following

propoimon.
Proposition XL VI. Problem X.

To find the velocity of
* i
waves.
.
f
Let a pendulum be conftru&ed, vhofe length be-
tween the point of fufpenfion and the centre of ofcil-
lation is equal to the breadth of the waves ; and in the
time that the pendulum will perform one fingle ofcil-
- *
«
lation,
Digitized by Google
1
172 Mathematical 'Principles Book II.
lation, the waves will advance forward nearly a fpace

equal to their breadth.
That which I call the breadth of the waves
is the
tranfverfe meafure lying between the deepeft part of

the hollows, or the tops of the ridges. Let ABCDEF
(PL 8. Fig.j.) reprefent the furface of ftagnant water
afcending and defcending in fucceffive waves ; and let
Ay C, £, &c. be the tops of the waves ; and let
B y D,F, &c. be the intermediate hollows. Becaufe the
motion of the waves is carried on by the fucceffive af-
cent and defcent of the water, fo that the parts thereof,
as Ay C, Ey &c. which are higheft at one time, become
loweft immediately after and becaufe the motive
,*
force, by which the higheft parts defcend and the low-

eft afcend, is the weight of the elevated water, that al-
ternate afcent and defcent will be analogous to the re-
ciprocal motion of the water in the canal, and obferve
the fame laws as to the times of its afcent and defcent ;
and therefore (by prop. 44.) if the diftances between
the higheft places of the waves A, C, Ey and the loweft
By Dy F, be equal to twice the length of any pendu-
lum, the higheft parts Ay C, £, will become the loweft
in the time of one ofcillation, and in the time of an-
other ofcillation will afcend again. Therefore between
the paffage of each wave, the time of two ofcillations
will intervene; that is, the wave will defcribe its
breadth in the time that pendulum will ofcillate twice
but a pendulum of four times that length, and which
therefore is equal to the breadth of the waves, will juft
ofcillate once in that time. O. E. I.
Cor. 1. Therefore waves, whofe breadth is equal
to 3 f-g French feet, will advance thro'
a fpace equal
to their breadth in one fecond of time ; and therefore
in one minute will go over a fpace of 183 j feet; and
in an hour a fpace of 11000 feet, nearly.
Cor. i; And the velocity of greater or lefs waves will
be augmented or diminiflied in the fubduplicate ratio of
their breadth, Thefe
Digitized by Google
Digitized by Google
Sea. VIII. of Natural Thilofophy. i 7l
Thefe things are true upon the fuppofition, tbac
the parts of water afcend or defcend in a right line
but in truth, that afcent and defcent is rather performed
in a circle ; and therefore I propofe the time defined by
this proportion as only near the truth.
Proposition XLVII.Theorem XXXVII.

If pulfes are propagated thro* a fluid, the fe-
deral particles of the fluid, going and re-
turning with the Jhortefl reciprocal motion*
are always accelerated or retarded according
•
to the law oftheofcillating pendulum. PL 9-
Fig. 1.
Let A By BC, CD, Sec. reprefent equal diftances of

fucceffive pulfes ; JBC of the
the line of direction
motion of the fucceflive pulfes, propagated from to A
B ; E y Fy G three phyfical points of the quiefcent me-
dium fituate in the right line AC at equal diftances
from each other; Ee Ff, Gg equal fpacescf extreme
y
ftiortnefs, thro* which thofe points go and return with

a reciprocal motion in each vibration ; «, <p, y any in-
termediate of the fame points; and E F9 FG

places
phyfical lineolae, or linear parts of the medium lying
between thofe points, and fucceflively transfer'd into
the places t^, (py, and efifg. Let there be drawn
the right line PS equal to the right line Ee. Bifeft
the fame in O, and from the centre O, with the inter-
val OP y defcribe the circle SIPi. Let the whole
time of one vibration, with its proportional parts, be
expounded by the whole circumference of this circle
and its parts; in fuch fort, that when any time P Hot
PHSb is compleated, if there be let fall to PS the
perpendicular HL or hly and there be taken Et equal
to PL or Pit the phyfical point E may be found in *.
A
4
Digitized by Google
Mathematical Trinciples Book II,
A point as E moving according to this law with a re-

ciprocal motion, in its going from E thro' e to e, and
returning again thro' i to £, will perform its Ieveral
vibrations with the fame degrees of acceleration and re-
tardation with thofe of an ofcillating pendulum. We
are now to prove, that the fevcral phyfical points of
the medium will be agitated with fuch
kind of mo-
a
tion. Let us fuppofe then, that a medium hath fuch

& motion excited in it from any caufe whatfoever, an<t
confider what will follow from thence.
In the circumference PHSh
let there be taken trie
equal arcs HI, IK, or hi, il^ having the fame ratio
to the whole circumference as the equal right lines EF,
FG have to BC the whole interval of the pulfes. Let
fall the perpendiculars I Af,KN or im> kn ; then be-
caufe the points E F^G
y are fucceffively agitated with
like motions, and perform their entire vibrations com-
pofed of their going and return, while the pulfe is
rransferr'd from B to C, if PH
or PHSh be the time
elapfed fince the beginning of the motion of the point
E, then will PI or PHSibe the time elapfed fince the
beginning of the motion of the point F, and or PK
PHSl^thc time elapfed fince the beginning of the
motion of the point G ; and therefore JEi, F(f, Gy
will be refpeftively equal to PL, P M% P N> while
the points are going, and to PUPm+Pn, when the
points are returning. Therefore gy or EG-\-Gy —
Ei will, when the points are going, be equal to EG
— LAT9 and in their return equal to EG-\-ln. But
ty is the breadth or expanfion of the part E G of the
medium in the place ty ; and therefore the expanfion
of that part in its going, is to its mean expanfion as
EG — LN to EG
; and in its return as E
G -\-ln or
EG-\-LNto EG. Therefore fince LN
is to KH
as IMio the radius OP, and toKH EG as the cir-
cumference PHShP
toBC ; that is, if we put for V
the radius of a circle whole circumference is equal to
BQ
Digitized by Google
Sfcft. VIII. of Natural Thilofdphj. i 7s
BC the interval of the pulfes, as OP to V
and, ex
;
aequo* L AT to EG as IMtoV; the expanfion of the

part EG or of the phyfical point
in the place ty F
to the mean expanfion of the fame part in its firft place
EG will be
9 V as to IM V
in going, and as V4-# m
to Vin its return. Hence the elaftic force of the
point F
in the place c y to its mean elaftic force in the
place EG* is as to ~ in its going, and as
\-\-tm
f
.
— to 4rV * n lts return. And by
J the fame reafon-
ing the elaftic forces of the phyfical points E and G in

so\nc% at e as d —— - and to — : and the
difference of the forces to the mean elaftic force of the

HL — KN
medium* as
VV — VxHL — VxKN-\~ HLxKN
HL — KN to — or
— as HL —
I , . i
to ; that as is, ,
KN to V ; if we fuppofe (by reafon of the very

ftiort extent of the vibrations) and HL
to be in- KN
definitely lefs than the quantity V. Therefore fince
the quantity V is given, the difference of the forces is
asHL — KN; that is, (becaufe is pro- HL—KN

portional to HK y and OM 01 ox OP
and becaufe
to ;
HK and OP are given) zs OM;

that is, if Ff be
bife&ed in ft, as ft q>. And for the fame reafon the dif-
ference of the of the phyfical points *
elaftic forces
and y of the phyfical lineola *y, is as
in the return
a 0. But that difference (that is, the excefs of the
elaftic force of the point € above the elaftic force of
the point y) is the very force by which the inter-
vening phyfical lineola %y of the medium is accele-
rated in going, and retarded in returning ,* and there-
fore the accelerative force of the phy fical lineola % y is
Digitized by Google
»
as its from Zl the middle place of the vibra*

diftance
tion. Therefore (by prop. 38. book u) the time is
rightly expounded by the arc PI ; and the linear pare
of the medium t y is moved according to the law above-
mentioned, chat is, according to the law of a pendulum
ofcillating ; and the cafe is the fame of all the linear
parts of which rhe whole medium is compounded.,
£K E. D.
"Cor. Hence it appears that the number of the pulfes
propagated is the fame with the number of the vibra-
tions of the tremulous body, and is not multiplied in
their progrefs. For the phyfical lineola t y as foon as
it returns to its firft place is at reft ; neither will it
move again, unlefs it receives a new motion, either

from the impulfe of the tremulous body, or of rhe
pulfes propagated from that body. As foon therefore
as tlYe pulfes ceafe to be propagated from the tremulous
body, it will return to a ftate of reft ; and move no
more.
•
Proposition XLVIII. Theorem XXXVIII.

The velocities ofpulfes propagated in anelajlic
fluid, are in a ratiocompounded of the fub-
duplicate ratio of the elaflic force diretfly,
and the fubduplicate ratio of the denfity in-
verfely ; fuppojing the elaflic force of the
fluid to be proportional to its condenfatton.
Case i. If the mediums be homogeneous, and the

diftances of the pulfes in thole mediums be equal amongft
themfelves, but the motion in one medium is more in-
tenfe than in the other : the contractions and dilatations
of the correfpondent parts will be as thofe motions.
Not that this proportion is perfectly accurate. How-
ever, if the contractions and dilatations are nor ex-
ceedingly intenfe, the error will not be fenfible ; and
there-
Digitized by Google
Se£h VII. of Natural Thilofbphy: 1 77
therefore this proportion may be confider'd phyfi*
as
cally exa<5t Now the motive elaftic forces are as the
contractions and dilatations ; and the velocities gene-
rated in the fame time in equal parts are as the forces*
Therefore equal and correfpondmg parts of correfpond-
ing pulfes will go and return together, thro* fpaces pro-
portional to their contractions and dilatations, with
velocities that are as thofe fpaces : and therefore th$
pulfes, which in the time of one going and returning
advance forwards a fpace equal to their breadth, and
arealways fucceeding into the places of the pulfes that
immediately go before them, will, by reafori of the
equality of the diftances, go forward in both mediums
with equal velocity.
Case 2. If the diftances of the 'pulfes or their
lengths are greater in one medium than in another; let
us fuppofe that the correfporident parts defcribe fpaces;
in going and returning, each time proportional to the
breadths of the pulfes : then will their contractions
and dilatations be equal. And therefore if the mediums
are homogeneous, the motive elaftic forces, which agi-
tate them with a reciprocal motion, will be equal alfo.
Now the matter to be moved by thefe forces is as the
breadth of the pulfes ; and the fpace thro' which they
move every time they go and return, is in the fame
ratio. And moreover, the time of one going and return-
ing, is in a ratio compounded of the fubduplicate ratio
of the matter, and the fubduplicate ratio of the fpace }

and therefore is as the fpace. But the pulfes advance
a fpace equal to their breadths in the timesof going
once and returning once, that is, they go over fpaces
proportional to the times ; and therefore are equally
iwifr.
Case And therefore in mediums of equal denfity
and elaftic force, all the pulfes are equally fwifr. Now
ifthe denfity or the elaftic force of the medium were
augmented, then becaufe the motive force is increafed
Vol. II. N *g
Digitized by Google
»
ifi Mathematical Trinciples Book: II.

in the ratio of the elaftic force, and the matter to be
moved is increafed in the ratio of the denfity,- the time
which is neceflary for producing the fame motion a*
before, will be increafed in the fubduplicate ratio of
thedenfity, and will be diminimed in the fubduplicate
ratio of the elaftic force* And therefore the velocity
of rhe pulfes will be in a ratio compounded of the Tub-*
duplicate ratio of the denfity of the medium inverfely*
and the fubduplicate ratio of rhe elaftic force direftlyv
CLE. D.
This propofition will be made more clear from tha
conftruftion of the following problem.
Proposition XLIX. Problem XL

The denfity and elaftic force of a medium being
given, to find the velocity of the pulfes.
Suppofe the medium to be prefs'd by an incumbent

weight after the manner of our air ; and let A be the
height of a homogeneous medium, whofe weight is equal
to the incumbent weight and whofe denfity is the
fame with the denfity of the coroprcfTed medium ii*
which the pulies are propagated. Suppofe a pendulum
to be conftru&ed, whole length between the point of
fufpcnfion and the centre of ofcillation is A : and in
the time in which that pendulum will perform one en-'
tire ofcillation compofed of its going and returning!
the pulfe will be propagated right onwards, thro' a
fpace equal to the circumference of a circle defcribed
with the radius A.
For letting thofe things ftand which were conftruft-
ed in Prop. 47. if any phyfical line as EF {PL 9. Fig.
1.) defcribing the fpace PS in each vibration, be
a&ed on in the extremities P and S of every going and
return that it makes by an elaftic force that is equal
to its weight ; it will perform its feveral vibrations in
•*————— * - 1
the
Digitized by Google
t
Sea. VIII, 6f Natural Thilofophp i 79

thetime in which the fame might ofciilate in a cycloid,
whofe whole peririieter is equal to the length PS : and
that becaufe ecfual forces will impel equal corpufcles
thro* equal fpaces in the fame or equal times. There-
fore fmce the times or the ofciHations are in the fubdu-*
plicate ratio of the lengths of the pendulums, and the
length of the pendulum is equal to half the arc of the
whole cycloid ; the time of one vibration would be to

the time of the ofcillation of a pendulum, whofe length
is A, in the fubduplicate ratio of the length *PS or PO
to the length A. But the with which the
elaftic force,
^hyfical lineola EG
is urged, when it is found in its
extreme places P, S, was (in the demonftration of

prop. 47.) to its whole elaftic force as KNto HL —
V, that is, (fince the point K
now falls upon P) as
UK to V: and ail that force, or, which is the fame
thing, the incumbent weight by which the lineola EG
is comprefs'd, is to the weight of the lineola as the al-
titude Aof the incumbent weight to E G the length of

the lineola ; and therefore, ex tquo, the force with
which the lineola £ G is urged in the places P and S is y
to the weight of that lineola as to HKxA ; YxEG

or as POxA to VV
; becaufe //X was to as EG PO
to V. Therefore fince the times, in which equal bo-
dies are impelled thro' equal fpaces, are reciprocally in
the fubduplicate ratio of the forces, the time of one vi-
bration, produced by theaftion of rhat elaftic force, will
be to the time of a vibration, produced by the impulfe
of the weight, in a fubduplicate ratio of V V to P O x A,
and therefore to the time of the ofcillation of a pendu-
lum whofe length is A, in the fubduplicate ratio of VV
to POxAy and the fubduplicate ratio of PO to A
conjunftly ; that is, in the entire ratio of V
to A. But
in the time of one vibration compofed of the going and
lemming of the pendulum, the pulfe will be propagated

rieht onwards thro* a flpace equal to its breadth B C.
Therefore the time in which a pulfe runs over the fpace
it % B C,
Digitized by Google
186 Mathematical Principles Bdok If*
B C, is to the time of one

compofed of the
ofcillation
going and returning of the pendulum, as to A, that V
is, as B C to the circumference of a circle whofe radius
is A. But the time in which the pulfe will run over

the fpace BC, is to the time in which it will run over
a length equal to that circumference, in the fame ratio;
and therefore in the time of fuch an ofcillation, the
pulfe will run over a length equal to that circumference*
O.E.D.
Cor. i. The velocity of the pulfes is equal to that
which heavy bodies acquire by falling with an equally
accelerated motion, and in their fall ckferibing half the
altitude A. For the pulfe will, in the time of this fall,
fuppofing it to move with the velocity acquired by
that run over a fpace that will be equal to the
fall,
whole altitude A ; and therefore in the time of one of-

cillation compofed of one going and return, will go
over a fpace equal to the circumference of a circle ae-
fcribed with the radius A : for the time of the fall is
to the time of ofcillation, as the radius of a circle to

its circumference.
Cor. Therefore fince that altitude
2. is as the A
elaftic forceof the fluid diredly, and the denfity of
the fame inverfely ; the velocity of the pulfes will be
in a ratio compounded of the fubduplicate ratio of the
denfity inverfely, and the fubduplicate ratio of the
elaftic force diredly.
>
Proposition L. Problem XII.

To find the diftances of the pulfes.
Let the number of the vibrations of the body, by

whofe tremor the pulfes are produced, be found to any
given time. By that number divide the fpace which a
.pulfe can go over in the fame time, and the part found
will be the breadth of one pulfe. Q. E. /.
Scho-
Digitized by Google
Sett. VIII. of Natural Thilofophy.
Scholium. t
The lad propofitions refpeft the motions of light

and founds. For fince light is propagated in right lines,,
it is certain that it cannot xonfift in aft ion alone, (by-
Prop. 41 and 42.) As to founds, fince they atife from
tremulous bodies, they can be nothing elfe but pulfes
of the air propagated thro' it, (by Prop. 43 ) And this
is confirmed by the tremors, which founds, if they be
loud and deep, excite in the bodies near them, as we
experience in the found of drums. For quick and
fhort tremors are lefs eafily excited. But it is well
known, that any founds, falling upon firings in uni-
fon with the fonorous bodies, excite tremors in thofe
firings. This is alio confirmed from the velocity of
founds. For fince the fpecific gravities of rain-water
and quick-filver are to one another as about 1 to i$f,
and when the mercury in the barometer is at the height
of 3 o inches of our meafure, the fpecific gravities of the
air and of rain-water are to one another as about 1 to
^70 : therefore the fpecific gravity of air and quick-

filver are to each other as 1 to 11890. Therefore
when the height of the quick-filver is at 30 inches, a
height of uniform air, whofe weight would be fuffi-
cient to comprefs our air to the denfity we find it to
be of, muft be equal to 3 56700 inches or 29725 feet
of our meafure. And this is that very height of the me-
dium, which I have called A in the conftru&ion of the
foregoing propofition. A circle wjiofe radius is 2972 5
feet 186768 feet in circumference. And fince a
is
pendulum 39 f inches in length complcats one ofcilla-

tion, compofed of its going and return, in two feconds
of time, as is commonly known ; it follows that a pen-
dulum 29725 feet or 356700 inches in length will
perform a like ofcillation in 190 i feconds. Therefore
N 3
«
<9
Digitized by Google
j8z Mathematical Principles Book II,
in that time a found will go right onwards 18676^8
feet, and therefore in one fecond P7P feet.
But in this computation we have made no allowance
for the craflkude of the tolid particles of the air, by
which the found is propagated inftantaneoufly. Be-
pufe the weight of air is to the weight of water as
1 to 870, and becaufe falts are almoft twice as denfe as
water ; if the particles of air are fuppofed to be of near
the fame denfity as thofe of water or fait, and the rarity
of the air arifes from the intervals of the particles; the
diameter of one particle of air will be to the interval
between the centres of the particles, as 1 to about p or
10, and to the interval between the particles themfelves
as 1 to 8 or p. Therefore to 079 feet, which, ac-
cording to the above cal«ulation, a found will advance
Jorward in one fecond of time, we may add or
about 1 op feet, to compenfate for the craflitude of the
particles of the air : ana then a found will go forward
about 1088 feet in one fecond of time.
Moreover, the vapors floating in the air, being of
another fpring, and a different tone, will hardly, if ac
all, partake of the motion of the true air in which the
founds are propagated. Now if thefe vapors remain

unmoved, that motion will be propagated the fwifter
thro* the true air alone, and that in the fubduplicate ra-
tio of the defect of the matter. So if the atmofphere
confift of ten parts of true air and one part of vapors,
the motion of founds will be fwifter in the fubduplicari
ratio of 11 to 10, or very nearly in the entire ratio of
21 to 20, than if it were propagated thro* eleven parts
of true air : and therefore the motion of founds above
difcovered muft be encreafed in that ratio. By this
fneans the found willpafs thro* 114* feet in one fecond
of time.
Thefe things will be found true in fpring and au-
tumn, when tne air is rarefied by the gentle warmth of
thofe feafons, and by that means its elaftic force be-
.... .. «§ w. • -- - -
1
comes
Digitized by Google
Sea. VIII. of Natural Thitofophy. Ui
comes fomewhat more intenfe. Dot in winter, when
the air condenfed by the cold, and its elaftic force is
is
fomewhat remitted, the motion of founds will be flow-

er in a fubduplicate ratio of the denfity ; and on the
other hand, fwifter in the fummer.
Now by experiments it actually appears that founds
do really advance in one fecond of time about 1141
feet of Englifo meafure, or 1070 feet of French mea-
fure.
The velocity of founds being kno"wn, the intervals
of the pulfes are known alfo. For M. Snuvenr, by
forne experiments that he made, found that an open
pipe about five Paris feet in length, gives a found of the
fame tone with a viol-firing that vibrates a hundred
times in one fecond. Therefore there are near 100 pulfes
in a fpace of 1070 Paris feet, which a found runs over
in a fecond of time,- and therefore one pulfe fills up a
fpace of about 10 A
Paris feet, that is, about twice the
Jength of the pipe. From whence it is probable, that
the breadths of the pulfes, in all founds made in open
pipes, are equal to twice the length of the pipes.
Moreover, from the corollary of prop. 47. appears
the reafon, why the founds immediately ceafe with the
motion of the fonorous body, and why they are heard
no longer when we are at a great diftance from the fo*
norous bodies, than when we are very near them. And
befides, from the foregoing principles it plainly ap*-
pears how it comes to pafs that founds are fo mightily
encreafed in fpeaking-trumpets. For all reciprocal mo-

tion ufes to be encreafed by the generating caufe at each
return. And in tubes hindering the dilatation of the
founds, the motion decays more flowly, and recurs more
forcibly ; and therefore is the more encreafed by the new
motion impreffed at each return. And thefe are the
principal phenomena of founds.
N 4 SEC-
Digitized by Google
j 84 Mathematical Principles Book II.
SECTION IX.
Of the circular motion of fluids.
HYPOTHESIS. J
Thereflflance, arifing from the want of lubri-

city in the parts of a fluid, is, caeteris pari-
bus, proportional to the velocity with which
the parts of the fluid are feparated from
each other.
Proposition LL Theorem XXXVIII.

If a folid cylinder infinitely long, in an uniform
and infinite fluid, revolve with an uniform
motion about an axis given in pofition, and
the fluid be forced round by only this im-
pulfe of the cylinder, and every part of the
. fluid perfever e uniformly in its motion-, 1 fay,
that the periodic times of the parts of the
fluid are as their dijlances from the axis of
the cylinder.
Let j4FL (PL9. Fig.z.) be a cylinder turning

jiniformly about the axis,?, and let the concentric cir-
cles BG My CHNy DIO, EKP, &c. divide the fluid

into innumerable concentric cylindric folid orbs of the
fame
Digitized by Google
Seft. IX. of Natural Thilofophf. 185
fame thicknefi. Then, bccaufe the fluid is homoge-
neous, the impreflions which the contiguous orbs make
upon each other mutually, will be (by the hypothefis)
as their tranflations from each other, and as the conti-
guous fuperficies upon which the impreflions are made*
If the impreflion made upon any orb be greater or
on its concave, than on its convex fide, the ftronger
lefs
impreflion will prevail, and will either accelerate or re-
tard the motion of the orb, according as it agrees with,
or is contrary to the motion of the fame. Therefore,
that every orb may perfevere uniformly in its motion,
the impreflions made on both fides mud be equal, and
their directions contrary. Therefore fince the impref-
fions are as the contiguous fuperficies, and as their
tranflations from one another ; the tranflations will be
inverfely as the fuperficies, that is, inverfely as the dif-
tances of the fuperficies from the axis. But the diffe-
rences of the angular motions about the axis, are as thofe
tranflations applied to the diftances, or as the tranfla-
tions directly and the diftances inverfely ; that is, join-
ing thefe ratio's together, as the fquares of the diftances
inverfely. Therefore if there be erected the lines Aa %
J!b> Cc,Dd> Ee &c. y perpendicular to the feveral parts of

the infinite right line SAB CDEQjuA reciprocally pro-
portional to the fquares of SA, SB, SCy SD, SE, &c-
and thro* the extremities of th©fe perpendiculars there
be fuppofed to pafs an hyperbolic curve; the fums of
the differences, that is, the whole angular motions, will
be as the correfpondent fums of the lines a, Bb, Cc, A
Dd, Ee> that is, (if to conftitute a medium uniformly
fluid, the number of the orbs be encreafed and their
breadth diminirtied in infinitum) as the hyperbolic area's
Aa Q, BbQ, CcO, DdO, EeQ^ Sec. analogous to the
fums. And the times, reciprocally proportional to the an-
gular motions, will be alfo reciprocally proportional to
thofe areas. Therefore the periodic time of any par-
ticle as D, is reciprocally as the area DdQ> that is, (as
appears
Digitized by Google
I $6 Mathematical Trincipks Book IK
appears from the known methods of quadratures of
curves) dire&ly as the diftance SD. Q.E. P.
Cor. i. Hence the angular motions of the particles
of the fluid are reciprocally as their diftaaces from the
axis of the cylinder, and the abfolute velocities are
equal.
Cor. 2. If be contained in a cylindric veflel
a fluid
of an and coptain another cylinder
infinite length, ith- w
?n, and both the cylinders revolve about one common
axis, and the times of their revolutions be as their fe-
midiameters, and every part of the fluid perfeveres in
its motion : the periodic times of the (eyeral parts will
be as the diftances from the axis of the cylinders.

Cor. 3. If there be added or taken away any com-
mon quantity of angular motion from the cylinder and
fluid moving in this manner ; yet becaufe this new mo-
tion will not alter the mutual attrition of the parts of
the fluid, the motion of the parts among themfelves will
not be changed. For the tranflations of the parts from
one another depend upon the attrition. Any part will
perfevere in that motion, which, by the attrition made
on both fides with contrary direftions, is no more ac-
celerated than it is retarded.
Cor. 4.
Therefore if there be taken away from this
whole fyitcm of the cylinders and the fluid, all the an-
gular motion of the outward cylinder, we fhall have
the motion of the fluid in a quiefcent cylinder.
Cor. Therefore if the fluid and outward cylin-
5.
der are at and the inward cylinder revolve uniform-*
reft,
ly ; there will be communicated a circular motion to
the fluid, which will be propagated by degrees thro*
the whole fluid ; and will go on continually encreafing,
till fuch time as the feveral parts of the fluid acquire the
motion determined in cor. 4.

Cor. 6. And becaufe the fluid endeavours to pro-
pagateits motion ftill farther, its impulfe will carry the
outmoft cylinder alfo about with it, unlefs the cylinder
Digitized by Google
S£&. IX. of Natural Thilofophy. is?
be violently detained ; and accelerate its motion till the
periodic times of both cylinders become equal among
themfelves. But if the outward cylinder be violently
detained, it will make an effort to retard the motion of
ihe fluid j an4 unlefs the inward cylinder preferye that
motion by means of fome externaHorce impreJTcd there-
on, it will make it ceafe by degrees.
All thefe things will be found true, by making the
experiment in deep ftanding water f
Proposition LIL Theorem XL.

If a folid fphere, in an uniform and infinite fluid,,
revolves about an axis given inpojition with
an uniform motion, and the fluid be forced
round by only this impulfe of the fphere and
every fart of the fluid perfeveres uniformly
in its motion: I fay, that the periodic
times
parts of the fluid are as the fquares
of the
the centre of the
of thetr diftances from
(phere.
Case i, Let ATL be a fphere turning uniformly

about the axis S, and let the concentric circles B GM,
CJiN, DIO, EKP, Sec. divide the fluid into innu-
thicknefs. Sup-
merable concentric orbs of the fame
to be folid and becaufe the fluid is ho-
pofe thofe orbs ;
orbs
mogeneous, the impreffions which the contiguous
will be (by the fuppofition)
make one upon another,
as their tranflations from
one another, and the conti-
guous upon which the impreffions are made.
fuperficies
If the impreffion upon any orb be greater or lefs upon
its convex fide ; the more
for-
its concave than upon
either accelerate
cible impreffion will prevail, and
will
according as it is di-
or retard the velocity of the orb,
Digitized
1 8 s Mathematical Trinciples Book II.
retted with a confpiring or contrary motion to that of

the orb. Therefore that every orb may perfevere uni-
formly in its motion, it is neceffary that the impreflions
made upon both fides of the orb fhould be equal, and
have contrary directions. Therefore fince the impref-
jions are as the contiguous fuperficies, and as their tranf-
lations from one another ; the tranflations will be in-
verfly as the fuperficies, that is, inverfly as the fquares
of the of the fuperficies from $he centre. But
diftancss
the differences of the angular motions about the axis
areas t hole tranflations applied to the difhnces, or as the
tranflations direflly and the difhnces inverfly ; that is,
by compounding thofe ratio's, as the cubes of the dis-
tances inverfly. Therefore, if upon the feveral parts
of the infinite right line SAB CD E <0 there be erect-
ed the perpendiculars An % Bb, Cc, Dd, Ee, &c. re-
ciprocally proportional to the cubes of SA y SB, SC9
SD, SE &c. 9 the fums of the differences, that is, the
"whole angular motions, will be as the correfponding
fwms of the lines Aa,Bb y Cc9 Dd9 Et* &c. that is,
(if to conftitute an uniformly fluid medium the num-

ber of the orbs be encreafed and their thicknefs di-
minifhcd in infinitum) as the hyperbolic areas AaOy
JibOyPcChDdOyEeOy fumT;
Sec. analogous to the
?nd the periodic times being reciprocally proportional
xo the angular motions, will be alfo reciprocally pro-
portional to thofe areas. Therefore the periodic time
of any orb DIO is recipfocally as the area DdO, that
is, (by the known methods of quadratures) diredly as
the fquare of thediftance SD. Which was firft to be

demonftrated.
Case 2. From the centre of the fphere let there be
drawn a great number of indefinite right lines, making
given angles with the axis, exceeding one another by
equal differences ; and, by thefe lines revolving about
the axis, conceive the orbs to be cut into innume-
rable annuli : then will every annulus have four an-
Digitized by Google
Sc<a. IX. of Natural Thilofophyl i s9
nuli contiguous to it, that is, one on its infide, one

on its outude, and two on each hand. Now each of
thefe annuli cannot be impelled equally and with con-
trary directions by the attrition of the interior and.
exterior annuli unlefs the motion be communicated ac^
cording to the law which we demonftrated in cafe i.
This appears from that demonftration. And therefore
any feries of annuli, taken in any right line extending
itlelf in infinitum from the globe, will move according
to the law of cafe i. except we fhould imagine it hin-
dered by the attrition of the annuli on each fide of it.
But now in a motion, according to this law, no fuch
attrition is, and therefore cannot be any obfhele to the
motion's perfevering according to that law. If annuli
at equal diftances from the centre revolve either more
fwiftly or more flowly near the poles than near the
ecliptic y they will be accelerated if flow, and retarded
if fwift, by their mutual attrition ; and fo the periodic
times will continually approach to equality, according
to the law of cafe I. Therefore this attrition will not
at all hinder the motion from going on according to the
law of cafe i. and therefore that law will take place *
that is, the periodic tinjes of the feveral annuli will be
as the fquares of their diftances from the centre of the
globe. Which was to be demonftrated in the fecond
place.
Case 3. Let now every annulus be divided by tranf-
verfe feftions into innumerable particles conftituting a
fubftance abfolutely and uniformly fluid ; and becaufe
thefe feftions do not at all refpeft the law of circular mo-
tion, but only ferve to produce a fluid fubftance, the
law of circular motion will continue the fame as before.
All the very fmall annuli will either not at all change
their afperity and force of mutual attrition upon ac-
count of thefe fe&ions, or elfe they will change the
fame equally. Therefore the proportion of the caufes
remaining the fame, the proportion of the effects will
remain
Digitized by Google
19D ,
Mathematical "Principles Book If
remain the fame alfo ; that is, the proportion of the
motions and the periodic times. O.E. D. But now
as the circular motion, ancf the centrifugal force thence
arifing, is greater at the ecliptic than at the poles, there
rouft be fome caufe operating to retain the feveral par-
ticles otherwife the matter that is at
in their circles ;
the ecliptic will always recede from the centre, and

come round about to the poles by the outfide of the vor-
tex, and from thence return by the axis to the ecliptic
with a perpetual circulation.
Cor. i. Hence the angular motions of the parts of
the fluid about the axis of the globe, are reciprocally as

the fquares of the diftances from the centre of the
globe, and the abfolute velocities are reciprocally as the
tame fquares applied to the diftances from the axis.
Cor. z. If a globe revolve with a uniform motion
about an axis of a given pofition.in a fimilar and infinite
quiefcent fluid with an uniform motion, it will com-
municate a whirling motion to the fluid like that of a
vortex, and that motion will by degrees be propagated
onwards in infinitum; and this motion will be en-
Creafed continually in every part of the fluid, till the
become as the fquares
periodical times of the feveral parts
of the from the centre of the globe.
diftances
Cor. 3. Becaufe the inward parts of the vortex are
by reafon of their greater velocity continually prefling
upon and driving forwards the external parts, and by
that aftion are perpetually communicating motion to
them, and at the lame time thofe exterior parts com-
municate the fame quantity of motion to thofe that lie
ftill beyond them, and by this aftion preferve the quan-
tity of their motion continually unchanged ; it is plain

that the motion is perpetually transferred from the cen-
tre to the circumference of the vortex, till it is quite
fwallowed up and loft in the boundlefs extent of that
fiiperficies concentrical to the vortex will never be ac-

cclerated,
Digitized by Google
Scar. IX. of Natural Thitofophy: i $t
celerated ; becaufe that matter will be always transfer-
ring the motion it receives from the matter nearer the
centre to that matter which lies nearer the circumfe-
rence.
Cor. 4. Therefore in order to continue a vortex in
the fame of motion, fome aftive principle is requU
ftate
red, from which the globe may receive continually the
fame quantity of motion which it is always communi-
cating to the matter of the vortex, Without fuch a
principle it will undoubtedly come to pafs that the
globe and the inward parts of the vortex, being always
propagating their motion to the outward parts, and not
receiving any new motion, will gradually move flower
and flower, and at laft be carried round no longer.
Cor. 5. If another globe ftiould be fwimming in the
fame vortex at a certain diftance from its centre, and in
the mean time by fome force revolve conftantly about
an axis of a given inclination ; the motion of this
globe will drive the fluid round after the manner of a
vortex ; and at fir ft this new and fmall vortex will
revolve with its globe about the centre of the other ;
and in the mean time its motion will creep on, far-
ther and farther* and by degrees be propagated in infi-
nitum, after the manner of the firft vortex. And for
the fame reafon that the globe of the new vortex was
carried about before by the motion of the other vortex,
the globe of this other will be carried about by the mo-
tion of this new vortex, fo that the two globes will re-
volve about fome intermediate point, and by reafon of
that circular motion mutually fly from each other, un-
lefs fome force reftrains them. Afterwards, if the con-
ftantly imprefTed forces, by which the globes perfevere
in their motions, fhould ceafe, and every thing be left
to aft according to the laws of mechanics, the motion
of the globes will languifti by degrees, (for the rea-
fon affigned m cor. 3 and 4.) and the vortices at laft
will quite ftand ftill.
Cor.
Digitized by Google
192 Mathematical Principles Book It.
Cor. 6. If feveral globes in given places fliould con-
ftantly revolve with determined velocities about axes
arife from them as many
given in pofition, there would
vortices goingon in infinitum. For upon the fame
account that any one globe propagates its motion in
infinitum, each globe apart will propagate its own mo-
tion in infinitum alfo; fo that every part of the infinite
fluid will be agitated with a motion refulting from the
actions of all Therefore the vortices will
the globes.
not be confined by any certain limits, but by degrees
run mutually into each other ; and by the mutual aftions
of the vortices on each other, the globes will be per-
petually moved from their places, as was (hewn in the
iaft corollary ; neither can they poffibly keep any cer-
tain pofition among themfelves, unlefs fome force re-
ftrains them. But if thofe forces, which are confhnt-
ly impreffed upon the globes to continue thefe motions,
inould ceafe ; the matter (for the reafon affigned in
cor. 5 and 4.) will gradually Hop, and ceafe to move in
vortices.
Cor. 7. If a fimilar fluid be inclofed in a fphaerical
vefTel, and by the uniform rotation of a globe in its
centre, is driven round in a vortex; and the globe and
vefTel revolve the fame way about the fame axis, and
their periodical times be as the fquares of the femidia-
meters ; the parts of the fluid will not go on in their
motions without acceleration or retardation, till their
periodical times are as the fquares of their diftances from
the centre of the vortex. No conftitution of a vortex
can be permanent but this.
Cor. 8. If the vefTel, the inclofed fluid, and the
globe, retain this motion, and revolve befides with a
common angular motion about any given axis ; becaufe
the mutual attrition of the parts of the fluid is not
changed by this motion, the motions of the parts among
each other will not be changed. For the tranflations of
the parts among themfelves depend upon this attrition.
Digitized by Google
Scft. IX. of Natural Thilofophy. 193
Any part will perfevere in that motion, in which its
attrition on one fide retards it juft as much as its at*
trition on the other fide accelerates it.
Cor. 9. Therefore if the veffel be quiefcent, and
the motion of the globe be given, the motion of the
fluid will be given. For conceive a plane to pafi thro*
the axis of the globe, and to revolve with a contrary
motion ; and fuppofe the fum of the time of this revolu-
tion and of the revolution of the globe to be to the time
of the revolution of the globe* as the fquare of the
femidiameter of the veiTel to the fquare of the femi-
diameter of the globe ; and the periodic times of the
parts of the fluid in refped of this plane will be as the
lquares of their diftances from the centre of the globe*
Cor. 10. Therefore if the veffel move about the fame
axis with the globe, or with a given velocity about a
different one, the motion of the fluid will be given*
For if from the whole fyftem we take away the angular
motion of the veffel, all the motions will remain the fame
among themfelves as before, by cor. 8. and thofe moti-
ons will be given by cor. p.
Cor. 11. If the vefTel and the fluid are quiefcent,
and the globe revolves with an uniform motion, that
motion will be propagated by degrees through the
whole fluid to the veffel, and the veffel will be carried
round by it, unlefs violently detained ; and the fluid
and the veffel will be continually accelerated till their
periodic times become equal to the periodic times of
the globe. If the veffel be either withheld by fome
force, or revolve with any conftant and uniform mo-
tion, the medium will come by little and little to the
flare of motion defined in cor. 8. p. io. nor will ic
ever perfevere in any other ftate. But if then the forces,
by which the globe and veffel revolve with certain
motions, fliould ceafe, and the whole fyftem be left to
aft according to the mechanical laws, the veffel and
by means of
globe, the intervening fluid, will aft upon
Vol. II. O-
each
194 Mathematical Principles Book IF.
each other, and will continue to propagate their moti-

ons through the fluid to each other, till their periodic
times become equal among themfelves, and the whole
fyftem revolves together hke one folid body.
Scholium. *
Ifl all thefe reafonings, I fuppofe the fluid to confifl:

bf matter of uniform denfity and fluidity. I mean
that the fluid is any where
fuch, that a globe placed
therein may propagate with the fame motion of its
own, at diftances from it felf continually equal, fimi-
lar and equal motions in the fluid, in the fame inter-
val of time. The matter by its circular motion en-
deavours to recede from the axis of the vortex ; and
therefore prefTes all the matter that lies beyond. This
preffure make* the attrition greater, and the feparation
of the parts more difficult ; and by confequence dimi-
niihes the fluidity of the matter. Again, if the parts
of the fluid are in any one place denfer or larger than
in the others, the fluidity will be lefs in that place,
becaufe there are fewer fuperficies where the parts can
be feparated from each other. In thefe cafes I fuppofe
the defect of the fluidity to be fupplied by the fmooth-^
nefs or foftnefs of the parts, or fome other condition,*
ptherwife the matter where it is lefs fluid, will cohere
more, and be more fluggifti, and therefore will receive
the motion more flowly, and propagate it farther than
agrees with the ratio above afligned. If the vefTel be
not fphacrical, the particles will move in lines, not cir-
cular, but anfwering to the figure of the veffel, and
the periodic times will be nearly as the fquares of the
mean diftances from the centre. In the parts betwecB
the centre and the circumference, the motions will be
flower where the fpaces are wide, and fwifter where
narrow; but yet the particles will not tend to the cir-
cumference
•.»•..
.
Digitized by Google
Sc& IX. of Natural Thilofophyl t&J
cumference at all the more for their greater fwiftnefs.
tor they then defcribe arcs of lefs curvity, and the co-
natus of receding from the centre is as much diminiih-
ed by the diminution of this curvature, as it is aug-
mented by the increafe of the velocity. As they go
out of narrow into wide ("paces they recede a little far-
ther from the centre, but in doing fo are retarded i and
when they come out of wide into narrow fpaces they
are again accelerated; and fo each particle is retarded
and accelerated by turns for ever. Thefe things will
come to pafs in a rigid veflel. For the ftate of vor-
tices in an infinite fluid is known by cor. 6. of this
propofition*
I have endeavoured in this propofition to invefti-
gate the properties of vortices, that I might findwhe-
ther the celeftial phenomena can be explained by them;
For the phenomenon is this, that the periodic tirnes of
the Wanets revolving about Jupiter, are in the fefqui-
plicate ratio of their diftances from Jupiter's centre; and
the fame rule obtains alfo among the Planets that re-
solve about the Sun. And thefe rules obtain alfo with
the greateft accuracy, as far as has been yet difcovered
by agronomical obfervation. Therefore, if thofe Pla-
nets are carried round about Ju-
in vortices revolving
piter and the Sun, the vortices mud revolve according
to that law. But here we found the periodic times of
the parts of the vortex to be in the duplicate rario of
the diftances from the centre of motion; and this ratio
;
cannot be diminilhed and reduced to the fefquiplic ate,

utdefs either the matter of the vortex be more fluid,
the farther it i< from the centre, or the refifrmce ail-
Ting from the want of lubricity in the parts of the
fluid, mould, as the velocity with which the part* of
the fluid are feparated goes on increafing, be augmcnt-

ted with' it in a greater ratio than that in which the
velocity increafes. But neither of thefe fuppofirionV
feem reafonable. The more grofs and lefs fluid pai rs
O z will
Digitized by Google
Will tend to the circumference, unlefs they are heavy

towards the centre. And tho\ for the fake of demon-
ftration, I propofed> at the beginning of this Se&ion,
an hypothecs that the refiftance is proportional to the
velocity, neverthelefs, 'tis in truth probable that the
refiftance is in a than that of the velocity.
lefs ratio
Which granted, the periodic times of the parts of the

vortex will be in a greater than the duplicate, racio of
the diftances from its centre. If, as fome think, the
vortices move more fwiftly near the centre, then flower
to a certain limit, then again fwifter near the circum-
ference, certainly neither the fefquiplicate, nor any ci-
ther certain and determinate ratio can obtain in them.
Let philofophers then fee how that phaenomenon of the
fefquiplicate ratio can be accounted for by vortices.
Proposition LIII. Theorem XLI.

Bodies, carried about in a vortex and returning
in the fame orb, are of the fame denfity with
the vortex, and are moved according to the
fame law with the parts of the vortex, as
to velocity and direilion of motion.
For if any fmall part of the vortex, whofe particles

or phyfical points preferve a given fituation among
each other, be fuppofed to be congealed ; this particle
will move according to the fame law as before, fince
no change is made either in its denfity, vis infita, or
figure. And again, if a congealed or folid part of the
vortex be of the fame denfity with the reft of the vor-
tex, and be refolved into a fluid, this will move ac-
cording to the fame law as before, except in fo far as
its particles now become fluid* may be moved among
themfelves. Negleft therefore the motion of the par-
Digitized by Google
Sea. IX. of Natural Thilofophy. 197
tides among thcmfelves, as not at all concerning the
progreffive motion of the whole, and the motion of the
whole will be the fame as before. But this motion
will be the fame with the motion of other parts of the
vortex at equal from the centre; bec.uife the
di fiances
folid, now a fluid, is become perfeftly
refolved into
like to the other parrs of the vortex. Therefore a
folid, if it be of the. fame denfity with the matter of
the vortex, will moVe with the fame motion as the
parts thereof, being relatively at reft in the matter that
furrounds it. If it be more denfe, it will endeavour
more than before to recede from the centre; and there-
fore overcoming that force of the vortex, by which,
being as it were kept in equilibrio, it was retained in
its orbit, it will recede from the centre, and in its re-
volution defcribe a fpiral, returning no longer into the

fame orbit. And by the fame argument, if it be more
rare it will approach to the centre. Therefore it can
never continually go round in the fame orbit, unlefs it
be of the fame denfity with the fluid. But we have
ftiewn in that cafe, that it would revolve according to
the fame law with thofe parts of the fluid that are at
the fame or equal diftances from the centre of the
vortex.
Cor. 1. Therefore a folid revolving in a vortex,
and continually going round in the fame orbit, is rela-
tively quiefcent in the fluid that carries it.
Cor. 2. And if the vortex be of an uniform denfi-
ty, the fame body may revolve at any diftance from
tne centre of the vortex.
Scholium.
Hence it is manifeft, that the Planets are not carried
round in corporeal vortices. For according to the G>-
fernican hypothefis, the Planets going round the Sun,
O 5 revolve
Digitized by Google
jpS Mathematical Trinciplef Book II.
revolve in ellipfes, having the Sun in their coramon
focus j and by radii drawn to the fun defcribe areas

proportional to the times. But now the parts of a
vortex can never revolve with fuch a motion. Let
j4D> BE, CF, (Pt*9*Fig>l ) rcprefent three orbits de^
(cribed about the Sun S, of which let the utmoft circle
CF be concentric to the Sun, and let the aphelia of
the two innermoft be A, B; and their perihelia D> E.
Therefore a body revolving in the orb CF, defcribing,
by a radius drawn to the Sun, areas proportional to the
times, will move with an uniform motion. And accor-
ding to the laws of aftronomy, the body revolving in
the orb BE will move flower in its aphelion B and y
fwifter in its perihelion E-, whereas, according 10 the

laws of mechanics, the matter of the vortex ought to
jiiove more fwiftly in the narrow fpace between and A
C, than in the wide fpace between D
and F-> that is,
more fwiftly in the aphelion than in the perihelion. Now
thefe two condufions contradict each other. So at the
beginning of the fign of Virgo, where the aphelion of
Mars is at prefent, the diftance between the orbits of
Mars and Venus is to the diftance between the fame orbits
at the beginning of the fign of Pifces, as about $ to 1
and therefore the matter of the vortex between thofc
orbits ought to be fwifter at the beginning of Pifces,
than at the beginning of Virgo, in the ratio of 3 to 2.
for the narrower the fpace is, thro* which the fam?
quantity of matter paffes in the fame time of one re-
volution, the greater will be the velocity with which
it pafles thro* it. Therefore if the Earth being rekr
tively at reft in this celcftial matter ftiould be carried
round by it, and revolve together with it about the
Sun, the velocity oftheEarthat the beginning of Pifces
would be to its velocity at the beginning of Virgo in a
fefquialteral ratio. Therefore the Sun's apparent diurnal
motion at the beginning of Virgo, ought to be above
,7° minutes ; and at the beginning of Pifces lefs than 48
? '
minutest
•
Digitized by Google 1
I
Digitized by Google
Digitized by Google
Sea. IX. of Natural Thilofofhy. 199
minutes. Whereas on the contrary that apparent moti-
on of the Sun is really greater at the beginning of Pifces
than at the beginning of Virgo, as experience teftifies
and therefore the earth is fwifter at the beginning of
Virgo than at the beginning of Pifces. So that the hy-
pothefis of vortices is utterly irreconcilably with agro-
nomical phaenoraena, and rather ferves to perplex than
explain the heavenly motions. How thefe motions arc
performed in free fpaces without vortices, may be un-
derftood by the firft bqok.j and I fliall now more fully
treat of it in the following k
book of the Sj/lcm of the
World, \ . - •
*
•
'
. 1 . I
• 1 *• -
O 4 OF
Digitized by Google
OF THE
SYSTEM OF THE
WORLD.
BOOK III.
N the preceding books I have laid down

the principles of philofophy ; principles,
not philofophical, but mathematical ; mch,
to wit, as we may build our reafonings
upon in philofophical enquiries/'Thefe
principles are, the lawsand conditions of certain moti-
i ons, and powers or forces, which chiefly have refpeft
to philofophy. But Jeft they fliould nave appeared
of themfelves dry and barren, I have illuftratcd them
here and there* with fome philofophical fcholiums, gi-
ving an account of fuch things, as are of more general
nature, and which philofophy feems chiefly ro be
founded on ; fuch as the denfity and the refinance of
bodies,
Digitized by Googl
Book IH Mathematical Trinciples, &c. 201
bodies, fpaces void of all bodies, and the motion of
It remains, that fom the fame prin-
%N
light and founds. ' fr
ciples, I now demonftrate the frame of the Syftem of rcujrt / vv

the World. Upon this fubjeft, I had indeed compos'd Alt 0
\\ tl V<
'
the third book in a popular method, that it might bejwJUj.

^jrjad by many. But a fterwar ds confidering that fuch JU*^\ sua
^âsnad not fufficiently ent^'dinto the principles, could
notjeafi^flifcern the flxength of the confequences, nor \w<*h~
vlâfTae the prejudices to which they had been ma-
V
propofitions (in the mathematical way) which fliould

be read by thofe only, who had firft made themfelves - ^• •
matters of the principlSêttablifti'd in the preceding v ^f.-'u^

t
books. Not that I would advife any one to the pre- v'^/ M
vious ftudy of every propohtion of thofe books. For
they âbound with fuch as m^ht coft too much time,
even to rjti$m of good maêmaticaUwrmng? It is ^ , a £
nouflh ifon!? carefully" rp<^the definitions, the laws £&*?a+\ %

of motion, ancTtKenrft 'three fe&ions of the firft book.
X -He may then pafs on to this book, of the Syftem of the
World, and confult fuch of the remaining propofitions -/^Wui
of the firft two books, as the references in this, and his
require. fu*
occafions, fliall ,
,
Digitized by Google
202 Mathematical Principles Book III.
THE
R U OF
L E S
.
* »
Reasoning in Philosophy,
JlULE I.
We are to admit no more caufes of natural

things than fuch as are both true and fuf
faent to explain their appearances.
To this purpofe the philofophers fay, that Nature

do"s nothing in vain, and more is in vain, when lefs
willferve; For Nature is pleas'd with fimplicity,andaf*

k&s not the pomp of fuperfluous caufes.
Rule II.
Therefore to the fame natural effects we mufi%

as far as pojfible, ajfign the fame caufes.
'
As to refpiration in a man, and in a beaft ; the de-

fcent of ftones in Europe and in America ; the light of
our culinary fire and of the Sun; the refle&ion of light
in the Earth, and in the Planets.
Digitized by Google
* .
tf Natural Thilofophy. 2 ©j
*
Rule III. .
The qualities of bodies\ which admit neither in-

ten/Ion nor regiMonof degrees, and which &6$£CZTX
found to belongio all bodies within the reach
of our experiments, are to be efteemyl thfunv fy^ZZ* ,
verjal qualities of all bodies t whatever^ f^/f%

For fince thequalities of bodies are only known to ^ ^ tM
^ by i
ifuch as
êxperiments, we are to hold for univerfal, all
univerfally agree with experiments; and fuch u<
y+ui
-
r
v
«
as are not liable to diminution,can never be quite um»V 1
are .cer^tan^ not to relinguiOi^^^

l*}3JZ*Yi fe
trteevidence of experiments for the T^ke of dreams .
,<
and vain fictions of our own deviling; nor are we to ]v ^^ m

^ recede from the analogy of NJfure,* which ufkito be atc^t**"^*
^simple, and always confonant to it felf. We no others c.vw|vv Av^
ways know the extenfion of bodies, than by our
nor do in all bodies but becaufe a f<*«* t« <
%
fenfes, thefe reach it
we perceive extenfionTnall that are fenfible, therefore

we afcribe it univerfally to all others alfo. That V' •
abundance of bodies are hard we learn by experience.

And becaufe the^hardnefs or 'ftiejÎijde arifes from the 4^0%
hardnefs of the partY/Sfrfc- therefore jumy infer the hard- - UC u*»«*
'
T
nefs of the undivided particles notTonfy of the bodies
we jsgi but of all others. That all bodies are inn 1c**
penetrable, we gather not from reafon, but from fenfa-j r
tion. The bodies which we handle we find impene* ua( r< v •••
trable, and thenc e conclude impenetrability to be an/ - .

iirtM ,
v
univerfal property of all bodies whatfoever. That all

bodies are moveable, and enjow'd with certain powers •
;
(which we call the vires inertk) of perfevering in their

motion or in their reft, wc only infer from the like >kwu-*«
properties obferv'd in the bodies which fre have feen.
The extenfion, hardnefs, impenetrability, mobility,
^
?nd vis imrti* of the whole, refult from the exten-
fion
Digitized by Google
204 Mathematical "Principles Book III.
impenetrability, mobility, and wres
fion, hardnefs,
of the parts : and thence we conclude the leaft
inertia
particles of all bodies to be alfo all extended, and hard,
,\
»
\* and impenetrable, and moveable, and endow 'd with their
proper vires inertia. And this is the foundation ofall
<\ if ans
philofophy. Moreover, thatt.he divided ût contiguous
> fi
particles of bodieTmay b^leparated fronTone another,

is matter of obfervation ; and, in the particles that re-
)»< ûîMin undivided, our r^ds areâWelto diftinguiih yer^ ,
« Ieiier parts, mathematically demohitrated.

as is But
V^^hether the parts fb diftinguiih'd, and not yet divided,
1 ***** ^ may, by the powers of nature, be adually divided and
feparated from one another, we cannot certainly deter-
c <t s-^ K
mine. Yet had we the proof of but one experiment,
t j)at an „ unc|ivided particle, in breaking a hard and fb-
|
* •*
lid body, fuffer'd a divifion, we might by virtue of

p t^ n\n
v
c jj£ s ru | e> conc iU(j e> that the undivided as well as the
divided particles, may be divided and aftually feparated
to infinity.
t\x*W«dk Laftly, If it univerfally appears, by experiments and
I
vv ic>\ v*#i aftronomicalobfervations, that all bodies about
the Earth,
gravitate towards the Earth ; and that in proportion to
the quantity of matter which they feverally contain;
that the Moon likewife, according to the quantity of
its matter, gravitates towards the Earth ; that on the
*\9 \ ck y other hand our Sea gravitates towards the Moon and ,*
all the Planets mutually one towards another ; and the
Comets in like manner towards the Sun ; we muft, in con-

cxAwîv A^ fcquence of this rule, univerfally allow, that all bodies
Jl-1<aJ m whatsoever endow'd with a principle of mutual
are
gravitation. For the argument from the appeaMjices t;^
concludes with more force fof the universal gravita-
tion of all bodies, than for their impenetrability ; of
which among thofe in the celeftial regions, we have no
experiments, nor any manner of obfervation. Not
that I affirm gravity to be efTential to bodies. By their 4*
,W I Au ; Vs 1 mcan nothin S b
^ *5T vh inertu. This
Digitized by Google
of Natural Thilofophy. 205
is immutable. Their gravity is diminiflied as they re-, J/vu^y
cede from the Earth. — *
1
'
Rule IV.
In experimental thilofophy we are tovlook upon
proportions cmtBed by general induction from /c***^
phenomena as accurately or wry marly tzm, >m**<U*.i
notwithflandinz hn^contrary hypotfiefes that^.y^
may be imagined, till fuch time as other Wft^
.
phenomena occur, by which they may either be K**nM
made more accurate, or liable to exceptions.
This rule we muft follow that the argument of in-

duction may not be evaded by hypothecs*
THE
Digitized by Google
206 Mathematical Principles Book III.'
THE
Phenomena or Appearances.
Phenomenon L
That the circumjovial planets, by radij drawn
to Jupiter's cerrter, defcribe areas proportio-
L
nal to the ttmes of defcription, and that
their periodic times y the fixed Stars being at
(\) refty are in the J*J^$ltiate proportion of
their diftances from tts center.
TH I S we know from aftronomical obfervations.

For the orbits of thefe planets differ but infenfibly
from circles concentric to Jupirer ; and their Motions in
thofe circles are found to be uniform. And all aftrono-
mers agree, that their periodic times are in" the fefqui-
vftv
plicate proportion of the fcmidiameters of their orbits :
and fo it manifeftly appears from the following ta-
ble.
The periodic times of the Satellites of Jupiter.

d.i} h .i3'.4*"' d h
7 -5 -4*'»3*"*
h .27'.34".
i*.i8 $
Digitized by Google
• t
of Natural Thilofophy: . 307
The Aflame s of the Satellitesfrom Jupiter's center.

Prom the obfervations of 2 3 4
BorelU 8j '4 2 47
To vvnley by the Microm. »3>47 24,72
Callini by the Telefcope. am. of
8 13 23
Caflini by the eclip. of the fate I-
9 Hf . 3
2; h
From the periodic times. 66719,01; I
4,384 25,299,
Mr. Pound has determined by the help of excellent a VN <

^
micrometers, the diameters of Jupiter and the elongation
of its fatellites_afte r the following manner. The great-
eft heliocentric elongation of the fourth fatelike frorri
Jupiter's centre \âs taken with a micrometer in a 1 5 foot )vlt/> »
telefcope, and aftne mean diftance of Jupiter from IFe swu&sm*

Earth was found about 3'. 16". The elongationof the
third fatellite was taken with a micrometer in a telef-
cope of 123 feet, and at the fame diftance of Jupiter n\< )
from the Earth was found 4'. 42". The greatefl elonga-
tions of the other fatellites at the fame diftance of Jupi-
ter from the Earth, are found from the periodic times
to be 2'. 56". 47". and i'. 51". 6'".
The diameter of Jupiter taken with the micrometer
in an 123 foot telefcope feveral times, and reduced to
Jupiter's mean diftance from the Earth, proved always >
lefs than 40", never lefs than 38", generally 39". This
diameter in flioTter telefcopes is 40", or 41". For Ju- VUs . VVJ .

t
piter's light Is a little dilated by the unequal refrangibi-;v

^^v ;\;}^/
lity of the raysând this dilatation bears a lefs ratio to^v'w.^
6
the diameter of Jupiter in the longerVnd more perfedfc
telefcopes, than in thofe which are fliorter and lefs per-
fect. The times in which two fatellites, the firft and
the third, paiTed over Jupiter's body, were obferved, from
the beginning of the ingrefs to the beginning of the e-- t> 1-
%refs, and from the complete ingrefs to the complete A : .
egrefi, with the long telefcope. And from the tranfit

of the firft fatellke, the diameter of Jupiter at its mean
diftanc©
Digitized by Google
ao8 Mathematical "Principles Book III.
\ <.« < diftance from the Earth,/ came foith^ 7*", and from the
r
t ran fit gf the third 37^ . There was obferved alfo the
PANN
%l''^
tmlc
o-
m ' ^
w ^ c h t 'ic îac ow °f e firft fatellite pafs'd o-
ver Jupiter's bodyrancfthence the diameter of Jupiter
at its mean diftance from the Earth came out about 37".
vXet us fuppofe its diameter to be 37^" very nearly, and
lvsv
then the greateft elongations of the firft, fecond, third
and fourth fatellite will be rcfpeftively equal to 5,965,
9t494» ij»*4ij and 26,63 femidiameters of Jupiter.
Phenomenon. IL
That the circumfaturnalplanets, by radij drawn
to Saturn s center, deferibe areas proportional
to the times of defer ipt ion, and that their
periodic times, the fixed Stars being at reft, are
in the fefquiplicate proportion of tfievr dif-
tances from its centre.
For as Cajfmi from his own obfervations has determined,

their diftances from Saturn's centre, and their periodic
times are as follow.
The periodic times of the fatellite s of Saturn.

i
d .2i h . 18'. 27". i d . i7 h .4i'.2i". 4
d. ii\ 25'. 12".
15'*. 2 2 h . 41'. 14". 75> d .
7
h
. 48'. 00".
The diftances of the fatellites from Saturn s center, infimi*

diameters of its Ring.
From obfervations if £. 2* 3*. 8.

. 24.
From the periodic times. 1, 93. 2,47. 3, 45. 8. 23, 3 J.
The greateft elongation of the fourth fatellite from

Saturn's centre is commonly determined from the ob-
fervations to be eight of thofe femidiameters very near-v
Digitized by Google
L
Book III. of Katural Tkikfipbf. 20jf
ly. But the greateft elongation of this fatellite from
Saturn's centre, when taken with an excellent micrometer
in M. Htsygem* telefcope of 123 feet, appeared to be
eight femidiameters and 20 of a femidiameter. , And
from this obfervation and the periodic times, the dis-
tances of the Satellites from Saturn's centre in femidia-
meters of the Ring are 2,1. 5,75. 8,7. and
2,6"p.
25,35. The diameter of Saturn obferved in the fame

telefcope was found to be to the diameter of the Ring
as 3 to 7, and the diameter of the Ring, Maj 28, 29.
1719, was found to be 43". And thence the diameter of
the Ring when Saturn is at its mean diftance from the
Earth is 42", and the diameter of Saturn 18". Thefe
things appear (b in very long and excellent telefcopes, be-
caufe in fuch telefcopes the apparent magnitudes of the h
.
bJ&Sgnly bodies êaiA greater proportion to the dilatation uXts\

ofhght in the extremities of thofe bodies, than in ihor- wwa ûa*«^*
I£t telefcopes. If we then reject all the fpurious light, the
diameter of Saturn will not amount to more than 16*".
Phenomenon III.
That the jive primary Tlanets, Mercury, Venus%

Mars, Jupiter and Saturn, with their feve-
ral orbit Si encompafs the Sun.
That Mercury and Venus revolve about the Sun, is

from their moon-like appearances. When they
evident
g^yiôut with ajyfujl^face, they are in refpeft of ust
ônd or above the Sun ; when they appear half-full, «*a>*a<0si
tKeyare about the fame height on one fide or other of '
the Sun ; when horn'd, they are below or between, us and * f A .
the Sun, and they are fometimes,i*W^0 direttly under* .
feen like foots traverfing the Sun's disk. That Mars t .1 v

^rrounds the Sun, is as pjain from its full face when
.^^îts conjunction with the Sun, and from the gib-
pofTfigure which it fhews in its quadratures. And the
Digitized by Google
2 id Mathematical ^Principles Book III.
fame thing is demonftrable of Jupiter and Saturn, from

i . their appearing full in all fituations; for the fhadows
»a
^^vw
0£ ^ m fatellites that appear fometimes upon their disks
£j4v>V^nv make it plain that the light they filing with, is not their
^ own, but borrowed from the Sun. /% v ^
Phenomenon IV*
That the fixed Stars being at reft y the peri-
tVwio odic times of the five primary TUnets, and
( whether of the Sun about the Earth\ or )
*
oflhe~Earth about the Sun, are in thefef-
implicate proportion of their mean diftances
rom the Sun.
This proportion, firft obferv'd by Kepler, is now r£*
by all aftronomers. For the periodic times are the
ceiv'd
fame, and the dimenfions of the orbits are the lame,
- yhether the Sun revolves about the Earth, or the Earth
about the Sun. And as to the meafures of the perio-
But
^
%
die times, all aftronomers are agreed about them.
trvorV^ Nv /
for the dimenfions of the orbits, "Kepler and Bullialduj,
fx0 Vnv above all others, have determin'd them from obferva-
tions with the greateft accuracy : and the mean dif-
tances correfponding to the periodic times, differ but
infenfibly from thofe which they have aflign'd, and
for the moft part fall in between them ; as we may fet
from the following Table.
The periodic times, with refpett to thefixed Stars, of the Pla-

nets and Earth revolving 460*/ the Sun, in days and deci-
mal parts of a day.
h X 0* 8 8
10759,275. 4332,514. 686,9785. 365,2565. 224,6176.
9
•7»?69*«
Digitized by Google
» 1 ¥ •
Book III. of Natural Thilofophy. 21?
The mean diftances of the Planets and of the Earth from

the Sun.
ft V *
According to Kepler 5)51000. 519^50. 152550.
ToBull/aldns Pf4io8. 522520. 15*350.
To the periodic Times 054006.
8? 152360,
520006'.
8
According to Kepler iocooo. 72400. 38806,
To BnUialdni 100000. 72398.
38585%
Tothe periodictimes 100000.
72.333. 38710.
As to Mercury and Venus, there can be no doubt £ vv A* V
about their diftances from the Sun ; for they areUeter-
min'd by the elongations of thofe Planets from the Sun.
And for the distances of the fuperior Planets, all dif.
puteis cut off by the eclipfes of the fatellites of Jupi-
ter. For, by thofe eclipfes, the polltion of the iha-
\
daw, which Jupiter proje&s, is dctermin'd ; whence
we have the heliocentric longitude of Jupiter. And
from its heliocentric and geocentric longitudes com-
par'd together, we determine its diftance.
Phenomenon V.
Then the primary Tlanets, by radij drawn to
the Earth deferibe areas (no wife proportion ^ ""J
*
nal to the times But thai the areas, which

;
they defcribe by radij drawn tg the Sun,

are proportional to the times of defcription.
For to the Earth they appear fometimesdirefr, fome-

times ftationary, nay and fometimes retrograde. But A If
from the Sun they are always feen direft, and to pro- ,
ceed with a motion yearly uniform, that is to fay, a

little fwifter in the perihelion and a little flower in the . ^ r
\
\
Digitized by Google
aphelion difhnces, fo as to maintain an equality in the
cMn*\ **r -
t defcription of the areas. This is a noted propoficion
CA
among aftronomers, and particularly demonftrable in
^ "Jupiter, from the edipfes of his fatellites ; by the help
<**y*£ «- of which eclipfes, as we have faid, the heliocentriclon-
gitudes of that Planet, and its diftances from the Sun
are determined.
Phenomenon VI.
That the Moon by a radius drawn to the Earth**
centre, defcrtbes an area proportional to the
time of defcription.
ijitM%\\ucl This we gather from the apparent motion of the

Moon, compar'd with itsapparent diameter. It is true
that the motion of the Moon is a little difturb'd by the
* 1
^ adion of the Sun. But in (laying dow n^thefe phae-
nomena, I negleft thofe finall and inconfiderable errors*
.-f
THE
r
Digitized by Google
Book EI. of Natural Thilofofhf. iij
THE
PROPOSITIONS.
Proposition I. Theorem I.
That the forces by which the circumjovialTla-

nets are continually { drawn ojffrom retti«^^* ei *
1
linear motions, and retain d

in their proper
orbits, tend to Jupiter's centre ; and are re-
ciprocally as the fquares of the diftances of
the places of thofc Planets from that cen-
tre.
THE former part of this propofition

from phaen. i. and prop. 2. or 3. book
appears
1. The
latter from phxn. 1. and cor. 6. prop, 4. of the fame
book.
The fame thing we are to underftand of the Pknetf
which encompafs Saturn* by pHapn. 2.
^ <
<
,
Digitized by Google
214 Mathematical Trinciples Book Hfc
Proposition II. Theorem II.
the forces by which the primary Tlanets

are continually drawn off from rectilinear
motionsy and retain d in their proper orbits*
tend to the Sun $ and are reciprocally as the
fquares of the difiances of the places .of
thofe Planets from the Suns centre.
The former part of the propofition is manifeft from

phaen. 5. and prop. 2. book 1. Thelatter from phaen.
4. and cor. 6. prop. 4. of the fame book. But this
part of the propofition is, with great accuracy, de-
%
AvA nionflrable from the guiefcence of the aphelion points.

•ivu
VV
A For a very fmall aberration from the reciprocal du-
plicate proportion, would (by cor. 1. prop. 45. book u)
VaV« V*- P r°d uce a motion of the apfides, fennble enough in

every fingle revolution, and in many of themTnor-
moufly great.
,^»\ ^fc.
« t
^
Proposition HI. Theorem III.
That the force by which the Moon is retahid

in its orbit, tends to the Earth \ and is re-
ciprocally as the fquare
of the diflance of its
place from the Earth's centre.
The former part of the propofition is evident from

phaen. 6. and prop. 2. or 3. book 1. The latter from
the very (Ipw amotion of the Moon's Apogee; which
in every 'fingfe revolution amounting but to 3 0 3'. m
confidential may be neglefled. For (by cor. 1. prop. 45.
book 1.) it appears that if the diflance of the Moon
from the Earth's centre, is to the femidiamcter of the
"
Earth,
Digitized by Google
Book III. of Natural "Philofophf. 21 j
Earth, D to 1 ; the force, from which fuch a mo-
as
tion will refult, is reciprocally as D a T-* T 1, *• reci-
procally as the power of D, whofe exponent is 1 -;4 T ,
that is to fay, in the proportion of the diftance fome-pjKo
thing greater than reciprocally duplicate, but which
comes 59 4: times nearer to the duplicate than to the <v
triplicate proportion. But in regard that this motion „
is owing to the aftion of the Sun, (as we (1^11 aftcc- >^
wards ihewj it is here to be negle&ed. The action of n^^f
the Sun, attracting the Moon from the Earth, is near ly Ova
us the Moon's diftance from the Earth ; and therefore
(by what we have (hewed in con 2. pr. 45. book 1.)
is to the centripetal force of the Moon, as 1 to } 57*45,
or nearly fo; that is, as 1 to 178 And if
we negleft fo inconfiderable a force of the Sun, the re-
maining force, by which the Moon is retained in its ,
orb, will be reciprocally as D*. This will yet more ^ UuUfl1 ; 1
™
. ,ûU]âppear from comparing this force withthe force nfii*»*J<*f*<n
cTfgfavifyi as done in the next propofition.
is — r
Cor. If we augment the mean centripetal force by

which the Moon is retained in its orb, firft in the pro*
portion of 177 to 178 JJf and then in the dupli- t^"} 3
cate proportion of the femidiameter of the Earth to

the mean diftance of the centres of the Moon and Earth ;
we fhall have the centripetal force of the Moon at the ^
furface of the Earth ; fuppofing this force, in descend-
ing to the Earth's furrace, continually to increafe in
the reciprocal duplicate proportion of the height.- <*£tW*-
•
Proposition IV. Theorem IV.

That the Moon gravitates towards the Earth $
and, by the force of gravity is continually
xK
Indrawn off)from a rettuinear motion, and re-^-
fained In its orbit;
The mean diftance of the Moon from the Earth hi
the fyzygics in femidiameters of the Earth, is, accor-
P 4 ding
Digitized by Google
21 6 Mathematical Principles Book III.
ding to Ptolomy and mo ft Aftronomers, 50, according
to Vcndelin %v&Hstjgtn$6o 9 to Copernicus 60 j-, to St*"?**
60 f 9 and ro Tjcho 56" \. But Tjcho y and air that fol-
low his tables of refraction, making the refra&ions of
£ the Sun and Moon (altogether againft the nature of
•
, light) to exceed the refra&ions ot the fixt Stars, and
avVfv M ât «ky ^Surôr five minutes »ggr the Horizon,
thereby increafe the Moon's horizontal parallax
did&xvf
T>y
^fcvtt v*vêto
,
^
alike number of minutes, that is, by a twelfth, or fi£-,
teent n P art °^ the whole parallax. Correal this error,
% Iû^X .
'ancTthe diftance will become about 60 \ femidiamerers

of the Earth, near to what others have affigned. Let
$L<tv*vv*.w>t us aftum? the mean diftance of o'o diameters in the
fyz} gies; and fuppofe one revolution of the Moon, in
refpedtofthe fixtltars, to becomplctcdin 27^. j h 43', .
as Aftronomers have determined; and the circumference

*
;ct }^
of the Earth to amount to 12, 5 249600 Paris feet, as jvxi
* the Fr ench have found by menfuration. And now if^y*.
I
i ^ 1
*
we imagine the Moon, deprived of all motion, to be
let go, lb as to defcend towards the Earth with the
impulfe of all that force by which (by cor. prop. 3.}
it is retained in its orb; it will, in the fpace of one ,
minute of time, defcribe in its fall 15 ,A2 Paris feet, nut

This we gather by a calculus, founded either upon prop.
( l s
36". book i. or (which comes to the fame thing) up-
'
-
on cor. p. prop. 4. of the fame book. For the verted

fine of that arc, which the Moon, in the fpace of one
minute of time, would by its mean motion defcribe at
the diftance of o'o femidiameters of the Earth, is nearly
1 5 t\ Paris feet, or more accurately 1 5 feet, rinch,
and 1 line Wherefore, lince that force, in ap-
proaching to the Earth, increafes in the reciprocal du-
plicate proportion of the diftance, and, upon that ac-
W*C<i4vt'* ^counr, at the furface of the Earth, is 60 x 60 times

greater, than at the Moon; a body in our regions,
to vvUi\«.i\f
"filingw »th that force, ought, in the fpace of one mi-
nute of time, to defcribe Co x o'o x 1 5 TV Paris fe?t,
and.
Digitized by Google
Book III. of Natural Thilofophy. 217
and, in the fpace of one fecond of time, to dcfcribe
1 5 -rV of thofe feet ; or more accurately 1 5 feet, 1
inch, and 1 line f. And with this very force we actu-
ally find that bodies here upon Earth do really defcend. r <^
For a pendulum ofciKatlng feconds in the latitude o£
Paris, will be 3 Paris feet, and 8 lines J in length, as r%»v.4"{
Mr. Hujgens has obferved. And the fpacewHIch a
heavy body defcribes by falling in one fecond of time,
is to half the length of this pendulum, in the duplicate
ratio of the circumference of a circle to its diameter,
(as Mr. Hfijgens has alfo fhewn) and is therefore 1$
Paris feet, 1 inch, 1 line And therefore the force
by which the Moon is retained in its orbit becomes, at
the very furface of the Earth, equal to the force of
gravity which we obferve in heavy bodies there. And
therefore (by rule 1. & 2.) the force by which the
Moon is retained in its orbit, is that very fame force, ,
which we commonly For, were gravity

call gravity. my a\ jtuio.
another force different from that, then bodies defcend-

ing to the Earth with theJoint impulfe of both for- cwh
ces would fall with a double velocity, and in the fpace
of one fecond of time would defcribe 5 o j Paris feet ; /«..
altcjggther agaifliL experience.

V** Vms founded on the hypothefis of the
calculus is .
<
r
Earth^4ftan(|ing For, if both Earth and Moori

ftifl. ^ w -
vM [
move 'about tfie~Sun, and at the fame time about

their common centre of gravity; the diftance of the
centres of the Moon and Earth from one another, will
be 60 \ femidiameters of the Earth ; as may be found
by a computation from prop, 60. book u
Scholium.'
The demonftration of this propofition may be more

diffufely explained after the following manner. Suppofe
feveral
" moons to revolve about the Earth, as in the fy*
"~ item
"
Digitized by Googl
%i s Mathematical Principles Book III;
Item of Jupiter or Saturn ; the periodic times of thefe
moons (by the argument of induction) would obfcrve
\^ the fame law which KepUr found to obtain among the
Planets ; and therefore their centripetal forces would be
reciprocally as the fquaro of the diflances from the
centre of the Earth, by prop. i. of this book. Now
tne ' owe ft °f tne ê were vcry finally and were fo near
% f 'ie ârtrTas a I 0^ to toucr* the togs of the higheft
<wv!a J P
c
mountains; the ^centripetal force thereof, retaining it
M ^
| n ts or
-
^
wou ] (j b e very nearly equaTto the weights
of any terreflrial bodies that ftiould be found upon
the tops of thofe mountains, as may be known by the
UiJvVif* / foregoin g computation. Therefore if the fame little

moon Thould be deierted by its centrifugal force that
J .carries it through its orb, and fo be difabled from going
t herein, it would defcend to the Earth; and
c
^ -i*uL ^tftat Wttn the fame velocity as heavy bodies do actually
fall with, upon the tops of thofe very mountains ; be-
caufe of the equality of the forces that oblige them

both to defcend. And if the force by which that
lcw.»\H v jggsft rnoon would defcend, were different from gra-
vity, and if that moon were to gravitate towards the
Earth, as we find terreflrial bodies do upon the tops of
mountains* it would then defcend with twice the velo-
city, as being impelled by both thefe forces confpiring
together. Therefore fince both thefe forces, that is,
the gravity of heavy bodies, and the centripetal forces
of the moons, refpcft the centre of the Earth, and are
{imilar and equal between themfelves, they will (by
rule i. and 2.) have one and the fame caufe. And
therefore the force which retains the Moon in its orbir,
very force which we commonly call gravity
is that
Ju *\ v becaufe otherwife this little moon at the top of a moun-

,
„
t u 4
mcvJa
j- ^ Uv
v**!"'
mull either be without gravity, or fall twice as
fwiftly as heavy bodies ufe to do.
Pao^
Digitized by Google
Eook III. of Natural Thilofophj. 219
Proposition V. Theorem V.
That the circumjovial Planets gravitate to-
uts ards Jupiter 5 the circumfatitrnal towards
Saturn ; the circumfolar towards the Sun\
and by the forces of their gravity are (drawn &y*\"
zpff)from refiilinear motions, and retained in
curvilinear orbits.
For the revolutions of the circumj'ovial Planets about

Jupiter, of the circumfaturnal about Saturn, and of
Mercury and Venus, and the other circumfolar Planets
about the Sun, are appearances of the fame fort with
the revolution of the Moon about the Earth; and
therefore by rule 2. muft be owing to the fame fort
of caufes; efpecially fince it has been demonftrated,
that the forces, upon which thofe revolutions depend,
tend to the centres of Jupiter, of Saturn, and of the
Sun; and that thofe forces, in receding from Jupiter, a^v"*' 0- * 1
from Saturn, and from the Sun, decreafe in the fame

proportion, and according to the fame law, as the force
of gravity does in receding from the Earth.
Cor. 1. There is therefore a power of gravity ten- * .
ding to all the Planets. For doubtlefs Venus, Mer- ts ; ^Y^K*

cury, and the reft, arc bodies of the fame fort with Ju- jt*/* \
piter and Saturn. And fince all attraction (by law 3.)
is mutual, Jupiter will therefore gravitate towards all
his own fatellites, Saturn towards his, the Earth to- Am ^"J^
>vu
wards the Moon, and the Sun towards all the primary ^ 1
'
Planets.
Cor. i. The force of gravity, which tends to any
one Planet, is reciprocally as the fquare of the difknce
of places from that Planet's centre.
Cor. 3. All the Planets do mutually gravitate
towards one another, by cor. j. and 2,. And hence
it
Digitized by Google
220 Mathematical Trinciptes Book III.
it is, that Jupiter and Saturn, when near their
junction, by their mutual attractions fenfibly dii
each other's motions. So the Sun difturbs the motions
of the Moon ; and both Sun and Moon difturb our
Sea, as we (hall hereafter explains cyni^W
Scholium*
The force which retains the celeftial bodies in their
U! K ** r
.orbits, has been hitherto called centripetal force. Buc ic
^ being now made pTaln, that it can be no other than a
gravitating force, we (hall hereafter call it gravity.
t%U4uuiwc For the caufeof that centripetal force, which retains the
Moon in its orbit, will extend it fclf to all the Planets
by rule i. z. and 4.
Proposition VI. Theorem VI.

That all bodies gravitate towards" every *P la-
net j and that the Weights of bodies towards
any the fame T/anet, at equal diftances
from the centre of the "Planet, are proportio-
nal to the quantities of matter which they
feverally contain.
It has been,now of a long time, obferved by others,

/ ^r that all of heavy bodies, (allowance being made
forts
i\c«^
,
•
for the inequality of retardation, which tKey fufFer from
a fmall power of refinance in the air) defcend to the Earth
from equal heights in equal times: and that equality
of times we may diftinguifti to a great accuracy, by
thehelp of pendulums. I tried the thing in goldj fil-/^
%
vefc leact, glafs* fcnd^ common fait, wood, water, arid

wheat. I provfded Two wooden boxes, round and c-
I Digitized by Google
Book III. <?/ Natural Thilofophy. lit
qual. I filled the one with wood, and fufpended an
equal weight of gold (as exadly as I could) in the jûXa
centre of ofcillation of the other. The boxes hanging
by equal threads of n
feet, made a coupjeof pendu-IÛ\
lums perfe&ly equal in weight and figure? and equally
receiving the refiftance of the air. And placing the t*UÂ< ^
one by the other, I obferved them to play together ^WUv
^^grwjr^ds and backwards, for a long time, with equal
vibrations. Ana therefore the quantity of matter itt
the gold (by cor. i. and 6. prop. 24. book 2.) was to
the quantity of matter in the wood, as the a&ion of
the motive force (or vis motrix) upon all the gold, to
the adion of tjie fame upon all the wood; that is, as
the weight of the one to the weight of the other. And , t >
*
the like happened in the other bodies. By thefe expe- m****-^
riments, in bocfies of the fame weight, I could mani-
festly have difcovered a difference of matter lefs than
the tbgufandth part of the whole, had any fuch been. .
r
ButTîtiTouYall doubt, the nature of gravity towards ^ 4A ***-
the Planets, is the fame as towards the Earth. For,
fliould we imagine our terreftrial bodies removed to the
orb of the Moon, and there, together with the Moon,
deprived of all motion, to be let go, fo as to fall to*
gethtr towards the Earth : it is certain, from what we
have demonftrated before, that, in equal times, they
would defcribe equal fpaces with the Moon, and of
confequence are to the Moon, in quantity of matter,
as their weights to its weight. Moreover, fince the uw ^/v***^
fatellites of Jupiter perform their revolutions in times x(***^*
which obferve the Tefquiplicate proportion of their

diftances from Jupiter's centre, their accelerative gra-
vities towards Jupiter will be reciprocally as the fquares
of their diftances from Jupiter's centre; that is, equal,
at equal diftances. And therefore, thefe fatellites, if
fuppofed to fall towards Jupiter from equal heights,
would defcribe equal fpaces in equal times, in like
manner as heavy bodies do on our Earth. And by the
~ fame
"fi*MUn
Digitized by Google
2zi Mathematical Trincipks Book III.
fame argument, if the circumfolar Planets were fup
fed to be let fall at equal diftances from the Sun, tl
would, in their deicent towards the Sun, defcribe ecju.al

fpaces in equal times. But forces, which equally ac-
celerate unequal bodies, rriuft be as thofe bodies; thac
is to fay, the weights of the Planets towards the S**>s
c muft be as their quantities of matter. Further, chat

a *m
& v
^ e weights of Jupiter and of his fateUites towards the
Sun are proportional to the feveral quantities of their
matter, appears from the exceeding regular motions of
the fatellites, (by cor. 3. prop. 55. book 1.) For iffome
of thofe bodies were more ftrongly attracted to the
Sun in proportion to their quantity of matter, than
others ; the motions of the fatellites would be difturbed
by that inequalityof attra&ion (by cor. 2. prop. 6^5.
book 1.) from the Sun, any fa-
If, at equal diftances
tellite in proportion to the quantity of its matter, did
^ V ' MC
gravitate towards the Sun, with a force greater than
Jupiter in proportion to his, according to any given
proportion, fuppofe of d to e; then the diftance be-
tween the centres of the Sun and of the fateilite's orbit
Would be always greater than the diftance between the
centres of the Sun and of Jupiter, nearly in the fub-
duplicate of that proportion ; as by fome computations
I have found. And it the fatellite did gravitate towards
the Sun with a force, leflTer in the proportion of e
to </, the diftance of the centre of the fateilite's orb
from the Sun, would be lefs than the diftance of the
centre of Jupiter from the Sun, in the fubduplicate of
the fame proportion. Therefore if, at equal diftances
from the Sun, the accelerative gravity of any fatellite
towards the Sun were greater or lefs than the accele-
rative gravity of Jupiter towards the Sun, but by one
t . Vo part of the whole gravity ; the diftance of the
centre of the fatellite's orbit from the Sun would be
greater or lefs than the diftance of Jupiter from the
$un, by one ^rW part of the whole diftance; that is,
Digitized by Google
Book III. of Natural Thilofophy. aii
by a fifth part of the diflance of the utmoft fatellite 'vh^mW*
from the centre of Jupiter; an excentricity of the orbit,
which would be very fenfible. But the orbits of the
fatellitesare concentric to Jupiter, and therefore the
accelerative gravities of Jupiter, and of all its fatellites
towards the Sun, are equal among chemfelves. And by
the fame argument, of Saturn and of his
the weights
fatellites towards the Sun, at equal diftances from the
Sun, are as their feveral quantities of matter: and the
weights of the Moon and of the Earth towards theSun,
are either none, or accurately proportional to the maf-
fes of matter which they contain. But fome they are
by cor. i. and }. prop. 5.
But further, the weights of all the parts of every <*^ llv '* 1
Planet towards any other Planet, are one to another

as the matter in the feveral parts. For if fome part*
did gravitate morei others lefs, than for the quantity ^ vtvC ^ 4
of their matter ; then the whole Planet, according to

the fort of parts with which it moft abounds, would a***^
gravitate more or lefs, than in proportion to the quan-
tity of matter in the whole. Nor is it of any mo- yvv
menr, whether thefe parts are external or internal. For,
if, for example, we fhould imagine the terreftrial bo-
1 - *
, • */*_] 1 1 t n m I
dies with us to be raifed up to the orb of the Moon,

/v
i
to be there compared with its body: If the weights

of fuch bodies were to the weights of the external parts
of the Moon, as the quantities of matter in the one
and in the other refpe&ively ; but to the weights of
the internal parts, in a greater or lefs proportion, then
likewife the weights of thofe bodies would be to the
weight of the whole Moon, in a greater or lefs pro-
portion; againft what we have Ihewed above. - ^
CoR/V.^Henê the weights' of bodies do not de-
pend upon their forms and textures. For if the weights
could be altered with the forms, they would be greater
or lefs, according to the variery of forms, in equal
patter s altogether againft experience*
Digitized by Google
124- Mathematical Trinciples Book- III.
Cor. 2. Univerfally, all bodies about the EartH
gravitate towards the Earth ; and the weights of all, at
equal diftances from the Earth's centre, are as the quan-
titiesof matter which they feverally contain. This is
. the quality of all bodies, within the reach of our eac-
(tXitiA+AA-
periments ; and therefore, (by rule $.) to be affir-
.
med of all bodies whatfoever. If the^/^r, or any other

body, were either altogether void of gravity, or were
to gravitate lefs in proportion to its quantity of
matter ; then, becaufe (according to Ariftotlc, Des Car~
tes, and others) there is no difference betwixt that and
>4 ^ c other bodies, but in mere form of mauer, by a fuc—
k ceflive change from form to form, it might be changed
X^^- at laft into a body of the fame condition with thofe
which gravitate moft in proportion to their quantity
of matter; and, on the other hand, the heavieft bo-
dies, acquiring the £rft form of that body, might by
degrees, quite lofe their gravity. And therefore the
weights would depend upon the forms of bodies, and
with thofe forms might be changed, contrary to what
was proved in the preceding corollary,
((cwn CoR 3' AH fpaces are not equally Full. For if all
-
foaces were equally full, then the fpecihe gravity of

, tne fluid which fills the region of the air, on acoopn^ r "
(<>a*a». extremc denfity of the matter, would falf no^
•
Qf
thing ifhort of the fpecific gravity of quick-filver, or
£old, for -iSy other the moft denfe body?an3 thefttore,
neither gold, nor any other body, could defcend in
air.^Tor bodies do not defcend in fluids, unlefs they
* llvm
V* v are fpecifically heavier than the fluids. And if the
quantity of matter in a given fpace, can, by any
rarefa&ion, be dirnjnifticd, what fhould hinder a di-
1
minution to infinity ?
Cor. 4* If all the folid particles of all bodies are of
the fame denfity, nor can be rarified without pores
a void fpace or vacuum mult be granted* By bodies
te^ZiUc Of
Digitized by Googli
Book III. cf Natural Thilofophy] 22 5
of the fame denfity, mdta thofe, whofe vim inert it
I
are in the proportion of their bulks.^^^ - f-^
Cor. 5. Xhe power of gravity is of a different na-
ture from the power of maMenfjn. For the magnetic
attraction is not as the/ matter attracted. Somebodies
are attracted more by the magnet, others lefs
; moft bo-
dies not at all. The power of magnetifm, in one and
the fame body, may be increafed and diminiflied ; and
is fometimes far ftronger, for the quantity of matter,
than the power of gravity ; and in receding from the
magnet, decreafes not in the duplicate, but almoft in
tVifc triplicate proportion of the diftance, as nearly as
I could, judge from fome rude obfervations. tfA '^
Proposition VII. Theorem VII.

That there is a power ofgravity tending to all
bodies•> proportional to the feveral quantities
of matter which they contain.
That the Planets mutually gravitate one towards

all
another, we
have prov'd before ; as well as that the
force of gravity towards every one of them, confidcr'd
apart, is reciprocally as the fquare of the diftance of
places f rom the centre of the planer. And thence (by
prop. 69. book. 1. and its corollaries) itfollows, that the
gravity tending towards all the Planets, is proportional
to the matter which they contain.
Moreover, fince all the parts of any planet >4gravi-

tate towards any other planet B; and
the gravity of
W-ty part is to the gravity of the whole, as the matter r«x«<\\ w n
^fthepart to the matter of the whole; and fbylawjj
to every aftion correfponds an equal re-adtion : there-
fore the planet B will, on the other hand, gravitate to*
wards all the parts of the planet-^; and its gravity to-
wards any one part will be to the gravity towards the

Vol. II. Q, whole,
v Digitized by Google
2i6 Mathematical Principles Book III.
whole, as the matter of the part to the matter of the

whole. Q. E. D.
Cor. i. Therefore the force of gravity towards any
» iaÎ i ^ "whole planet, arifes from, and is compounded of, the
forces of gravity towards all its parts. Magnetic and
x ele&ric attractions afford us examples of this. For all
doÂ towards tKe"wEo!e from the attra&ions
attra fti on ariles
towards the feveral parts. The thing may be eafily un-

der flood in gravity, if we confider a greater planet, as
.
r j
'
form'd of a "number of lefTer planets, meeting together

'
in one globe. For hence it 'would appear that the

force of the whole muft arife from the forces of the
component parts, if it is objected, that, according to
this law, all bodies with us mufl mutually gravitate one
towards another, whereas no fuch gravitation any where
c#v*di4*»& appears : I anfwer, that fince the gravitation towards
-iaAjKzv^ thefe bodies is to the gravitation towards the whole
Earth, as thefe bodies are to the whole Earth, thegravi-
tatioa towards them mufl: boTar lefsithan to fall under
the obfervation of our fenfes.
- M
Cor. 2. The force of gravity towards the feveral
equal particles of any body, is reciprocally as the fquare
of the difhnce of places from the particles ; as appears
from cor. 3. prop. 74. book 1.
Proposition VIII. Theorem VIII*

In two fpheres mutually gravitating each to-
wards the other, if the matter in places on
all fides round about and equidiftant from the
centres, is fimilar ; the weight of either
'\ < < •
» {
fphere towards the other, will be reciprocally

as the fquare of the diftance between their
centres.
After I had found that the force of gravity towards

a whole planet didarife from, and was compounded of
M..* the
Digitized by Google
the forces of gravity towards all its parts ; and towards
every one part, was in the reciprocal proportion of the
fquares of the diftances from the part : I was êt in i>.w.^
doubt, whether that reciprocal duplicate proportion did
accurately^hold, or but nearly fo, in the total force com- \zM^ <nM
-
pounded oTTb many partial ones. For it might be

that the proportion which accurately enough took place 4^" ^
um* t
in greater diftances, ftiould beîdeoi thej^ytlj^near the aVt* -cm*

furface of the planet, where thelcfiftances ottne particles ^.wvAt
are unequal, and theirSituation diflimilar. But by the
iielg of prop. 75. and 76*. book 1. and their corollaries*
I was at laft fatisfy'd of the truth of the propofition, as
it now lies before us.
Cow*it Hence we may find and compare together
the weights of bodies towards different planets. For the
weights of bodies revolving in circles about planets,
are (by cor. 2. prop. 4. book 1.) as the diameters of
the circles diredly, and the fquares of their periodic
times reciprocally ; and their weights at the furfaces of
the pknets, or at any other diftances from their centres,
are (by greater or lefs, in the reciprocal du-
this prop.)
plicate proportion of the diftances. Thus from the pe- o
riodic times of Venus, revolvingabouttheSun, in d* n^
i6± h , of the utmpft circumjovial fatellite revolving vm* ,
6y«»vr
about Jupiter, in x6\ l<J 1A, h j of the Hugenian fa-
tellite about Saturn in I5 .
d n*
h
; and of the Moon
h with the
about the Earth in j . 43'; compared
mean diftance of Venus from the Sun, and with the
greateft heliocentric elongations of the outmoft circum-
jovial fatellite from Jupiter's centre, 8', 16". of the Hu-
genian fatellite from the centre of Saturn, 3'. 4", and
of the Moon from the Earth, 10'. 33"; by computa-
tion I found, that the weight of equal bodies, at equal
diftances from the centres of the Sun, of Jupiter, of
Saturn, and of the Earth, towards the Sun, Jupiter,
Saturn, and the Earth, were one to another, as 1,
,o6 7
,
'
_I_ and
3 on> .6»S»*
—^
refpefiively.
*
Then becaufe as
*
% the
Digitized by Google
ii8 Mathematical Principles Book III.
the diftances are increafed or diminiftied, the weights

are diminiftied or increafed in a duplicate ratio ; the
weights of equal bodies towards the Sun, Jupiter, Sa-
turn, and the Earth, at the diftances 10000, 997,
791 and 109 from their centres, that is, at their very
fuperficies, will be as 10000, 942, 529 and 435 re-
spectively. How much the weights of bodies are at
the fuperficies'oT the Moon, will be^^hewij her^fper^ ,
^
c \,.
(C
J "
Cor. 2. Hence q&ntity of
iyce\v,if^we difcoverthe
matter in the feveral Planets. For their quantities of mat-
ter are as the forces of gravity at equal diftances from
in the Sun, Jupiter, Saturn, and
their centres, that
the Earth, asi,— I— ,
is,
io6 7 7 3on
, and I
16928a
— refpe&ively.
r '
If the parallax of the Sun be taken greater or lefs than
10", 50'", the quantity of matter in the Earth muft be
augmented or diminiftied in the triplicate of that pro-
portion.
Cor. 3. Hence alfo we find the denfities of the Pla-
nets. For (by prop. 72. book 1.) the weights of equal
and fimilar bodies towards fimilar fpheres, are, at the
furfaces ofthofe fpheres, as the diameters of the fpheres.
And therefore the denfities of diffimilar fpheres are as
thofe weights applied to the diameters of the fpheres.
But the true diameters of the Sun, Jupiter, Saturn, and
the Earth, were one to another as 10000, 997, 791
and 109 ; and the weights towards the fame, as 10000,
943, 529, and 435 refpeftively ; and therefore their
denfities are as 100, 94 ±, 6j and 400. The denfity
of the Earth, which comes out by this computation,
does not depend upon the parallax of the Sun, but is
determined by the parallax of the Moon, and therefore
is here truly defin'd. The Sun therefore is a littlcuden-
fer than
p arid *the
and
Jupiter, than Saturn
Jupiter ,
Earth four times denfer than the Sun ; for the Sun, by
J[ t .\ U * ts g reat h eat * is kept in a fort of a rarefy *d ftate. The
Moon is denfer than the Earth, as ftiall appear after-
Cor.
Digitized by Google
Book III. of Natural Thilofophy, 229
Cor. 4. Thefmallcr the Planets are, they are, merit
paribus* of fo much the greater denfity. For fo the
powers of gravity on their ftveral furfaces, come nearer
to equality. They are likewife, ceteris paribus, of the
'
greater denfity, as they Sun.

are nearer to the So m u-
piter is more denfe than Saturn, and the Earth than J u-
piter. For the Planets were to be placed at different dis-
tances from the Sun, that according to their degrees of
4
denfity, they might enjoy a greater or lefs proportion of - * *
the Sun's heat. Our water, if it were removed as far

as the orb of Saturn, would be converted into ice, an4
^
in the orb of Mercury would quickly fto a,way in va- Vv^JUv^v
pour. For the light of the Sun, to WMCQfts heat is
proportional, is Joyen times denfer in the orb of the
Mercury than witnus : and by the thermometer I have
found, that a fevenfold heat of our farmer- fun will make
water boil. Nor are we to doubt, that the matter of Mer-
cury is adapted to its heat, and is therefore more denfe
than the matter of our Earth ; fince, in a denfer matter,
the operations of nature require a ftronger heat.
Proposition IX. Theorem IX.

That the force of gravity, confide?d down- ^ ;
W0ids from the furface of the planet s^He-\ *%^L«<u»tt

creafes nearly in the proportion of the difc
^ v
tances from their centres.
If the matter of the planet were of ah uniform den*

lity, this propofition would be accurately true, (by
prop. 75. book 1.) The error therefore can be no greater
than what may arife from the inequality of the denfity*
CI 5 P R °i
Digitized by Google
zto Mathematical Principles Boole HI-
Proposition X. Theorem
That the motions of the Tlanets in the hedZjuer?s
° t
may fubfift an exceeding long timet ^
In;he fchcliumof prop. 40. book 2. I haveffiew'd

^Ji+At- that i globe of water, frozen into ice, and moving free-
*Y v*f ^ jy j n our a j r> m
t he time that it would defcribe the
length of its femidiameter, would lofe by the refiftan cc
j ^ of the air -J_ part of its motion. And the fame
and mov'd with whatever velocity. But ttat outglo&e

U^f**- 0 f earth is of greater den fity than it would be if the
whole confifted of water only, I thus make out. If

the whole confifted of water only, whatever was of
lefs denfity than water, becaufe or its lefs fpecific gra-
n 4 wou'd emerge and float above. And upon this

vity,
4
J*V account, if a globe of terreftrial ^natter, cover'd on all
M
ndeTwith water, was lefs denfe than water, it would
>rfmerge fomewhere ; and the fytjfiding water falling
u
*^*'* u, ^
would be gathered to fne o'ppofite fide. And
jfe&k>
Juch is the conditiorToT our Earth, which in a great
meafure is covered with teas- The Earth, if it was not
for its greater denfity, wouU emerge from the feas, and,
* according to its degree of levity, would be raifed more
1
h*tf**M f
or lefs above their furface, the water of the (eaôwmg

* backwards to the oppofite fide. By the fame argument,
wNl <M
-
^^ v
i
»'
thelpots of the Sun, which float upon the Jluofl mat-
ar
^toL^ hat «*» An<C$
the Planets have been lorra'd, while they were yet in
wm-
^
1 ft
f
j
11 c
fluid maffes, all the heavier matter fubfided to the cen-
tre. Since therefore the common matter of our Earth
on the furface thereof, is about twice as heavy as wa-
ter, and a little lower, in mines, is found about three
VM ^ ^
*i or four, or even five times more heavy; it is probable,
that the quantity of the whole matter of the Earth may
be
Digitized by Googl
B o ok III. of Natural Thilofophy. 23
be five or fix times greater than if confided all of it
water; efpecially fince I have befoj^jDhew'd, that the

Earth is about four times more o!enie than Jupiter. If
therefore Jupiter is a little more denfe than warer, in
the fpace of thirty days, in which that planet defcribes frt^W
the length of 459 of its femidiameters, it would, in a
medium of the lame denfity with our air, lofe almoft
a tenth part of its motion. But fince the refiftance of JuuiXrn**
mediums weight or den-
decreafes in proportion to their
fity, fo that water, which is ijf times lighter than
quickfilvcr, refifts lefs in that proportion ; and air,
which is 860 times lighter than water, refifts lefs in
the fame proportion: Therefore in the heavens, where
the weight of the medium, in which the Planets move,
is immenfely diminiftied, the refiftance will almoft Tj-^ <(t<w/t
Itisftiewnin thefcholiumof prop. 21. book 2. that

at the heightof 200 miles above the Earth, the air is
more rare than it is at the fuperficies of the Earth,
in the ratio of jo to 0,0000000000003998, or as
75000000000000 to 1 hence the planet
nearly. And
Jupiter, revolving in a medium of the fame denfity with
that fuperior air, would not lofe by the reliftance of the
medium theiooooooth part of its motion in 1000000
years. In the fpaces near the Eart h, the refiftance is pro-
duced only by the air, exhalations and vapours. When
thefe are careful ly exhaufted by the air pump from un-<<^*J*i*
der the receiver, heavy bodies within the receiver
fall Y ;^f t ( jv
with peifeft freedom, and without the leaft fenfible re*

fiftance; golJJtHTand the llgftteft dojvn^ let fall t0»«O^f .'.«
gether, will ddcenTwith egualvelocityTand though^

they fall through a fpace or four, jfix, and ejghtTeet,
they will come to the bottom at the lame time ; as ap- ^ ^
pears from experiments. And therefore the celeftial re-
gions being perfeftly void of air and exhalations, the
Planets and Comets meeting no fenfible refiftance in thofe
"
Q4 fpaces,
Digitized by Googl
fpaces, will continue their motions through them for

an immenfe trad of time.
Hypothesis L
That the centre of the fyflem of the world
is immoveable.
ûrv*«r^£- This is acknowledge! by all,while fome cont£0c|

v
that the Earth, others* that the SunTs fix'd in that
rU- . ^ centre. Let us fee what may from hence follow,
Proposition XI. Theorem XL

That the common centre ofgravity of theEarth,
the Sun, and all the Planets is immoveable.
For (by cor. 4. of the laws; that centre either is at

reft, or moves uniformly forward in a right line. But
if that centre mov'd, the centre of the world would
move alfo, againft the hypothefis.
Proposition XII. Theorem XII.

That the Sun is agitated by a perpetual motion,
f
'
but never r^cedesjarfrom the common centre
• ô^gravityôf
Forfince (by cor. 2. prop. 8.) the quantity of mat-

ter in the Sun, is to the quantity of matter in Jupiter,
as 1067 to 1 : and the diftance of Jupiter from the
Sun, is to the femidiameter of the Sun, in a proportion
but a fmall matter greater ; the common centre of gra-
vity of Jupiter and the Sun, will fall upon a point a
I, *m\l*» without the furface of the Sun. By the famear-
^ Utt gumcrYti frnce the quantity of matter in the Sun is to
the quantity of matter in Saturn, as 5021 to i> and
Digitized by Google
Book III of Natural Thilofophf. 23?
the diftance of Saturn from the Sun is to the femidi-
ameterof theSun in a proportion but a fmall matter lefs; r^^k
the common centre of gravity of~Saturn and the Sun
will fall upon a point a little within the lurface of the
Sun. And purfuing the principles of this computation,
we fhould find that tho' the Earth and all the Planets ttuÂ^1 -
were plac'd on one fide of the Sun, the diftance of the

common centre of gravity of all from the centre of the
Sun would fcarcely amouqjtoone diameter of the Sun.
In other cafes, the diftanlces*of thofe centres is always
lefs. And therefore, fince that centre of gravity is in
perpetual reft, the Sun, according to the various pofi*
tions of the Planets, muft perpetually be moved evferyâJ*.
way, but willfaever recede Tar from that centre. * Xtiwl '
T
Cor. Hence tTle\ ommon centre of gravity of the
?
Earth, the Sun, and all the Planets is to be efteem*4

—
the Centre of the World. For fince the Earth, the Sun
and all the Planets, mutually gravitate one towards ano-
ther, and are therefore, according to their powers of
gravity, in perpetual agitation, as the laws of motion
require ; it is plain that their moveable centres cannot
be taken for the immoveable centre of the world. If
th^t body were to be plac'd in the centre, towards
which other bodies gravitate moft, ('according to com-
mon opinion) that privilege ou^ht to be allojMto the "^^ x ^ v
Sun. But fince the Sun it felf is movâ tact point

is to be chofen, from which the centre of the Sun re- } - )
>
****
v and from which it would recede yet left,
~*
cedes ^leaTf
if the Body of the Sun were denfer and greater, and
therefore lefs apt to be moY'cfc
Pro;
Digitized by Google
234- Mathematical Principles Book
ran HI.
Proposition XIII. Theorem XIII.
The Planets move in ellipfes which have their

common focus in the centre of the Sun 5
and, by radij drawn to that centre, they de-
fcribe areas proportional to the times of de-
Jcription.
We have difcours'd above of thefe motions from the

phenomena. Now that we know the principles on
which they depend, from thofe principles we deduce
%
the motions of the heavens a priori. Becaufe the weights
of the Planets towirHTthe Sun, are reciprocally as the
fquares of their diftances from the Sun's centre ; if the
Sun was at reft, and the other Planets did not mutually
aft one upon another, their orbits would be ellipfes, hav-
ing the Sun in their common focus ; and they would
defcribe areas proportional to the times of defcription
by prop. 1 &and cor. i.prop. 13. book 1. But the
1 it
mutual aft ions of the Planets one upon another, are fo

very fmall, that they may be neglefted. And byprop,
66. book 1. they lefs difturb the motions of the Pla-
nets around the Sun in morion, than if thofe motions
i|tuA*^*1 were perform'd about the Sun at reft.

It is true, that the aftion of Jupiter upon Saturn
is not to be neglefted. For the force of gravity towards
Jupiter is to the force of gravity towards the Sun as 1
to 100*7; anc therefore in the conjunftion of Jupiter
'
and Saturn, becaufe the diftance of Saturn from Jupi-

ter is to the diftance of Saturn from the Sun, almoft
as 4 to 9 5 the gravity of Saturn towards Jupiter, will
be to the gravity of Saturn towards the Sun, as 81 ro
^ * (
"J*
i6x 10^7; or,as 1 to about 111. And hence arifcs a
perturbation of the orb of Saturn in every conjunction
of this Planet with Jupiter, fo fenfible that aftrono-
^ roers
Digitized by Google
Book III. of Natural Thilofophy. z $s
mers are puzled with ir. As the Planet is differently ^f^*^
fituated conjun&ions, its excentricity is fome-
in thefe
times augmented, fometimes diminiih'd ; its aphelion is
fome times carry 'd forwards, fometimes backwards, and "fTa^nW r
,
'
its mean motion is by turns acceleratea^nd retard-

ed. Yet the whole error in its motion about the Sun,Û twJUvy
Jtha* arifing from fo great a force, maybe almoft ^ voided ^^^ N v
Cexcept in the mean motion) by placing the lower *To- >>XM

cus of its orbit in the common centre of gravity of Ju-
piter and the Sun, (according to prop. 6j. book i.)
and therefore that error when it is greateft, fcarcely ex- hcimcu uufo
ceeds two minutes. And the greateft error in the
mean motion, fcarcely exceeds two minutes yearly . But *^mJU^;I(
in the conjunction of Jupiter and Saturn, the accelera-
tive forces of gravity of the Sun towards Saturn, of
Jupiter towards Saturn, and of Jupiter toward the Sun,
are almoft as 16, 81 and

— *— L.*i2il?or i 56600 ;and
therefore the difference of the forces of gravity of the
Sun towards Saturn, and of Jupiter towards Saturn, is
to the force of gravity of Jupiter towards the Sun, as
65 to if 6609, or as 1 to 240^. But the greateft
power of Saturn to difturb the motion of Jupiter is
proportional to this difference; and therefore the pertur-
bation of the orbit of Jupiter is much lefs than that of
Saturn's. The perturbations of the other orbits are yet owm
far lefs, except that the orbit of the Earth is fenfibly
"cHhirb'd by the Moon. The common centre of gra-
vity of the Earth and Moon moves in an ellipfe about
the Sun in the focus thereof, and by a radius drawn <£t d-U.
to the Sun, defcribes areas proportional to the times
of defcription. But the Earth in the mean time by a
jnenftruai motion is revolv'd about this common cen-
tre, .
Pro-
Digitized by Google
2} 6 'Mathematical Principles Book III:
Proposition XIV. Theorem XIV*

y
The aphelions and nodes of the orbits of the "P/a^

nets are fixt.
The aphelions are immoveable, by prop. u. book

and fo are the planes of the orbits by prop. i. of the
fame book. And if the planes are fixt, the nodes mud
be lb too. It is true, that fome inequalities may a-
rife from the mutual adions of the Planets and Comets
in their revolutions. But thefe will be fo fmall thar
they may be here (pafrd by.) ' <r^+
Cor. i. The fixt Stars are immoveable, feeing
they keep the fame pofition to the aphelions and nodes
of theflanets.
Cor. 2. And fince thefe Stars are liable to no fen-
frble parallax from the annual motion of the Earth,
they can have no force, becaufe of their immenfe dif-
tance, to produce any fenfible effeft in our fyftem f
Not to mention, that the fixt Stars, every where pro-
mifcuoufly difpers'd in the heavens, by their contra-?
ry attraftions deftroy their mutual aftions, by prop. 70 1
book 1.
Scholium.
m
Since the Planets near the Sun (viz,. Mercury, Ve- .
nus, the Earth and Mars) are fo fmall that they can
avft but with little force upon each other ; therefore
their aphelions and nodes mud be fixt, excepting in fo
far/'as they are difturb'd by the a&ions of Jupiter and
Saturn, and other higher bodies. And hence we may
find, by the theory of gravity, that their aphelions
move a little in confequentia, in refpeft of the fixed
Stars, and that in the lefquiplkate proportion of their
feveral
Digitized by Google
Book III. df natural tfhilofophy]
feveral diftances from the Sun. So that if the aphelion ,
of Mars, in the fpace of an hundred years, is carried ( ^ tKK

35'. 2.0". in confecmtntUy inrefpeft of the fixed Stars 5
the aphelions of tne Earth, of Venus, and of Mercury,
will, in an hundred years be carried forwards 17'. 40".
10'. 53". and 4'. 16". refpe&ively. Butthefe motions
are fo inconfiderable, that we have negleded them in
this proposition.
Proposition XV. Theorem I.

To find the principal diameters of the orbits of
the Tlanets.
They are to be taken in the fubfefquiplicate proporti-

on of by prop. 15. bock 1. and then
the periodic times
to be feverally augmented in the proportion of the fum
of the maflesof matter in the Sun and each Planet to the
Jfirft of two mean proportionals betwixt that fum and
the quantity of matter in the Sun, by prop. 6o.
^«
book i»
Proposition XVI. Problem II.
To fnd the eccentricities and aphelions of the

"Planets.
This problem is refolved by prop. 18. book 1.
Pro:
Digitized by Google
3 Mathematical ^Principles Book III.
Proposition XVIL Theorem XV.

That the diurnal motions of the Planets are
uniform, and that the It brat ion of the Moon
artfes from its diurnal motion.
The propofition is prov'd from the firft law of mo-
tion, and cor. 22. prop. 66. book 1. Jupiter, with

h
refpeft to the fixed Stars, revolves in 9 . $6'. Mars in
h h h
24 w'. Venus in about 2j . the Earth in i$ .
.
56'. the Sun in 25 \ days, and the Moon in 27 days
7 hours 43'. Thefe things appear by the phenomena.

o\o.wJU* \ The (pots in the Sun's body return to the fame fitua-
tion on the Sun's disk, with refpeft to the Earth in 27
£ days ; and therefore with refpeft to the fixed Stars
the Sun revolves in about 2$ \ days. But becaufe
the lunar day, arifing from its uniform revolution a-
bout its axft is menftrual, that is, equal to the time
of its periodic revolution in its orb, therefore the fame
(<v\\. face of the Moon will be always nearly turned to the
v av"-i- v. .s*?£&r ôcus

oJt ns or k ; b uc > as tEehtuation of that
'
\cU '
focus requires, will deviate a little, to one fide and to
the other, from the Earth in the lower focus; and this
*wi-
»
Up js thelibration in longitude. ForHiT libration in lati-
tude arifes from the Moon's latitude, and the inclinati-
on of its axis to the plane of the ecliptic. This theory
of the libration of the Moon, Mr. N. Mercator in his 4*
aftronomy, beginning of the Year
publiftied at the
cv -.KW'.vCtt 1576, explained more fully out of the fetters I fent
The utmofL fatellite of Saturn feemi to revolve*
^
a c\ hitn *
about its axis witTi a motion like thiôTlthe Moon,
refpefting Saturn continually with the fame face. For
t in its revolution round Saturn, as often as it comes to
the eaftern part of its orbit, it is fcarcely vifible, and
generally quite difappears ; which islike tobeoccafioned
wyjtWwA*«v
1
>
by
Digitized by Google
by fomejgots in that part of its body, which is then *\.e*J>**\
turned toward the Earth, as M. Caffini has obferved*
So alfb the utmoft fatellitc of Jupiter teems to revolve U™*)k>j*"n
about its axis with a like motion, becameîn that part
of its body which is turned from Jupiter, it has a fpor, vô^cJUc
which always appears'as if it were in Jupiter's own bo- ^my**
dy , wheneve r the fatellitc pafles between Jupiter and A !
our eve. 77
Proposition XVIII. Theorem XVI*

That the axes of the Tlanets are lefs than the
diameters drawn perpendicular to the axes.
The equal gravitation of the parts on all fides would

give a fphaerical figure to the Planets, if it\was not for
their diurnal revolution in a circle. By that circular
motion comes to pafs that the parts receding from*'-d/mAw
it
the axe endeavour to afcend about the equator. And op»'^'M<

therefore if the matter is in a fluid ftate, by its afcenc
f
towards the equator it will enlarge the diameters there,
and by its defcent towards tne poles it will (horten ^
the axe. So the diameter of Jupiter, (by the concurring
obfervations of aftronomers) is found (hortcr betwixt
pole and pole, than fromjeaft to weft. And by the ; ^tc v
fame argument, if our Earth was not higher about the

^ — 1 — -1— 'J f..\-C J _ _l_
equator than at the poles, the Seas would fubfide about (w^vs^t
1 /\t
the poles, and rifing towards the equator, would lay * - ^ " <
,AutV
all things there under water. i
Proposition XIX. Problem III.
To find the proportion of the axe of a Tlanet

to the diameters perpendicular thereto. ^ M«\
Our countryman Mr. Norwood^ meafuring a diftance t#wy\,*t-tA

of 9057J 1 feet oT
London meafufe between London and
Digitized by Google
*40 Mathematical Trinciples Book III.
Ttrk. fa i^}5» an ^ obferving the difference of latitudes

to be 2°. determined the meafure of one degree
to be 367196 feet of London meafure, that is 57300
faris toiles. M. Picm meafuring an arc of one de-
gree, and 22'. 55". of the meridian between Amiens
and Alalvoi/ine, found an arc of one degree to be 57060
Paris toifes. M. Caflini the father meafured the di-
*0± \ fiance upon the meridian from the town of Collioure in
RonJJillon to the obfervatory of Paris: And his fon ad-
v
l ded the diftance from the obfervatory to thîtadel of
^V^y* jStokirkz The whole diftance was 4861 56Ttofl«7
and the difference of the latitudes of Collioure and Dnn-
ty^was 8 degrees, and 31'. 11 J". Hence an arc
of one degree appears to be 57061 Paris toifes. And
from thefe meafures we conclude, that the circumfe-
rence of the Earth is 123249600, and its femidiaraeter
19615800 Paris feet, upon the fuppofition that the
Earth is of a fphaerical figure.
In the latitude of Paris a heavy body falling in a
fecond of time, defcribes 1 5 Paris feet, 1 inch, 1 line
as above, that is, 2173 lines f. The weight of
the body is diminifhed by the weight of the ambient
, air. Let us fuppofe the weight loft thereby to be
U tiW»Ao i_ part of the whole weight ^then that heavy bo-
YT
dy falling in vacuo will defcribe a height of 2174 lines
in one fecond of time.
Ûi^ A bod y in fvery fidereal day of 23*. 56'. 4".

uniformly revolving in a circle at the diftance of
19615800 feet from the centre, in one fecond of time
defcribes an arc of 1433, 46 feet; theverfed fine of
which is 0,05236561 or 7,54064 lines.
feet, And
therefore the force with which bodies defcend in the
latitude of Paris is to the centrifugal force of bodies
in the equator arifing from the diurnal motion of the
Earth, as 2174 to 7,54064.
The centrifugal force of bodies in the equator, is ro
the centrifugal force with which bodies recede direftly
from
Digitized by Google'
Book m. of Natural Thilofophf. z±i
from the Earth in the latitude of Paris 48 0 . 50'. 10"*
in the duplicate proportion of the radius to the co-
fine of
the latitude, that is, as 7,54064 to 3,267.
Add this force to the force with which bodies defcend
by their weight in the latitude of Paris, and a body,
in the latitude of Paris, falling by its whole undimi-
niftied force of gravity, in the time of one fecond, will
defcribe 2177,267 lines, or 15 Paris feet, 1 inch, and
5,267 lines. And the total force of gravity in that
latitude will be to the centrifugal force of bodies in
the equator of the Earth, as 2177,267 to 7,54064,
or as 289 to 1.
Wherefore if APBO^(Pl. 10. Fig. i.jreprefent the fi-
gure of the Earth, now~no longer fphaerical, but generated ^ '^ ^
by the rotation of an ellipfis about its lefler axe ; and
ACQjjca a canal jfulj of water, reaching from the Û*^*"^
pole Ojj to the cefetre Cc, and ^tljence.rifing to the cix**^^*^
equator Aa: The weight of the waterîn the Jeg of jvUv*^
the canal ACca, will be to the weight of water in the
other leg OCc^ as 289 to 288, becaufe the centri- ,
h
%
fugal forceT arifing from the circular motion, fuftains *'
*
^
•
and(tjkesjotf)one of the 289 parts of the weight (in AA* 1

the one leg) and the weight of 288 in the other fuf-
tains the reft. But by computation (from cor. 2.
prop. 91. book 1.) I find, that if the matter of the
Earth was all uniform, and without any motion, and
its axe P <9 were to the diameter AB, as 100 to 10 1
the force of gravity in the place towards the Earth,

would be to the force of gravity in the fame place
towards a fphere defcrib'd about the centre C with
Q
the radius PC, or QC, as 126 to i2f. And by the
fame argument, the force of gravity in the place A
towards the fphaeroid, generated 4>y the rotation of the
ellipfe APBQ_ about the axe AB y is to the force of
gravity in the fame place A> towards the fphere de-

icrib'd about the centre C with the radius AC> as
125 to 126. But the force of gravity in the place A$
Vox.. II. R to-
Digitized by Google
242 Mathematical Principles Book 111.
towards the Earth, is a mean proportional betwixt the

forces of gravity towards that fphaeroid and this fphere;
becaufc the fphere, by having its diameter P dimi-
niftied, in the proportion of 101 to 1O0, is transfor-
med into the figure of the Earth ; and this figure, by
having a third diafneter perpendicular to the two di-
ametersAB and P Q diminifh'd in the fame proporti-
Ll Jlvo on, is converted into the faid fphaeroid ; and the force
% of gravity in A, in either' cale, is diminiftVd nearly in
C£Mc t h e fafne proportion. Therefore the force of gravity
in A, towards the fphere defcrib'd about the centre C,
with the radius AC, is to the force of gravity in A%
towards the Earth, as 126 to And the force
of gravity in the place j?» towards the fphere defcrib'd
about the centre C withthe radius QC9 is to the force
of gravity in the place A, towards the fphere defcrib'd

about the centre C, with the radius AC
y in the pro-
portion of the diameters, (by prop. 72. book 1.) that

is, as ioo to 10 1. If therefore we compound thofe
three proportions iztf to 125, 126 to 12$ 7, and 100
to 101 ; into one: The force of gravity in the place
j0 towards the Earth, will be to the force of gravity
in the place A towards the Earth, as 116 x 116 x
100 to 125 x i2j£ x 101 ; or as 501 to 500.
Now fince (by cor. 3. prop. 91. book 1.) the
force of gravity in either leg ot the canal JCcs, or
*
OCcfy is as the diftance ofthe places from the centre
o? the Earth, conceived to be divided
if thofe legs are
by tranfverfe, and equidiftant furfaces, into parts
parallel,
proportional to the wholes, the weights of any num-
ber of parts in the one leg ACca> will be to the weights
of the fame number of parts in the other leg, as their
magnitudes and the accelerative forces of their gravity
conjun&ly, that is, as 101 to 100, and 500 to 501,
or as 505 to 501. And therefore if the centrifugal
force of every part in the leg ACca, arifing from the
"
motion, was to the weight of the fame part, as
"
4 to
Digitized by GoogU
Book III. of Natural Thilofophy. 2+3
^ to 505, fo that from the weight of every part, con-
ceived to be divided into 505 parrs, the centrifugal
force might ta ke offj four of thofe parts, the weightsXuiA ,Ki^
woulii Vemain equal in each leg, and therefore the fluid
would reft in an equilibrium. But the centrifugal
force of every part is to the weight of the fame pare
as x to 289; is, the centrifugal
that force which
£hoUld be of the weight, is only T-§-7 part
parts
^ thereof. And therefore, I fay, by the rule of propor-
tion^ that if the centrifugal force -p^r make the height
of the water in the leg ACca to exceed the height
of the water in the leg QCcq by one T part of its
t ~
-whole height; the centrifugal force T-W will make
the excels of the height in the leg ACca, only T | T
part of the height of the water in the other leg
jDCcq* And therefore the diameter of the Earth at
the equator, is to its diameter from pole to pole, as
2.30 to 220. And lince the mean femidiameter of the
Earth, according to Picart's menfuration, is 106*15800 .
Paris feet, or 3923, itf miles (reckoning jood feec c^^^

to a mile) the Earth will be higher at the equator,
than at the poles, by 85472 feet, or 17 TV miles. And
its height at the equator will be about 15)6*5 8600 feet,
and at the poles 10573000 feet.
If, the denfity and periodic time of the diurnal re-
volution remaining the fame, the Planet was greater or
lefs than the Earth ; the proportion of the centrifugal
force to that of gravity, and therefore alfo of the di-

ameter betwixt the poles to the diameter at the equa-
tor, would likewife remain the fame. But if the di-
urnal motion was accelerated or retarded in any pro-
portion, the centrifugal force would be augmented or
diminifhe d nearly in the fame duplicate proportion ; and
of the diameters will be increa-
therefore the difference
fed or diminifhed fame duplicate ratio very
in the
nearly. And if the denfity of the Planet was aug-
mented or diminilhed in any proportion, the force of
R 2.
6raY"X
Digitized by Google
244:
> Mathematical Trinciples Book III.
gravity tending towards it would alfo be augmented

or diminilhed in the fame proportion; and the differ-
* >ence of the diameters contrarywife would be diminifti-
jvo tl K^«wgj
n proportion as the force of gravity is augmented,
j
and augmented in proportion as the force of gravity

is dimimmed. Wherefore, fince the Earth, in refpeft
of the fixt Stars, revolves in 23*. 56", but Jupiter in
oh. and the fquares of their periodic times are as
56',
29 to and their denfities as 400 to 94 -J ; the dif-
5>
ference of the diameters of Jupiter will be to its leffer
29 400 229
diameter, as~~$~x 941^ x 1 to 1, or as 1 to 9 f nearly.
1 ******
Therefore the diameter of Jupiter from eaft to weft,
is to its diameter from pole to pole nearly as 10 f

to 9 f. Therefore fince its greateft diameter is 37",
its leffer diameter lyin^between the poles, will be 33"
A 25'". Add thereto about 3" for the irregular refrac-
tion of light, and the apparent diameters of this Pla-
net will become 40" and 36". 25"': which are to
each other as 11 £ to 10$ very nearly. Thefe things
are fo upon the fuppofition, that the body of Jupiter
is uniformly denfe. But now if its body be denfer
towards the plane of the equator than towards the poles,
its diameters may be to each other as 12 to II, or 13
'* u v
And Captti obferved in the year 16*91, that the diame-
k ter ofJupiter reaching from eaft to weft, is greater by a-
cluam/i*. (
bout a fjfteent h part t jj an ol her diameter. Mr.

<y**<** P«W with his 123 foot telefcope, and an excellent
micrometer, meafured the diameters of Jupiter in the
year 17 19, and found them as follows.
The
Digitized by Google
Book HI. of Natural Tbihfokyl 245
err
lbe times. Greatejldiam. Lejfer diam.VTbe diam. to each other.
day. hours. parts. parts. as

Jan. 28 6 12,28 12 to 11
Mar. 6 7 13*12 12,20 13* tO 12i
Mar. 9 7 13*1* 12,08 to ii*
Apr.
4X i
9 9 12,32 11,48 I to
, 3
So that the theory agrees with the phenomena. crw****- <
For the Planets are morelheated by the Sun's ravs to- f<jU^ - \
wards an5 therefore are a litnelfi&re

their equators,
condenfed by that heat, than towards their poles. <<t£*V
Moreover, that there is a diminution of gravity oc- o Jja«*a
cafioned bv the diurnal rotation of the Earth, and
therefore the Earth rifes. higher there than it does at
the pole?, (fuppofing that its matter is uniformly denfe)
will appear by the experiments of pendulums related
under the following proportion.
Proposition XX. Problem IV.

To find and compare together the weights of bo-
dies in the different regions of our Earth.
viY* Becaufe the weights of the unequal legs of the canal /aÂ
of water ACQjjca, are equal; and the weights of the
parts proportional to the whole legs, and alike fituated !>y«£,,*,$.
in them, are one to another as of the
the weigKts
wholes, and therefore equal betwixt themfelves; the ^w*7^
weights of equal parts and alike fituated in the legs,
will be reciprocally as the legs, that is, reciprocally as
250 to 229. And the cafe is the fame in all homo-
geneous equal bodies alike fituated in the legs of the
canal. Their weights are reciprocally as the legs, that
R $
~
is,
Digitized by Google
2+6 Mathematical ^Principles Book III.
is, reciprocally as the diftances of the bodies from the

Therefore if the bodies are fitu-
centre of the Earth.
m^^-ated in the uj>gexmoft parts of the canals, or on the
furface of the EarthT their weights will be, one to an-
prher, reciprocally as their diftances from the centre.
And by the fame argument, the weights in all other
hAvf places roun d the whole of the Earth, are reci-
furface
procally as the diftances of the from the centre
places
and therefore, in the hypothefis of the Earth's being a
fphxroid, are given in proportion.
>\v.y V"' Whence arifcs this theorem, that the increafe of
weight, in palling from the equator to the poles, is
nearly as the verfed fine of double the latitude, or,
which comes to the fame thing, as the fquare of the
right fine of the latitude. And the arcs of the degrees
of latitude in the meridian, increafe nearly in the fame
proportion. And therefore, fince the latitude of Paris
is 4 8°. 5
0', that of places under the equator, oo°. 00'.
and that of places under the poles 90 0 ; and the verfed

fines of double thofearcs are 11354,00000 and 20000,
the radius being 10000 j anc} the force of gravity at
the pole is to the force of gravity at the equator, as
230 to 229, and the e^cefs of the force of gravity at
the pole, to the forcp of gravity at the equator, as 1
to 229, the excefs of the force of gravity in the lati-
tude of Parts, will be to the force of gravity at the
cqustor as 1 x '-J-H* to 219, or as 5667 to 2290000.
And whole forces of gravity in thole
therefore the
places one to the other, as 1195667 to
will be,
ê^j-Z 290000. Wherefore, fince the lengths of pendu-
lums vibratingfin equal times, are as the forces of gra-
vity, and in the latitude of Paris> the length of a pen-
dulum vibrating feconds, is 3 Paris feet, and 8 \ lines,
,»v .or rather, becaufe of the weight of the air 8 £ lines
.
the length of a pendulum vibrating in the fame time

pnder the equator, will be fhorter by 1,087 ^ nes *
^0
And by a like calculus the following table is made.
Latitude
% • «
Digitized by Google
Book IIL of Natural Thilofophy. 247
Latitude »f Length of the Meajkre of one degree

the place. fenduUim* in the meridian.
Deg. Fecr, Lines. Toifes.
o 7>4<*8 5**37
5 7,481 56642
10 7>5*<* 56659
7>55>6 56687
20 56724
15 7,812 56769
3° 7>94 8 56823
35 8,099 5-6882
40 8,26l 5*94f
1 8,294 f*958
2 8,327 56971
3 8,361 56984
4 8,394 5-6997
45 8,428 57010
<5 8,461 5702*
8,494 57035
I 8,528 57048
9 8,561 57o6i
5o 8,594 57074
55 8,756 57M7
8,907 57196
*5 9*044 57250
7° 9,162 f7*5>5
75 9,258 5733*
80 9**9 57360
85 9>i7 z 57377
90 9>1&7 f7?8*
By this table therefore it appears, that the inequality
of degrees is fo finall, that the figure of the Earth, in
R 4 geogr*.
Digitized by Google
X
Mathematical ^Principles Book I1L

geographical matters, may be confidered as fphaerical
cfpecially if the Earth be a little denfer towards the

plane of the equator than towards the poles. L p^,^ j^
u<*>\#JU^
Now feveral aftronomers (ent into remote joutttries
to make aftronomical obfervatlons, have found that
*w ^
i r^
pendulum
ôur
<
or tH a
do
clocks accordingly
climates.
move flower near the
And firft of alfmthe
. year i6ji, M. took
Richer notice of it in the ifland
^âvo
^ For when,
Cayenne. in the month of Auguft, h& ju
was obferving of the fixt Stars over the
the tranfits
ineridian, he found his clock to_gg flower than it
C
^
vvû^ 0^
^v*^ * v
SHfit * n
t re ^P e(^ °f tne mean m °tion of the Sun, at
the rate of 2'. 28''. a day, Therefore<fittingjjp a,
fimple pendulum to vibrate in feconds, which were
meafured by an excellent clock, he obferved the length
of that fimple pendulum^ and this he did (over and
over/every week for .ten months together. And upon a.
his return to France, comparing the length or that

pendulum, with the length of the pendulum at Paris,
(which was 3 Paris feet and 8 f lines) he found it
ihorter by 1 \ line.
6{>.u\vvm Afterwards our friend Dr. Hallej> about the year
1 677, arriving at tne^flland of St« Helen> found his
pendulum-clock to go flower there than at London,
* without marking the difference. But he (horjped the
^J^
*"
rpd of his clock, by more than the $ of 'an 'inch, or
1 J line. And to effeft this, becaufe the length of
the^fcjewât the lower encfbf' the rod was not iuffici-r
c
ent, He interpofed a wooden ring betwixt the nut and
the ball.- A
Then in the year 1682. M. Parinznd M. dfcx Zfajftf,
Wu" '
£ i0,a *
found the length of a fimple pendulum vibrating in
feconds at the royal obfervatory of Paris to be } feet
and 8£ lines. And by the fame method in the ifland
of Goree, they found the length of an ifochronal pendu-
lum to be 3 feet and 6% lines, differing from the for-
mer by two lines. And in the fame year, going to the
ifland*
Digitized by Google
iflandsof Guadaloupe and Martinico, they found that the
length of an ifochronal pendulum in thofe iflands was
2 feet and 6i lines. 1 •
•
After this M. Couplet, the Jon^ in the month of Ju-

+ ,
ly 1 607/" atthe royal obfervatory of Paris'^to fitted his r twCv:
pendulum clock to the mean motion of the Sun, that

y
for a confiderable time together, the clock agreedL 'nh A
the morion of the Sun. In November followYngV *up«c*~
jm his arrival at Lisbon, he found his clock to go
flower than before, at the rate of 2'. 12". in 24 hours. >^Vv
And. nexx^March coming to Paraiba he found his clock fog 0
to go?Uower there than at Paris, and at the Tate of 4'.
I a", in 24 hours. And he affirms, that the pendulum
vibrating in feconds was fhorter at Lisbon by 2± lines,
and at Paraiba by jf lines, than at Paris. He had done
better to have reckon'd thofe differences if and J. t*l**&*v
2
For correfpond to the differences of
thefe differences
the times 13". and 4. 12''. But this gentleman's ob-
2'.
fervations are fo grofs, that we cannot confide in

them.
Inthefollowingyearsidppand 1700. M. des Hayes,
making another voyage to America, determin'd that in Utlu^
the iflands of Cayenne and Granada the length of the pen-
dulum vibrating in feconds was a fmall matter left c*t<*~
than 3 feet and 6\ lines; that in the iflandof Sr.
Chriftophers, it was 2 feet and 6 \ lines ; and in. the
ifland of St. Domingo, 3 feet and 7 lines.
And in the year 1704. P. Feuille at Puerto hello in
America, found that the length of thependulum vibra-
ting in feconds, was 3 Paris feer, and only T
5 T T lines,
that is, almoft 3 lines fhorter than at Paris ; but the
obfervation was faulty. For afterwards going to the <**r tu
*^
ifland of Martinico, he found WTength of the ifo-
chronal pendulum there, 3 Paris feet and 5f f lines.
Now the latitude of Paraiba is 6°. 38'. fouth. That Avr
of Puerto hello 9°. 33'. north. And the latitudes of the
iflands Cayenne ,Goree, Guadalottpe, MwimQ,Granada,
Digitized by Google
2 so Mathematical Trinciples Book III.
0.
St. Chriftophers and St. Domingo, are refpe&ively
4
55', 14
0
. 40", 14 0 . oo', 14 0 . 44, 12 0 . 06', 17°- I5>'.
and 19 0 . 48'j north. And the exceffes of the length
*
1 of the pendulum at Paris aboxe the lengths of the ifochro-
HvU ~
nalpendulums obferv'd in thofe latitudes,are a little grea-
terthan by the table of the lengths of the pendulum a-
bove computed. And therefore the Earth is a little
higher under the equator than by the preceding calcu-
* us > an( * a '* rt ' e ênfer at centre than in mines near
C %aa
Jj thefurface, upjefs perhaps the heats oFthe torrid zone
x"
>J X
* have a little Extended the length of the pendulums.
%ii For M. Pkart has obferv'd, that a rod of iron, which

in frofty feather in the %wipyer fealon was one footyx^
i\vC*<
V
Vv long, when headed by fireT was lengthen'd into iloot
l ^f and i line. Afterwards' M. dc la Hire found that a
rod of iron, which in the like winter feafon was 6
feet long ; when expos'd to the heat of the fummer Sun,
*
was exrended into 6 feet and f line. In the former
cafe the he*t was greater than in the latter. But in the
latter it was greater than the heat of the external parts
of an human body. For metals expos'd to the fum-
mer-fun, acquire a very confiderable degree of heat.
But the rod of a pendulum-clock is never expos'd to
the heat of the fumrnerrfun, nor ever acquires a heat
equal to that of the external parts of an human body.
^^ And therefore though the 3 foot rod of a pendulum
i^^
(V
ock will indeed Be a little longer in the fummer
than in the winter-feafon ; yet the difference will
/
f
* uv v.A < -fe?E£^!y amount to \ line. Therefore the total difference

oPTKe lengths of ifochronal pendulums in different
climates, cannot be afcrib'd to the difference of heat,
t ^ - 'm Nor indeed to the miftakes of the ^rewb aftronomers.
For although there is not a perfefr agreement betwixt
1
*
w
'
, their obfervations,yet the errors are fo finall that they
i.u uavn
^ e neglefted; and in this they all agree, that ifo-
chronal pendulums are fhorter under the equator than
?t the royal obfervatory of Paris, by a difference not
lefs
Digitized by Google
Book III. of Natural Thilofophy. z5 1
lefs than 1
J line, nor greater than 2 J lines. By the
obfervations of M. Richer in the iflandof Cajenne,thc dif-
ference was 1* line. That difference being corre&ed by
thofe of M. des Hayes becomes 1 \ line or 1 \ line.
By the lefs accurate obfervations of others the fame was
;
made about two lines. And this difagreement might
v< ^'
arife partly from the errors of the obfervations, partly^'
from the diflimilitude of the internal parts of the Earth,
and the height of mountains, partly from the different
heats of the air.
I take an iron rod of 3 feet long to be ftiorter by

a fixth part of one line in winter time with us here in * r AAm
^
England, than in the fummer. Becaufe of the "great 1
heats under the equator, fubduft this quantity from

the difference of one line anTTaquarter obferv'd by M.
Richer, and there will remain one line TV> which agrees
very well with ir-l-f^ Hne colle&ed by the theory
a little before. M. made
Richer repeated his obfervations,
in the ifland of Cayenne, every week months to- >ut it}
for 10
c
gether, and compared the lengths bf the pendulumi'*** i„/fcw<
wHIch he had there noted in the iron rods, with the
lengths thereof which he obferv'd in France. This
diligence and care feemj to have been wanting to the o- • u r
•
c
ther obfervers. If/iEis* gentleman's ODfervatioqs are to

be depended on, the Earth is higher under the equator
than at the poles, and that by an excefs of about 17
miles : as appeared above by the theory.
Prop*
Digitized by Google
252 Mathematical Principles Boole III.
Proposition XXL Theorem X\TII.

7&z£ equinoEtial points go backwards, and
that the axe of the Earth, by a nutation in
evegy annual revolution, twice vibrates to-
wards the ecliptic j and as often returns to
The proportion appears from cor. 20. prop.

book t But that motion 'of nutation muft be very
, t 1 , imall, and indeed fcarce perceptible.
Proposition XXII. Theorem XVHL

That all the motions of the Moon, and all
the inequalities of thofe motions, follow
from the principles which we have laid
wU"\ iH-\ That the greater Planets, while they are carried about
the Sun may, in the mean time, carry other le/Ter
Planets, revolving about them ; and that thofe lefTer
Planets muft move in which have their foci in
ellipfes,
the centres of the greater, appears from prop. ^5. book
;^ u\v^ *• But then their motions will be fevejal ways dif-

turb'd by the aftion of the Sun, and they will fuffer
fuch inequalities as are obferv'd in our Moon. Thus
our Moon, (by cor. 2, 3, 4, and 5. prop. 66. boolciT)
moves fafter, and, by a radius drawn to the Earth,
defcribes an area, greater for the time, and has its orbit
lefs curv'd, and therefore approaches nearer to the
Earth, in the fyzygies than in the quadratures, except-
WvV ^
'
in 8 in fo far a5)thefe effefts are hinder'd by the moti-
'
on of eccentricity. For (by cor. ^prop." 66. book 1.)

the
Digitized by GoOjgi
Book III. of Natural Thilofophy. 25*
the eccentricity is when the apogeon of the
greateft,
Moon is in the fyzygies, and leaft when the fame is
in the quadratures ; and upon this account, the peri- j
geon Moon is fwifter, and nearer to us, but the apo-*™^
geon Moon flower?~and farther from us, in the fyzy-^^^tc 1 .
gies than in the quadramresr^ Moreover the apogee

goes forwards, and the nodes backwards : and this is \^ tK(K cdt to ^
done, not with a regular, but an unequal motion. For

(by cor. 7 and 8. prop. 66, book 1.) the apogee goes »
more fwiftly forwards in its fyzygies, more flowly

^ ***
backwards in its quadratures; and, by the excels of
its progrefs above its regrefc, advances yearly in confix
quentia. Butfconttary wi fe the nodes (by cor. 1 1 . prop. * i *yJH"ilo
1
66. book 1 •) are quiefcent in their fyzygies, and gO

back in their quadratures. Further, the greatefl: lo ^^t^.
eofttie Moon, (by cor. io^ pr^tftf. book x.)
is greater in the quadratures of the Moon, than in its
fyzygies. And (by cor. 6. prop. 66. book 1.) the
mean motion of the Moon is flower in the perihelion '
of the Earth, than in its aphelion. And thefe are the

principal inequalities (of the Moon,) taken notice of by
aftronomers.
But there are yet other inequalities, not obferv'd
former aftronomers; by which the motions
Moon are fo difturb'd, that to this day we have noc
by wx-1^*
of the
Ah<v
^'^ v> ^
been able^to bring them under any certain rule. For
the velocities or horary motions of the apogee
and nodes of the Moon, and their equations as well
as the difference betwixt the greateft eccentricity in
the fyzygies, and the leaft eccentricity in the quadra-
tures, and that inequality, which we call the variation,
are (by cor. 14. prop. 66. book 1.) in the courfe of
the year, augmented and diminiih'd, in the triplicate
proportion of the Sun's apparent diameter. And be- * Ai^Â
fides (by cor. 1 and 2. lem. 10. and cor. 16. prop.tftf.
book i.) the variation is augmented and diminiih'd,
nearly in the duplicate proportion of the time between
the
Digitized by Google
the quadratures. But in aftronomical calculations, this

is commonly Ithrown into*' and confound-
Ur | -4c^K «U inequality
ed with, the equation of the MoonY centre.
' *
Proposition XXIIL Problem V-

AxJLiCv* dwV* the unequal motions of the fatellites
of Jupiter and Saturn from the motions oj
our Moon.
From the motions of our Moon we deduce the cor-

refponding motions of the moons or fatellites of Ju*
piter, in this manner, by cor. \6 prop. 66. book I.
v ua ^{^xo The mean motion of the nodes of the outtnoft fatellite

of Jupiter, is to the mean motion of the nodes of our
Moon, in a proportion compounded of the duplicate
proportion of the periodic time of the Earth about
the Sun, to the periodic time of Jupiter about the Sun,
and the fimplc proportion of the periodic time of the
fatellite about Jupiter to the periodic time of our Moon
about the Earth : and therefore thofe nodes, in the

lpace of an hundred years, are carried 8°. 24'. back-
tab *U A wards, or in antecedents. The mean motions oT the
no^ es °^ inner fatellites, are to the mean motion of
v*
the nodes of the outmofl, as their periodic times to
%M<5
>wk\l*\* t he periodic time of the former, by the fame corolla-
ry, and are thence given. And the motion of the ap-
fis of every fatellite in confiqaenti*, is to the motion of
its nodes in antecedent, as the motion of the apogee of
our Moon, to the morio? of its nodes (by the fame

,h ok s*» **u corollary) and is thence given.
v
But the motions of
the apfides thus found, muft be diminiih'd in the pro-
portion of 5 top, or of about 1 to 2, on account of a
caufe, which I cannot here defcend to explain. YThe
greateft equations of the nodes, and of the apfis of c-
vcry fatellite, are to the greateft equations of the nodes,
and
Digitized by Google
Book III. of Natural Thilofophy* z;f
and apogee of our Moon refpe&ively, as the motions
of the nodes and a p fides of the farellites, in the time
of one revolution of the former equations, to the mo-
tions of the nodes and apogee of our Moon, in the
time of one revolution of the latter equations. The va-
riation of a fatellite, Jeen from Jupiter, is to the varia-
^*> '
tw
tion of our Moon, in the fame proportion, as the whole

motions of their nodes refpe&ively, during the times, ^fM^ L
&
in which the fatellite and our Moon, (after parting J.u)u*m
from) are revolv'd (again) to the Sun, by the fame <?i/* **t
corollary ; and therelore in the outmoft fatellite, the
variation does not exceed 5". n'".
Proposition XXIV. Theorem XIX.

That the flux and reflux of the Sea, arifefrom - ,v
the atttons of the Sun and Moon.
By cor.19 and 20. prop. 66, book 1. It appears that

the waters of the fea ought twice to rife and twice to -i*^
fall every day, as welHuoaras folar ; and that the great-
eft height of the waters in the oj>en and jde,eg feas, ^ (

^ /
ought to follow the appulfe of the luminaries to the

'
meridian of the place, by a lefs interval than 6 hours ;

as happens in all that eaft^ trad of the Atlantic and ^^
gM"
ty£ihiofk feas between France ancftlie Cape of Good Hope ;
and on the coasts of Chili and Pern in the South-Sea; in
all which fti6ars>the flood falls out about the fecond, i\wJA<ie^
third, or fourth hour, unlefs where the motion propa-

gated from the \deea otean is by^the fhallowne fsof the
c hanne ls, througftwtiich it pafTes to fome particular^
plicesT retarded to the fifth, fixth, or fevenrh hour, and
^
even lajter^^The hours I reckon from the appulfe of
A
each luminary to the meridian 6T the place, as well un-
der, as above the horizon ; and by the hours of the
C '*
lunar day, I ujaderftand the 24th parts of that time, ?^^'£
which the Moon, by its apparent diurnal motion, em-'
ploys
Digitized by Google
z$6 Mathematical Trinciples Book III.
tfk*. ploys to come about again to the meridian of the place

pjeAV c ] which it the day before. The
oftheSunor
force
** w t"^VMoon left
in raiting the fea, is greateft of

in the appulfe
c
the luminary to the meridian of the place. But the
force imprefled upon the fea at that time continues a
little while after the imprcflion, and is afterwards en-
creas'd by a new, though lefs, force upon it.
ftilj afting
This makes the higher and higher, till this new
1
force becoming too w^Jc to^jgifeît any more, the fea
rifes to its greateft height. And this will come
tcTpafs perhaps in one or two hours, but more frequent-
ly near tHe fliore s in about three hours, or even more
where the fea is (hallows
The two luminaries excite two motions, which will
not appear diftinftly, but between them will arife one
mixt motion compounded out of both. In the con-
junction or oppofition of the luminaries, their forces
will be conjoint, and bring on the greateft flood and
^hb. In the quadratures the Sun willtraifeihe waters
which the Moon deprefles, and deprefs the^faxers which
the Moon raifes, and from the difference of their forces*
the fmalleft of all tides will folio w* And becaufe fas
experience tells us ) the force of the Moon is greater
than that of the Sun, the greateft height of the wa-

1 'i.yf ters will happen about the third lunar hour. Out of
the fy zy gies and quadratures, the greateft tide, which
by the (ingle force of the Moon ought to fall out at
the third lunar hour, and by the fingle force of the Sun
at the third folar hour, by the compounded forces of
both muft fall out in an intermediate time, that ap-
proaches nearer to the third hour of the Moon, than
to that of the Sun. And therefore while the Moon is
pafling from the fyzygies to the quadratures* during
which time the jd hour of the Sun precedes the 3d
hour of the Moon, the greateft height of the waters
will alfo precede the }d hour of the Moon ; and that,
by the greateft interval, a little after the oftants of the
Digitized by Google
Moon and by like intervals, the greateft tick will fol-/vwfcVe*-
;
,
low the 3d lunar hour, while the Moon is palling

from the quadratures to the fyzygies. Thus it hap- a.
pens in the open fea. For in the mouths of rivers, the * 3 1 ^

greater tides come later to their heTghTT^' <c *
But the effecls of the luminaries depend upon their

diftances from the Earth. For when they are lefsdif-
tanr, their effects are greater, and when more diftant,
their effedh are lef , and that in the triplicate propor-
tion of their apparent diameter. Therefore it is, that
the Sun, itr the winter time, being then in its perigee,
has a greater effect, and makes the tides in the fyzygies ^^'^
fomething and thofe in the quadratures fome-
greater,
thing left than in the fummer feafon ; and every month vK ^
the Moon, while in tHe^perigce, raifes greater tides
than at the diftance of 1 5 days before or after, when
it is in its apogee. Whence it comes to pafs, that two
highcft tides don't follow, one the other, in two im-
mediately fucceeding fyzygies.
The effed: of eitjjer luinjnary doth like wife depend
upon its from the equator. For,
declination or diftance
if the luminary was plac'd at the pole, it would con-
fhntly attrad all the parts of the waters, without any
intention or remiffion of its aftion, and could caufe no ,
'
reciprocation of motion. And therefore, as the lumi-

naries decline from the equator towards either pole,
they will, by degrees, lofe their force, and on thisac-
-count will excite lefler tides in the folftitial than in the
equinoctial fyzygies. But in the folftitial quadratures,
they will raifc greater tides than in the quadratures a- ^ a 1
f
bout the equinoxes; becaufe the force of the Moon

then fituated in the equator, moft exceeds the force of
the Sun. Therefore the greateft tides fall out in thofe
fyzygies, and the leaft in thofe quadratures, which
happen about the time of both equinoxes; and the
greateft tide in the fyzygies is always fucceeded by the
leaft tide in the quadratures, as we find by experience.
Vol.
t .
II. S Bur,
——
Digitized by Google
258 Mathematical Principles Book IlL
But, becaufe the Sun is lefs diftant from the Earth in
winter than in Cummer, it comes to pafs that the great-
, eft and leaft tides more frequently appear before than
after the vernal equinox, and more frequently after
than before the autumnal.
Moreover, the effeds of the luminaries depend upon
the latitudesof places. LetsipEP Pl.io.Fig. 2. repreftnc
the Earth cover'd with deep waters ; C its centre
lts
P°' cs » tne equator ; F, any place without
/jtiW«_
( the equator 5 F/, the parallel of the place ; d the cor- D
refpondent parallel on the other fide of the equator ;
Li the place of the Moon three hours before; //, the
place of the Earth diredtly under i t ; h, the oppofite place ;
A', ^the places at 90 degrees diftance; CH, Ch, the
greateft heights of the feafrom the centre of the Earth;
and CK, cl^ its leaft heights: and if with the axes
Hb y Kkj an ellipfis isdefcrib'd, and by the revolution
of that ellipfis about its longer axe Hk> a fpha^roid HP
Kbpk* is form'd, this fphseroid will nearly reprefent
the figure of the lea; and CF, Cf, CD,Cd, will repre-
fent the heights of the fea in the places Ff, Dd. feut
^ ^ further, in the faid revolution of the eHipfis any point

K
N defcribes the circle NM> cutting the parallels F'fi
'
.
• Dd, in any places RT; and the equator AE in S; CN
will reprefent the height of the fea in all thofe places^,
S,T, fituated in this circle. Wherefore in the diurnal
\ revolution of any place F, the greateft flood will be in
F, at the 3d hour after the appulfe of the Moon to the
meridian above the Horizon ; and afterwards the great-
eft^bîn Oy at the 3d hour after the fating of the
t
a A
Moon v anfthen the greateft flood in /, at the 3d hour
after the appulfe of the Moon to the meridian under
. * »
^ the horizon, and laftly, the greateft ebb in O, at the
3d hour after the rifing of the Moon; and the latter
* *' t%
flood in /, will be lefs than the preceding flood in F.
For the whole fea is divided into two hemifpherical
floods, one in the hemifphere KHk on the north fide,
the
Digitized by Google
Book III. of Natural <Philofophy. iyg
theother intheoppofitehemifphere Khkjwhkh wemay
therefore call thejiwth^rn and "the fbuthern floods; ^^[L^^X
Thefe floods being always bppofite the one to the other,
come by turns to the meridians of all places, after an
intervalof iz lunar hours. And feeing the northern
countries partake more of the northern flood, and the jn*f««-*} tA "
fouthern countries more of the fouthern flood, thence

and lefs in all places with-
arife tidff„ afrefRafely greater
out the equator, in which the luminaries rife ancTfet. '/*^'^
But the greateft tide will happen, when the Moon "He-
clinestowards the vertex ot the place, about the jd ->H^ vW
hour after the appuTIe of the Moon to the meridian
above the horizon ; and when the Moon changes its de-
clination to the other Jide of the equator , that which
NUt A
was the greater tide will be chang'dintoa lefTer. And >
<
the greateft difference of the floods will fall out about

the times of the folftices i efpecially if the afcending
node of the Moon is about the firft of Aries. So it is j^^v
found by experience, that the morning tides in winter ^
exceed thofe of the evening, and the evening tides in j (Al x
fummer exceed thofe of the morning ; at Plymouth by

the height of one foot, but at Brijiol, by the height of
15 inches, according to the obfervations of Coleprefl
and Sturmy.
But the motions which we have been defcribing,'
fufFer fome alteration from that force of reciprocation^
which the waters, being once moved, retain a little
while by their vis infita. Whence it com& fo pafs than
the tides may continue for fome time, tho* the aftion*
of the luminaries fhould ceafe. This power of retaining
the imprefs'd motion lefTens the difference of the alter-
nate tides and makes thofe tides which immediately fuc-
ceed after the fyzygies greater, and thofe which follow
next after the quadratures, lefs; And hence ir is, thac
the alternate tides at Plymouth and BrifloU don't differ
much more one from the other than by the height of a
foot or 1 5 inches, and that the greateft tides of all at
S 2 thofe
Digitized by Google
2 6o Mathematical Tr inciples Book III,
thofe ports are not the firft but the third after the fy-
abiks**4 zygies. And befides aHthe motions are retarded in their
paffage through fhallow channels, fo that the greateft
,<t>w*Vo t jj es Q f ajj j n fame {heights and mouths of rivers, arc
>%v\<«^~^ the fourth or even the fifth after the fyzygies.
* i *v<My JU Farther it may Jiap^that thejtide may be propagat-
:
ed from the ocean through different channels towards

^ ;îr may pais quicker through fome chan-
the fame port, and
through others, in which cafe the fame tide,
nels than
divided into two or more fucceedingone another, may
compound new motions of different kinds. Let us fup-
pofe two equal tides flowing towards the fame port from
different places, the one preceding the other by (Shoi^rs* -
and fuppofe the firft tide to happen at the third hour

of the appulfe of the Moon to the meridian of the
port. If the Moon at the time of the appulfe to the
£.a<ttt- meridian was in the equator, every 6 hours alternately
v*^Jt*<>\v tnere would arife equal floods, which meeting with
v
vvuû<w 35 man y ecl ua ' c s w °uld ^

ballance one the other,
v.
*L
r
tvv ^
that for that day the water would ftagnate and remain
' quiet. If the Moon then declined iroriTthe equator,
the tides' in the ocean would be alternately and
greater
|
^ lefs as was fajd. And from thence two greater and two
« would be alternately
leffer tides propagated towards that
port. But the two greater floods would make the
greateft height of the waters to fall out in the middle
time betwixt both ; and the greater and leffer floods
would make the waters to rife to a mean height in the
middle time between them, and in the middle time be-
tween the two leffer floods the waters would rife to
their leaft height. Thus in the fpace of 24 hours the
waters would come, not twice, as commonly, but once
only to their greateft, and once only to their leaft height;
and their greateft height, if the Moon declined to-
wards the elevated pole, would happen at the 6 or 3 0th
hour after the appulfe of the Moon to the meridian;
and when the Moon changed its declination this flood
would
Digitized by Google
Book IIL of Natural Thilofophy. 261 7
would be changed into an ebb. An example of all

which Dr. Halley has given us, from the obfervations
of feamenîn the port of Bat/bam in the kingdom of -Uvm*
Tnnquin in the latitude of 20 0 50'. north. . In that
port, on the day which follows after the pafTageof the
Moon over the equator, the waters ftagnate when the v4MXVV
;
^^
Moon declines to the north they begin to flow and ebb, Amcuvai^!
not twice, as in other ports, bat once only every day,
and thejg_2sj$yiappens at the fating and the grcateft ebb ^ Au
> ,
l J
at theVifing of the Moon. This tide encreafes with

the declination of the MoonjtjU the 7th or 8th day; U<^t w
then for the 7 or 8 days following, it decreafes at the
fame rate ashad increafed before, and ceafes when
it
Vî^
the Moon changes its declination, eroding over the e- ^v^*^* «
quator to the fouth. After whiclfthe nood is imme-
diatly chang'd into an ebb; and/ thenceforth jthe ebb ^1 ^
happens at the J^trigg, and the flood at the
{[Q^g of the
Moon ; till th£ xtioon again pafling the equator chang- LV<A -
es its declination. There are two inlets to this port, U^^^t.J.

and the neig hbourin g channels, one from the feas of |v ; ^ l tl t
China, between the continent and the ifland of Lucoma9

the other from the Indian fea, between the continent
and the ifland of Borneo. But whether there be really
two tides propagated through the ftid channels, one
^
»wt^
>
u^
t
from the Indian fea in the fpace of iz hours, and one

from the fea of Chins in the fpace of 6 hours, which
therefore happening at the 3d and 9th lunar hours, by
being ^compounded together, produce thofe motions, or
whether there be any other circumftances in the ftateof 0
'
thofe feas, I leave to be determin'd by obfervations on v *
/ f
the neighbouringlhoars.', r • A
TKus TFave explain'd the caufes of the motions of .
»
the Moonand of the Sea. Now it is fit to fubjoin

fomething concerning the quantity of thofe motions.
Pro-
Digitized by Google
26* Mathematical Principles Book IIL
Proposition XXV. Problem VI.

To find the forces with which the Sun dif-
^f<w4<c
turbs the motions of the Moon. PI. 10. Fig. V
Let S reprefent the Sun, T the Earth, P the Moon,
CADB the Moon's orbit. In SP take SAT equal 10ST
and let S L be to SK, in the du plicat^ proportion of
SK to SP; draw LM parallell to PT; and if J7*or
SK fuppos'd to reprefent
is the accelerated force of
gravity of the Earth towards the Sun, S L will re-
prefent the accelerative force of gravity of the Moon
towards the Sun. But that force is compounded of the
partsS and L M M, of which the force LM, and that
part of SM which is reprefented by TM, difturb the
motion of the Moon, as we have fhew'd in prop. 66.
••;—.tt book i. and its corollaries. Forifmuch as the Earth and
1
Moon are revolv'd about their common centre of gra-
vity, the motion of the Earth about that centre will
be alfo difturb'd by the like forces, but we may con-
fider the fums both of the forces and of the motions
as in the Moon, and reprefent the fum of the forces
by the lines TM
and ML, which are analogous to
them both. The force ML
(in its mean quantity) is,
to the centripetal force by which the Moon may be re-
tained in its orbit revolving about the Earth at reft at
the difhnce PT, in the duplicate proportion of the
periodic time of the Moon about tne Earth, to the
periodic time of the Earth about the Sun (by cor. 17.
prop. 66. book 1.) that is in the duplicate proportion
of 27 a 7 h 43'. to 3^5 d 6\ p'; or as 1000 to
. . .
178725; or as 1 to 178^. But in the^thprop. of

this book we found* that, if both Earth and Moon
were revolv'd about their common centre of gravity,
the mean difhnce of the one from the other would be
nearly 6o± mean femidiameters of the Earth. And
ni W* 4
* *< >
yZ , ^ xv , ~ the
„ : •* 2 r
t' 1 . » • -4- v.
Digitized by Google
Book III. of Natural Thilofophy. 2(5$
the force, by which the Moon may be kept revolving yvxamî*"
in itsorbit about the Earth in reft at thediftance PT
of 6o± femidiameters of the Earth, is to the force by
which it may be revolv'd in the fame time at the
diftance of 60 femidiameters, as 6o\- to 60 ; and this
force is to the force of gravity with us, very nearly ast^s^rvte
1 to o'o x 60. Therefore the mean force is to ML
the force of gravity on the furface of our Earth, as
1 x 60^ to 60 x 60 x 60 x 178TJ, oras 1 to 6"j8op2,
6. whence by the proportion of the lines TM> ML,
the force TM is alfo given ; and thefe are the forces
with which the Sun difturbs the motions of the
Moon. O E.I.
Proposition XXVI. Problem VII.

To find the horary increment of the area, Mw**
which the Moon, by a radius drawn to the
Earth, defcribes in a circular orbit.
«
Wehaveabove fliew'd that the area, which the Moon

defcribes by a radius drawn to the Earth, is proportio-
nal to the time of defcription excepting in(fo faras)the
;
Moon's motion is difturb'd by the aftion of the Sun.

And here we propofe to inveftigate the inequality of
the moment, or horary increment of that area, or motion
fi difturb'd. To render the calculus more eafy, we fhall

fuppofe the orbit of the Moon to be circular, and neg- P xu
jcft all inequalities, but that only which is now under
confideration. And becaufeof the immenfediftance of
the Sun, we that the lines SP and
fhall further fuppofe,
ST, are parallel. means, the force L
By this PL 10. M
Fig. 4. will be always reduc'd to its mean quantity TP,
as well as the force TM,
to its mean quantity 3 PK.
Thefe forces^ (by cor. 2. of the laws of motion) com-
pofe the force TL;
and this force by letting fall the
S 4
' '
perpen-
Digitized by Go
26\. Mathematical Principles Book III.
perpendicular LE upon the radius TP, is refolv'd into

the forces TE, EL; of which the force TE, aft-
^m.oc
\<A<.vy^
lt]
S conftantly in the direction of the radius TP, neither
acce l era tes or retards the description of the area TP C,
made by that radius TP; but EL atting on the radius
TP in a perpendicular direftion, accelerates or retards
ct/»v the defiription of the area in proportion as it accelerates
or retards the Moon. That acceleration oT the Moon,
in its pafTage from thequadrature C, to the conjunction
A, is in every moment of time, as the£f»mir/»gaccele-
rative force EL, that is, as Let the time
h? reprefented by the mean motion of the Moon, or

(which comes to the fame thing) by the angle C7*P3
or even tnearc CP- At "gh* a ng' es u P on C T, ere<5t
vva
:
*
qq equal to CT. And fuppofing the quadrantal arc
AC to be divided into an infinite number of equal
parts Pp &c. there parts may reprefent the like infinite
number of the equal parts of time. Let fall /^per-
pendicular on CT; and draw TG meeting with P, K
\j> produe'd, in Fand/; then will FK be equal tp
TKj and Kk^ be to P K
as Pp to Tp, that is, in a
giv'n proportion ; and therefore FK
x Kl^, or the area
PK *
FKk.f, will be as > îat *s as
TP
compounding, the whole area G CKF will be as the fum
of all the forces EL imprefs'd upon the Moon in the
whole time CP; and therefore alio as the velocity ge-
nerated by that fum, that is, as the acceleration of the
defcription of the area CTP, or as the increment of
cvV the moment thereof. The force by which the Moon
may in its periodic time CADB of zy d . yK 43', be-
Earth in reft at the diftance
retain'd revolving about the
. v. TP, would body, falling in the time CT, to
caufe a
defcribe the length f CT, and at the fame time to ac-
quire a velocity equal to that with which the Moort
Digitized by Google
Book III. of Natural Thilofopby. 26$
is moVd in its orbit. This appears from cor. 9. prop* 4.
book 1. But fince Kd, drawn perpendicular on TP y is
but a third part of E Lj and equal to the half of TP, or
ML-t in the oftants,the force EL in the o&ants, where .x*^<^ <.
it is greateft, will exceed the force ML, in the propor-

tionof 3 to 1; and therefore will be to that force by
which the Moon in its periodic time may be rerain'd
revolving about the Earth at reft, as 100 to fx 17872*,
or 1 191 5 ; and in the time CT will generate a ve-
locity equal to . L2±- parts of the velocity of the
Moon; but in the time CP A* will generate a greater
velocity in the proportion of to or TP. Let CA CT
the greateft force E L in the o&ants be reprefcnted by
the area FKxKk^ or by the redangle \ TPxPp,
which is equal thereto . And the velocity which that ^- * ^
greateft force can generate in any time C P 9 will be
to the velocity which any other lefler force can v*uuv$V EL
generate in the fame time, as the reSangle £ TPxCP
to the area KCGF;
but the velocities generated in the
whole time CP A, will be one to the other as the rec-
tangle \ TPxCA to the triangle TCG; or the as
quadrantal arc CA to the radius TP. And therefore

(by prop. 9. book 5. elem ) the latter velocity gene-
100
rated in the whole time, will be parts
r of the
1 1 9 1.5
velocity of the Moon. To this velocity of the
Moon, which is proportional to the mean moment
of the (fuppofing this mean moment to be
area
reprefented the number 119 15) we add and
by
fubftraft the half of the other velocity ; the fum 11915
rl-50, or notff will reprefent the greateft moment of
the area in the fyzygy A; and the difference 15 „ up "
— 50, or 1 1855, the leaft moment thereof in the qua- ki w***

dratures. Therefore the areas, which in equal times,
are defcribed in the fyzygies and quadratures, arc, one
to the other, as np^f to 11865. And if to the
leaft moment 1186^, we add a moment which lhall be
to
Digitized by Google
266 Mathematical Trinciples Book III.
LiO**\ j to iooi the difference of the two former moments

^jvvJA^) as the trapc2 i um jfkCG to the triangle TCG, or
.
^xv ^v ^ c
which
fine
comes to the fame thing, as the fquare of the
PK to the fquare of the radius TP, (that as is,
Pd to T P) the fum will reprefent the moment of the

area, when the Moon
any intermediate place P.
is in
But only in the hypothefis
thefe things take place,
that the Sun and the Earth are at reft, and that the
fynodical revolution of the Moon is finiftied in 2j d .
h But
7 . 43'. fince the Moon's fynodical period is really
a
2<? . 1 i h . 44', the increments of the moments muft bein-
JargecT,\ in the fame proportion as the time is, that is,
in the proportionof 1080853 to 1000000. Upon

which account, the whole increment, which was
parts of the mean moment, will now become
__L°JL_ parts .thereof. And therefore the moment of

the area, in the quadrature of the Moon, will be to
the moment thereof in the fyzygy, as 11023 fo to —
no2j-|-fo; or as 10973 to 11073; andtothemo-
ment thereof when the Moon is in any intermediate
place?, as 10973 to 10973 4""* that is, fuppofing
77*= 100.
The area therefore, which the Moon, by a radius
drawn to the Earth, defcribes in the feveral little equal
parts of time, is nearly as the fum of the number 2 19,^6,
and the verfed fine of the double diftance of the Moon
from the neareft quadrature, confidered in a circle
which hath unity for its radius. Thus it is, when
the variation in the o&ants is in its mean quantity. But
if the variation there is greater or lefs, that verfed fine
muft be augmented or diminiftied in the fame propor-
tion.
Pro*
Digitized by Googd
Proposition XXVII. Problem VIII.

From the horary motion of the Moon, to find
its dijtance from the Earth.
The area which the Moon, by a radius drawn to the

Earth, defcribes in every moment of time, is as the
horary motion of the Moon, and the fquare of the di-
ftance of the Moon from the Earth conjunctly. And
therefore the diftance of the Moon from the Earth is in
a proportion compounded of the fubduplicate proporti-
on of the area dire&ly, and the fubduplicate proporti-
on of the horary motion inverfely. O. E. /. .
l> "
Cor. i* Hence the apparent diameter of the Moon p***
is given. For it is reciprocally as the diftance of the

Moon from the Earth. Let aftronomers try how pv*jUr*~.
accurately this rule agrees with the phenomena.
Cor. 2. Hence alio ~the orbit of the Moon may be
.
114v4 ^
more exa&ly defin'd from the phenomena than hi- k^vfct-Jwfc.
therto could be done.
Proposition XXVIII. Problem IX.

To find the 'Diameters of the orbit in which >
without eccentricity the Moon would move.
The curvature of the orbit which a body defcribes, if

attracted in lines perpendicular to the orbit, is as the
force of attra&ion direftly, and the fquare of the velo-
city inverfely. \l eftimate the curvatures of lines, com-
pared one with another, according to the evanefcent
proportion of the fines or tangents of their angles of
conta& to equal radij, fuppofing thofe radi] to be in-
finitely diminifhed. > But the attraction of the Moon
towards the Earth in the fyzygies, is the excefs of its
~'
gravity
Digitized by Google
26S Mathematical Trinciples Book III,
gravity towards the Earth above the force of the Sun

zPK (fee Fig. prop. 15.) by which force, the ac-
celerative gravity of the Moon towards the Sun ex-
ceeds the accelerative gravity of the Earth towards
the Sun, or is exceeded by it. But in the qua-
dratures that attraction is the fum of the gravity
of the Moon towards the Earth, and the Sun's
force KT, by which the Moon is attrafied towards the
AT-\-CT
Earth. And thefe attraaions, puttin g N for 3 ! are
*nA ^
2000 l 71<> '
IOO °
at? + cjvn and —r~ + atx~n
nearlvas—
near,y as -Zil I \
9
oras 178725 Nx CT — 2000 AT xCT, and 178725
2 2
N x AT*-\- 1000 2
CT
xAT. For if the accelerative
gravity of the Moon towards the Earth be reprefented
by the number 17872^ the mean force which ML>
'^•oJu m *c quadratures is or 7X and draiws the Moon
towards the Earth, will be 1000 ; andlFe mean force
TM y in the fyzygies will be 3000; from which, if
we fubftrafl the mean force ML* there will remain

2000, the force by which the Moon in the fyzygies
is drawn from the Earth, and which we above called
i PK. But the velocity of the Moon in the fyzygies

^fandfl, is to its velocity in the quadratures C and
as CTto AT, and the moment of the area, which
A
the Moon by a radius drawn to the Earth defcribes in
. the fyzygies, to the moment of that area defcribed in
the quadratures conjun&ly; that is, as 1107} C7*to
10973 AT. Take this ratio twice inverfely, and the
former once dire&ly, and the curvature of the orb
ratio
of the Moon in the fyzygies will be to the curvature
thereof in the quadratures, as 120406729 x 178725
AT*xCT* xN— 1 20406725) x 2000 AT*xCT, to
122611529x178725 AT 2
xCT* XN+1226H329
x 1000 CT+xAT, that is, as 21 5 1969 ATx CTx
N — 24081 AT* to 2191371 ATxCTxHX*
Becauie
uigi id by Google
Becaufe the figure of the Moon's orbit b unknown, let *M (
us, in itS|ftgj» affume the ellipfe DBCA,PL 10. Fig. f

m the centre of which we iuppofe the Earth to be ii-
tuated, and the greater axe de to lie between the qua- Art&V
dratures, as the kffer AB
between "the fyzygies. But
fince the plane of this ellipfe is revolved about the Earth
by an angular motion, and the orbit, whofe curvature
we now examine ftiould be defcribed in a plane (void ^smv^ -
oOfuch motion; we are to confiderthe figure which the

"Moon, while it is revolved in that ellipfe, defcribes in
this plane, that is Cpa, the feveral
to fay the figure
points p of which are found by afluming any point P
in the ellipfe, which may reprefent the place of the
Moon, and drawing Tp equal to TP, in fuch manner
thatthe angle PTp may be equal to the apparent mo-
tionof the Sun from the time of the lali quadrature
inC; or (which comes to the fame thing) that the
angle CTp may be to the angle CTP> as the time of
the fynodic revolution of the Moon to the time of the
periodic revolution thereof, or as i? d . nh.
44', to
2 7 d# 7
h#
4?' g If therefore in this proportion we
take the angle CTa angle CTA, and
to the right
make Ta
of equal length with TA; we lhall have a
the lower, and C the upper apfis of this orbit. But by
computation I find, that the difference betwixt the
curvature of this orbit Cpa at the vertex a, and the
curvature of a circle defcribed about the centre T, with
the interval TA, is to the difference betwixt the cur-
vature of the ellipfe at the vertex A, and the curva-
ture of the fame circle, in the duplicate proportion of
the angle CTP to the angle CTp; and that the cur-
vature of the ellipfe in A, is to the curvature of that
circle, in the duplicate proportion of TA to TC; and
the curvature of that circle to the curvature of a
circle defcribed about the centre T
with the interval
TC, as TC to TA ; but that the curvature of this loft
mh is to the curvature of the ellipfe in C, in the du-
plicate
Digitized by Google
270 Mathematical Principles Book III;
plicate proportion of TA to TC; and that the differ-

ence betwixt the curvature of the ellipfe in the vertex
Cy and the curvature of this laft circle, is to the dif-
ference betwixt the curvature of the figure Tpa, at
the vertex C, and the curvature of this fame laft cir-
cle, in the duplicate proportion of the angle CTp to
the angle CTP. All which proportions are eafily
drawn from the fines of the angles of contaft, and of
the differences of thofe angles. But by comparing
thofe proportions together, we find the curvature of
the figure Cp a at a, to be to its curvature at C, as
^TKx^J44^CT> AT to * CT
-\- t?J1j±. AT*
u«u *(* x CT number T Vr¥A- reprefents the dif-
Where the
ference of the fquares of the angles CT? and CTp,
applied to the fquare of the leffer angle CTP; or
(which is all one) the difference of the fquares of the
times i7 d 7 h . 43 .
and 29*. i2 h . 44'- applied to the
zy d h
fquare of the time y . 43'. .
u^ *mJL Since therefore a reprefents the fyzygy of the Moon,

^ and C its quadrature, the proportion now found muft
be the fame with that proportion of the curvature of
the Moon's orb in the fyzygies, to the curvature there-
to £>( in the quadratures, which we found above. There* 4
fore, in order to find the proportion of C7*to AT,

Let us multiply the extremes and the means, and the
terms which come out applied to ATxCT, become
2062,79 Cr 4 2151969 — N
xCT' -I-368676 N
xATx
CT* -|- 36342 AT*xCT*~
362047 x N
at*
x ct-\- 2191371 3
Nx^r
-|- 4051,4 ^rr 4
=0. Now if for the half fum of the terms N AT

_ and CT we jnit 1, and x for their half difference,
then CT will be =
1 -|-#, and JT=
i—x. And fub-
p.u* ftituting thofe values in the equation, after refolving
if ^ thereof, we fhali find #=0,00719; and from thence
the femidiameter CT= 1,00719, and the femidiameter
^7==o,9928i, which numbers are nearly as 70-^,
and 69^. Therefore the Moon's diftance from the
Earth
Digitized by Google
Earth in the fyzyeies, is to its diftance in the qua-
dratures ( fating ahde/the confideration of ecce^ricity>(Mî- A i*JL
*
as 6p 2 7 to 70/^5 or in round numbers as 69 to 70.
Proposition XXIX. Problem X.

To find the variation of the Moon.
This inequality is owing partly to the elliptic figure of mK jL

the Moon's orbit, partly to the inequality of the moments,
of the area which the Moon by a radius drawn to the
Earth defcribes. If the Moon P revolved in the el-
lipfe DBCA, about the Earth quiefcent in the centre •
of the ellipfe, and by the radius TP, drawn to the

Earth, defcribed the area CTP, proportional to the
time of defiriftion ; and the greateft femidiameter C7*of
the ellipfe was to the leaft TA
as 70 to 69 the tan-
gent of the angle CTP would be to the tangent of
the angle of the mean motion computed from the qua-
drature C, as the femidiameter TA
of the ellipfe, to
its femidiameter TC, or as 69 to 70. But the de-
fcription of the area CTP, as the Moon advances from
the quadrature to the fyzygy, ought to be in fuch
manner accelerated, that the moment of the area in the
Moon's fyzygy, may be to the moment thereof in its M
quadrature, as 11 075 to 10975; anc* that the excefs
of the moment in any intermediate place P, above the
moment in the quadrature, may be as the fquare of the *
fine of the angle CTP. Which we may efFed with k )

accuracy enough, if we>d»minifli the tangent of the ûjuu ,•>'
angle CTP>~in ihe fubduplicate proportion of the num-

ber 10973 to the number 1107$, that is, in propor-
tion of the number 68,6877 to the number 69. Up- 7
on which account the tangent of the angle CTP, will ^ 1

" ^'p
now be to the tangent of the mean motion, as 68,6877

to 70 ; and the angle CTP, in the o&ants, where the
mean
Digitized by Google
27 z Mathematical Principles Book III.
0 27'. 28".
mean motion 45°, will be found 44 .
is which
0
fubftrafted from 45 . the angle of the mean motion,
x.^vs^v. leaves the greateft variation 32'. 31". Thus it would
be, if the Moon in palling from the quadrature to the
fyzygy, defcribed an angle CTAof 90 degrees only.
But becaufe of the motion of the Earth, by which
the Sun is apparently transferr'd in confeqnentia, the
JU*m v
*o»
Moon, before it overtakes the Sun, delcribes an angle
CTa, greater than a right angle, in the proportion of
the time of the fynodic revolution of the Moon, to
the time of its periodic revolution, that is, in the pro-
, k
jportion of i$ d . i2 h 44'. to ij d . j h . 43'. Whence
.
, ? 1 uwî^m^ comes to p a fs> tnac a |i cne angles about the centre y T

are dilated in the fame proportion, and the greateft va-
riation, which otlierwife would be but 31'. 32", now
augmented in the faid proportion becomes 35'. 10".
And this is its magnitude in the mean diltance of the
m u „J un from f he Earth, negleding the differences, which
x
* 1
,
may arife from the ciifvatunT of the orbis magnusy and
^^
^ I
the ffronger aftion of the Sun upon the Moon when

%m *
f
' *
horn'd and new, than when gibbous and full. In other
l,4 * v " diftances, of the Sun from the Earth, the greateft va*
riation is in a proportion compounded of the duplicate
proportion of the time of the fynodic revolution of the
Moon (the time of the year being given) dire&ly, and
the triplicate proportion of thediftance of the Sun from
the Earth, inverfely. And therefore, in the apogee of
the Sun, the greateft variation is 33'. 14", and in its
perigee, 37 . n", if the eccentricity of the Sun is to
the tranfverfe femidiameter of the orbis magnus* as 16
f| to 1000.
(\„v *t v i^ tnerto we nave inveftigated the variation in an
*li
orb not eccentric, in which, to wit, the Moon in irs
oftants is always in its mean diftance from the Earth.
I^ tn ^ Moon, on account of its eccentricity, is more
;
%v 0
' *
or lefs removed from the Earth, than if placed in this
orb, the variation may be fomething greater, or fome-
thing
Digitized by Google
>y Google
t
Digitized by Gock e
Book III. of Natural Thilofophf. 27$
thing than according to this rule.
lefs, But I leave the a Lj'^"
excefs or defect to the determination of aftronomers
from the phenomena.
Proposition 1
XXX. Problem XI.
To find the horary motion of the nodes of the
Moon in a circular orbit, PI. 1 1 Fig. i.
Let S reprefent the Sun, T

the Earth, P the Moon.
NPn the orbit of the Moon, Npn the orthographic
projection of the orbit upon the plane of the ecliptic;
N y n the nodes; *TJVm, the line of the nodes produ-
ced indefinitely ; Ply PK

perpendiculars upon the lines
ST, Ojj ; Pp a perpendicular upon the plane of the
ecliptic; A, B the Moon's fyzygies in the plane of
the ecliptic; uiZ a perpendicular let fall upon Nn^
the line of the nodes ; jgj f the quadratures of the
Moon in the plane of the ecliptic, zndpK, a perpen-
dicular on the line Qq .lying between the quadratures.
The force of the Sun to difturb the motion of the , .
Moon (by prop. 2f.) is twofold, one proportional to A^w^'m

the line LM> the other to the line AtT, in thefcheme
of that propofition. And the Moon by the former > -
force is drawn towards the Earth, by the latter to-

wards the Sun, in a direction parallel to the right line
ST joining the Earth and the Sun. The former force
LM acts in the direction of the plane of the Moon's
tiK
orbit, and therefore makes no change upon the fituation * * v* •
r v
thereof, and is upon that account to be neglected. |C *
The latter force MT> by which the plane of the Moon's

orbit is difturbed, is the fame with the force 3 PKot
3 IT. And this force (by prop. 25.J is to the force,
by which the Moon may, in its periodic time, be uni-
formly revolved in a circle about the Earth at reft, as
3 IT to the radius of the circle multiplied by the
Vol. II. T number
Digitized by Google
r

number 178,725, or as IT to the radius thereof mul-
tiplied by 59*575. But in this calculus, and all thac
follows I confider all the lines drawn from the Moon
to the Sun, as parallel to the line which joins the
Earth and the Sun, becaufe what inclination there
almoft as much diminifties all effefts in fome cafes,
it augments them in others, and we are now enquiring

after the mean motions of the nodes, neglecting fuel*
niceties as are of no moment, and would only ferve
<4 ! [jciS
to render the calculus more perplext.
Now fuppofe PM
to reprefent an arc which the
Moon defcribes in the lcaft moment of time, and ML
a little line, the half of which the Moon, by the im-
pulfe of the faid force 3 IT would defcribe in the
fame time. And joining P L> MP, let them be pro-
duced to m and /, where they cut the plane ot the
ecliptic, and upon Tm
let fall the perpendicular PH.
Now fince the right line ML is parallel to the plane

of the and therefore can never meet with the
ecliptic,
\ right line ml which lies in that plane, and jxt

x
ij
.
v -
1 -<
both thofe right lines Jye in one common plane LM
• ", '
Pmlj they will be parallel, and upon that account the

:,u(l * u
triangles LMP^lmP will be fimilar. And Teeing
MPm lies in the plane of the orbit, in which the Moon
.
4 flid move while in the place P; the point m will fall
4VU%U " upon the line N», which pafles through the nodes
N, », of that orbit. And becaufe the force by which
.the half of the little line LAI is generated, if the
whole had been together, and at once impreffed in the
point P, would have generated that whole line, and
t
caufed the Moon to move in the arc whofe chord is
LP; that is to fay, would have transferred the Moon
from the plane MPmT
into the plane LP IT; there-
fore the angular motion of the nodes generated by that
force, will be equal to the angle mTU But ml is
to mP, as ML to MP\ and fince MP, becaufe of

the time given, is alfo given, mI will be as the rec-
tangle
Digitized by Google
Book III. of Natural Thilofophf. 27s
tangle AfLxmP, that is, as the re&angle ITxmP.
And, if Tml is a right angle, the angle mTl will be
as —r-
1 tn
and therefore as
i
*
m
that is, (becaufe
,
Tm and mP, TP and P// are proportional) as

ITx
—— P H
—— ; and therefore, becaufe TP is given, as
ITx P H. But if the angle Tml or STN

is oblique,
the angle mTl will be yet lefs, proportion of the

in
fine of the angle STN to the radius, or AZ
to AT.
And therefore the velocity of the nodes, is as ITx
VHxAZ, or as the folid content of the fines of the
three angles, TP U PTN, and STN.
If thefe are right angles, as happens when the nodes a<^V u
are in the quadratures, and theMoon in the fyzygy,
the little line m I will be removed to an infinite di-
ftance, and the angle mTl will become equal to the
angle m PL But in this cafe the angle mPl is to the
angle PTM> which the Moon in the fame time by-
its apparent motion defcribes about the Earth, as 1 to
59,57 5 • For the angle mPl\% equal to the angle

LP My that is, to the angle of the Moon's deflexion ttu»U<t*
from a rectilinear path, which angle, if the gravity of \mtV* •
l
the Moon fliould have then ceafed, the faid force of

the Sun 3 IT would by it felf h*ve generated in that
given time; and the angle PTM
is equal to the angle
of the Moon's deflexion from a re&ilinear path, which

angle, if the force of the Sun 3 IT
fhould have then
ceafed, the force alone by which the Moon is retained ^ ^
in us orbit would have generated in the fame time. And
thefe forces (as we have above ftiew'd) are, the one to
the other, as 1 to 59,^75. Since therefore, the mean
horary motion of the Moon (in refpeft of the fixt
Stars) is 32'. 56*". 17'". iz\ {y > the horary motion
of the node in this cafe will be 33". 10"'. iv V
J3 . I2 .
But in other cafes, the horary motion, will be to 33".
T 1 10"'.
Digitized by Google
276 Mathematicqlgrinciples Book III.
10'".
3J .
iv
.iz v
the folid content of the fines of
as
i{
the three angles TP I, PTN
and 577V (or of the
diftances of the Moon from the quadrature, of the
Moon from the node, and of the node from the Sun)
i to theûbe of the radius. And asjofren as the fine of
^ UiauC>
any angle is changed from pofitivelro negative, and
from negative to pofitive, fo often muft the regreffive
be changed into a progreflive, and the progreffive into
a regreflive motion. Whence it comes to pais, that
the nodes are progreflive, as often as the Moon hap.
wv^ ^yh* pens to be placed between either quadrature, and tne
node neareft to that quadrature^ In other cafes, they
• are regreffive, and by the excefs of the regrefs above
***** the progrefs, they are monthly transferred in antccc-
dentia.
§
CeR. i. Hence if from P and M, the extreme

vVv\.xsx«.
points of a leaft arc PAf, PL u. Fig. z. on the line
Qtj joining the quadratures we let fall the perpendi-
l
culars PK, Mk$ and produce the fame till they cut
>
uu w
the line of the nodes Nn> in D
and laffthe horary
motion of the nodes will be as the area y and MP Dd
the fquare of the tine AZ
conjunctly. For let PK,
A /aa PH and AZbe the three faid fines, viz,. the PK
fine of the diftance of the Moon from the quadrature,
PH the fine of the diftance of the Moon from the
node, and AZ the fine of the diftance of the
node from the Sun : and the velocity of the node
will be as the folid content of PKxPHxAZ.But
FT is to PK> as PM
to Kkj> and therefore, be-
caufe PT PM
and are given, K^
will be as PK.
Likewife AT is to PD, as AZ
to PH, and there-
fore PH is as the reftangle PDxAZ,
and by com-
pounding thofe proportions, PKxPHis as the folid
Kk^PDxAZy and PKxPHxAZy
content as AT*
,
xPDxAZ*. that is, as the area PDdM and AZ %
conjunctly. Q. E. D.
Con.
Digitized by Google
Book HI. of Natural Thilofophy. 277
Cor. In any given pofition of the nodes, their
z.
mean horary motion is half their horary motion in
the Moon's fyzygies; and therefore is to 16". 35'".
i6 lv z.6 v , as the fquare of the fine of the diflance of
.
the nodes from the fyzygies to the fquare of the radius,

or as AZ2
, to %
. AT For if the Moon, by an
uniform motion defcribes the femi circle QAq* the
fum of all the areas PDdM
during the time of the
Moon's paflage from to M, will make up the area
QMdE, terminating at the tangent OE of the circle.
And by the time that the Moon has arrived at the .
point*, that Aim willfmalce up\the whole area E QA***^^}. -
defcribed by the line PD;

but when the Moon pro- ^
ceeds from n to q y the line PD
will fall without tEe
circle, and will defcribe the area nqc> terminating at
the tangent qe of the circle; which area, becaufe the
nodes were before regreffive, but are now progreffive, j
£
muft be fubdufted from the former area, and being it
^(jslf equal to the area OENj will leave the femicircle •
NOAn. While therefore the Moon "defcribes a fe- >uVt*t1**

micircle, theluni of all the areas PDdM will be the
area of that femicircle; and while the Moon defcribes
a complete circle, fum of thofe areas will be the
the
area of the whole circle. But the area PDdM, when
the Moon is in the fyzygies the re&angle of the
is
arc P M into the radius PT; and the fum of all the
areas, every one equal to this area, in the time that the
Moon defcribes a complete circle is the reftangle of
the whole circumference into the radius of the circle;
and this reftangle, being double the area of the circle,
will be double the quantity of the former fum. If
therefore the nodes went on with that velocity uniform-
ly continued, which they acquire in the Moon's fyzy-
gies, they would defcribe a fpace double of that which
they defcribe in faS; and therefore the mean motion, v "
by which, if uniformly continued, they would defcribe

the fame fpace with that which they do in fad defcribe
T i
by
Digitized by Googl
27 1 Mathematical "Principles Book IIL
by an unequal motion, is but one half of that motion

which they are poffefleci of in the Moon's fyzygies.
Wherefore fince their greateft horary motion, if the
nodes are in the quadratures, is 3}". 10"'. 3j iv . v
, n
their mean horary motion in this cafe will be itf".
ly
3f"'. i6 . 3$ .
v
And feeing the horary motion of
the nodes is every where as %
and the area AZ
PDdM conjunftly, and therefore in the Moon's
fyzygies, the horary motion of the nodes is as
%
AZ
and the area PDdM
conjun&ly, that is, (be-
caufe the area PDdM
dtferibed in the fyzygies is
given) as \ AZ*
therefore the mean motion alfo
will be as AZ*
y and therefore when the nodes are
without the quadratures, this motion will be. to 16".

"55"'. i(S
iv
. 3<S V . as AZ 2
to AT 1
. Q. E. D.
Proposition XXXL Problem XII.

To find the horary motion of the nodes of the
Moon in an elliptic orbit, PI. 12. Fig. 1.
Let Qjmaq reprefent an ellipfe, defcribed with the
greater axe 04, and the leflfer axe ab; OAqB a cir-
cle circumfenbed ; T
the Earth in the common centre
of both; S the Sun; p the Moon moving in this
ellipfe; and pm an arc which it defcribesin the leaft
moment of time; .AT and n the nodes joined by the
line Nnt, pK and mk perpendiculars upon the axe
Qq> produced both ways till they meet the circle

in P and M, and the line of the nodes in and <L D
And if the Moon, by a radius drawn to the Earth,
defcribes an area proportional to the time of defcription,
the horary motion of the node in the ellipfe will be as
the area pDdm, and AZ 2
conjunctly.
For let PF touch the circle in P, and produced meet
TN in F; and pf touch the />, and produ-
ellipfe in
ced meet the fame TNinf, and both tangents concur
2 in
Digitized by Google
Digitized by Google
in the axe TO at T. And lec reprefent ML the fpace
which the Moon, by the impulfe of the abovementio-
ncd force 3 IT or 3 PAT, would defcribe with a tranf-
verfe motion, in the meantime while, revolving in Vaiu**.^
the circle it defcribes the arc P fluid m I denote the ^
fpace, which the Moon revolving in the ellipfe would
defcribe in the fame time by the impulfe of the fame
force 3 IT or $PK; and let LP and Ip be produ-
ced till they meet the plane of the ecliptic in G and
g, and FG and fg be joined, of which FG produced
may cut pfi pg, and 7*j9 in c> e and R refpe&ively
and fg produced may cut TO^ in r. Becaufe the force
3 IT or 3 PK in the circle, is to the force 3 or IT
$pK in the ellipfe, as PK to or as AT
to *!Tj
the fpace ML, generated by the former force, will be
to the fpace ml generated by the latter, as to y PK pK
that is, becaufe of the fimilar figures PTKp, and
FTRc, as FR to cR. But (becaufe of the fimilar
triangles PLM y PGF) ML is to FG> as PL to ,
P G> that is (on account of the parallels L^ PK G R) f 1 «< -

v
as pi to pe, that (becaufeof the fimilar triangles plm %

is,
cpe) as Im to ce; and inverfely as LM

is to lm, or
as FR is toc£, fo is FG to ce. And therefore if
fg was to as/) to cT, that is as fr to

cr, (that
is as fr to FR and FR to cR conjun&ly, that is,
as fT to y FT
and FG to cc conjunctly) becaufe
the ratio of FG to ce, expung'd on both fides, leaves
4<
the ratios fg to FG and/T to FT, fg would {
%t
be to F G> as fT'to FT; and therefore the angles

which' FG and /| would fubrend at the Earth T
would be equal each to other. But thefe angles, (by
what we have fhew'd in the preceding propofition) are
the motions of the nodes, while the Moon defcribes,
in the circle the arc P M, in the ellipfe the arc pm\
And therefore the motions of the nodes in the circle,
and in the ellipfe, would be equal to each other. Thus
I fay it would be if fg was to ce, as fT to cT% that ]
Digitized by Google
280 Mathematical Trinciples Book Ill-
is, if fg was equal to —^r But becaufe of the fi-
milar triangles cep,fg is to ce as

fp to cp i
and therefore /> is equal to
cc
— x Jr
/*p
and therefore the
/ angle which fg fubtends in Jaft, is former

to the
^<cAv a* K motion
an gi e which fubtends, that is to fay, the
of the nodes in the ellipfe is to the motion of the fame
'
in the circle, as thisfg or
CC * ^ y
to the former fg
or
ce
C
—
xfT
JL
, that is as fp x c TtofTx cp, or as//? to
fT 9 and c Tto cp, that is, if p h parallel to T N meet FP

in h, Fh to F T and JTto FP
as ; that is, as Fh to
FP or Dp to Z)?, and therefore as the area D pmdto
the area D P Aid. And therefore feeing (by corol. i.
u ^ w^ prop, jo.) the latter Area and %

conjun&ly are AZ
proportional to the horary motion of the nodes in the
circle, the former area and 2
conjunftly will be pro- AZ
I)ortional to the horary motion of the nodes in the el-
ipfe. Q. E D.
Cor. SixiQS therefore in an)' given pofition of the
nodes, the fum of all the areas pDdm, in the time
while the Moon is carried from the quadrature to any
place w, is the area mp OEd terminated at the tangent
of the ellipfe OE ; and the fum of all thofe areas, in one
entire revolution, is the area of the whole e'lipfe the :
mean motion of the nodes in the ellipfe will be to the

mean motion of the nodes in the circlcas the ellipfe to the
circle; that is, as Ta to T or 6p to 70. And therefore A
fince (by corol. 2. prop. 50.J the mean horary morion of
the nodes in the circle is to 16". 55"'. itf iv j6 v - as %
. AZ
to AT
1
, if we take theangkj 16'. 21".
j
iv
.
v
3 o . to the
angle 1 6'. 2f'". 16 v $6 V . astf$>to7o, the mean horary
.
motionofrhenodesintheellipfewillbeto 16". ii"'.Jj iv.

lo v .zsAZ 2 to %
AT
, thatis,asthefquareofthe fine of
thediflance of the node from the Sun to the fquare of the

radius. But
- i
Digitized by Google
Book of Natural Thilofophy..
III. 2g x
But the Moon, by a radius drawn to the Earth, de-
fcribesthe area in the fyzygies with a greater velocity
than does that in the quadratures, and upon thatac-
it
count the time is contra&ed in the fyzygies, and pro-
longed in the quadratures ; and together with the time
the motion of the nodes like wife augmented or di-
is
minifti'd. But the moment of the area in the quadra-

ture of the Moon, was to the moment thereof in the
fyzygies as 10P73 to 11075 > anc^ therefore the mean
moment in the o&ants is to the excefs in the fyzy-
gies, and to the defe£t in the quadratures, as 11925,
the half fum of thofe numbers, to their half difference
50. Wherefore fince the time of the Moon's mora in
the feveral little equal parts of its orbit, is reciprocally
as itsvelocity ; the mean time in the oftants will be
to the excefs of the time in the quadratures, and to ,
the defedfc of the time in the fyzygies, arifingfrom this

caufe, nearly as 11025 to 5°* ^ ut rec ^ on n g horn. u*i<<tU<J ^ ~
the quadratures to the fyzygies, I find that the ex-

cefs of the moments of the area, in the feveral places,
above the leaft moment in the quadratures, is nearly as ( ,> W
(EeTquare of the of the Moon's difhncefrom the
fine
quadratures; and therefore the difference betwixt the
moment in any place, and the mean moment in the
o&ants, is as the difference betwixt the fquare of the
fine of the Moon's diftance from the quadratures, and

the fquare of the fine of 45 degrees, or half the fquare
of the radius; and the increment of the time in the fe-
veral placesbetween the oftants and quadratures, and
the decrement thereof between the oftants and fyzy-
gies is in thefame proportion. But the motion of the
nodes while the Moon defcribes the feveral little equal
parts of its orbit, is accelerated or retarded in the dupli-
cate proportion of the time. For that motion while
the Moon defcribes P M> is (uteris paribus) as ML 3
and M Lis proportion of the time.
in the duplicate
Wherefore the motion of the nodes in the fyzygies,
2 Si Mathematical, Trinetples Book III.
in the time while the Moon defcribes giv'n little parts

of its orbit, is diminiuYd of
in the duplicate proportion
the number 1075 to the number 1 1023 and the de-
1 ;
crement is to the remaining motion as 100 to 10573;

but to the whole motion as 100 to 11073 near ty» ^ ut
the decrement in the places between the oftants and
fyzygies, and the increment in the places between the
o&ants and quadratures, is to this decrement, nearly
as the whole motion in thefe places to the whole moti-
on in the fyzygies, and the difference betwixt the fquare
of the fine of the Moon's diftance from the quadrature,
and the half fquare of the radius, to the half fquare
of the radius conjunctly. Wherefore, if the nodes are
in the quadratures, and we take two places, one on one
fide, one on the other, equally diftant from the oftant
and other two diftant by the fame interval, one from
the fyzygy* the other from the quadrature, and from
the decrements of the motions in the two places between •
the fyzygy and oftant, we fubtraft the increments

of the motions in the two other places between the oc-
tant and the quadrature; the remaining decrement will
be equal to the decrement in the fyzygy : as will ea-
by computation. And therefore the mean
fily appear
. decrement, which ought to be fubdu&ed from the
mean motion of the nodes, is the fourth part of the
decrement in the fysygy. The whole horary motion
of the nodes in the fyzygies (when the Moon by a
radius drawn to the Earth, was fuppos'd to defcribe
an area proportional to the time) was 32". 42'", y lY .
And we have fhew'd, that the decrement of the mo-
tion of the nodes, in the time while the Moon, now
moving with greater velocity, defcribes the fame fpace,
-was to this motion as 100 to 1 1075 ; and therefore
this decrement is 17". 43 iv . v . The
u
fourth part of
iv v
•which 4'". *5 . 48 . fubtra&ed from the mean ho-
rary motion above found 16". zi'". iv . 30 v . leaves
3
1 5". i6"\ 37^. 42 v . their correct mean horary mo-
tion. If
Digitized by Google
Book III. of Natural Thilofophy. 28 j
If the
nodes are without the quadratures, and two fuA ^
places are confider'd, one on one fide, one on the o-
ther equally diftant from the fyzygies; the fumof the
motions of the nodes when the Moon is in thofe places,
will be to the fum of their motions, when the Moon
is in the fame and the nodes in the quadratures,
places
as AZ %
j . And the decrements of the
to l
motions, arifing from the caufes but now explained, /u(m >
will be mutually as the motions themfelvcs, and there-

fore the remaining motions will be mutually betwixt
themfelves as AZ 2
. to AT 2
. And the mean
motions be as the remaining motions.
will And
therefore in any giv'n pofition of the nodes, their cor-
rect mean horary motion is to 16". 16"'. 37*. 42 v .
as AZ 2
,
^ to AT 2
that is, as the fquare of the
fine of
the diftance of the nodes from the fyzygies to
the fquare of the radius.
Proposition XXXIII. Problem XHL

To find the wean motion of the nodes of the
Moon. PI. 12. Fig. 2.
The yearly mean motion is the fum of all ttie rteam

horary motions, throughout the courfe of the year.
Suppofe that the node is in TV, and that after ev'ry
hour is ehpsjcU it is drawn back again to its former;/ .
place; fo that, notwit hftanding its proper motion, iv^

may conftantly remain in the fame (ituation, with ret**0 *
'
peS to the fixt Stars ; while in the mean timetheSun vwi^ V*

S9 by the motion of the Earth, isfeen tole^ve the node
and to proceed till it compleats its apparent annual courfe jvunt gv v*
by an Tfiulorm motion. Let a reprefent a givenA
leaft arc, which the right line TS always drawn
to the Sun, by its interferon with the circle 9 NAn
defcribes in the leaft given moment of time; and the
mean
Digitized by Google
28* Mathematical Principles Book III.
mean horary motion what we have above fhew'd^
("from
will be as ^Z 2
, and
that isTare pro
(becaufe AZ Z
portional) as the re&angle of into ZT, that is, AZ
as the area AZTa. And the Aim of all the mean horary
motions from the beginning will be as the fum of all
the areas aYZA* that is as the area AZ. But the N
greateft AZTa is equal to the re&angle of the arc Aa
into the radius of the circle; and therefore the fum of
all thefe re&anglfes in the whole circle, will be to the
like fum of all the greareft redhngles, as the area of the
whole circle to the rectangle of the whole circumference
into the radius, that is, as i to a. But the horary mo*
tion correfponding to that greateft redangle, was 16".
16"% ;7 iv 42 v . and this motion in the complete courfe
.
of the fidereal year 365^ 6 h . 9'. amounts to 39 0 38'. .
7". 50'". and therefore the half thereof 19 0 . 49',

3". 55'". is the mean motion of the nodes correfpond-
ing to the whole circle. And the motion of the nodes,
in the time while the Sun is carry'd from TNT to is to A
*9°-49 *3"- 55 as the area to the whole NAZ
circle.
Thus it would be node was after every hour
if the
drawn back former place, that fo, after a
again to its
Compleat revolution, the Sun at the year's end would

be found again in the fame node which it had left
when the year begun. But becaufe of the motion of
the node in the mean time, the Sun muft needs meet
jl the node loone r, and now it remains that we compute
" vu 1
1
^ the abreviation of the time.i Slnc^then the Sun, in '
the courfe of the year, travels 3 60 degrees, and the node

f u
in the fame time by its greateft motion would be carried
0
39 . 38'. 7". 50", or 39, 6355 degrees ; andthemean
motion of the node in any place N» is to its mean mo-
tion in its quadratures, as to % :
AZ*
the motion AT
of the Sun will be to the motion of the node in JV, as
360 AT 1
39,6355 AZ*\ that is, as 9,0817646
, to
AT 1
to AZ*. Wherefore if we fuppofe the circum-
ference
Digitized by Google
Book III. of Natural Thilofophy. 28s
ference N An of the whole circle to be divided into
little equal parts, fuch as Aa> the time in which the
Sun would defcribe the little arc Aa> if the circle
was quiefcent, will be to the time of which it would
defcribe the fame arc, fuppofing the circle together with
the nodes to be revolv'd about the centre 7, recipro-
cally as 9, 0827645 AT 1
109,0827546 AT* -|-
AZ*. For the time is reciprocally as the velocity
with which the little arc is defcrib'd, and this veloci-
ty is the (um of the velocities of both Sun and node.
Jf therefore the feftor NTA
reprefent the time in
which the Sun by it felf, without the motion of the
node, would defcribe the arc NA, and the indefinitely
fmallpart^7î of the feftor reprefent the little mo-
ment of the time, in which it would defcribe the lead ,
arc Aa; and ( letting fall a T perpendicular upon Nn)

if in A Z we take dZ> of fuch length, that the rec-
tangle of dZ into zr, may be to the leaft part ATa
of the fe&or , as AZ 2
to 9,0827646 AT %
-J-
AZ* %
that is to fay, that dZ may be to \ AZ> as AT* to
9,0827646 AT* -|- A2>* 5 the re&angle of </Zin-
to ZT will of the timearifing
reprefent the decrement
from the motion of the node, while the arc a is A
defcrib'd. And if the curve NdGn is the locus where
the point d is always found, the curvilinear area NdZ
will be as the whole decrement of //awhile the whole
arc NA is defcrib'd. And therefore, the excefs of
the fe&or NAT above the area NdZ will be as the
whole time. But becaufe the motion of the node in a
lefs rime, proportion of the time, the area
is lefs in
AaTZ muft
bedimininYd in the fame proporti-
alfo
on. Which may be done by taking in the line AZ
eZ of fuch length, that it may be to the length of
jiZ, as AZ* to 9, 0827646 AT*-\- AZ*. For
fo the re&angle of e Z
into ZT> will be to the area
u4ZYa> as the decrement of the time in which the
arc A
a is defcrib'd, to the whole time in which it
would
Digitized by Google
would have been defcrib'd, if the node had been qui-

cfcent. And therefore that redrangle will be as the de-
crement of the motion of the node. And if the curve
NcFn'xs the locus of the point*, the whole area
NeZj which lsTthe fum of all the decrements of that
motion^ will be as the whole decrement thereof during
the time in which the arc AN
is defcrib'd; and the
remaining area NAe
will be as the remaining motion,
which is the true motion of the node, during the time
in which the whole arc NA
is defcrib'd by th ejoint
motions of both Sun and node. Now the area or the

femicircle is to the area of the figure NeFn found by
the method of infinite feries, nearly as 793 to (So. But
the motion correlponding or proportional to the whole
circle was ip° 49'. 3". 55'". and therefore the moti-
on corrcfponding to double the figure ito Fn is i°. 29'.
58'. % . which taken from the former motion
leaves18 0 . 19'. 5". 5$*". the whole motion of the
node with refpeft to the fixed Stars in the interval be-
tween two of its conjunctions with the Sun ; and this
motion fubduded from the annual motion of the Sun
7'''. the motion of
j <So°. leaves 54 1°. 40'. 54". the
Sun in the interval between the fame conjunctions.
But as this motion is to the annual motion 360°. fo
isthe motion of the node but juft now found 18 0 19'.

5". 5$"'. to its annual motion which will therefore
be 19 0 . 18'. 1". i}'". And this is the mean motion
of the nodes in the fidereal year. By aftronomical
0 21'. 21". 50'". The difference is lefs
tables it is 19 .
than T4~r of the whole motion, and feems to arife

part
from the of the Moon's orbit, and its in-
eccentricity
clination to the plane of the ecliptic. By the eccen-
tricity of this orbit, the motion of the nodes is too
much accelerated, and on the other hand, by the incli-
nation of the orbit, the motion of the nodes is fome-
thing retarded, and reduc'd to its juft velocity.
;
Book III. of Natural Thilofophy. zt?
Proposition XXXIII. Problem XIV.

To find the true nation of the nodes of the
, Moon. PI. 12. Fig. 3,
In the time which is as the area NT A—NdZ(u%

the preceding Fig.) that motion is as the area NAc%
and is thence giv'n. But becaufe the calculus is too
be better to ufe the following conftruc-
difficult it will
tion of the problem* About the centre C, with any
interval CD, defcribe the circle B EFD> produce DC
to A, fo as AB may be to A C, as the mean motion to
half the mean true motion when the nodes are in their
quadratures C that is, as 19 0 . 18'. 1". 23*'. to 19 0 .
4S>'*3"* 5 j'"- and therefore BC
to AC, as the diffe-
rence of thofc motions o°. 31'. 2". 52'". to the latter
motion 19 0 . 49'. 3". 55 "'. that is, as 1 to 38/3.).
Then through the point D, draw the indefinite line
Cgt touching the circle in D ; and if we take the angle
BCE, or BCFy equal to the double diftance of the
Sun from the place of the node, as found by the mean
motion; and drawing AE
orAF, cutting the perpen-
dicular D
G in C7, we take another angle which ihall
be to the whole motion of the node, in the interval
between its fyzyeies fthat is to 9 0 . 11'. 3".) as the
tangent D
G to the whole circumference of the circle
BED\ and add which the angle
this laft angle (for
DAG may be us'cp to the mean motion of the nodes,
while they are pamng from the quadratures to the fy~
— !
zygies, and fubtraft it from their mean motion, while

they are paffing from the fyzygies to the quadratures
we fhall have their true motion. For the true motion
fo found will nearly agree with the true motion which ur***/^*
comes out from affuming the time as the area NTA—
NdZ> and the motion of the node as the area NAe*
as
Digitized by Google
z Muthmatic&l Trlnciples Book III.
j
**Ja»*
!
as wnoever will pleafe to examine and make the com-
putations will find. And this is the femi-menftrual
equation of the motion of the nodes. But there
is alfo a menftrual equation, but which is by no means
neceflary for finding of the Moon's latitude. For fince

the variation of the inclination of the Mot>n's orbit to
the plane of the ecliptic is liable to a twofold inequa-
lity : the one femi-menftrual, the other menftrual : the
menftrual inequality of this variation, and the menftru-
v
^1 equation of the nodes, fo moderate and correft eacfi
other, that in computing the latitude of the Moon both
may be negle&ed.
Cor. From this and the preceding prop, it ap-
pears that the nodes are quiefcent in their fyzygies,
but regreflive in their quadratures, by an hourly moti-
on of 1 6". 19'". i6 . And that the equation of the
iy
motion of thenodes in theoftants is i # . 30 '. all which

exa&Iy agree with the phenomena of the heavens.
Scholium.
Mr. Machin A (Iron. Prof. Grelh. and Dr. Hcnrj
Pcmbcrton feparately found out the motion of the nodes
by a different method. Mention has been made of this
. j method in another place. Their feveral PJgen, both
XttuMuvU"
4
^
which I have feen, contained two propohtioris, and
, exa&ly agreed with each other in both of them. Mr.
t
Machin '$ paper ,p>ming firft to my hands, I fliall here
infert it. Wto**E*
OF
Digitized by Google
Digitized by Google
Digitized by Google
i of Natural Thitofophy] 289
f the motion of the Moon's nodes.
Proposition I.
mean motion ofthe Sun from the node, is

by a geometric meanproportionaly be-
defined
iween the mean motion ofthe Sun, and that
mean motion with which the Sun reccjtjs
with the greateft fwiftnefs from tfie node
in the quadratures^
Let T (PL 1 5. Fig. 1.) be the Earth's placet
the line of the Moon's nodes at any given time,
KTM a perpendicular thereto,?*^ a right line revol-
ving about the centre with the fame angular velocity
with which the Sun and the node recede from one
another, in fuchfort that the angle between the qui-
c
Nn> and the revolving line
efcent right line TA y
may
be always equal to the diftance ofjthe places of the
,c
Sun and node. Now if any right line TK be divi-
" ded into parts, TS and SK, and thofe parts be taken
" as the mean horary motion of the Sun to the mean
u horary motion
of the node in the quadratures, and
" there be taken the right line TH, a mean proportio-
u nal between
the part TS
whole TK, this
and the
<c
right line will be proportional to the Sun's mean mo-
<c
tion from the node.
* For let there be defcribedthe circle NKnM from
" the centre T and with the radius TK, and about the
sl
fame centre, with the femi-axes TH and 77V, let there
<c
4<
be defcribed anellipfis HnL. N And in the time in
which the Sun recedes from the node through the arc
u Na
y if there be dratfn the right line Tba.ihe area of
<c
the fe&orj NT
a will be the exponent of the fum of
" the motions o£ the Sun and node in the fame time.
Let therefore the extremely fmall arc a be thatJ
" which the right line Tito, revolving according to the
" abovefaid law, will uniformly dttcribe in a given par-
Vol. II. .
U tide
Digitized by Google
«« tide of time, and the extremely fmall fe&or TAa will

" be as the fum of the velocities with which the Sun
<c and node are carried two different ways in that time.
€€ Now the Sun's velocity is almoft uniform, its inequa-
tuiftvuift^
1 Hty being fo fmall as i£arcely to produce the leaft-in^
«c equality in the meanmotion of the nodes. TlSôffier
c
vl^^%M*vfc part of this fum, njrpîy the mean quantity of the ve-
€i
lodty of the node, is increafed in the recefs from the
« fyzygies in a duplicate ratio of the fineoFits diftance
«c from the Sun (by corol. prop. 3 i. of this book) and
ic being greateft in its quadratures with the Sun in 9 K
* is in the fame ratio to the Sun's velocity as to TSy SK
«« that is, as fthe difference of the fquares of TK and
«« 77/, or) the reft angle KHM to TH\ But the
c« ellipfis NBH divides the fedor ATa> the exponent
€t ofthefums of thefe two velocities, into two parts
" ABba and BTb, proportional to the velocities. For
" produce B T to and from the point
the circle in /3,
«c B let fall upon the greater B G>
axis the perpendicular
<c which being produced both ways may meet the circle
€C
in the points F and/; and becaufe the fpace ABba
" is to the fe&or TBb as the're&angle to B T*, AB$ k
<c
(that reftangle being equal to the difference of the
« fquares of TA
and TB, becaufe the right line A{i
** is equally cut in T, and unequally in B ;) therefore
«c when the fpace ABba
is the greateft of all in K>
€€ this ratio will be the fame as the ratio of the re&angle
« KHM to HT 2
. But the greateft mean velocity of
« the node was fhewn above to be in that very ratio to
« the velocity of the Sun; and therefore in the quadra-
* tures the feftor A Ta is divided into parts proportio-
<r nal to the velocities. And becStufe the re&angle KHM
« is to HT 2
, as FBf to BG %and the re&zngk ABfi
<c is equal to the re&angle FBf; therefore the little a*
*wJU u rea ABba, wh$i£ it is greateft, is to the remaining
" k€tor TBb, as the reftangle AB(i to B G \ But the
" ratio of thefe little areas always was as the reftangle
.
" ABfr
Digitized by Google
Book IE. of Natural Thilofophy. 29 V
*' AB (i to and therefore the little area ABb a in
B T*,
" the place A
is lefs than its cbrrefpondent little area in
M the quadratures, in the duplicate ratio of to BG BT
9
w that is, in the duplicate ratio of the fine of the Sun's
u diftance from the node. And therefore thefum of all .
" the little areas ABb

a, to wit, the fpace A
BAT will <* luV
" be as the motion of the node in the time in which
u
c
the Sun hath been going over the arc NA
fince he t(
f '
Uk£t the node. And the remaining fpace, namely^ t1£e^ l^^d
u elliptic feftor NTB y will be as the Sun's "mean motl-^H^|*^
u on in the fame time. And becaufe the mean annual *^%/ t
* motion of the node is that motion which it performs.^ u u v -f

rt in the time that the Sun completes one period of its
u courfe, the mean motion of the node from the Sua
*c will be to the mean motion of the Sun it felf, as the
area of the circle to the area of the ellipfis ; that is as
* the right line TK to the right line TH> which is a *
2
K ro portional between TXand TS-, or which
5SS2SP p
4C
TSes to the fame, as the mean proportional THtQ the
* right line TS.
3PROPOSltION II.
The mean motion of the Mooris nodes being

given, to find their true motion.
<c
Let the angle A
be the diftance of the Sufi from
the mean place of the node, or the Sun's mean motion
" from the node. Then if we take the angle B9 whofe u ^*~
* c tangent
is to the tangent of the angle A y as T H to
tc
TK, that is, in the fubduplicate ratio of the mean ho-
xc rary motion of the Sun to the mean horary motion
xc of the Sun from the node, when the node is in the
** quadrature, that ^ngle B will be the diftance of the
I
tc Sun from the node's true place. For join FT, and by,
w the demonftration of the laft proportion, the angle
* FTN will be the diftance of the Suq fron> the mean
Digitized by Google
29 z Mathematical Trhiciples Book III,
« place of the node, and the angle the diftance ATN

«« from the true place, and the tangents of thefe angles
«' are between themfelvesas to TH. TK
" Cor. Hence the angle FT is the equation of A
£*vufifi
c< tne Moon's nodes, and the fine of this angle where
*« it is greateft in the o&ants, is to the radius as K
" to TK -|- TH. But the fine of this equation in a-
« ny other pbee A is to the greareft fine, as the fine
« of the fumsof the angles FTN \-AT IV to the radius
«« that is, nearly as the fine of double the diftance of
« the Sun from the mean place of the node (namely
<c
z FTN) to the radius. îuv*U^
Scholium.
<c
If the mean horary motion of the nodes in the qua-
" dratures be 16". 16"'. }7 iv . 42/. that is in a whole
« fidereal year 39°. 38'. 7". fo'". 77/ will be to
«c
7" A' in the fub-duplicate ratio of the number
c<
9,0827646 to the number 10, 827646, that is, as
<c
18, 6524761 to 19, 6524761. And therefore 77?
" is to HK
as 18,6524761 to i,that is, asthemoti-
€C on of the Sun in a fidereal year to the mean motion
«« of the node 19 0 . 18'. 1". 23*".
*' But if the mean motion of the Moon's nodes in
\iA\aav*i
c< 20 Julian years is 3 86°. 50'. 15". as is colle&ed from
^ " the oBIervations made ufe of in the theory of the
«c Moon, the mean motion of the nodes in one fidereal
" year will be 19°. 20'. 31". 58
///
And 77/jwill be.
" to HK as 360
0
to 19°. 20'. 31". 58". that is,
.
as 18, 61214 to 1, and from hence the mean horary

«« motion of the nodes in the quadratures will come out
» 16", 1 8'", 48 iv . And the greateft equation of th*
g nodes in the o&ants will be i° %f\

» •
«
»
»
t
* •
Digitized by Googl
*
Book HI. of Natural Thilofophy. 293
Proposition XXXIV. Problem XV.

To find the horary variation of the inclination
of the Moons orbit to the plane of the
ecliptic.
»
Let Amda,
(Pi. 13. Fig. 1 .) reprefent the fyzy-
gies Ojand q the quadratures; ./Vand n the nodes;
;
P the place of the Moon in its orbit; p the orthogra-

phic projection of that place upon the plane of the ec-
liptic; and mTl the momentaneous motion of the
nodes as above. If upon Tm we let fall the perpen-
dicular PG, and joining pG we produce it till it meet
TI in g, and join alfo Pg; the angle P Gp will be the
inclination of the Moon's orbit to the plane of the ec-
liptic when the Moon is in P; and the angle Pgp
will be the inclinationof the fame after a fmall moment 1
of time is elaps'd ; and therefore the angle G Pg will be t'^^

the momentaneous variation of the inclination. But
this angle G Pg is to the angle G Tg, as TG to PG •
and Pp to PG conjunctly. And therefore if for the

moment of time we aflume an hour; fince the angle
G Tg (by prop. 3 o.) to the angle 5".is
3
1 o'".
3 3
1 v . as / T
x PG x AZ, to AT the angle GPg 1
•> (or the horary
variation of the inclination) will be to the angle 33". io"'t
3 3
iv . as ITxAZxTG x ^ to AT 3
. O. E. I.
And Moon was uniformly

thus it/vjojuld be if the ^V^ tV% ~~
revolv'd cifcuWofbit. But if the orbit is elliptical^

in a
the mean motion of the nodes will be diminifti'd in pro-
portion of the lefler axis to the greater, as we have
fhewn above. And the variation of the inclination will
be alfo diminilh'd in the fame proportion.
Cor. i. Upon Nn ereft the perpendicular TF, and
let p Mbs the horary motion of the Moon in the plane
V 5 ~~ ?r
Digitized by Google
^94 Mathematical Principles Book llh
of the ecliptic ; upon OT let fall the perpendiculars
pK> Mk, and produce them till they meet TF in H
and h; then /Twill be to AT, as Kk^ to Mp; and
TG to Hp as rz to AT; and therefore ITxTG
ynu be equal to , that is, equal to thi
HpMh multiplied into the ratio

TZ and there*
I
area jg- :
fore the horary variation of the inclination will be to

33". 10'". 33 iv » as the zvtiffpMh multiply'd into
M9m TZ x —
Pp
£ to ATK
AZx
\
{
Mp PG
2. And therefore, if the Earth and nodes were
Cor.
every hour drawn back from their new, and in*
'after
*{j<J[JJL<Xlo ftantly ?reftor'd to their oLdplaces, fo as their fituatirn

ipigHt continue given iot a whole periodic month
rVwuA
together; the whole variation of the inclination 3uruSg
that month would be to 33". 10'". 3 3'% as the agg.e-
gate of all the areas HpMh,
generated in the time of one,
Jsis L revolution of the point />, (with^ê^regard in fumming
to their proper figns -j-and
P
— ). multiply'd into AZ
p
X TZ x to Mp x AT 3
, that is, as the whole cir-
de QAq a multiply'd \nxoAZx TZx*^ to Mpx

jtT3 , that is, as the circumference QAq a multiply'd
Cor. 3. And therefore, in a giv'n pofition of the

fiodes, the mean horaryfrom which, if u-
variation,
niformly continued through the whole month, thatmen-
ftrual variation might be generated, is to
' 33". 10"'.
M9m ^„ Pp Mm AZxTZ
^ÂZxTZxîozATôt^Ppx—^^
, .
*0 PGx+AT, that is (becaufePj? is to PG, as the
fine
Digitized by Google
Book HI of Natural Tbikfipbf, 29s
fine of the aforefaid inclination to the radius ; and cuvkA^
A
—ZAT— to 4
x TZ
. AT, as the fine of double the angle
"T
ATn to four times the radius) as the fine of the fame

inclination mulciply'd into the fine of double the dif-
tance of the nodes from the Sun, to four times the
fquare of the radius.
Cor, 4. Seeing the horary variation of the inclina-
tion, when the nodes are in the quadratures, is (by this
prop.) to the angle 33". 10'". 33 iv ,as/Tx AZxTGx
to AT \ that is, as _^_x^ , to 2 AT,
that is, as the fine of double the diftance of the Moon
Pp
from the quadratures multiply'd into to twice the
PG
radius : the fum of all the horary variations during the
time that the Moon, in this fituation of the nodes,
pafTes from the quadrature to the fyzygy (that is in
the fpace of 177I hours) will be to the fum of as ma-
ny angles 33". 10"'. 3 3 iv . or 5878", as the fum of all
the fines of double the diftance of the Moon from the
Pp
quadratures multiply 'd into^-, to the fum of as ma-
ny (diameters; that is, as the diameter multiplied into
to the circumference 5 that is, if the inclination be

0 1', asyx -3.f44.-to 22, or as
5 . 278 to 10000. And
therefore the whole variation, compos'd out of the fum
of all the horary variations in the forefaid time,, is 163".
or z'. 43". «*JuUl*
U 4 Pro,
Digitized by Google
29 6 Mathematical Trinciples Book Hi:
Proposition XXXV- Problem XVI.

i
To a given time to find the intimation of
\
the Moons orbit to the plane of the ec-
liptic.
Let AD (PL 14. Fig.

1.) be the fine of the grcarefl
inclination, and AB
the fine of the lead. Bik6tB E) in
oJUccUJUh ^> and round the centre C, with the interval BC, de-
scribe tKcîrcle BGD. In take C£ in the fame AC
proportion ro EB as EB to twice /? ^. And if to
(W)^9um*\ the time giv'n we lfet off Iche angle AEG equal to dou-
ble the diftance of the nodes from the quadratures, and
upon AD H AH
let fall the perpendicular G ; will be
the fine of the inclination requir'd.
For GE equal to G H -\-HE* = B HD-\-
2
is
2
HE = HBD -\-HE ~^-B H = HBDA- BE

2 2 2 2
— BHxBE = BE* -|-2 ECxBH = lECxAB

2
^zECxBH=zECxAH. Wherefore fince
2 £ Cis giv'n, G£ 2
will be as ^//. Now let A Eg
reprefent double the diftance of the nodes from the qua-
dratures, in a given moment of time after, and the
•
ttaîrw. arc Gg, on account of the giv'n angle GEg 3 will beas
the diftance GE. But Hh is to Gg, as G H to GC, and
therefore Hh is as the rectangle G Hx Gg,orGHxGE,
that is, as^fxG£ or^^x AH; a
that is, as
G E GE
A H and the fine of the angle G conjun&ly. If AE
therefore in any one cafe, AH
be the fine of incli-
nation, it will increafe by the fame increments as the
fine of inclination doth, by
cor. of the preceding
prop, and therefore will always continue equal to that
fine. Rut when the point G falls upon either point
B or D, is AH equal to this fine, and therefore re-
tile mains always equal thererc). O. £. D.

" in this demonftration I have iuppos'd, that the an-
gle
Digitized by Google
Digitized by LjOOQle
uigm ed by Google'
Book III. of Natural Thilofophf. i 97
gle BEG reprefenting double the diftance of the nodes
from the quadratures, increafeth uniformly. For I
cannot defcend to ev'ry minute circumftance of inequa-
lity. Nowfuppofe that BEG
is a right angle, and «dur/^
that G g is in this cafe the horary increment of dou-

ble the diftance of the nodes from the Sun ; then by
cor. 3. of the laft prop, the horary variation of the in-
clination in the fame cafe, will be to 33 ". 10"'. 55**.
asthe reftangle of AH
the fine of the inclination into
the fine of the right angle BEG, ,
double the
diftance of the nodes from the Sun, to four times rhe
fquare of the radius ; that is, as the fine of the AH
mean inclination to four times the radius, that is, feer
ing the mean inclination is about 5 0 87, as itsfineFptf .
to 40000, the quadruple of the radius, or as 224 to

10000. But the whole variation, correfponding to
BD the difference of the fines, is to this horary vari-
ation, as the diameter to the arc Gg y that is, con-
junctly as the diameter BD to the femi-circumference
BGDy and as the timeof 2079— hours, in which the
node proceeds from the quadratures to the fyzygies, to
one hour, that is, as 7 to 1 1 and 2079 to r. Where-
fore compounding all thefe proportions, we fliall have
the whole variation B D to 33". 10"'. 33 iv . as 224 x
r
7 x 2079 T o to 1 10000, that is, as 29645 to 1000;
and from thence that variation BD will come out i6\
-3* •
And this is the greatefl variation of the inclination,

sbftrafting from the fituationof the Moon in its orbit.
For if the nodes are in the fyzygies, the inclination
4*? A'*
,
j
faffcrs no change from the various pofitions of the
Moon. But if the nodes are in the quadratures, the
inclination is lefs when the Moon isinthefyzygies than
when it is in the quadratures, by a difference of 2'.
43''. as we fhew'din cor. 4. of the preceding prop,
and the whole mean variation BD, diminifli'dby 1'.
11 V. the half of this excefs, becomes 1$. z"> when

"
1 the
Digitized by Google
Mathematical Principles Book TTTJ
the Mooft is in the quadratures ; and increas'd by the
fame* becomes 17'. 45". when the Moon is in the
fyzygies. If therefore the Moon be in the fyzygies,
the whole variation in thepaffageof the nodes from the
riratures to the fyzygies will be 17'. 45". Arid
eforeif the inclination be 5 0 17'. zo". when the
.
ics are in the fyzygies, it will be4°. 59'. 35". whetx

the nodes are in the quadratures and the Moon in the
fyzygies. The truth of all which is confirm'd by ob-
fervations.
Now if the inclination of the orbit ftiould be requir'd*
when the Moon is in the fyzygies, and the nodes any
where between them and the quadratures; let AB be
0
to AD, as the fine of 4 59'. 35". to the
. fine of j°.
and take the angle AEG, equal to double
17'. 20".
the diftance of the nodes from the quadratures; and
AHwiW be the fine of the inclination defir'd. Tothis
inclination of the orbit the inclination of the fame is
equal, when the Moon is 90 0 diftant from the nodes*
.
In other fituations of the Moon, this menftrual inequa-

lity to which the variation of the inclination is obnox-
.-vavU- * ous ' nt ^ e ca * cu,us °f Moon's latitude, is balanced

'
^^JlC^3 in a manner|took off,! by the menftrual inequality
u V (<tA c f t jie motion of the nodes (as we faid before) and
therefore may be negle&ed in the computation of tho
platitude,
SCHOXIUM.
» By thefe computations of the lunar motions, I was
i v. .*tvV: wjlling to (hew that by the theory of gravity the mo-
tions of the Moon
could be calculated from their phy-
By the fame theory I moreover found*
J Uu(i , fical caufes.
that the annual equation of the mean motion of the
Moon arifes from the various dilatation which the or-
bit of the Moon fuffers from the, a#ian of the Sun>
aCCOrd-
Digitized by Google
Book III. of Natural *Philofophy\ 39*
According tocor.tf. prop. 66. book 1. The force of this
a&ion is greater in the perigeon Sun, and dilates the
Moon's orbit; in the apogeon Sun it islefs, and per-
mits the orbit to be again contra&ed. The Moon
TO0ves A fl9)ivej in the dilated, andfafter in the contraft- lM ^
ed orbit"; and the annual equation, by which this in-
equality is regulated, vanifties in the apogee and peri-
gee of the Sun. In the mean diftance of the Sun
from the Earth it arifes to about 11' . 50". In other
diftances of the Sun, it is proportional to the equati-
on of the Sun's centre, and is added to the mean moti- , .
on of the Moon, white the Earth is paffing from its a- au» 1u ^ v y
phelion to its perihelion, and fubdufted while the Earth

is in the oppofite femicircle. Taking for the radius of
the orbii magms, iooo, and 16 § for the Earth's eccen-
tricity, this equation when of the greateft magnitude, -
by the theory of gravity (comes out; ii'. 45)". But thc/^Litt*-

eccentricity of the Earth feems to be fomething greater,
.and with the eccentricity this equation will be aug-
mented in the fame proportion. Suppofe the eccentri-
city itf if, and the greateft equation will be 11'.
Further, I found that the apogee and nodes of the

Moon move fafter in the perihelion of the Earth, where w *\-%»)**
k
the force of the Sun's a&ion is greater, than in the

aphelion thereof, and that in the reciprocal triplicate pro-
portion of the Earth's diftance from the Sun. And
hence arife annual equations of thofe motions pro-
portional to the equation of the Sun's centre. Now
the motion of the Sun is in the reciprocal duplicate
proportion of the Earth's diftance from the Sun, and
the greateft equation of the centre, which this inequa-
lity generates, is i°. 56'. 20". correfponding to the
abovemention'd eccentricity of the the Sun 16 f But
if the motion of the Sun had been in the reciprocal
triplicate proportion of the diftance, this inequality
0
would have generated the greateft equation 2 54'. .
30".
Digitized by Google
joo Mathematical Trinciples Book III.
30". Arid therefore the greateft equations which the
inequalities of the motions of the Moon's apogee and
0
aiodes do generate, are to 2 54. 30". as the mean di-
.
urnal motion of the Moon's apogee and the mean diur-

nal motion of its nodes are to the mean diurnal motion
of the Sun. Whence the greateft equation of the mean
motion of the apogee comes ou t} 19 43". and the
(
.
greateft equation of the mean motion of the nodes 9'.

24". The former equation is added, and the latter fub-
dutfed, while the Earth is pafling from its perihelion to
its aphelion, and contrariwife when the Earth is in the
oppofite femicircle.
By the theory of gravity I likewjfe found, that the
aftionof the Sun upon the Moon is fomething greater
when the tranfverfe diameter of the Moon's orbit paf-
feth through the Sun, than when the fame is perpendi-
cular upon the line which joins the Earth and the Sun:
And therefore the Moon's orbit is fomething larger in
the former than in the latter cafe. And hence arifes
another equation of the Moon's mean motion, depen-
ding upon the fituation of the Moon's apogee in refpeft
the Sun; which is in its greateft quantity, when the
Moon's apogee is in the o&ants of the Sun, and va-
nifhes when the apogee arrives at the quadratures or
fyzygies. And added to the mean motion, while
it is
the Moon's apogee is pafling from the quadrature of

the Sun to the fyzygy, and fubdufted while the apo-
gee is pafling from the fyzygy to the quadrature. This
equation, which I (hall call the femi-annual, when
greateft in the o&ants of the apogee, arifes to about
3'. 45". fo far as I could colleft from the phenomena.
And this is its quantity in the mean diftance of the

Sun from the Earth. But it is increafed and diminish-
ed in the reciprocal triplicate proportion of the Sun's
diftance, and therefore is nearly 3'. 34". when that
diftance is greateft, and 3'. 56"* whenleaft. But when
the Moon's apogee Is without the o&antf, it becomes
Digitized by Googl
Book III. of Natural Thilofophy. 30 1
lefs,and is to its greateft quantity, as the fine of double
the diftance of the Moon's apogee from the neareft
fyzygy > or quadrature to the radius.
By the fame theory of gravity, the aftion of the

Sun upon the Moon is fomething greater, when the
Vine of the Moon's nodes pafTes through the Sun, than
when it is at right angles with the line which joins
the Sun and the Earth. And
hence arifes another e-
quation of the Moon's mean motion, which I lhall
call the fecond femi-annual, and this is greateft when
the nodes are in the o&ants of the Sun, and vanifties
when they are in the fyzygies or quadratures; and in
other pofitions of the nodes is proportional to the fine
of double the diftance of either node from the neareft
fyzygy or auadrature. And it is added to the mean
motion of the Moon, if the Sun is in antecedently to
the node whicji is neareft to him, and fubdu&cd if m JuL
confequentia and in the oflants, where it is of the
;
greateft magnitude, it arifes to 47". in the mean di-

ftance of the Sun from the Earth, as I find from the
theory of gravity. In other diftances of the Sun this
equation, greateft in the ofiants of the nodes, is reci-
procally as the cube of the Sun's diftance from the
Earth, and therefore in the Sun's perigee it comes to-
about 49'', and in its apogee to about 45".
By the fame theory of gravity, the Moon's apogee
goes forward at the greateft rate, when it is either in
conjun&ion with or in oppoficion to the SunTEut in ./
*
its quadratures with the Sun it goes bac kward . And
the eccentricity comes, in the former cafe, to its great-
eft quantity, in the latter to by cor. 7. 8. and
its leaft,
9. prop. 66. book 1. And

thofe inequalities by the ^
^
corollaries we have nam'd, are very great, and generate
the principal, which I call the femPannual, equation
of the apogee. And this femi-annual equation in
its greateft quantity comes to about n°. 18". as near-
Digitized by Google
$oi Mathematical Trinciples Book lit
ly as I could colle6h from the
phenomena* Our
countryman Horrox was the firftô advanced the
anuiadv^*
* tneory of the Moon's moving in an Ellipfe about the
awoucVo Earth placed in its lower focus. Dr. Hailej improved
the notion, by putting the centre of the ell^pfeln aa
TuIkJ -
epicycle whofe centre is uniformly revolved about the

Earth. And from the motion in this epicycle the
mentioned inequalities in the progrefs and regrefs of
the apogee, and in the quantity of eccentricity do arife.
Suppofe the mean diftance of the Moon from the Earth,
to be divided into iooooo parts, and let T(PL i^.Figk
2.) reprefent the Earth, and TC
the Moon's mean ec-
centricity of 5505 fuch parts. Produce to 5, fa TC
as CB may be the fine of the greateft femi-annual e-
quation 12 0 . 18', to the radius TC; and the circle
BDA defcribed about the centre C, with the interval
€ [
CB, will be the epicycle (poke .of, in which the centre
**
of the Moon's orbit is placed^ and revolved according
i ,
v
to the order of the letters BDA* Set_ofFjthe angle
(
< BCD equal to twice the annual argument, or twice

the diftance of the Sun's true place from the place of
the Moon's apogee once equated, and
7
will beCTD
the femi-annual equation oT the Moon's apogee, and
TD the eccentricity of its orbit, tending to the place
of the apogee now twice equated. But having th$
Moon's mean motion, the place of its apogee, and its
eccentricity, as well as the longer axe of its orbic
200000; from thefe data the true place of the Moon,
in itsorbit, together with its diftance from the Earth,
may be determined by the methods commonly known*
In the perihelion of the Earth where the force of
Sun is greateft, the centre of the Moon's orbit
the
n> \c\-t*p\&+
moves fafter about the centre C, than in the aphelio%
and that in the reciprocal triplicate proportion of the
Sun's diftance from the Earth. But becaufe the equa*
tion of the Sun's centre is included in the annual argu-
Kpfpr, the centre of the Moon's orbit moves fafter in
Digitized by Google
Book III. of Natural Thilofophf. 3 04
its epicycle BDA, in the reciprocal duplicate propor-
tion of the Sun's diftance from the Earth. There-
fore that it may move yet fafter in the reciprocal fimpler
proportion of the diftance; fuppofe that from D
the
centre of the orbit a right line DE is drawn, tending
towards the Moon's apogee once equated, that is, pa-> i
u T ?
rallel to TC; and(fet offjthe angle EDF equal to the ^jiaV* v

excefs of the argument above the di-outu ekVU^
forefaid annual
ftance of the Moon's apogee from the Sun's perigee
in confiqucntiai or, which comes to the fame thing,
take the angle CDF
equal to the complement of the
Sun's true anomaly to jtfo°. And let be to DC* DF
as twice the eccentricity of the orbis magnus to the
Sun's mean diftance from the Earth and the Sun'^
mean diurnal motion from the Moon's apogee to the
Sun's mean diurnal motion from its own apogee con- ^MTJvvO
jun&ly, that is, as 3 3 -f to 1000, amTp?. 27". 16"'.
to 59'. 8". 10'". conjunctly; or as 3 to 100. And
imagine the centre of the Moon's orbit, placed in the
point F> to be revolved in an epicycle whofe centre if
£>, and radius DF, while the point D
moves in the
circumference of the circle DABD.
For by this
means the centre of the Moon's orbit comes to defcribe
a certain curve line, about the centre C, with a velocity
which will be almoft reciprocally as the cube of the /
**
Sun's diftance from the Earth, as it ought to be.
The calculus of this motion is difficult, but may be,
render'd more eafy by the following approximation.
A {fuming as above the Moon's mean diftance from the
Earth of 1 00000
parts, and the eccentricity of TC
5 5 of fuch parts, the line CB or CD
will be found
1172^, and DF
35 j of thole parts. And this line
DF at the diftance TC
fubtends the angle at the Earth,
-which the removal of the centre of the orbit from the wW
place D to the place F generates in the motion of this
centre; and double this line DF in a parallel pofiti-
on, at the diftance of the upper focus of the Moon's
? orbit
Digitized by Google
Mathematical principles Book III.
orbit from the Earth, fubtends ac the Earth the fame

angle as DFdid before, which that removal generates
in the motion of this upper focus ; but at the diftance
of the Moon from the Earth this double line zDF
at the upper focus, in a parallel polition to the firft line
DF, fubtends an angle at the Moon which the laid

removal generates in the motion of the Moon, which
angle may be therefore called the fecond equation of
the Moon's centre. And this equation, in the mean
diftance of the Moon
from the Earth, is nearly as the
line of the angle which that line D
F contains with
the line drawn from the point F to the Moon, and
when in its greateft quantity amounts to t\ 2f".
But the angle which the line DF
contains with the
line drawn from the point F to the Moon, is found
^\ A. cither, hy fubtrafting the angle EDF
from the mean
anomaly of the Moon, or by adding the diftance of
the Moon from the Sun, to the diftance of the Moon's
apogee from the apogee of the Sun. And as the ra-
dius to the fine of the angle thus found, lb is i. 25".
to the fecond equation of the centre ; to be added, if
u4* jUcU r - the forementioned fum be lefs than a femicircle, to be
^^(.C.v^îubduHe3T"f greater. And from the Moon's place in
its orbit thus corre&ed, its longitude may be found
in the fyzygies of the luminaries.
The atmofphere of the Earth to the height of ^5
or 40 miles refra&s the Sun's light. This refraftion
crs an<JJCSdttke light over the Earth's âdpwj
1 1 'tuA fejf
^
*
u%% *™ of the'jâdpw_
diflipaled]light near the limits
dilates the fhadow. Upon which accounts, to the
diameter of the fhadow, as. it comes our by the parallax,
I add 1 or 1} minute in lunar eclipfes.
But the theory of the Moon ough t to be examine4
and proved from the phenomena, 'firft in the fyzygies j
then in the quadratures ; and laft of all in the octants
anc* wn °f° pleafes to undertake the work, will find ic
•*"i«uu '
i
I
not amifs to'affume tlie pm
wmg mean motions of the
§uq
Digitized by Google
JBdolc III. of natural Vhilofophf. 305
S un and Moon, at the royal obfervatory of Greemvick
to the laft day of Decembers noon, anno 1700, O. S.
0
viz,. The mean motion of the Sun VS 20 . 43'. 40";
and of its apogee
0
^
7 . 44'. 30". the mean motion
of the Moonss 15 . 11. 00"; of its apogee, K 8°.
0
20'. 00". and of its afcending node, S\ 27°. 24'.

20"; and the difference of meridians betwixt the
obfervatory at Greenwich and the royal obfervatory at
Paris, o h 9'. 20". but the mean motion of the Moon
.
and of its apogee, are not (yet) obtained with fufficient

accuracy. ****
Proposition XXX VL Problem XW*

To find the force of the Sun to move the Sea.
The Sun's force or ML PT

to difturb the motions
of the Moon, was, (by prop. 25.) in the Moon's
quadratures, to the force of gravity with us, as 1 to
638092,5. And the force TM—LM
y or 2 in PK
the Moon's double that quantity.
fyzygies, is Buc
defcending to the furface of the Earth, thefe forces are
diminifhed in proportion of the diftances from the
centre of the Earth, that is, in the proportion of 6o\ to
1 ; and therefore the former force on the Earth's fur-
Face is to the force of gravity, as 1 to 38604600.
And by this force the Sea is jjeprefled in fuch places «
as are 90 degrees diftant from "the Sun. But by the

other force which is twice as great, the Sea is rais'd ; & \
not only in the places dire&ly under the Sun, but in

thofc alfo which are direftly oppofed to it. And the
fum of thefe forces is to the force of gravity, as 1 to
12868200. And becaufe the fame force excites the
feme motion, whether it deprefles the waters in thofe v
places which are 90 degrees diftant from the Sun,* or

xaifes them in the places which arc dire&ly under, and >
direaiy oppofed to the Sun ; the foreftitf fum will be

1,1. x ^vTc^^^
f
$06 Mathematical Trinciples Book in,
: the total force of the Sun to difturb the Sea, and will
have the fame efFeft as if the whole was employed in
.{tt^ttV railing theSea in the places dire&ly under and dire&ly
oppos'd to the Sun, and îd not aft at all in the places
jyhich are po degrees removed from the Sun.
And this is the force of the Sun to difturb the Sea
in any given place, where the Sun is at the fame time
both vertical, and in its mean diftance from the Earth.
In other pofitions of the Sun, its force to raife the Sea
is as the verfed fine of double its altitude above the
horizon of the place diredtly, and the cube of the di-
ftance from the Earth reciprocally.
Cor. Since the centrifugal force of the parts of the
Earth, arifing from the Earth's diurnal motion, which
is to the force of gravity as i to 289, raifes the wa-
ters under the equator to a height exceeding that un-

der the poles by 85472 Paris feet, as above in prop.
19. the force of the Sun which we have now Ihewed
to be to the force of gravity, as 1 to 128682,00, and
therefore is to that centrifugal force as 289 to 1 2868200,
C^ ^. 1 or as 1 to 44f27, will be able to raife the waters in
the places direftly under and direftly oppos'd to the
Sun, to a height exceeding that in the places which
are 90 degrees removed from the Sun, only by one
Paris foot and 113^ inches. For this meafure is to
the meafure of 85472 feet, as 1 to 44527.
Proposition XXXVII. Problem XVM.

To find the force of the Moon to move the Sea.
The force of the Moon to move the Sea is to be

deduced from its proportion to the force of the Sun,
and this proportion is to be colle&ed from the propor-
tion of the motions of the Sea, which are the effects
I . _ * of thofe forces. Before the mouth of the river Avon,
three miles below Briflol, tfie height of the afcent of
the
Digitized by Google
Book III. of Natural Thilofophy: 307
the water, in the vernal and autumnal fyzygies of the
luminaries, (by the obfervations of Samuel Sturmj) a-
mounts to about 45 feet, but in the quadratures to 2
fc>nly. The
former of thofe heights arifes from the
fum of the forelaid forces, the latter from their dif- Jfuw*
ference. If therefore S and L are fuppofed to repre-
fent refpe<5Hvely the forces of the Sun and Moon,
while they are in the equator, as well as in theirmean
diftances from the Earth, we ftiall have L-f-S to L —
as 45 to 25, or as 9 to 5.
At Plymouth (by the obfervations of Samuel Coleprefs)
the tide in its mean height riles to about 16 feet, and
in the Ipring and autumn the height thereof in the
fyzygies may exceed that in the quadratures by more
than 7 or 8 feet. Suppofe the greateft difference of
thofe heights to be 9 feer, and L-|-S will be to S, L—
as 20j to 11*, or as 41 to 23 ; a proportion that , , .
agrees well enoug h with the former. But becaufe of

the great tide at Briftol y we are rather to depend upon ,\v\.y*
the obfervations of Sturmj, ancTthereforc till we pro-
cure fomething that is more certain, we lhall ufe the
proportion of 9 to 5.
But becaufe of the reciprocal motions of the waters,'
the greateft tides do not happ en at the times of the /
r
"'''\7
fyzygies of the luminaries, but as we have faid before,
arc the third in order after the fyzygies; (or reckoning r ^
from the lyzygies) follow next after the third appulfe
of the Moon
to the meridian of the place after the
fyzygies or rather (as Sturmj obferves) are the third
;
after the day of the new or full Moon, or rather near-

ly after the twelfth full Moon, and
hour from the new or
therefore upon the forty third hour after theo
fall nearly
new or full of the Moon. But in this port they fallout
about the feventh hour after the appulfe of the Moon k-
to the mencfian of the place; and therefore follow next t
after the appulfe of the Moon to the meridian, when * • ** •
the Moon is diftant from the Sun, or from oppofition
Digitized by Google
308 Mathematical Principles Book III;
with the Sun by about 1 8 or 19 degrees in confequentia.
So t 'ie fummer an ^ winter feafons come not to their

v^^juô
height nTtKFfolftices themfelves, but when the Sun
beyond the folftices by about a-jtenth part
is ac*vanced
\it<M *iU.
of its whole courfe, that is, by about 36 or jêgrees.
In like manner the greateft tide is raifed after the ap-
pulfe of the Moon to the meridian of the place, when
the Moon has paffed by the Sun, or the oppofition there-
of, by about a tenth part of the whole motion from

one greateft tide to the next following greateft tide.
Sup-
pofe that diftance about i8£ degrees. And the Sun's
force in this diftance of the Moon from the fyzygies
I , :> and quadratures, will be of lefs moment to augment
4<u< *+. ,
j^jjjjjjj tjjat p art 0 f the motion oFthe Sea which
proceeds from the motion of the Moon, than in the
fyzygies and quadratures themfelves, in the proportion
of the radius to the confine of double this diftance, or
of an angle of 37 degrees, that is, in proportion of
10000000 to 7986355. And therefore in the pre-
ceding analogy, in place of S we muft put 0,7986355 s.
U iK Atfauj&But further, the force of the Moon in the quadra*
tures muft be diminifhed, on account of its declinati-
on from the equator. For the Moon in thole quadra-
tures, or rather in
i8f degrees paft the quadratures,
from the equator by about 22 0 . 13'. And
declines
.the force of either luminary to move the Sea is dimi-
Uvu "** r nifhed as it declines from the
equator, nearly in the
duplicate proportion of the co-fine of the declination.
And therefore the force of the Moon in thofe quadra-
tures is only 0,8770327 L; whence we have L-|-
0,7986355 S, to 0,8/70327 L —0,7986355 S, as 9
to 5.
u*U%%vt Further yet, the diameters of the orbit, in which the
v Moon fhoufd move, fetting afide the confideration of
7
eccentricity, are one to the other, as 69 to 70. And

therefore the Moon's diftance from the Earth in the
fyzygies, is to its diftance in the quadratures, cateris
paribus.
Google
Book III.
4>f Natural Thilofophy. 309
paribus, 69 as to 70. And its diftances, when 18 J ,
degrees advanced beyond the fyzygies, where the great-

eft tide was excited, and when i8j degrees paffed by
the quadratures, where the leaft tide was produced, are
to its mean diftance as 695098747 ana 69*897345
to 6p£. But the force of the Moon to move the Sea
is in the reciprocal triplicate proportion of its diftance.
And therefore its forces, in the greateft and leaft of
thofe diftances, are to its force in its mean diftance, as
0,9830427 and 1,017522 to 1. From whence we
have 1,017522 L x 0,7986355 S to 0,9830427 x
—
0,8570327 L 0,7986^55 S as 9 to 5. And S to
L, as 1 to 4,4815. Wherefore fincc the force of the
Sun is to the force of gravity as 1 to 12868200, the
Moon's force will be to the force of gravity, as 1 to
2871400.
Cor. 1. Since the waters excited by the Sun's force
rife to the height of a foot and 1 f inches, theMoon's
force will raife the fame to the height of 8 feet and
7-L- inches; and the joint forces of both will raife the
fame to the height of io~ feet; and when the Moon

is in its perigee, to the height of 12 J feet, and more,
efpecially when the wir^d fets the fame way as the tide, {t^
And of that 'quantity is abundantly fufficient to
a force
excite all the motions of the Sea, and agrees well with the c*\\*^*«»
proportion of thofe motions. For in lucli Seas as lye free ;< *• x
^ s
and/opeij ^rpm eaft to weft, as in the Pacific Sea, and •
in H&fe JtraAs oflhe Atlantic and Ethiopic Seas which r-*it***«
lye without the tropics, the waters commonly rife to I to

tf,9, 12, or 15 feet. But in the Pacific Sea, which is
of a greater depth as well as of a larger extent, the tides
are faid to Be greater than in the Atlantic and Ethiopic
Seas. For to have a full tide raifed, an extent of Sea 4
»-
from eaft to weft is required of no lefs than 90 de«- tA 1 >
grees. In the Ethiopic Se3, the waters rife to a lefs

height within the tropics than in the temperate zones,
P
'fZXt* -
5 X be-
Digitized by Google
'316 Mathematical Trinciples Book III*
becaufe of the narrownefs of the Sea between Africa
vanu^cu»4and the fquthern parts of America* In the middle of
V *~^ e w êrs without JfaUjng, to-
<fe1
t 'ie 2E£n S e cannot rife
etner ac âme time > u P on botn the extern and

g
tll^l weftern flioars; when notwithftanding in our ^¥9^^
Seas, they ought to fall orT tftott (hores ] by alternate*
rvwu..*3 *^
1
turns. Upon "which account, there is commonly but

j t lCui<j * (mall flood and ebb in fuch iflands, as 1(£ fardiftant
v
1 « from the continent?* On the contrary in lome* ports,
* \
* where to 611 and^rnr>ry the bays alternately i the wa-
ters are w t j1 g reat violence forced in and out through
j
(hallow chanels, the flood and ebbmuft be greater than

l^.^j
ordinary, as at Plymouth and Chcpftcw-Bridge in England,
-
at the mountains of St. Michael, and the town of Aa-
ranches in Normandy, and at Cambaia and Pegu in the
In thele places the Sea is hurry ed in and
1
*
J
^
out with fuch violence, as fometimes to lay theôars^^
under water, fometimes to leave them Tlrj, for many
^jf ^ mito t Nor is this force of the influx efflux to be
^, T>roke, till it has raifed and deprefled the waters to 50,

40, or jo feet and above. And a like account is to
» be given of long and (hallow chanels or ftreights, fuch
'"
au H as the Magellanic ftreights and thofe chanels which en-
viron England. The tide in fuch ports and ftreights,
by the violence of the influx and efflux, is augmented
above meafure. But on fuch (hoars as ly towards the
•
rvK deepand open^Sea, with a teep defcent, where the wa-
ters may^frVely rife end fall without that precipitation
of influx and efflux, the proportion of the tides agrees
yith the forces of the Sun and Moon.
Cor. 2. Since the Moon's force to move the Sea
is to the force of gravity, as 1 to 2871400, it is evi-
dent that this force is far lefs than to appear fenfibly

in ftatical or hydroftatical experiments, or even in thofe
of pendulums. It is in the tides only that this force
#ews it felf by any fenfible effect
Con
d by Google
Book III. of Natural Thtlofophf. 3 1 r
Con. 3. Becaufe the force of the Moon to move

the Sea is to the like forceof the Sun as 4,4815 to
1 ,% and thofe forces (by cor. 14. prop. 66. book 1.)
are as the denfities of the bodies of the Sun and Moon
and the cubes of their apparent diameters conjunctly;
the denfity ofthe Moon will be to the denfity of the
Sua as 4,4815 to 1 dire&ly, and the cube of the
Moon's diameter to the cube of the Sun's diameter
inverfely; that is, mean apparent diameters
(feeing the
of the Moon and Sun are zi. 16$". and 32'. 12".)
as 48^1 to 1000. But the denfity of the Sun was
to the denfity of the Earth, as 1000 to 4000; and
therefore the denfity of the Moon is to the denfity
of the Earth as 4891 to 4000, or as 11 to 9. There-
fore the body of the Moon is more denfe and more
^ rU
> >.
earthly, than the Earth it felf. ? cV

Cor. 4. And fince the true diameter of the Mooft,'
(from the obfervations of aftronomersj is to the true
diameter of the Earth, as 100 to 565, the mafs of
matter in the Moon will be to the mafs of matter in
the Earth as 1 to 39,788.
Cor. 5. And the accelerative gravity oh the fur-
face of the Moon will be about three times lefs than
the accelerative gravity on the furface of the Earth.
Cor. 6. And the diftance of the Moon's centre from
the centre of the Earth will be to the diftance of the
Moon's centre from the common centre of gravity
of the Earth and Moon, as 40,788 to 39,788.
Cor. 7. And the mean diftance of the centre of
the Moon from the centre of the Earth will be (in
the Moon's odants) nearly 60$ of the greateft femi-
diameters of the Earth. For the greateft femidiameter
of the Earth was 19(5*58^00 Paris feet, and the mean
diftance of the centres of the Earth and Moon,
confifting of 60 f fuch femidiamerers, is equal to
1 187379440 feet. And this diftance (by the pre-
ceeding cor.) is to the diftance of the Moon's centre
X4 from
Digitized by Google
3 1 % Mathematical Trinciples Book III.
from the common centre of gravity of the Earth and

Moon, as 40,788 to 39,788; which latter diftance
therefore is 11^8268534 feet. And fince the Moon,
in refpeS of the fixe Stars, performs its revolution in
d h
27 . 7 434'. tne verfed-fine of that angle which the
.
Moon in a minute of time ddcribes is 127 51 341, to

the radius 1000,000000,000000. And as the radius is
ta this verfed-fine, fo are 1 158268534 feet to 14,

7706353 feet. The Moon therefore falling towards
the Earth, by which retains it in its orbit,
that force
would in one minute of time defcribe 14,7706355
feet. And if we augment this force in the proportion
of 178 *1- to 177-^-f, we ihall have the total force of
gravity at the orbit of the Moon, by cor. prop. 3,
And the Moon falling by this force, in one minute of
time would defcribe 14,8538067 feet. And at the
6o ch part of the diftance of the Moon from the
Earth's centre. That is, at the diftance of 197896573
feet from the centre of the Earth, a body falling by
its weight, would, in one fecond of time, likewile
defcribe 14,8538067 feet. And therefore at the dir
fiance of 19615800, which compofe one mean femi-
diameter of the Earth, a heavy body would defcribe
in falling 15,11x75, or 15 feet, 1 inch and 47V lines
in the fame time* This will be the defcent of bodies in
the latitude of 45 degrees. And by the foregoing
table to be found under prop. 20. the defcent in the
latitudeof Pari: will be a little greater by an excefs of
about f parts of a line. Therefore by this computa-
tion heavy bodies in the latitude of Paris falling in va-
cuo will defcribe 15 Paris feet, 1 inch, 4ff- lines ve-
ry nearly in one fecond of time. And if the gravity
be diminiftied by taking away a quantity equal to the
centrifugal force arifing in that latitude from the
Earth's diurnal motion; heavy bodies falling there
will defcribe in one fecond of time 15 feet, 1 inch,
ancl i£ line, And with this velocity heavy bodies
Digitized by Google
Book III. of Natural Thilofophy. , x 3
do really fall in the latitude of Paris, as we have

ftiewn above in prop. 4. and 19.
Cor. 8. The mean diftanceof the centres of the
Earth and Moon in the fyzygies of the Moon is e-
qual to 60 of the greateft femidiameters of the Earth,
fubdufting only about one 30 th part of a femidiame-^-^y^ ~
v
terT And in the Moon's quadratures the mean diftance.

of the fame centres is 6o| fuch femidiameters of the
Earth. For thefe two diftances are to the mean di-
ftance of the Moon in the oftants, as 69 and
70 to
by prop. 28.
Cor. 9. The mean diftance of the centres of the
Earth and Moon in the fyzygies of the Moon is 60
mean femidiameters of the Earth, and a 10 th part of
one femidiameter; and in the Moon's quadratures the
mean diftance of the fame centres is 61 mean femidia-
meters of the Earth, fubdu&ing one 30 h part of one
femidiameter.
Cor. 10. In the Moon's fyzygies its mean hori-
zontal parallax in the latitudes of 0,30,38,45,52,60,90
degrees, is 57'. 20". 57. 16". 57'. 14". 57'. 12". 57'
'
10". '. 8".
57'. 4". refpeftively.
57
In thefe computations I don't confider the magne-
tic attra&ion of the Earth whofe: quantity is
very
Imall and unknown. If this quantity Ihould ^ver be
found out, and the meafures of degrees upon the meri-
dian, the lengths of ifochronous pendulums in differ-
ent parallels, the laws of the motions of the Sea, and
the Moon's parallax, with the apparent diameters of the
Sun and Moon, fhould be more exaftly determined
from pbaenomena ; we fhould then be inabled to bring
iû^-lJ
Ipis calculation to a greater accuracy.
Pro*-
Digitized by Google
Proposition XXXVII. Problem XIX.

To find the figure of the Moon's body.
If the Moon's body were fluid like our Sea, the
M>toM,W ôrce °^ t 'ie ^ art '1 t0 t ' ,at

^ u ' c' , t 'ie near eft m
and remoteft parts, would be to the force of the Moon,
by which our Sea is raifed in the places under and op-
pofite to the Moon, as the accelerative gravity of the
Moon towards the Earth, to the accelerative gravity
of the Earth towards the Moon, and the diameter of
the Moon to the diameter of the Earth conjundly,
that is, as ?p,788 to 1, and 100 to 565 conjunftly,
or as 108 1 to 100. Wherefore, fince our Sea, by
the force of the Moon, is raifed to 8f feet ; the lunar
fluid would be raifed by the force of the Earth to 93
u P on l ^ ls
êer# ^ n( * JLciC0Urj!> 6g ure °f the
0Uiu/{A<
Moon would
be a fpheroTd, whofe greateft diameter
» A*~*±l* produced would pafs through the centre of the Earth,
and exceed the diameters perpendicular thereto, by
i85 feet. Such a figure therefore the Moon affedb,
,
, and muft have put on from the beginning. O. E. I f
Cv
r ^ * Cor. Hence it is, that the fame face of the Moon
always refpefts the Earth; nor can the body of the
Moon poffibly reft in any other pofition, but would
return always by a libratory motion to this fituation.
But thofe librations however muft be exceeding flow,
V/; , J becaufe of the weaknefs of the forces which excite
them; fo that the face of the Moon which fhould be
^ j ^ always obverted to the Earth, may for the reafon af-
ligned in prop. 17. be turned towards the other focus
of the Moon's orbit, without being immediately drawn,
back, and converted again towards the Earth.
L E M-
Digitized by Google
Book III. of Natural Thilofoph/. 3 1 s
«
Lemma *
L
If APE p (PI. 14. Fig. 3.) reprefentthe Earth

uniformly denfe, markd with the centre C, the
poles V, p, and the equator A
E ; and if about the
centre C, with the radius C
P, we fuppofe the
fphere P a p e to be defcribed, and Q^R to denote
the plane on which a right line, drawn from the
centre of the Sun to the centre of the Earth, *
h* ^v
,
l
v\^
infifts at right angles, and farther fuppofe, that
the federal particles of the whole exterior Earth
Pap APepE, without the height of the faid A***
fphere, endeavour to recede towards this fide and
that fidejrom the plane OR, every particle bya
force proportional to its diftance from that plane ;
Ifay in the firfi place, that the whole force and
efficacy of all the particles, that are fituate in
AE the circle of the equator, and difpofed uni-
"
formly without the globe, encompajfmg the fame '
after the' manner of aripj^ to wheel the Earth

about its centre, is to the whole force and efficacy of
as many particles, in that point A of the equator
which is at the greatefl diftance from the plane
Q^R, to wheel the Earth about its centre with
a like circular motion, as i to i. And that cir- ^ ^
cular motion will be performed about an axis Ijh \r ^
ing in the common feStion of the equator and the
pane QR.
For let there be defcribed from the centre K, with
the diameter /L, the femicircle INLK.Suppofe the
fcmicircumference fNL to be divided into innume-
rable
Digitized by Google
3i6 Mathematical Trincifles Book HE
rable equal parts, and from the feveral parts N to the
diameter IL let fall the fines NM. Then the fums
of the fquares of all the fines will be equal to NM
the fums of the fquares of the fines and both KM>
fums together will be equal to the fums of the fquares
of as many femidiameters KN;
and therefore the fum
of the fquares of all the fines will be but half JVM
fo great as the fum of the fquares of as many femi-
diameters KJV.
Suppole now the circumference of the circle to AE
be divided into the like number of little equal parts,
and from every fuch part F a perpendicular to be FG
let fall upon the plane jO R> as well as the perpendicu-
lar AH from the point A. Then the force by which
the particle F recedes from the plane OR, will (by
fuppofition) be as that perpendicular FG, and this
force multiplied by the diftance CG will reprefent
the power of the particle F to turn the Earth round
its centre. And therefore the power of a particle in
the place F 9 will be to the power of a particle in the
place A, as FGxGC to AHxHC; that is, as FC X
to AC * : and therefore the whole power of all the

particles F, in their proper places F, will be to the
power of the like number of particles in the place A,
as the fum of all the FC 2 to the fum of all the
AC 1
, that is, (by what we have dcmonftrated before)
as i to z. J§>. £. D.
And becaufe the aftion of thofe particles is exerted
i
in the diredion of lines perpendicularly receding from
^' >u " t
,
the plane QR,and that equally from eacIHideiof this

\ V/ p' an ^> they will wheel about the circumference of the
J '
circleof the equator, together with the adherent body
i of the Eai th, round an axe, which lies as well in the
x
'
plane OR, as in that of the equator."
L E M-
Digitized by Google
Book III. of Natural Thilofophy: jit
Lemma II.
»
***
The fame things ftjU fuppofed, Ifay in the fiAo***3
cond place\ that the total force or power of all the
f articles fituated\every where) about the fphere to
turn the Earth about the faid axe, is to the
whole force of the like number of particles, uni-
formly difpos'd round the whole circumference of
the equator AE
in the fajhion of a ring, to turn
the whole Earth about with the like circular
motion, as z to y. PI. 14. Fig. 4.
For, let IK be
any lefTer circle parallel to the equa-
tor AE y andL>1 be any two equal particles i? this
let
circle, fituated without the fphere Pape. And if

upon the plane jO R> which is at right angles with a
radius drawn to the Sun, we let fall the perpendiculars
LM, Im; the total forces by which thefe particles
recede from the plane <2 R, will be proportional to the.
perpendiculars LM,
lm. Let the right line Ll be
drawn Papc, and bifedr the fame
parallel to the plane
in X; and thro' the point X
draw Nn, parallel to the
plane OR, and meeting the perpendiculars lm LM,
in N and n ; and upon the plane OJl let fall the per-
pendicular XT* And the contrary forces of the par-
ticles L and /, to wheel about the Earth contrary-
wife, are as LMxMC, and ImxmC, that is, as LM
xMC~y NM xMC, and Inx mC nmxmC; or —
LNxM C-J- NMx M CandLATx m C—JVMx m C 3
L Nx Mm — NM x M C-\- m C, the difference of

and
the two, is the force of both taken together to turn
the Earth round. The affirmative part of this dif-
ference LNxMm, or zLJVxNX, is to zAHa
H C, the force of two particles of the fame fize^ fitu- | \>
Digitized by Google
1 i s Mathematical Trinciples Book III.
A, as L X to AC
ated in And 2 2
. the negative part
NMxAlC-\-mC, otiXYxCYy is to lAHxHC,
the force of the fame two particles fituated in Af, as
CX 2
to 2
. AC
And therefore the difference of the
parts, that is, the force of the two particles L and /,
m^Mst taken together, to wheel the Earth about, is to the

force of two particles, equal to the former and fitua-
tf
ted in the place A> to turn in like manner the Earth

round, as 2 2
LX
to 2
. — CX
But if the cir- AC
cumference IK
of the circle IK is fuppofed to be di-
vided into an infinite number of little equal parts L, afl
the 2
LX
will be to the like number of IX , as i
2
to 2 (by lem. u) and to the fame number of 2

, AC
as IX
1
to iAC*; and the fame number of 1
, CX
to as many AC 2
, as zCX 1
to zAC 1
. Wherefore
the united forces of all the particles in the circumfe-
rence of the circle IK> are to the joint forces of as
many particles in the place A, as IX 1
— i CX 2 to
zAC 2
; and therefore (by lem. i.) to the united
forces of as many particles in the circumference of the
circle A E, as IX 2 — i CX 2
to AC 2
.
Now if Pp the diameter of the fphere is conceiv'd

to be divided into an infinite number of equal parts,
upon which a like number of circles IK are fuppofed
vCK i
to in fi ft, the matter in the circumference of every cir-
cle IKwill be as 2
. IX
And therefore the force of
that matter to turn the Earth about will be as 2
in- IX
to IX 2 — zCX
2
. And the iorce of the fame mat-
ter, if it in the circumference of the cir-
was fituated
cle AE, would be as IX 2 into 2
. And there- AC
fore the force of all the particles of the whole matter,
fituated without the fphere in the circumferences of
all the circles, is to the force of the like number of
particles fituated in the circumference of the greateft
circle A E, as all the IX 2 into IX 1
— i CX* to as
many IX 2
into AC 3
, that is, as all the AC —CX 2 l
into AC'—iCX* to as many AC 2 — CX 2 into

* AC
Digitized by Google
- t :
Book III. of Natural Thilofophf. 3 0

\A. , that is, as all the AC^^/Â C a x CX* -|-$ CX+
to as many -/*C 4 — AC 1 x CJf* , that is, as the wholo -
fluent quantity whofe fluxion is ^C 4 —-qAC x

x mf-f^'n
-|- j CJf 4 , to the whole fluent quantity
whofe fluxion is AC*—AC*xCX x
; and therefore
by the method of fluxions, AC* xCX— f AC*
as
xCX4 : fCX'
to AC*xCX— f AC*xCX>,
that is, if for CX we write the whole Cp 9 or ^C,
as -r4T c 5 t0 t 4 C *3 ât is, as 2 to 5.
Lemma III.
The fame things fill fuppofed, I fay in the ,
third place, that the motion of the whole Earth *' Au u ?

aFout the axe abovenamed, arifngjrom the nuh
turns of all the particles^ will be to the motion of
~ w^
the fqrefaid ring about the fame axe, in a pro-^: ^*^
portion compounded oj the proportion of the mat-
ter in the Earth to the matter in the ring ; and
the proportion of three fquares of the quadrantal
arc of any circle, to two fquares of its diameter,
that is, in the proportion of the matter to the
matter, and of the number 525175, to the num-
ber 1000000.
For the motion of a cylinder, revolv'd about its

quiefcent axe, is to the motion of the infcrib'd fphere
revolv'd together with it, as any four equal fquares to
three circles infcrib'd in three of thofe fquares : And
the motion of this cylinder is to the motion of an ex-
ceeding thin ring, furrounding both fphere andcy-.
linder in their common contaft, as double the mat-
ter in the cylinder to triple the matter in the ring
And this motion of the ring, uniformly continued a-
bout
Digitized by Google
$20 Mathematical "Principles Book III.
bout the axe of the cylinder, is to the uniform motion
1
^c of the fame about its qwn diameter per form 'd in the
/
fame periodic time, as the circumference of a circle to
double its diameter.
Hypothesis EL
If the other parts of the Earth were [took a way,

mid the remaining ring was carried alme about
the Sun in the orbit of the Earth by h%e annual
%
%i M motion, while by the diurnal motion it was in the

mean time revolved about its own axe, inclined
V^cyvvo to the plane
of the ecliptic by an angle of de-
grees ; the motion of the equinoBtal points would
'be the fame, whether the ring were fluid, orwhe-
v ,
v
0 ther it confifled of a hard and rigid matter.
Proposition XXXIX. Problem XX.

To find the frecejjion of the equinoxes.
The
middle horary motion of the Moon's nodes,
in a when the nodes are in the quadra-
circular orbic
tures, was 1 6". iv 36" v the half of which
3f"'. itf . .
8'. 17"'. 38 iv . i8 v . (for the reafons above explain'dj

is the mean horary motion of the nodes in fuch an or-
bit, which motion in a whole fidereal year becomes

zo°. 11'. 46". Becaufe therefore the nodes of the
Moon in fuch an orbit would be yearly transfer'd 20 0 .
\ ,{v \ v \i
4&". * n Antecedent ia ; and if there were morj Moon ?, 5
the motion of the nodes of every one, Ifiy cor. 16.

prop. 66. book 1.) would be as its periodic time ; if
upon the furface of the Earth, a Moon was revolv'd
in the time of a fidereal day, the annual motion of
the nodes of this Moon would be to 20 0 1 i. 46'. .
1 4_ _ . - - < • •
Digitized by Googl
s
Digitized by Google
Digitized by Google
Book III. of Natural Thilofophy. j ±\
as 2j
h the fidereal day, to 27*. 7 h 43'. the pe-
.
56'. .
riodic time of our Moon, that is, as 143d to 39345*

And the fame thing would happen to the nodes of a
ringof Moons encompa ffing the Earth, whether thefe osJAa*^****
Moons did not mumally touch each the other, or whe- V t*>y—
ther they were molten and form'd into a continued 1 nu<ii#^
ring, or whether 'THaTring lhould become rigid and in-
flexible.
Let us then fuppofe that this ring is in quantiry of
matter equal to the whole exterior Earth P ap ep E, AP
which lies without the fphcre Papc ("fee Fig. Lcm.
2.) and becaufe this fphere is to that exterior Earth,
as <*C* to AC X — aC z
j that is, (feeing PC or
aC the leaft femidiameter of the Earth is to AC the vwc^fu^w***
greateft lelnidiameter of the fame as 22.9 to 230^ as
52441 to 459; if this ring encorapafs'd the Earth ^-tt*^v^«L

round the equator, and both together were revolv'd
about the diameter of the ring, the motion of the ring ,
(by lem. 3.)would be to the motion of the inner vaVu^

fphere, as 459 to 52441 and iooaooo to 925275
conjunctly, thatis, as 4590 to 485223 ; and therefore
the motion of the ring would be to the fum of the

motions of both ring 'and fphere, as 4f9o to 489813.
Wherefore if the ring adheres to the fphere, and com-
municates its motion to the fphere, by which its nodes
or equinoctial points recede : the motion remaining in
the ring will be to its former motion, as 4590 to
489813, upon which account the motion of the equi-
noctial points willbediminifli'd in the fame proportion.
Wherefore the annual motion of the equinoctial points
of the body, compofed of both ring and fphere, will
be to the motion, 20 0 n'. 46". as 1436 to 39343
.
and 4590 to 489813 conjunctly, that is as 100 to

292369. But the forces by which the nodes of a
number of Moons (as we explained above) and there-
fore by which the equinoctial points of the ring re-
cede (that is the forces 3 IT in Fig. prop. 30 ) are in the
Y feveral
Digitized by Google
3 22 Mathematical Trinciples Book 111.
fevcral particles as the diftances of thofe particles from

the plane QJi ; and by thefe forces the particles recede
from that plane: and therefore (by lem. 2.) if the mat-
.4 ter of the ring was (pread all over the furface of the
L A ,
^s fP here 'after the

ii^ ion of the fi & urc P*p<*P<r > E
t
t* in order to make uptEat exterior part of the Earth, the
total force or power of all the particles to wheel about
a the Earth round any diameter of the equator, and there-
fore to move the equinoftial points, would become lefs
than before, in the proportion of * to 5. Wherefore

t , the annual regrefs of the equinoxes now would be to
CU\tf>*-- 2QO# tl \ qtf9 as I0 t o 73091: tKat is, would be
9". 5<T. 50*

But becaufe the plane of the equator is inclin'd to
that of the ecliptic, this motion is to be diminifh'd
in the proportion of the fine 91705, (which is the
co-fine of 23 \ deg.) to the radius 100000. And the
iv
remaining motion will now be 9". 7'". 2o . which is
the annual preceflion of the equinoxes, arifing from the
force of the Sun.
But the force of the Moon to move the fea was to
the force of the Sun nearly as 4,4815 to 1. And the
force of the Moon to move the equinoxes is to that
of the Sun in the fame proportion. Whence the an-
nual preceflion of the equinoxes, proceeding from the
iv
force of the Moon, comes out 40". 52". 52 . and the
total annual preceflion, arifing from the united forces
of both, will be 50". 00'". I2 iv the quantity of which
.
motion agrees with the phenomena. For the preceflion

of the equinoxes, by aftronomical obfervations, is a-
bout 5 o". yearly.
If the height of the Earth at the equator exceeds
its height at the poles by more than 17^ miles, the
matter thereof will be more rare near the furface, than
at the center; and the preceflion of the equinoxes will
be augmented by the excefs of height, and diminilhed
by the greater rarity.
4 And
Digitized by Google
Book of Natural Thilofophy.
III. 323 \
And now we have defcribed the fyftem of the Sun,

the Earth, Moon and Planets, it remains; that we; add )
fomething about the Comets. r*Vh*"* '
Lemma IV.
That the Comets are higher than the Moon,

and in the regions of the Tlanets.
•
As the Comets were placed by aftronomers above

the Moon becaufe they were found to have no diurnal
parallax; fo their annual parallax is a convincing proof of
their defcending into the regions of the Planets. For all the
Comets which move in a direft courfe according to the , ,
order of the figns, about the end of their appearance ^M*'** .*

'
become more than ordinarily flow or retrograde, if the -t^

Earth is between them and the Sun: and more than or-
dinarily fwift, if the Earth is approaching to a helio- /itaui^
centric oppofition with them. Whereas, on the other
hand, thofe which move jigaioft the order of the figns, ( v\\i< c
^ v
towards the end of their appearance, appear fygjfter than na**

they ought to be, if the Earth is between them and ^t^H**.^
the Sun $ and flower, and /perhaps retrograde, if the^ w ^J[i
Earth is in the "other fide ofitsorbir. And thefe ap-
pearances proceed chiefly from the diverfe fituations £*U»e»y «t
which the Earth acquires in the courfe of its motion,
after the fame manner as it happens to the Planets, which
appear fometimes retrograde, fometimes more flowly, W ^ c
and fometimes more fwiftly, progreflive, according as

the motion of the Earth rails in with that of the Pla- îaw/U.
net, or is direfted the contrary way. If the Earth
move the fame way with the Comet, bur, by an angu-
lar motion about the Sun, fo much fwifter that right vx-m i >w * >
lines drawn from the Earth to the Comet converge to-

wards the parts beyond the Comet; the Comet feen ^/ola.4.
from the Earth of its flower motion will ap-
becaufe" ^^-'Wl
Y-x— '
pear
Digitized by Google
$2 + Mathematical Principles Book III>
pear retrograde ; L
and even
Earth is flower than
if the
the Comet, the motion of the Earth being fubdufted,

JL vvua*^ the motion of the Comer will at Jeaft appear retarded.
But Earth tends the contrary way to that of the
if the
Comet, the motion of the Comet will from thence ap-
pear accelerated. And from this apparent acceleration,
or retardation, orregreflive motion, the diftance of the
Comet may be inferr'd in this manner. Let Y QÂ,
TO By TQCCPl. 15. Fig. 1.) be three obfervcd lon-
gituBes of the Comet about the time of its firft ap-
mXIvIm^- pearing, and tOF its laft obferved longitude before

its difappearing. DrawlEe right line ABC^ whofe
parts AB %BC, intercepted between 'the right lines
Qji and OB> OB and OJO, may be one to the other,
as the two times between the three firft obfervations.
[v A v/ Produce AC to G 9 fo as AG may be to AB as the

' ^ HmTBetween and laft obfervation to the time
the firft
between the firft and fecond ; and join OG. Now if

\v * cc the Cometdid move uniformly in a right line, and the
Earth eitheFTtood ftill, or was likewife carried for-
|,<u*4
W ards insight line by an uniform motion : the angle
T QjG would be the longitude of the Comet at the
time of the laft obfervation. The angle therefore
FQG, which is the difference of the longitude, pro-
ceeds from the inequality of the motions of the Comet
and the Earth. And this angle, if the Earth and Co-
added to the angle T QG,
met move contrary ways, is
and motion of the Comet, But

accelerates the apparent
if the Comet move the fame way with the Earth, it is
fubtra&ed, and either retards the motion of the Co-
•\
u{
!
met, or perhaps renders it retrograde, as we have but
i%U^«&vUSjnow explained. This angle therefore, proceeding chiefix
-
1
'Avvt> v^
from the motion of the Earth, is juftly to be efteem/d
rtivvafto the parallax of the Comet neglefting, tp_ wit; fame
]i tt i e increment or decrement that may arife from the
unequal motion of the Comet in its orbit. And from

this parallax we thus deduce the diftance of the Comer.
Let
Digitized by Google
Book III. of Natural Thilofophy. 3 2$
Let -S,(Pl. 1 5. Fig. 2.) reprefent theSun,*c:Tthe or bis mag-
nusy a the Earth's place in the firft obfervation,* the place
of the Earth in the third obfervation, T
the place of
the Earth in the laft obfervation, and TT a right line
drawn to the beginning of Aries, f Set o ff? the angle 4tf
V TP\ equal to the angle T OF, that is, equal to the
longitude of the Comet at the time when the Earth is
in T*; join a c y and produce it to g, fo as a g may be
to ac, as AG
to AC
; and^ will be the place at which
the Earth would have arrived in the time of the laft

obfervation, if it had continued to move uniformly in
the right line a c. Wherefore if we draw g y> parallel
to Ty, and make the angle Y g K equal to the angle
V OG y this angle Y^^willbe equal to the longitude
of the Comet feen from the place £,and the angle TPg
will be the parallax which arifes from the Earth's being
transferr' d from the place g into the place T; and^*^^*^
therefore V
will be the place of the Comet in the
{>lane of the ecliptic. And this place is commonlyV t ^»
ower than the orb of Jupiter. - " / ^

The fame thing may be deduced from the incur-
vntion of the way of the Comets. For thefe bodies
move almoft in great circles, while their velociry is
great, but about the end of their courfe, when that
part of their apparent motion which arifes from the
parallax bears a greater proportion to their whole ap- *wv\* >1 A"
parent motion, they commonly deviate from thofe cir-
cles, and when the Earth goes to one fide, they devi-
ate to the other. And this deflexion, becaufe of its
correfponding with the motion of the earth, muft arife \
^h iefly from the parallax. And the quantity thereof is

foconfiderable, as, by my computation, to place the
difappearing Comets a good deal* lower than Jupiter. A^cvw^f^
Whence it follows that wiei^ftfey approach nearer to
us in their perigees and perihelions, they often de-
scend below the orbs of Mars and the inferior Pla-
nets.
Y j Tfci
Digitized by Google
326 Mathematical Trinclples Book III.
The near approach of the Comets is further confirm*

cd from the light of their heads. For the light of a
f
(wtft^jgytjgi body, illuminated EyTKe Sun and receding to
^4v**^^femote parts, is diminiihed in the quadruplicate propor-
tion of the diftance; to wit, in one duplicate proper-
tion, on account of the increafe of the diftance from
the Sun, and in another duplicate proportion, on ac-
count of the decreafe of the apparent diameter. Where-
fore if both the quantity of light and the apparent di-
ameter of a Comet are given, its diftance will be alfo
jiven, by taking the diftance of the Comet to the
jiftance of a Planet, in the direft proportion of their
diameters and the reciprocal fubduplicate proportion of
their lights. Thus in the Cometof the year 1682, Mr.
FUmftead obferved with a telefcope of 16 feet, and
meafured with a micrometer, the Igaft diameter of its
.
head, 2'. 00. But the nucleus, or ftar in the middle

of the head, fcarcely amounted to the tenth part of
'
this meafurc; and therefore its diameter was only 11"

or 12". But in the light and fplendor of its head, it
furpafs'd that of the Comet in the year 1680. and
might be compared with the Stars of the firft or fe-
cond magnitude. Let us fuppofe that Saturn with its
ring was about four times more lucid ; and becaufe
the light of the ring was almoft equal to the light of
the globe within, and the apparent diameter of the
globe is about 21". and therefore the united light of
both globe and ring would be equal to the light of a
globe whofe diameter is 50". it follows that the diftance
of the Comet was to the diftance of Saturn, as 1 to
^4 inverfly and 12." to 30 dire&ly; that is, as 24
to 30, or 4 to 5. Again the Comet in the
of jfyril 1 66 j, as Hcvtlim informs us, exceflecTal-
moft all the fixt Stars in fplendor, and even Saturn
it felf, as being of a much more vivid colour. For
this Comet was more lucid than that other which
had appeared about the end of the preceding year and
had been compared to the Stars of the firft magnitude.
The
Digitized by Googl
Book III. of Natural Tbilofophf. 327
The diameterof its head was about 6'. but the nu-
cleus, compared with the Planets by means of a tele- 1
fcope, was plainly lefs than Jupiter; and fometimes/JV^ lfawM

judged lefs, Tometimes judged equal to the globe of
Saturn within the ring. Since then the diameters of ,
the heads of the Comets Jeldom exceed 8' or iz'.-<n^^

Q -
and the diameter of the nucleus or central ftar isJ^t^/W ^K

about a tenth or^f^tap^ fifteenth part of the diame-^%*
ter of the head > it appears that thefe ftars are gene-
rally of about the fame apparent magnitude with the
Planets. But in regard their light may be often com-
pared with the light of Saturn, yea and fometimes ex- ^<î*"*"
ceeds it; it is evident, that all Comets in their peri-
helions, muft above ci^û
either be placed below, or not/far r
Saturn. And they are muclf miftaken, who/ remove 1
them almoft as far as the fixt Stars. For if It was fo,
the Comets could receive no more light from our Sun,
than our Planets do from the fixt Stars.
So far we have gone, without confidering the ob-
fcuration which Comets fufFer from that plenty of ^J^,,,
thick fmoak, which êncomoafleth their heads, and
*
-i^,
through which the heads always ihcw duhVas through
a. cloud. For by^pw nûch)the moreTbody is ob-^vVj"^
S *
fcuredby this imoalc, by fo much the more near it

muft be allowed to come to the Sun, that it may yyey^ ^tv'Ju*
with the Planets in the quantity of light which it re-
flects. Whence it is probable chat che Comets defcend
far below the orb of Saturn, as we proved before from vy***m\
their parallax. But above all the thing is evinced from
their tails, which muft be owing either to the Sun's
light reflected by a frnoke arifing from them, and dif- tv*v*»o »
perfing it felf through the aether, or to the light of

their own heads. In the former cafe, we muft Iborreo -\ \j
the diftance of the Comets, Jeft we be obliged to aHoS^
that the fmoak arifing from their heads, is propagated *
a «
^ .
through fuch a vaft extent of fpace and with fuch a

velocity and expanfion, as will fcem altogether incre-yvW*.^
Y 4 dibfc.
Digitized by Google
j 28 Mathematical Trincipks Book III.
dible. In the latter cafe, the whole light of both
cfiv^ hwd and tail is to be afcribed to the central nucleus.

But then IT we fuppofe all this light to be united and
condcns'd within the difc of the nucleus, certainly the
nucleus will by far exceed Jupiter it felf in fplendor,
efpecially when it emits a very large and lucid rail.
It therefore, under a lefs apparent diameter, it refle&s
more light, it muft be much more illuminated by rhe
Sun, and therefore much nearer to it. And the fame
argument will bring down the heads of Comets fome-
times within the orb of Venus, viz,, when being Jhid
under the Sun's rays, they emit fuch huge and fplendid
^ v
r
v
tails, like beams or fire, as fometimes they do. For if
all that lighl was fuppofed to be gathered together into
!>
u*t-*4*' one Star, it would fometimes exceed not one Venus only,
but a great many fuch united into one,
ûUvvtA*fci2%> the fame thing is infer'd from the light of
. the heads, which increafes in the recefs of the Comets
fromtKe Earth towards the Sun; anddecreafes in their
return from the Sun towards the Earth. For fo the
Comet of the year 1665 (by the obfervations of Hc-
velius) from the time that it was firft fcen, was always
, V. .
lofing of its apparent motion, and therefore had jalread y > y
|
\ but yet the fplendor of its head was

paflcd its perigee ;
\* t,{\fik&*»<Wly increafing, till being Jiid under the Sun's rays,

the Comet ceas'd to appear. 'The Comet of the year
1683 (by the obfervations of the fame Heveiius) about
the end of July, when it firft appeared, moved at a
very flow rate, advancing only about 40 or 45 minutes
in its orb in a day's time. But from that time its di-
urnal motion was continually upon the increafe, till
Ûw C^ September 4, when it arofe to about 5

degrees. And
therefore in all this interval of time, the Comet was
approaching to the Earth. Which is likewife proved
from the diameter of its head, meafured with a micro-
meter. For Augufl 6. Hcvelitts found it only 6'. 05"'
including the coma, which Sept. 2. he obferved to be
» "
5> P7 •
Digitized by Google
Book III. ,
of Natural Thilofophy. 329
5/.07". and therefore its head appeared far lefs about the
beginning, than towards the end of the motion :tho* about ^ w .
the beginning, becaufe nearer to the Sun, it appeared

far more lucid than towards the end, as the fame He-
velius declares. Wherefore in all this interval of time,
on account of from the Sun, it decreas'd in
its recefs
fplendor, notwithfta nding its accefs towards the Earth.^ yo,* (
The Comet of the year \6\ 8 about the middle of De-

cember and that of the year 1680, about the end of
the fame month, did both move with their greateft ve-
locity, and were therefore then in their perigees. But
the greateft fplendor of their heads was leen two weeks
before, when they had juft got clear of the Sun's rays;
and the greateft fplendor of their taijs^ a little more cota^
early, when yet nearer to the Sun. TheJhêad of the^^-râvfe
Tormer ComeMfaccording to the obfervatibns" *oT Cjfa-
tus) December 1. appeared greater than the Stars of the
magnitude, and December 16. (then in the perigee)
firft
was but little diminilhed in magnitude, but in the.

it
fplendor and îghtnefs of its light, a great dea^ Ja- (^(t^f^

nuary 7, Kepler being .uncertain about the ^^Jcft_off e«^<W •>
obferving. December^!? xht head of the tettel^Comet

was feen and obferv'd by Mr. Flamftead^ when but 9 î^" c ^t<.
degrees diftant from the Sim ; which is fcarcely to be
done in a Star of the third magnitude. December 1 j
and 17. it appeared as a Star of the third magnitude,
its luftre being diminiftied by the brightnefs of the
^ clouds near the jetting Sun. December 16. when it mov'd

iA
t
wTtrTthe greateft velocity, being almoft in its, perigee,

* c ^
it was lefs than the mouth of Pegafus y a Star of the
third magnitude. 3 it appeared as a Star of the

.
fourth. Jan. 9. asone of the fifth. Jan. 1 3. it was hidr^^^

by the fplendor of the Moon then in her increafe. Ja- fti tfl*-<
nuary 25. it was fcarcely equal to the Stars of the femi J
venth magnitude. If we compare equal intervals of
time, on one fide and on the other, from the perigee,
we ftall find that the head of the Comet, which at
Digitized by Google
3 30 Mathematical Principles BookHI,
bothintervals of time, was far, but tyet; equally, re-
/ ,i mov'd from the Earth, and (hould have therefore ftione
• /Ljf^h equal fplendor, appear'd brightgft on the fide of
U v
**gfc p er igee towards the Sun

and difcppeared on the ;
other. great difference of light

Therefore from the
in the one fituation and in the other, we conclude the great
vicinity of the Sun and Comet in the former. For the
r pCflight of Comets ufes to be regular, and to appear
- < i«*L
w ^ en ^1^^ f5^W move ftêft, and are therefore
i n their perigees /excepting in ToTar as it isincreafedby
»•
f
their nearnefs to the Sun.
Jz i\ Cor. i. Therefore the Comets Jhine by the Sun's
light, which they reflcd.
Cor. 2. From what has been faid, we may likewife
fi
underftand, why Comets are fo frequently feen in that
V
;V
hemifphere in which the Sun is, and fo feldom in the
^
.^fevuM ^
otner . if t hey were vifible in the regions' far above
Saturn, they would appear more frequently in the parts
oppofite to the Sun. For fuch as were in thofe parts
^
would be nearer to the Earth, whereas the prefence of
7 **the Sun muft obfeure and hide thofe that appear
AN VV
? t in the hemifphere in which taîs. Yet looking over
* nchiftory of Comets, I finer that four or~rTve times
x
more have been feen in the hemifphere towards the Sun,

than in the oppofite hemifphere ; befides, without doubt,
y
not a few, which have been hid by the light of the
,
Sun. (¥ox Comets defcending into our parts neith er

emit tails nor are fo well illuminated by the Sun as to
f r
^J^difcover themfelves to our/nakedeyes,) until they are
^ ^ comc nearer to us t îan J u piwr7 But the far greater
i M 11 l i' xI
part of that fpherical fpace, which is defcribM about
'
,*K the Sun with fo fmall an interval, lies on that fide of

s
the Earth which regards the Sun; and the Comets in
that greater part are commonly more flrongly il-
luminated, as being for the moft part nearer to the

*
4w
CoR.
Digitized by Google
Book III. of Natural Thilofophy. 33c
Cor. Hence alfo it is evident, that the celeftial
3.
fpaces are void of refiftance.
are carried in oblique pat hs;
For though the Comets ^Û(
and fome times contrary tota/M.wn

'
the courfe of the Planets, yet they moveCeverxway^ .
with the greateft freedom, and preferve their motions/./' I \'

K
for an exceeding long time, even where contrary to the
^^JU.
courfe of the Planets. I am out in my judgment, if Lvv
^ ^^
they are not a fort of Planets, revolving in orbits return-
ing into themfelves with a perpetual motion. For as
to what fomew^rfrors contend, that they are no other ^mm'
than mcteors/'fea into tEisôpinion by the perpetual ^v*tC*i
changes that happen to their heads, it feems to have f\ vft t*-
no foundation. For the heads of Comets are encom- uiauM^
j>afTedwith huge atmofpheres, and the lowermoff parti ^ /^^*-t
of thefe atmofpGeres muft be the denfeft. And there-
fore it is in the clouds only, not in the bodies of rhe<\vwtx^
Comets themfelves, that thefe changes are feen. Thus
the Earth, if it was vjew'd from the Planets, would, />\wV»*l*-
without all doubt, Jhine By the light of its clouds, and &{ti*V
the folid body would fcarcely appear through the fur-
rounding clouds. Thus alfo the J>elts of Jupiter are ^V-****-'
form'd in the clouds of that Planet, for they change
their pofition one to another, and the folid body of ,
1
Jupiter is hardly to be feen through them. And much^**/" ,
more muft the bodies of Comets be hid under their * I
atmofpheres, which are both deeper an? Thicken
PROPO'
Digitized by Google
3 3 z Mathematical principles Book III.
Proposition XL. Theorem XX.

That the Comets move in fome of the conic
fcftions, having their foci in the center of the
Sun 5 and by radij drawn to the Sun defcribe
areas proportional to the times.
This proportion appears from cor. i prop, i j book

. . i.
compared with prop. 8. tz* and 15. book 5.
Cor. i. Hence if Comets are revolv'd in orbits re-

turning into themfelves, thofe orbits will be ellipfes;
and their periodic times be to the periodic times of the
Planets in the fefquiplicate proportion of their prin-
cipal axes. And therefore the Comets, which for the
mod part of their courfe are higher than the Planets,
and upon that account defcribe orbits with greater axes,
will require a longer time to finifti their revolutions.
Thus if the axe of a Comet's orbit was four times
greater than the axe of the orbit of Saturn, the time
of the revolution of the Comet would be to the time
of the revolution of Saturn, that is, to 30 years, as
4 *J 4 (or 8) to 1, and would therefore be 240 years.
Cor. 2. But their orbits will be lb near to para-
. bolas, that parabolas may be us'd for them without
I
t . ,
Jenhblc error.
Cor. 3. And therefore by cor. 7. prop. 16. book 1.
the velocity of every Comet will always be to the ve-
locity of any Planet, fuppos'd to
be revolv'd at the
fame diftance about the Sun, nearly in the
in a circle
fubduplicate proportion of double the diftance of the
Planet from the centre of the Sun, to the diftance of
the Comet from the Sun's centre very nearly. Let us
fuppofe the radius of the orbis magnus, or the greateft
femidtameter of the ellipfe which the Earth defcribes,
to
Digitized by Google
K }
Book IVL of Natural Thilofophy. 3 3
to confift of 100000000 parts ; and then the Earth

by mean diurnal motion will defcribe 1720211 of
its
thofe parts, and7 1675 £ by its horary motion. And

therefore the Comet, at the fame mean diftance of the
Earth from the Sun, with a velocity which is to the
velocity of the Earth as *J 2 to 1, would by its diur-
nal motion defcribe 2432747 parts, and 101364* parts
by horary motion.
its But at greater or lefs diftances
both the diurnal and horary motion will be to this di-
urnal and horary motion in the reciprocal fubdu-
plicate proportion of the diftances, and is therefore
given.
Cor. Wherefore, if the latus reftum of the pa-
4.
rabola quadruple of the radius of the orbit magnus,
is
and the fquare of that radius is fuppos'd to confitt of

100000000 parts : the area which the Comet will
daily defcribe by a radius drawn to the Sun will be
12x63737 parts; and the horary area will be 50682*
parts.But if the latus reflum is greater or lefs in any
proportion, the diurnal and horary area will be lefs or
greater, in the fubduplicate of the fame proportion re-
ciprocally.
Lemma V.
To find a curve line of the parabolic kind>^ Q
1
which fhall pafs through any given number of
points. PI. 15. Fig. 3.
.
Let thofe points be j4,B,Cy D,E y Fj Sec. and from

the fame to any right line H
N» given in pofition, let
fall as many perpendiculars A H, B /, CK DL
7 9 EAf,
FN, &c.
Cafe 1. If Hf> I 9 K L, 8cc. the intervals of the

points H I,K, L, M> N, &c.
} are equal, take b, 1 b, 3 b9
4^1
Digitized by
5^9 &c. the fir ft differences of the perpendiculars
AH, BI, CK, &c. their fecond differences c, zc,

cy 4;, &c. their third, d> id, xd> Sec. that is to
y fo as AH—BI may be=*, BI—CK= zb,
CK—DL=ib, D L-\- EM=/{ —E M-\- FN=
f
by
5 by 8cc. then i— 2*=r£, &c. and

on to the laft dif- fo
ference, which is here/. Then ere&ing any perpen-
dicular R S , which may be con fide red as an ordinate of
the curve required; in order to find the length of this
ordinate, fuppofe the intervals HJy IKy KL, LM,
&c. to be units, and let AH=dy HS=p> *p in- —
to IS=1, into -\-SK=zr, $ r into fx
into -j- SMznt ; proceeding, to wit, to the laft MEy
perpendicular but one, and prefixing negative figns be-
r fore the terms HSy IS, &c. which jye from S to-
^' wards A; and affirmative figns before tKe terms SK$
S L, &c. which lie on the other fide of the point S. And
obferving well the figns, RS will be=z*-[-b[>-\-c q -|-
Jr-{-es-\~ft,-\- &c.
Cafe 2. But if HI, IKy &€• the intervals of the
points H, Iy Ky Lt dec. are unequal, take bt zby 3 4 by
5 by dec. the firft differences ot the perpendiculars AH%
BI, CKy &c. divided by the intervals between thofe
perpendiculars ; c9 z cy } c, 4 c, dec. their fecond dif-
ferences divided by the intervals between every two;
dy zdy^ dy dec. their third differences, divided by the
futl <V interval between every three; z e y dec. their fourth

differences, divided by the intervals between everyTour;
lu«.\i - an<^ fo forth ; that is, in fuch manner, that b may be=
CK—D L
.
AH—BI lb=
BI—CK _
-~Hl—> —7K-^ b = —KL~> &C '
then c=
b
-— zb zb— lb
zc= —— , y= —
zb—4b m
tec
C ZC
then d= - zd= *
&c. And thofe dif-
Jti L / A2
ferences being found, let AH be— 4, — HS=p 9
f into
Digitized by Google
Book III. of Natural Thilofophy. j } s
f into— IS=<j, q into -}- SK = r> r into -|~ S
s into -\-SMznt; proceeding, to wit, to ME, the
laft 'perpendicular but one; and the ordinate RS will
Cor. Hence the areas of all curves may be nearly

found. For if fome number of points of the curve to
be fquar'd are found, and a parabola be fuppos'd to be
drawn through thofe points ; the area of this parabola
will be nearly the fame with the area of the curvilinear
figure propos'd to be fquar'd. But the parabola can
be always fquar'd geometrically by methods vulgarly
known.
Lemma VI.
Certain obferved places of a Comet being gi-

ven, to find theplace of the fame to any interme-
diate given time.
Let HI, IK, KL, LM

(in the preceding Fig.
reprefent the times between the obfervations
; IB, HA,
KC y LD, ME,fiveobferv'd longitudes of the Co-
met, and HS the given time between the firft obfer-
vation and the longitude required. Then if a regular
curve AB CD E fuppos'd to be drawn through the
is
points A,B, C,D, E, and the ordinate RS is found

out
by the preceding lemma, RS
will be the longitude re-
quired.
After the fame method, from five obferv'd latitudes
we may find the latitude to a given time.
If the differences of the obferved longitudes
are fmalJ,
fuppofe of 4 or 5 degrees, three or four obfervations
will
be fufficient to find a new longitude and latitude.
But
if the differences are greater, as of 10 or
;o degrees,
five obfervations rough; to be ufed.
LEMMA
Digitized by Google
Mathematical Principles Book III.
33 <S
Lemma VII.
Through a given point P, (PI. is- Fig- 4-)

to draw a right line
B C, whofe parts P B, P C,
cut off by two right lines A B, AC, given in
may be, one to the other, in a given

pofition,
proportion.
the given point P, fuppofe any

right line
From
right given as
D
p to be drawn to either of the lines
AC
the other
fame towards
AB, and produce the
given right line, as far as E, fo as
PE
may be to PD
in the given proportion. Let E C be parallel to D. A
Draw CPB, and PC
will be to PB, as PE
to PD.
. £. Ft
Lemma VM.
Let ABC (PL t6. Pig- i ) be a paraboh,
A C btfetlti
having its focus in S. By the chord
fegment ABC
whofe 4* I
H
AH ,
.
0 in l/cutoffjthe
meter~irip, and vertex In If* produced
Join OS,
take u O
equal to one half of 1^.
W
/r«&« if to |,
2 SO.
<aJ S
I may
Now, fuppofing a Comet to
>be equal to
revolve
the arc CBA, draw | B, cutting AC in h

. .
I fay, the point E will ûtoff)from the chord
A****** pic the fegment A E, neadyproporttonal to the
time.
arc ABC
For, if we join£0, cutting the parabolic
in r. and draw f* X
touching the fame arc in the «P
tex fH and meeting inEO the X

curvilinear area
Digitized by GoogI
Digitized by Google
Digitized by
a
«
Book III of Natural Thilofophy. 337

AEX pA will be to the curvilinear area ACYfxA 9
A E to A C.
as And therefore fince the triangle
AS E is ASC in the fame proportion,
to the triangle
the whole area ASEXuA will be to the whole area
ASCfyA, 2sAE to AC. But becaufe £0 is to
SO as j to 1, and EO to XO in the fame proportion,
SX will be parallel to EB: and therefore joining BX %
the triangle SEB will be equal to the triangle XEB.
Wherefore if to the area ASEXuA we add the tri-
angle EX By and from the fum fubdud the triangle
SEBy there will remain the area ASBXpA equal to
the area ASEXpA, and therefore in proportion to
the area A S CYpA as AE to AC. But the area
ASBYpA is nearly equal to the area ASBXpA,
and this area ASBTpA is to the area ASCfyA.
as the time of description of the arc AB to the time
of defcription of the whole arc AC. And therefore
AE is to AC nearly in the proportion of the times.
OE.D.
^Cor. When the point B falls upon the vertex p
of the parabola, AE is to AC accurately in the pro^
portion of the times.
Scholium.
If we join ju| cutting AC in <T, and in it take |»
in proportion to pBy as ijMI to \6Mp> and draw
Bn : tnis Bn will cut the chord A C in the proportion
of more accurately than before.
the times, But the , r
point n is to be taken .b^qnd, or on this fide the poi*t v\k UA ^

according as the point B is more or lefs diftant from
the principal vertex of the parabola than the point
Z Lb mm
Digitized by Google
«
338 Mathematical Trinciples Book HI.
Lemma IX.
The right lines Ip and p M and the length

A IC are equal among themfelves.
v For 4 S p is the latus re&um of the parabola belon g"

******* fog to the vertex ju.
Lemma X.
vv*U« ari Produce

:
toNand P, (PL 1 6". Fig. i.) fo as
* tnayêône third of pl y and SP may be to SN
as S N
to Sp: and in the time that a Comet
would defcribe the arc A^C, if it was fuppos'd to
u k'v ,s« \ c iwitf always forwards with the velocity which it

'
x hath in a 'heigfiTTqual to S P, it would defcrtbe
" " * a length equaTfo the chord AC
For if the Comet with the velocity, which it hath
in ju, was in the faid time fuppos'd to move uniformly
forwards in the right line which touches the parabola
in /x; the areawnich it would defcribe by a radius
drawn to the point S$ would be equal to the parabolic
area ACSpA. And therefore the fpace contained
under the length defcrib'd in the tangent and the length
Sp, would be to the fpace contained under the lengths
AC and SM> as the area ASCuA to the triangle
ASC, that is, as SN
to SM. Wherefore is to AC
the length defcrib'd in the tangent, as S p to SN. But
fince the velocity of the Comet in the height SP (by
cor, 6* prop. 16. book I.) » to the velocity of the
Digitized by Googl
fame in the height S/x 9 in the reciprocal fubduplicate
proportion of SP to s u> that is, in the proportion of
S^ to SN; the length defcrib'd with this velocity
will be to the length in the fame time defcrib'd in the
tangent, as S p to SJW. Wherefore iince AC, and the
length defcrib'd with this new velocity, are in the fame
proportion to the length defcrib'd in the tangent, they
muft be equal betwixt themfelves. £K E. D.
Cor. Therefore a Comer, with that velocity which
it hath in the height Sp -|~f /p, would, in the fame
time, defcribe the chord A
C nearly.
Lemma
1
XL
if » »
If a of) all motifn was let fall ***va<tc

Comt {void
from the height S N, or S f I +
towards the ^
Sun; and wasJlill impel? d to the Sun by the fame ^
force, uniformly continued, by which it was im-
pelled at fame in one half of that time
firft ; the
in which it might defcribe the arc AC in its own p.*y '
orbit\ would in defcendmg^ defcribe a fpace equal

to the length I p.
For in the fame time that the Comet would require * ,lv ^ *
to defcribe the parabolic arc AC, it wouIcTfBy the lajl
lemma) with that velocity which it hath in the height

SP 9 defcribe the chord AC; and therefore (by cor. j.
prop. 16. book 1.) if ic was in the fame time fuppos'd
to revolve by the force of its own gravity, in a circle
whofe femidiameter was SP, it would defcribe an arc
of that circle, the length of which would be to the
chord of the parabolic arc A
C, in the fubduplicate
proportion of 1 to 2. Wherefore if with that weight,
which in the height S P it hath towards the Sun, it
ihould fall from tfiat height towards the Sun, it would
Zz (by
Digitized by Google
jâ Mathematical Trintiples Book III.
(by cor. 9. prop. 4, book 1.) in half the faid tiftve

defcribe a fpace equal to the fquare of half the faid chord
apply'd to quadruple the height S P, that is, it would
defcribe the fpace —

^SP
But fince the weight of the
Comet towards the Sun in the height S N, is ro the

weight of the fame towards the Sun in the height SP*
as SP to S fAi the Comer, by the weight which it
X^ 0 hath in the height S AT, in falling from that height to-
wards the Sun, would in the fame time defcribe the
fpace —— , that is, a fpace equal to the length I u or
Proposition XLI. Problem XXL

From three obfer vat ions given to determine the
orbit of a Comet moving in a parabola.
J
This being a problem of very great difficulty, I
y many methods of refolving it ; and feveral of thofe pro-
V cn fimple.
. , v .
t\ Seleft three obfervattons diftant one from another by
v 1
J intervals of time nearly equal. But let that interval of

. a time in which the Comet moves morejlowly, bejome;
^^^^^Hbtt grca'tcr than the other; fo, to witTttot the dif-
ference of the times may be to the fum of the times,
as the fum of the times to about 600 days j or that
the point 16 Fig. u) may fall upon M
nearly,
Vf
f* -t>o.»f»nd may .err therefrom, rather towards /than towards
•xi / \A. If fuch dtrcft obfervatloW arc not at hand, a new
place of the Comet muft be found by lem. 6.
Book III of Natural Thilofophy. .
341
Let J (TV. 16. Fig. i.) reprefent the Sun; 7*,/, r, three
places of the Earth in the orbis magnus; TA, t B, tC,
three obferv'd longitudes of the Comet; the time V
between the firft obfervation and the fecond; the time
between the fecond and the third ; X
the length, which,
in the whole time, f-yW* the Comet might defcribe
with that velocity which it hath in the mean diftance
of the Earth from the Sun : which length is to be found
by cor. 3. prop. 40. book j. and tV a perpendicular
upon the chord Tr. In the mânobferved longitude tB,
take at pkafure the point B, for the place of the Comec <^ j\tacn
in the plane of' the ecliptic; and from thence towards JU-A Jii
the Sun S$ draw the line BE, which may be to the
perpendicular / V, as the content under SB and St* to /<rv t ^ A/*
^
the Cube of the hypotenuTe oiFthe right angl'd triangleJ^^cUcA
whofe fides are SB arid the tangent of the latitude of
the Corner ia the fecond obfervation to the radius t B.
And through the point £, (by lemma 7.) draw the
right line A EC, whofe parts AE
and E C> terminat-
ing in the tight lines TAand ?C
may be, one to the
other, as the times V
tfxk JVi then and C will beA
nearly the places of the Comet in the plane of the e-
cliptic in the firft and third observations, if B was its
place rightly afTum'd in chef fecond.
Upon A C, bifefted in /, ereft the perpendicular It.
Through B draw the obfeure line B i parallel to A C.
Join the obfcure line Si, cutting AC in a, and corn-
pleat the parallelogram i/tyc. Take /<r equal to 3 /a,
and through the Sun S, draw the obfeure line <r £ equal
to 3 St -|- j / a. Then, cancelling the letters A, E, C, /,
from the point B towards the point £, draw the new
obfeure line BE, which may be to the former B E
in the duplicate proportion of the diftance B S to
the quantity S p -|- f i a. And
through the point
E, draw again the right AEC
by the fame rule
line
as befone, that is, fo as its parts and EC may AE
be one to the other as the times and W* between V
Z 5 tht
Digitized by Google
34z Mathematical Principles Book III.
the obfervations. Thus A

and C will be the places of
the Comet more accurately.
AC
Upon y bifeSed in /, ereft the perpendiculars
AM, CN, JOy of which AMznd CN may be the
tangents of the latitudes Ml the firft and third obferva-
tions, to the radij TA and rC. Join MNy cutting
10 in O. Draw the re&angular parallelogram if A ^
as before. In I A produe'd, take ID equal to S{x-\~* $ a.
Then in MNy towards TV, take MP, which may be
to the above found length X> in the fubdfiplicate pro-
portion of the mean diftance of the Earth from the Sun
(or of the femidiameter of the orbis ntagnus) to the di-
ftance OD. If the point P fall upon the point N;
A, By and C will be three places of the Comet, through
which its orbit is to be defcrib'd in the plane of the
ecliptic. But if the point P falls notjipon the point
N; in the right line AC take CG equal to NP, fo
as the points G and P may lie on the fame fide of the
line NC.
By the fame method, as the points E 9 Ay C, G,
were found from the aflam'd point B , from other
points b and j3 aflum'd at pleafure, find out the new
points e y a, c f g; and €, a, *, y. Then through Gy gy
and y, draw the circumference of a circle G g y, cut-
ting the right line rC in Z: and Z will be one place
of the Comet in the plane of the elliptic. And in AC,
«Cy ax, taking AF, *f, *<p equal refpedtively to
CG,
eg, Ky; through the points i7,/, and <p, draw the cir-
cumference of a circle Ff <p, cutting the right line AT
in X; and the point X
will be another place of the Co-
met in the plane of the ecliptic. And at the points X
and Z, erefting the tangents of the latitudes of the
Comet to the radij TX, and tZ, two places of the
Comet in its own orbit will be determin'd. Laftl£»
if (by prop. ip. book i.) to the focus Sy a paraEoIais
defcrib'd pafling through thofe two places, this para-
bola will be the orbit of the Comet. 0. E. I.
The
«
Digitized by Googli
j

The demonftration of this conftruftion follows from
the preceding lemmas : becaufe the right line AC
is cut in E of the times by lem. 7,
in the proportion
as it ought to be by lem. 8 and BE, by lem. ti, is
:
a portion of the right line B S or B £ in the plane of

the ecliptic, intercepted between the zxcABC and the
chord AEC; and MP, (by cor. km. 10.) is the length
of the chord of that arc, which the Comet rttould de-
fcnbe in its proper orbit between the firft and third ob-
fervation, and therefore is equal to providing>g MN, 7
is a true place of the Comet in the plane of the ecliptic.
But it will be convenient to aflume the points B,b, /3,
not at random, but nearly true. If the angle AOt, sl^zW
at which tfie projection of the orbit in the plane of the
ecliptic cuts the right line t B, is rudejy known; it^v\U«^
that angle with B t draw the obfcure line AC y which
may be to f TV in the fubduplicate proportion of SO
to St. And drawing the right line S E fo as its part
EB may be equal to the length Vt^ the point B will
be determin'd which we are to ufe for the firft time.
Then cancelling the right line AC,
and drawing a new
AC according to the preceding conftru&ion, and more-3c<£t w<^\
jover, finding the length MP;
in t B take the poinTj£
T
by this rule, that if A, and tC interfeft each other
in r, the diftance Tb may be to the diftance TB in a
proportion compounded of the proportion of to MP
MN and the fubduplicate proportion of S B to Sb.
And by the fame method you may find the third point
)3, if you pkafe to repeat the operation the third rifne^Tr,c\V*w.~l
But if this method is follow'd, two operations gene- ^
rally will be fufficient. For if the diftance Bb happens

to be very fmall ; after the points /, and G9 g$ arc
found, draw the right lines Ff and Gg, and they will
cut TAand t C in the points requir'd Xand Z.
L 4 a.
Exampli.
Digitized by Google
j 44 Mathematical Principles Book III
Example.
Let the Comet of the year 1680 be proposed. The
following table fiiews the motion thereof, as obferv'd
by Flamjhady and calculated afterwards by hirmfrom
his oblervations, and corri&ecTby Dr Haliej from the
r
ame obfervations.
Ti me Sun's Comet's
I
Appar. Truc7 Longitude Longitude. Lit. N.
1680 Dec.12 4.46 4.46. o VS , 2 3 V5 6.32.30

i-5 - 828. o
21 6.327 6.36.59 11.06.44 s? 5.08.12 2142. 13
24 6.12 6.17.52 14.09.26 18.49.23 25.23. 5
26 5'4 5.20.44 16.09.22 28.24.13 27.00.52
29 7-55 8.03.02 19.19.43 Xi3-i<Mi 28.09.58
30 8.02 8.10.26 20.21.09 17.38.20 28.1 1.53
1681 7*//. 5 5-5« 6.01.38 26.22.18 f 8.48.53 26.15. 7
9 6.49 7.00.53 0.29.02 18.44.04 24.1156
10 6.06.10 1.27.43 23.43.52 20.40.50
13 7.08.55 4/33.20 25,59.48 22.17.28
25 7-44 7.58.42 Q 9.35. O 17.56.30
16.45 3 6
30 8.07 8.21.53 21.49.58 I3.i9.5i 16.42.18
Feb. 2 6. 20 6.34.51 24.46.59 1 5 *3 53 16.04. 1
7-Q4-4 1 27.49.51 16.59.06
5 ±5SL jiff: 31
To thefe you may add fome obfervations of mine.
Ap. I
omets
I
Time. 1
Longitude. Lat.North.
o
• #
16S 1 Feb. 25 8 30. tf26. 18 .35 46 46 I 2 .

.
27 8. 15 27 •
04 20 22 36 12
.
.
.
Mar. 1 11. o 27 .
52 .42 12 •
23 40
.
2 8. o . 28 - I 2 .
48 12 . P9 38
.
5 11 .30 29 . 18 . O 1 2 03 1 . .
7 9.30 XL c . 4 . . o 11.57- o
9 8.30 Q-43- 4 1 1.45-52
Thefe obfervations were made by a telefcope of 7

feet, with a micrometer and threads plac'd in the focus
Digitized by Google
of the telefcope ; by which inftruments we
determin'd
the pofitions both of the fixt Stars among themfelves t> wt/^
and of the Comet in refpeft of the" fixt Stars. Let
A (PL ij.) reprefent the Star of the fourth mag- ,
nitude in thej&t heel of Perfeus y (Bayers o) B the v^t^t^

following Star of tKe~thind magnitude in the left foot
(Bayers 0 C a Star of the fixth magnitude (Bayer's n) V* K
in the heel of the fame foot, and D, E, F, G> H
9 /, tvWf*/^
L 7 BZ^N* O y Z, 0, y, <f, other fmaller Stars in
the fame foot. And let />, />, O, R, S, 9 TK
X> re-
prefent the places of the Comet in the observations
above let down ; and r eckonin g the diftance AB
of f^^V
80,* parts, AC
was 52^ of thofe parts, BC, 58I ; "^f*
jtD, 57^ 5 B A
82 A ; CD, 2j| ; AE, i 9 f;
CE, 57^ ; DE, A9 ±5; AI, z 7l\ ; BI, 52J ; C/,
35^ ; Dly 55A ;AK,tf*; £ K, ^;CK
9 jif;
FK,z 9 ; FB,z iy FC, 7,6^1 AH, i2f ; DH,^;
BN^6^; CN, 3 if > B L, 45 t* ; A^L, 3 1 f . i/O
was to /f/ as 7 to tf, and produc'd did pafs be-
tween the Stars D and £, fo as the diftance of the Star
D from this right line was £ CD. L M
was to L N
as 2 to 5>> and produc'd did pafs through the Star H.
Thus were the pofitions of the fixt Stars determin'd
in refpcft of ope another.
Mr, Pound has fince obferved a fecond time the pofi-
tions of thefe fixed Stars amongft themfelves, and col-
letfed their longitudes and latitudes according to the
following table. •
•
• *
The
Digitized by Google
34<* Mathematical Principles Book III.
X AC
Their Latitude Latitude
nxea |
Longitudes. North. Lon 8 ltttdc3 - North.

Mars. Stars. j
o '
" Q / /•
A
/i c 20.41 '5° 12. 0.30 L Z9-33-34 12. 7.48
15 28.40.23 1 1. 17. 54 M 29.18.54 12. 7.20
r>
27.58.30 1 2.40.25 N 28.4^.29 12.31. 9
E in
•-
1 T
*-/*•/ 12.52. 7 Z 29.44.48 II- 57.13
F 28.28.37 1 1.52.22 M 29.52. 3 U.55.48
G 26.56. 8 12. 4.58 H 0. 8. 23 I I .43.56
H 27.11.45 12. 2. 1 y 0.40.10 I I. 55- 18
I 27.25. 2 11-53. u 1. 3.20 I I -30.42
K 27.42. 7 11.53.26 J j
The
pofitionsof the Comet to thefe nVd Scars were
obferv'd to be as follows.
r ki' n \ Friday , ftfc 25. O. S. at %*\ P. M. the difhnce of
the Comet
p from the Star £, was lefs than \ AE,
in }
and greater than ÂE, and therefore nearly equal to

?+AE ; and the angle ApE was a little obtufe, but
almoft right. For from A
y letting fall a perpendicu-
lar on pE, the diftance of the Comet from that perpen-

dicular was jpE.
The fame eight at 5>| h , the diftance of the Comet
in P from the Star £, was greater than ~ AE } and
4*
lefs than —- AE* and therefore nearly equal to ~
f>f or £9 AE. But the diftance of the Comet
from the perpendicular let fall from the Star upon A
the right line P £, was f/>£.
-vv r JSfl^yj
h
*7 8 4 p - * thc diftanceof the Co- M
met in O, from the Star O, was equal to the diftance
of the Stars O and H; and the right line pro- QO
duced pafs'd between the Stars JTand B. I could not,
by reafon of intervening clouds, determine the poiiti-
v.*\»»«^
on 0 f t jj C 5 tar t0 g reatcr accuracy.
Tucfday, ^refc 1. h
n
P.M. the Comet in R> .
-U lay exactly in a line between the Stars iTandC, fo as

the
Digitized by Google
Book HI. of Natural Thilofophyl 347
the part CR of the right line CRK, was a little greater
than \CK and a little lefs than K -\- \CR, and
therefore = f CiC-j- ?6 CR, or ^fCAT. \
Wedncfday, March 2. 8 h . P. M
the diftance of «n*i//co^
the Comet in £ from the Star C, was nearly fFC;
the diftance of the Star F from the right line C S pro-
duced was &FC ; and the diftance of the Star B from
the fame right line was five tinges greater than the di- ^- <<>
fiance of the Star F. And the right line NS pro-
duct pafs'd between the Stars H and /, five or fix
times nearer to the Star H than to the Star /.
Saturday, March 5. u£ h P. M. when the Comet j v)v^lo
was~TrT77 the right-line MT was equal to \ML>
and the right-line LT'produc'd pafs'd between B and F,
four or five times nearer to F than to ^cutting off from
BFz fifth orfixth part thereof towards F : and MTpro- V^**'-
due'd pafs'd on the (outfide of the fpace BF, towards ^fcVKrV
the Star 2? 5 four times nearer to the Star B than to
the Star F. Mwas a very fmall Star fcarcely to be feen
by but the Star L was greater, and of
the telefcope, .
about the eighth magnitude. tnjoô-^

Monday \March 7. o| P. M. The Comet being n
in^ the right line V* produced did pafs between B

and F, cutting off, from B F towards of B F3
and was to the right line at 5 to 4. And the
diftance of the Comet from the right line */3 wa*
Wednefday, March o. 8* b P. M. the Comet being

in X^ the right line y X was equal to \ y and the
perpendicular let fall from the Star ^ upon the right
y X was f of y &
n
The fame njght at h , the Comet being in y the Y
right line y7*was equal to f of y <T, or a lirrle lefs, as
perhaps *6 of y^
and a perpendicular let fall from |7>y
tfieStar <T on the right line yT
was equal to a-
bout \ or f y }. But the Comet being then extremely
near the horizon was fcarcely difcernable, and therefore
x its
Digitized by Google
54 8 Mathematical Principles Book III.
its place colild not be determined with that certainty a?

4^*° the £2!£££^S obfervations.
tc. Li
From tHHeôbfervations, by conftru&ions of figures
and calculations, deduced the longitudes and latitudes
I
of the Comet : and Mr. Pound by correcting the pla-
ces of the fixed Stars hath determined more corre&ljr
the places of the Comet, which corred places are fet
down above. /Though my micrometer was jpj£ of
v
"Y*^ the Jbejl, yet the Errors in longitude and latitude ("as
^Jj^*/* derived from my obfervaf ionsj fcarcely exceed one
minute. The Comet (according to my obfervations^
about the end of its motion* began to decline fenfibly
yu*o towards the north, from the parallel which it defcrib'd
about the end of February. y
Now in order to determine the orbit of the Co-

met out of the obfervations above defcrib'd ; I fe-
leded thofe three which Fltmjhad made, Dec. zi. Ja*.
5. and Jan. 25. From which I founder of 2841,1
parts, and Vt of 455, fuch as the feniidiameter of the
crbis magma contains 10000. Then for the fii ft ob-
fervation, afluming/5 of 5657 of thofe parts, I found
SB 9747, BE for the firft time 412, 5>o5o$, ih
41$, B E for the fecond time 421, O D 1018^
8528,4 ; PMSÔy MNfLw* NPzy From
whence, by the fecond operation, I collected the diftance
tb 5640. And by this operation, I at laft deduced
the diftances TX4775 and tZ 11322. From which
limiting the orbit, I found its descending node in S>
and afcending node in VS i<> j-j'; the inclination of
its plane to the plane of the ecltpridk 51°. 2o'f ; the
vertex thereof (or the perihelion of the Comet) di-
ftant from the Node 8°. 58', and in 27 0 4^, ^ .
with latitude 7 0 34' fourh ; its Utm rettum 236,8 ;

M
\ j .
and the diurnal 3rea defcrib'd by a radius drawn to thf

Sun 93585* fttppofing the fquare of the femidiame-
ter of the orbh magnus, icooooooo ; that the Comet
in this oi1>it mov'd direftly according to the order of
3 the
Digitized by Google
ok III. of Natural Thilofophy. 34^
figns, and on Dec. 8 d . oo h . 04 P. M. was in the
vertex or perihelion of its orbir. All which I deter-
min'd by and compafs, and the chords of an-
fcale
gles, taken from the table of natural fines, in a pretty &*.>f m**i K
large figure, in which, to wit, the radius of the~JrJri
mttgnas (confiding of 10000 parts,) was equal to \6\
inches of an Englijh Foot.
Laftly^ in order to difcover whether the Comet did fv^*£^«>vA
truly move in the orbit fo deterrrim'd, I inveftigated
its places in this orbit partly by arithmetical operations,
and partly by fcale and compafs, to the times of fome
of the obfervations, as may be feen in the following
table.
The Cornet's
Dift. Latitud.
Longitude Longitud. Latitude Dif. Dir.
from compu-
computed. obferv'd. obfervM. Lo. Lat.
Sun. ted.
Dec. 12 2792 VS 6\ 32' VS 6°.

3 i' 8°. 26 H- 7*
29 84.03 K 1 3 1 3 28. 00 Ki3-
*
»i 28 10 r, — 10A
0 00 +0
— +
Febr. 5 16669 »7 • »5- 29; tfi6. 59: 15 .27 2
t
War. 5 2*737 29 . 19* 12. 4 29. 20? 12 3i .
But afterwards Dr. HaBej did determine the orbit

to a greater accuracy by an arithmetical calculus, than
could be done by linear defcriptions ; and retaining
the place of the nodes in and i° 5$', and the ® W
inclination of the plane of the orbit to the ecliptic
6i° io\'i as well as the time of the Comets being in
perihelio, Dec. 8 a . 00. 04 : he found the diftance of
the perihelion from the afcending node meafur'd in
the Comet's orbit o°. 20', and the latm rt&ut* of the
parabola 2430 parts, fuppofing the mean diftance of
the Sun from the Earth to be 100000 parts. And
from thefe data, by an accurate arithmetical calculus,
he computed the places of the Comet to the times of
the obfervations as follows.
——
*" -— — — - - - rv
True
Digitized by Google
tÔC KM N i^n O ^
^ O N t «- M W> ~ N H " M "
N N •-OOOOOOOO'-'OON^N
1-1
I + H-H +-H+-H- 1 -H-++
~ CON «- 1
O bO * to N cooo ON »ovO N O co O O ~ 0s V?
^-^'^-^
tJ- N lo t*- io co
^ to «
I I I I4- H-+-H-1 1111'
hi
o
n
o V. n O OvO O O 0 O wN^rtO O
5° 8 £ « N - IA- Wlfl ~ ~
.s a,
5 E
u
CO
° N N N N N N N N N - ~ ~ ~
~
•a S
o v^ 00 00 co tÔO 00 O vO On co »aO vO On
| |
4Q
5JL
is OovO WO - - Q Ov ^ O O co « NO O ^
woô - o wto on no
mo om oo w tJ-O 4g^
« 0 io uo O nO NO
•jr -is
HvO rôo
co
O
- N
co O _ 0
—
O coNcOrl« ^
N to
On On
;* ^VO "O LOOOOCvO t^NO NtN W VO 00 -

3
^
I Mm
« N
H-vO On
N N N
O
CO
«o On O couô N
- ~ N to
io vy->
N
UN
i 3
This Comet alfo appeared in the November before,
and Coburg
at in Saxony was obferved by Mr. Gottfried
Kirch on the qth of that Month, on the 6th and
i ith from its pofitions to the neareft fixed Start
0. if ;
obferved with fufficient accuracy, fometimes with a

two foot, and fometimes with a ten foot telefcopc
from
Digitized by Google
Book III. of Natural Thilofophy. 3 5 1
from the difference of longitudes of Cobnrg and Lcn-

don, and from the places of the fixed Stars ob-
'
ferved by Mr, Pound, Dr. Hallej has determined the

places of the Comet as follows.
Nov. id. i7 h 2', apparent time at London, the Co-
.
met was in Si 29 deg. 51', with 1 deg. 17'. 45".

latitude north.
November 5. i5 h . 58' the Comet was in ^
j°. 23',
with i°. 6'. north lat.
November 10. i<S h . 31', the Comet was equally di-
ftant from two Stars in whicharec and r in Bayer ;
but it had not quite touched the right line that joins «rv\A)tM*
them, but was very little diftant from it. In Flam- - >VCVA ^
0
fiend's catalogue this Star <r was then in *!K 14 . 15'*
with 1 deg. 41'. lat. north nearly, and t in
0
^
17 . with o. deg. 34'. lat. fouth. And the jwv
middle point between thole Stars was *5t 19+3
with o\ 33'f lat. north. Let the diftance ot the
Comet from that right line be about 10' or 12'; and
the difference of the longitude of the Comet and that
middle point will be 7' ; and the difference of the
latitude nearly, 7'f. And thence it follows, that the
Comet was in 0
^
15 . 32', with about 26' lat. north.
The firft obfervation from the pofition of the Co-
met with refpeft to certain fmall fixed Stars had all the
exaftnefs that could be defired. The fecond alfo was
accurate enough. In the third obfervation, which wasA^^^^
the there might be an error of 6 or
leaft accurate,
7 1
minutes, but hardly greater. The longitude of thei^Û -v ^
Comet, as found in the firft and moft accurate obfer-
tion, being computed in the aforefaid parabolic orbit, v,^ AxA\o
comes out £^29°. 3 0'. 2 2", its latitude north i°. 2 5'. 7",
and its diftance from the Sun 1 15546.
Moreover, Dr. Hallej obferving that a remarkable
Comet had appeared four times at equal intervals of
575 years, that is, in the Month of September after Ju-
lius Cefar was killed,
« Chr. 551 in theconfulate of
£t,)tf\KLAo Lam-
* Digitized by Google
3$z Mathematical Principles Book III.
Lampadius and Oreftes, An. Chr. notf in the Month

of February , and at the end of the year 1680 ; and
(S lt<
that with a long and remarkable tail ('except when it
was feen after Ge/ar's death, at which time, by reafon
itliiu.%
c*
^ the inconvenient fituation of the Earth, the tail was
, not[fo confpicuous :
) fet himfelf to find out an elliptic
,t( wit** orbit whofe greater axis (hould be 1382957 parts, the
mean diftance of the Earth from the Sun containing
10000 fuch ; in which orbit a Comet might revolve
in 575 years. And placing the afcending node in ©
2°, i ; the inclination of the plane of the orbit to the
plane of the ecliptic in an angle of 6i°. 6'. 48"; the
perihelion of the Comet in this plane in 7 22 0 44'. 25";

.
the equal time of the perihelion December j d . 2j h .

the diftance of the perihelion from the afcending node
0
in the plane of the ecliptic 9 17'. 35''; and its con-
.
jugate axis 1848 1, 2 ; he computed the motions of

the Comet in this ecliptic orbit* The places of the
Comet, deduced from the obfervations and as ari-
as
fing from computation made in this orbit, may be fcen
in the following table.
True
Digitized by Goooll
1
Lat. Nor.
True time Lo/tg.comp.
J
Lat.c*^*^
obf.
3 16.47 a 29- 5> o I .17 .45 SI 29 5i 22

5 15 37• ^ 3 23 o 1.6.0 3 24 32 I . 1
10 16. 18 15-32 o o . 27 . o 15 33 2 O . 21
16 17 . 00 & 8 16 45 0 - 53
18 21 .
34 - 18 52 15 1 . 2<
20 17 . o - 28 10 36
23 17- 5 m 13 22 42 2 . 21
Dec. 12 4. 46 Vf 6. 32 3° 8 .28 o yp 6 3
• 20 8 . 24
21 6. 37 5- 8 12 21 42 13 .
5 6 . •; 21 .
4
24 6 18 . 18. 49 23 25 23 5 18 47 . . 3°
26 5 21. 28 24 >3 27 o 52 28. 21 . . .
42
3 K 13- 10
29 8 . 4i 28 9 5« i3« 11 . . 14 28 . lUr^l
30 8 10. 17- 38 o 28 11 53 17- 38 . .
27 28 . I,
Jan". 5 6 i£ y* 8 48 53 26. 15
.
7 8 48 . .
51 26 • IêU ,
* 18. 44 4 24 1 56 18 43 51 24
9 7 • . . . I
10
*3
6. 6 20 40 5° 23-43 32
25 59.48 22 17 28
•
20 40
26 o
. 23 23
8 22
. 4r
i»/
kt
7 9 . . .
[
25 9- 35. o 17 56 30 9- 34 1
59
4^^
. .
7
30 8 . 22 13 •
19. 51 1 6 42 . . 18 i3- 18 28 12 ;
Feb. 2 6 35 13-53 16 4 1 . . 11 59 16.
5 7
8
4 16
26
59. 6 15.27
18.35 12 46 46
3 . 16. 59
26 16. 59 12
17 15.2.
U-
.
41 . . . .
4
Mar. 1 11 . 10 27- 52.42 12 23 .40 . 27. 5i * 47 12 . 2
5 11 .39 29 18. o 12 3.16 . 29 20 11 12 . .
9 8 . 38 o 43- 4 11 .45 52 . o 42.43

. 1 1 .
4
Digitized by Google
To face Page 35 2
Errors in
omt,
* m *
Long. hat.
'
1
r it
Cat*- ' • 3*N - 0 . 22 — 0. 13

6 .
9 - 1 . 32 + 0. 9
-1.2 — 1
53 .
S. 54
3 35
•
•
•
-----
9 . 0
6N —
9.
4.42 — 1058 ++ «•2. 29*
1
1
.
— .
— 2.31 ++ 01.9 30
3 35 1 .
53 .
2 . 1
0 .
38 ho. 33 + 0 40 .
1 • 37 |-o. 7 — 0 16 .
4-57 -0 2 . — 0 10 .
2 .
17 ~ 0 13 + 0.21
—
.
3 • 25 0 . 27 — 0. 7
6 . 32, + 0 20 . — 0. 56
6. 6 — — 0 24
0. 5 — 0.49
23 1 . ~2
.
.
13
2- 7 "7 1
54 — .54I
7. 0 +
—
0
•
. 1 — 0. 3
5.22 1 . 36 — 24
1 1 .
2 . 28 "7°' 55 — 1.12
2 .
50 +0 2 11 — 0 26
—
. .
5-35 . 21 — 0.17
Book III. of Natural Vhilofophyl 35j
The obfervations of this Comet from the beginning
to the end agree perfe&ly with the motion of the
as frwv^
Comet now defcribed, as the motions
in the orbit juft
of the Planets do with the theories from whence they
are calculated, and by this agreement plainly evince that c ioV******
it was one and the lame Comet that appeared all that
time ; and alfo that the orbit of that Comet is here
rightly defined.
In the foregoing table we have omitted the obfervations yjvuLtJUx* t
of Nov. 16, 18, 20 and 23 not .iutficiently accu-

as
rate. For at thofe times feveral perfons had obferved
the Comer- Nov. 17. O. S. Pomhaus and his Com-
panions at 6 in the morning at Rome (that is 5 . 10' v< co
h h ;
at London) by threads directed to the fixt Stars, obferv'd {vv£Ur-i

the Comet in »
8°. 30'. with latitude, o°. 40'. foiub. : > v
Their obfervations may befeen in atreatife, which Pon- fa*A**£ *
publiuYd concerning this Comet. Celiius who was <^».v^
prefenr, and communicated his obfervations in a Letter < ^
to Cajjim, faw the Comet at the fame hour in 8^ 36'.. r & v
" *
with latitude o\ was likewife feen by
30' fouth. It
Galletuis at the fame hour at Avignon (that is at
$ . 42'. morning at London) in ^

h
8°. without lati- J ,L
tude. But by the theory the Comet was at that
time in a. 8°. i6\ 45". and its latitude was o°. J $'. 7".
fouth.
Nov. 18. at 6h . 30' in the morning at Rome (that
h
is, at 5 . 40'. at Lonlon) Ponthaus obferv'd the Co-
met in ~ 1
0
with latitude i°. 20'. fouth; and
.
30'.
Celiius in ~ 13 0 30'. with latitude i°. oo'* fouth.
.
But at j h 30'. in the morning at Avignon Galletius faw e4 w s * v

it in a jj*. oo'. with latitude i°. 00' fouth. In the
univerfiry of La Flecbe in France, at f h in the morn-
ing (chat is at 5 h . 9'. at London) it was feen by P.
AngOy in the middle between two fmall Stars, one of
which .is the middle of the three which lye in a right-line
in the fouthern hand of Virgo, Bayers ^ 9 and the other *v*.i^—*
is the outoioft of the wing, Bayers (• Whence the
i^v^M a Comet
Digitized by Googl
is4 Mtfhematical Principles Book IH>
Comet was then in ^

12,0. 46'. with latitude 50' fouth.
And was informed by Dr. Hallej that on the fame day,

I
at Bo/?** in New-England^ in the latitude of 42 J deg.
at j h in the morning, (that is, at p h 44' in the morn-
.
ing at London*) the Comet was feen near £ 14 0 , with

latitude i°. 30' fouth.
Nov. 19. 4 f at Cambridge the Comet (by the
11
at
©bfervation of a young man,) was diftant from Spiea
^ n.w
c) * " about 2 ° towar^ s the north- weft. Now the foike
a! "- J^was at that time in ~ 19 0 23'. 47". with latitucte 2 0/
.
!• 59". fouth. The fame day at 5 h in the morning

at Bofton in New-England* the Comet was diftant from
Splca 1% i° with the difference of 40' in latitude. The
fame day in the ifland of Jamaica, it was about i° dif-
tant from Splca The fame day Mr. Arthur Storer
at the river Patuxcnt near Hunting Creel^ in Maryland in
the confines of Virginia in lat* 30^° at 5 in the morn-
h
k^\H<^ i°g Cât is at io .at London) faw the Comet above
Splca % and very nearly join'oTwith it, the diftance
between them being about \ of one deg. And from
thefe obfervations compar'd I conclude, that at p h 44'
at London, the Comet was in *s 18 0 . 50' with about i°.
25' latitude fouth. Now by the theory the Comet
was at that time in B 18 0
. 52'. 15". with i°. 26'. 54'.
lat. fouth.
Nov. zo. Montenarl profeffor of aftronomy at Pa-
h
dua, at 6 in the morning at Venice ( that is 5". xo'at
London) faw the Comet in ~ Z3° # with latitude i°. 30'
(
fouth. The fame day at Bofton, it was diftant from
V
GivJudtJ
sPic* ^ 0
by bout 4 of longitude eaft, and therefore
fl
was in £s 23°. 24' nearly.

Nov. 21. Ponthans and his companions at 7* h inthe
0
morning, obferv'd the Comet in tf* 27 . 50' with la-
titude i°. i£. fouth. CelKus in » 28 '. P. Ango at 5 11
0
in the morning, in *a 27 . 45-'. Montenarl in 27°. A
51'. The fame day in the ifland of Jamaica* it was
fecn near rhe beginning of n\ and of about the fame la-
titude
zed by Google
S oofc III. of Natural Thilofophy. $sS
titude with Spica HP, that is, z°. z\ The fame day
at 5 h morning at Ballaforc in the Eafl-Indies (that is ac
ii h , 20' of the night preceding at London) the dif-
rance of the
Spica Comet from
was taken 7 0 . 35'. W
to the eaft. It was in a right line between the fpike
and theballance, and therefore was then in z6°. 58'. &
^with about i°. 11' lat. fouth;. and after 5\ 40'. (that
b
is at 5 morning at London) it was in (& z8°. 12'. with
i°. 16'. lat. fouth. Now by the theory the Comet
was then in 28
0
«
10'. 36" with i°.
f}'. 35'lat,
.
fouth.
Nov. 22. The Comet was feen by Montcnari in ni
a°. 33'. But at Bofton in New-England, it was found
in about ni 3 0 , and with almoft the iame latitude as be-
fore, that is, i°. 30'. The fame day at 5 h morning
at BMafore the Comet was obferv'd in til i°. 50'; and
h
therefore at 5 morning at London the Comet was in ill
0 5' fame day
nearly. The at 6± h in the morning
3 .
at London, Dr. //boôbferv'd it in about 1*1

0 30';
3 .
and that in the right line through Spica, which paffeth

fl£ and Cor Leonis; not indeed exaftly, but deviating a
little from that line towards the north. Montenari like-

wife obferv'd, that this day and fome days after, a right
line drawn from the Comet through Spica, pafs'd by
the fouth fide of Cor Leonis, at a very fmall difhnce
therefrom. The right line through Cor Leonis and
Spica *!? did cut the ecliptic in W 3
0
.
46' at an angle
of z°. 51'. And if the Comet had been in this line
and in ni ;°. its latitude would have been 2 0 . 26'.
But fince Hook^ and Montenari agree, that the Comet
•was at fome towards the
fmall diftance from this line
north, its latitude muft have been fomething lefs. On
the 20th, by the obfervation of Montenari, its latitude
was almoft the fame with that of Spica, that is about
i°. 30'. But by the agreement of Hook, Montenari and
jingo, the latitude was continually increafing and there-
fore muft now on the 2 2d, be fenlibly greater than
A a 2 1 9.
Digitized by Google
356 Mathematical ^Principles Book lit
i°. 30'. And taking a mean between the extreme li-
mits k ut nowftated 2°. 26andi°. 50', the latitude will

be about i°. 5?? Hook^ and Montenari agree that the
tail of the Comet was dire&ed towards Spica de- %
clining a little from that Star towards the' fouth accord-
ing to Hookj but towards the north, according to
Montenari. And therefore that declination was fcarcely
fenfible ; and the tail lying nearly parallel to the equa-
tor, deviated a little from the oppofition of the Sun,
towards the north.
Nov. 25. 0. S. At 5 h morning at Nuremberg (that
is at 4 £ at London) Mr. Zimmerman faw the Comet
h
in 01 8°. 8' with 2 0 . 3 \ fouth lat. its place being col-

lectedby taking its diftances from fixed Star*.
Nov. 24. Before Sun-rifing the Comet was feen
by Montenari in H 12 0 52' on the north fide of the
.
right line through Cor Leonis and Spica and there- %

fore its latitude than i°. 58'. And
was fomething lefs
fince the latitude, as we faid, by the concurring ob-

fervations of Montenari, j4ngo y and Hookj wa9 conti-
nually increafing; therefore it was now on the 24th
fomething greater than i°. 58',- and, taking the mean
0
vVc.v^^*- quantity, may be reckon'd 2 . without any con-
18',
querable error. Ponthtus and Galletius will have it that

the latitude was now decreafing; and Cellim and the
obferver in New»England , that it continued the fame,
i
viz,, of about i°, or I7 0 . The obfervationsof Pon-

thatts and Cellius are more rude, efpecially thofe which
were made by taking the azimuths and altitudes ; as are
alfo the obfervations of Galletius. Thofe are better
which were made by taking the pofition of the Comet
to the fixt Stars by Montenari, Hook^ Ango> and the
obferver in New-England, and fometimes by Ponthtm
gnd Cellius. The fame day, at 5 morning at Ballafore
11
the Comet was obferved in ?*l 4^'; and therefore

at
j
h morning at London was in ij° nearly. And
Digitized by Google
Book IIL of Natural Thik/bfifyl 3 57
by the theory, the Comet was at that time in nt
1 3°. zi'.42". ;
Nov. 25. Before Sun-rife Montenxri obferv'd the

Comet in HI 17°^ nearly; and Cellins obferv'd at the
fame time that the Comet was in a right line between t
.
the blight Star in the right thigh of Virgo and the îta-^V.
foUsherpTcale of Libra; and tKis right line cuts the Vv-vvVr
Comet's way in m. i8°. i6\ And by the theory the~
v
^«SWu *
Comet was in ni i8°f nearly.

From all this it is plain that thefe obfervations agree daVe-
with the theory, fo far as they agree with one another,
and by this agreement it is made clear that it was one
and the fame Comet that appeared all the time from
Nov. 4. to Mar. 9. The path of this Comet did
twice cut the plane of the ecliptic, and therefore was
not a right line. It did cut the ecliptic, not in oppoflce
parts of the hgjyens, but in the end of Virgo and be- \ . ^ ,
ginning of Capricorn, including an arc of about 5)8°.

And therefore the v/ay of the Comet did very much
deviate from the path of a great circle. For in che^*-**^*
month of Nov. it declined at leaft 5 0 from the ecliptic *w\ t.^vr
towards the (outh; and in the month of Dec. follow-
ing it decline?"" 19° from the ecliptic towards the
north; the two parts of the orbit in which the Comet
defcended towards the Sun, and afcended again from,
the Sun, declining one from the other by an apparent
angle of above 3© 0 , as obferv'd by Mumenari. This
Comet travel'd over 9 figns, to wit, from the laft ^Jeg.
of SI to the beginning of H, befide rhe fign of «V»
thro' which it pafs'd before it began to be feen. And
there is no other theory by which a Comet can go over fo
great a part of the heavens with a regular motion. The %
motion of this Comet was very unequable. For about the
20th of Nov. it defcrib'd about 5 0 a day. Then its
motion being retarded, between Nov. 16. and Dec. 12.
to wit, in the fpace of 1 5 J days, it defcrib'd only 40 0 .
But the motion thereof being aftjiwards accelerated, it cIjluvam
a j
~A ^~ defcrib'd
" '
Digitized by Google
15 8 Mathematical Trinciples Book III
0
defcrib'd near 5 day, till its motion began to be a*
a
gain retarded. And the theory which juftly correfponds

with a motion fo unequable, and through fo great a
part of the heavens, which obferves the fame laws with
the theory of the Planets, and which accurately agrees
with accurate aftronomical obfervations, cannot be other-
wife than true.
,\ c And thi nking it would not be improper, I have giv'n
{PL 18.) a true reprefentation of the orbit which this
*xL*-. and of the jail which it emitted in

Comet defcrib'd,
f 1 feveral places, in the annexed figure ; protrafted in the
l^^^^planeof the trajectory. In this fcheme repre- ABC

fents the trajectory of the Comet, the Sun, the D DE
axis of the trajectory, F the line of the nodes, D GH
the interferon of the fphere of the orbis rnagnns with
the plane of the traje&ory, / the place of the Comet
fjov. 4. Ann. 16*80, /Cthe place of the fame Nov. 11,
L the place of the fame Nov. 19. its place Dec. ii, M
N its place Dec. 21. O its place Dec. 29. P its place
Jan. 5. following, 0 its place Jan. 25. R its place

Feb. 5. £ its place ^. 25. Tits place March 5. and
Kits place March 9. In determining the length of
the tail I made the following obfervations.
Nov. 4. and 6. the tail did not appear; Nov. XL
begun to fhew itfelf, but did not appear
tail juft
I *v*wv. o
above ~ deg. long through a 10 foot telefcope; Nov.
17. the rail was fcen by Ponih&m more than 15 0 long;
Nov. 18. in New-England the tail appear'd jo° long,
r • ând dire<Sly oppofite to the Sun, extending îtfelf to
v%v
* the planet Mars, which was then in 7^ 9 0 54'; ffiov. .
19. in Mary-Land, the tail was found 15 0 or io° long,

Dec. 10. (by the obfervation of Mr. Flamftead) the
u\\ pafs'd through the middle of the difhnce intercepted
between the tail of the Serpent of Ophiuchus and the
Star <T in the fouth wingôf Afmhh and did terminate
near the Stars A, w, b, in Bayer's tables. Therefore the
end of the tail was in VS 19 with latitude about
Digitized by Google
Digitized by Google
' .
Book in. [of Natural Thilofophf. 359

34 £° north; Dee. 11. it afcended to the head of t>X^^,A
0
gitt a (Bqer*s *, /3) terminating in VS 16 43', with la-
.
titude 3 8°. 34' north; Dec. 11. it pafc'd through the

middle of Sagitta, nor did it reach much farther; ter- J.«.<uO* r
v
minating in £3 4°? with latitude 42^° north nearly. >w»4 tu*\
But thefe things are to be underftood of the length of j^.^^,
the brighter part of the taftT For with a more faint - iv^c
light, obferv'd too perhaps in afercnersky, at Rome\^''>\^* ^ l
r
Dec. n. 5 h . 40 n>y the obfervation of PontUuSy theVj^l . ,
7
tail arofe to io° above the rump of the fwan, and the ifj*^
4
fide thereof towards the weft and towards the norths f ;^
was 45' diftant from this ftar. But about that time :t/«t^
the tail was 3 0 broad towards the upper end; and there-
fore the middle thereof was 2 0 . 15 diftant from that ^3vo
4w tlN
ftar towards the fouth,and the upper end was H in iz° f**
with latitude tft° north. And thence the tail was about
70 0 long. Dec 2 1. it extended almoft to CoJJiopeiJs chair, 4 V 'IU
equally diftant from @ and from ScheMr, fo as its diTFance
from either of the two was equal to thediftanceof the
one from the other, and therefore did terminate in T
0
24 0 with latitude 47 7 . Dec. 29. it reach'd to a con- * I
taft with Scbeat on its left, and exactlyTflPd up the^êx^
fpace between the two ftars in the northern foot of An-
dromeda, being 540 in length; and therefore terminated
0
in t5 i5>°with 35 of latitude. Jan. 5. it touch'd the
Star -k in the bread of Andromeda on its right fide,
}
and the Star p~oFthe girdle on its left; and according

0
'\^ t?* v <v
to our obfervacions, was 40 long ; but 4it?was curved,

and the convex fide thereof lay to the fouth. And near > *<v^ 7
the head of the Comet, it made an angle of 4 0 with the 7~**t^*^
circle which pafs'd through the Sun and the Comet's
head. But towards the other end, it was inclin'd to
that circle in an angle of about io° or n°. And the
chord of the tail contain'd with that circle an angle of
8°. Jan. 13. the tail terminated between Alamecb and
f
Algol, with a light that was fenfible enough; but^* " r-
with a faint light it ended over againft tlie Star x in
JX{ A a 4 tZyjt^ Perfem'%
Digitized by Google
l6o Mathematical Principles Book III.
Pcrfem's fide. The diftance of the end of the tail from
the circle paffing through the Sun and the Comet, was
0
3 . £o'. And the inclination of the chord of the tail
to that circle was 8j°. Jan. 25. and 26. it (hone

ijUX with a faint light to the length of 6 or j\ And for
tA^tf a night or two after when there was a very clear sky,,
it extended to the length of 1 r°, or fomething more,
1
a ''S^c c ^ at was ver y âmt anc^ ver y jhardly to be
J*
1 feen. But the axe thereof was exactly direfted to the
bright Star in the eaftern (houlderof Auriga and there-
Vsjwk/* fore deviated from the oppolTnon of the Sun towards
the north, by an angle of io°. Laftly, Feb. 10. with
•; a telefcope I obferv'd the tail i° long.For thatjaintei
lot ^S' 1C w îch
fpoH e of, did not appear through the
*
g] a (feS- g ut ponthtns writes that on Feb. 7. he Jaw
*&\Wo^ ^
la ji I2 o j on g # Feb.*%yTtht Comet was without a
tail, and fo continued till it difappeared.
,
v
•
- Now if one rejkfis uponjthe orbit defcrib'd, and
'
. .i^^^^duly confiders
. trieother^ppearances of this Comet, he
A V J^"
V ^ **^y 1 ' tS} sSy'&r ^ 3t trie bodies of Comets are
compact, fixt and durable* like the bodies of

i folid,
the Planets. For if they were nothing elfe, but the va-
I
lLvsvto4
& Qurs Qr cx jj a j at j on$ Q f tne Barter oT the Sun, and other
p
Planets, this Comet in its pafftge by the nei ghbour-
.
v^v.tUi'jjQQj 0 f c he Sun, would have been immediately difli-

tjehrl f5tc3. For the heat of the Sun is as the denfity of
its as the fquare of the di-
rays, that is,~rcciprocally
ftance of the placesfrom the Sun. Therefore, fince on
Dec. 8. when the Comet was in its perihelion, the di-
ftance thereof from the centre of the Sun was to the
diftance of the Earth from the fame asrbout 6 to 1000,
the Sun's heat on the Comet was at that time to the
heat of the Summer-Sun with us, as ioooooo to 36,
or as 28000 to 1. But the heat of boiling water is
about 3 times greater than the heat which dry earth
acquires from the Summer-Sun, as I havejtrj^j; and
r'
the heat of red-hot iron (if my conjefture is right) is
about
Digitized by Google
Book III. of Natural Thilofophy. 36c
about three or four times greater than the heat of boil-
ing water. And therefore the heat, which dry earth x .
on the Comet, while in its perihelion, might have con- >m *

L '
ceived from the fays of the Sun, was about 2000 times
greater than the heat of red-hot iron. But by fo fierce w*fa*\o
a heat, vapours and exhalations, and every volatile mat-
ter muft have been immediately confunVd and difli-
pated.
This Comet therefore muft have conceived an im-
menfe heat from the Sun, and retain that heat for an ju>/m^**w
exceeding long time. For a globe of iron of an inch
in diameter, expos'd red-hot to to the open air, will
fcarcely jofe all its heat in an hour's time but a greater pArl&J
globe would retain its heat longer in the proportion ot
its diameter, becaufe the furface (in proportion to which
it iscooFd by the contact of the ambient air) is in that % ,
proportion lefs in refpeft of the quantity of thejn-

eluded hot matter. And therefore a globe of red-hot
iron, equal to our Earth, that is, about 40000000 feet
in diameter, would fcarcely cool in an equal number of
days, or in above 50000 years. But I fiifpecl that the
duration of heat may, on account of forae latent caufes,
^K
increafe in a yet lefs proportion than that of the diame- <5*^^ ,
c
ter; and I ftiould be glad that the true proportion was *f
inveftigated by experiments.
It is further to be obferv'd, that the Comet in the oJk*****
month of December, juft after had been heated by
it t
the Sun, did emit a much tr ^~

longer tail, and much more
fplendid, than in the month of November before, when
v
it had not yet arriv'd at its perihelion. And univer-.t^f-^*
Tally, the greateft and mod .fulgent tails always arife 4r/ii<**^
fiom Comets, immediately after their pafling by the o£t»/vî
neighbourhood of the Sun. Therefore the heat re- |*^v^<<«J
ceived by~tFe Comet conduces to the greatnefs of^'& vjlVu
the tail. From whence I think I may infer, TKat the r.^Wio
tail is nothing eljfe but a very fine vapour, which the *******
head or nucleus
— of
—
- .... emits by
the Comet »
its
_
heat, m/*^
__
But
Digitized by Google
362 Mathematical Trinciples Book HI.
But we^tlave
three feveral opinions about the naci
For fome will have it, that they are
tails of Comets.
r/*4A ** ^nothing elfe^bat the beams of the Sun's light trust
<NtUi^ mitred through the Comet's heads, which they fup-
pofe to be tranfparent ; others IKat they proceed from
the refra&ion which light fuffers in paffing from the
Comet's head to the Earth: and laftly others, that they
are a fort of clouds or vapour conftantly rifing from
the Comet's heads, and tending towards the parts op-
The firft is the opinion of fuch,
pofite to the Sun.
• M'o vctw * unacquainted with optics.
are yet For the beam*
M(uVa<; of the ^
Sun are kenTrTa darknei room only in confe-
"-""quenceof the light that isTefle&ed from them by the
yV^* a
** tr ' e
P ar " c es °f duft and fmoak which are always Jly-
'
u a ôut in the air. And for that reafon in air impreg-

1
V î*-- "i2S
*
'^k*.^ nated with thick fmoak, thofe beams appear with great
s^yM** brightnefs, Tn J^mc^ve^ the (enfe vigoroufly; in a yet
v
vt
^^ U** ner "r t^ e
y appVar^rhore Jajnt, and are lefs eafily dit
cerned; but in the heavens, where there is no matter
to refleft the light, they can never be feen at all. Light
is not fcen as it is in the beam, but as it is thence re-
ji }
flefted to our^yî. For vifion can be no otherwife
produced than by rays falling upon the eyes. And
therefore there muft be fome refle&ing matter in thofe
parts where the tails of the Comets are fcen: foe other-
wife, fince the celtftal fpaces are equally illuminated
all
by no part of the heavens could ap-

the Sun's light,
pear with more fplendor than another The fecond 0-
-
i i, .vt i ** *pinion is liable to many difficulties. The tail* of Comets
v '
\ are never feen variegated with thofe colours which cora-
ls*) 1
^**mon!y are infeparable from rcfracSion. And the diftinft
tranfmiflion of the light of the fixe Stars and Pla-
nets to us, is a demonftration that the sther or celeftial
><* » medium is not endow'd with any refraftive power. For
<c t
v<c
as to w -
c * $ alledg'd that the fixt Stars have been fome-
v times feen by the Egyptians, environ'd with a Com*,
or C*piilitwm y becaufe that has but rarely happen'd, it
Digitized by Google
Book III. of Natural Thilofophy. jtfj
*s rather to be afcrib'd to a cafual refra&ion of cjouds; wMr/
*v
ancffollie radiation and fcintillation of the fixt Stars; ^«-i
the refraflions both of the eyes and air. For upon
ing a telefcope to the eye thofe radiations and fcin- wrt**uUj
t illations immediately difappear. By the tremulous agi-
ration of the air and afcending vapours, it happens that
the rays of light are alternately turn'd afide from the * P** ,*
w
narro fpace of the pupil of the eye; but no luch fi->tVc^*^°
thingcan have place in the much wider aperture of the vvuth
objeft-glafs of a telefcope. And hence it is, that a fcin-
tillation is occafion'd in the former cafe, which ceafes
in the latter. And this cefTation in the latter cafe is a
demonftration of the regular tranfmiflion of light through
the heavens, without any fenfible refra&ion. But to
obviate an objection that may be made from the ap-
^
/»
pearing of no tail, in fuch Comets as fhine but with a C !^K #
faint light ; as if :he fecondary rays were then too weak

to affeft the eyes , and for that reafon it is that the
tails of the fixt Stars do not appear; we are to con-
fider, that by the means of telefcopes the light of the v
fixt Stars may be augmented above an hundred fold, t^tM^ ^

and yet no tails are feen; that the light of thT Planets •
is yet more copious without, any tail; but that Comets

are feen fometimes with huge tails, when the light of ^cAv^
their heads is but faint and dull. For fo it happen'd t*y 0> It f
4 *
in the Comet of the year 1680, when in the montlxV**
of Dec. it was fcarcely equal in light to the Stars of
the fecond magnitude, and yet emitted a notable tail,
0 0 0
extending to the length of 40 , 50 , 6o° or 70 , and
1
^ upwards and afterwards on the 2,7 and 28 of January h**^**'*
v
whenthe head appear 3 but as a Star of the 7 h
mag-
nitude, yet the tail fas was faid abov'ej with a light
that was fenfible enough, though faint, was ftretcht ^h*^ '
out to 6 or 7 degrees in length, and with a languifh^^^'J^f

°*
ing light that was more difficultly feen, ev'n to 12°. '
and upwards. But on the 9 and 10 of February, when
to the (naked eye lthe head appear'd no more, through
iv^c&jc' a tele*
Digitized by Google
Mathematical Trinciples Book III.
oruT* * telefcope I view'd the tail of z° in length. But far-

w\e4<îW^Cl£ij5
r
i|
TaiFwas owing to the refrafition ofTSe
*f
ceTeitial matter, and did deviate from the oppofition of
the Sun, according to the Figure of the heavens;
that deviation in the fame places of the heavens
ihould be always dire&ed towards the fame parts.
But the Comet of the year 1680 December z8 a , 8j h.
P. M. at London was feen in 8". 41'. with latitude
0
^ north 28°. <5'; while the Sun was in VS 18 . 16'. And

the Comet of the year 1577 Dec. zo . was in X 8*.
1
d
41 , with latitude north 28 0 . 40', and the Sun as be-

fore in about Yf 18 . 26'. In both cafes the fituation of
the Earth was the fame, and the Comet appear'd in
the fame place of the heavens: Yet in the former
cafe the tail of the Comet (as well by my ob-
fervations as by the obfervations of others) deviat-
ed from the oppofition of the Sun towards the north,
by an angle of 47 degrees, whereas in the latter, there
•was (according to the obfervations of Tjcho) a devia-
tion of 21 degrees towards the fouth. The refrafti-
on therefore of the heavens being thus difprov'd, it
remains that the phenomena of the tails of Comets mull
be deriv'd from fome reflecting matter.
And that the tails of Comets do arife from their
heads, and tend towards the parts oppofite to the Sun,
is further confirm'd from the laws which the tails ob-
êrv e# ^ S tnat Jj^2? in the planes of the Comet's orbits
which pafs througn the Sun, they conftantly deviate
from the oppofition of the Sun towards the parts
which .the Comet's heads in their progrefs along thefe
orbits have left. That to a fpeftator, plac'd in thofe
planes, they appear in the partsdireSly oppofite to the
Sun ; the fpeftator recedes from thofe planes,
but as
their deviation begins to appear, and daily becomes
greater. That the deviation, ceteris paribus, appears lefs,
when the tail is more oblique to the orbit of the Co-
met, as well as when the head of the Comet approaches
z nearer
Digitized by Google
I
look III. of Natural Thilofophf. j$ 5
tearer to the Sun, efpecially if the angle of deviation is
>fH mated near the head of the Comet. That the taib
jvhich have no deviation appear ftraight, but the tails l*rfc*k~ |
which deviate are likewife ben&iTTnto a certain cur- inuun!** ^"
rature. That this curvature is greater when the deviation
is greater; and is more fenfible, when the tail, cateris pa-
ribus, is longer: for in the (horter tails the curvature t>\oa
is hardly to beperceiv'd. TKat the angle of deviation ju'Uut
is TeTs near the Comet's head, but greater towards the
other erid of the tail ; and that becaufe the convex fide
of the tail from which the deviation
regards the parts,
is made, and which lye in a right line drawn out in- Aia*i+
finitely from the Sunthrough the Comet's head. And .
that the tails that are long and broad, andJhine with a Am6w*a
ftronger light, appear more refplendent ana more exact-
ly defin'd on the convex than on the concave fide.
Upon which accounts, it is plain that the phenomena
of the tails of Comets, depend upon the motions of
their heads , and by no means upon the places of
the heavens in which their heads are feen, and that
therefore the tails of Comets do not proceed from the
refraftion of the heavens, but from their own Jâds.oJcK^^l
which furnifh the matter that forms the tail. For, as jOw^r/cu**.**
in our air, tHe fmoak of a heated body afcends, either j^ww^
perpendicularly ifThe body is at reft, or obliquely, if
the body is mov'd obliquely ; fo in the heavens, where JU**At
all bodies gravitate towards the Sun, fmoak and vapouc r Iaa/vv ^ j
muft (as we have already faid) afcend from the Sun,

and either jrife perpendicularly, if the fmoaking body
y\,J>t
is at reft; or obliquely, if the body, in all the progrefs
"
of its motion, is always Leaving thofe places from which /v^Vbk****
the upper or higher parts of the vapour had rifen be- A \Ji>*.
fore. And that obliquity will be leaft, where thfe va- . w^ w. :
pour afcends with moft velocity, (jo wit ?near the fmoak- ;.
t
JUajIS
ing body, when that is near the Sun.^ But becaufe the
obliquity varies, the column of vapSur will be incur-
vated; and becaufe the vapour in the preceding fide is
fome-
Digitized by Google
366 Mathematical Principles EookUL
, fomething more reccnr, that is, has afcended fomething
\
t
xnorejate from the body, it will therefore be fomething

more denfe on that fide, and muft on that account re-
fleft more light, as well as be better defin'd. I add
0
^7 j
^nothing concerning the fudden uncertain agitatiorToT
^t4t^ r ^^the tails of Comets, andlEeir irregular figures, which
Authors fometimes defcribe, becaufe they may arife
from the mutations of our air, and the motions of our
> i clouds, in part obfcuring thofe tails ; or perhaps from
'
parts of the VUk LaBca>> which might have been con-
founded with and miflaken for parts of the tails of the
u
,
Comets as they( pjfleTBy.) #«XtiA

But that the atmofpheres of Comets may furnifb a
fupply of vapour, great enoug h to fill foimmenfe fpaces,
wc may eafily underlrand from the rarity of our own
air. For the air near the furface of our Earth, pofTcffes
afpace 850 times greater than water of the fame weight.
And therefore a cylinder of air 850 feet high, is of
equal weight with a cylinder of water, of the fame
uvvA'^^ breadth and but one foot high. But a cylinder of air,
Jf :i a^, v .^ reajdling to the top of the atmofphere, is of equal
j-H l vU weight with a cylinder of water, about 3$ feet high:
'
and therefore, if from the whole cylinder of air, the

n\«a ty«ô lower part of 850 feet high is taken away, the remain-
v
ing upper part will be of equal weight with a cylinder
of water 52 feet high. And from thence (and by the
hypothefis, confirm'd by many experiments, that the
compreflion of air is as the weight of the ir
atmofphere, and that the force of gravity is reciprocal-
ly as the fquare of the diftance from the center of the
Earth) railing a calculus, by cor* prop. 22. book im
y*^k ^.<A.v<U
t
1 found, that at theheighthof one femidiameter of the
* ^â**-*^ Earth, reckoned from the Earth's furface, the air is
t^v^vw.W more rare than with us, in a far greater proportion
than of the whole fpace within the orb of Saturn
to a fpherical fpace of one inch in diameter. And
therefore if a fphere of our air, of but one inch in tîcfe
Digitized by Google
Book III. -
of K^ralThilofophy. l6?
nefs,was equally ranty'd with the air at the heighth of £>)^*V
one femidiameter of the Earth from the Earth's fur-
face , it would fill all the regions of the Planets to
the orb of Saturn and farjônd it. Wherefore fincc *a<m
the air at greater diftances is immenfely rarify'd, and * tU
the coma or atmofphere of Comets is ordinarily about
ten times higher, reckonin g from their centers, than cJtaJuu £ *
the furface ot the nucIeusTand the tails rife yet higher,

they muft therefore be exceedingly rare. And a^. c
on account of the much thicker atmofpheres

and the great gravitatioiToTTheir bodies towards tht
tho!
of Comets ^ r
m)u*«.
Sun, as well as of the particles of their air and vapours

mutually one towards another, it may happen that the trwfM
air in the celeftial fpaces
and in the tails of Comet , is
not fo vaftly rarify'd; yet from* this computation ic
v
is plain, that a very fmall quantity of air and vapour civ/-
is aBundantly fufficient to produce all the appearances *

v„ ,
of the tails of Comets. For that they are indeed of a v ^;f ^ T

very notable rarity appears from the (hining of the HilZ'i*
Stars through them. The atmofphere "oTthe Earth,
illuminated by the Suns light, tho' but of a few miles a******-
in thicknefs, quite obfeures ar,d extinguiflies tfie light
J^vi*^ ^
not only of all the Stars, but ev'n of the Moon itfelf: "
.
whereas the fmalleft Stars are feen to fhine through the

immenfe thicknefs of the tails of Comets, likewife illu-
'
Uy ~ W :
-
minated by the Sun, without the leaft diminution of

their fplendor. Nor is Ane^brightnefs of the tails of
moft Comets ordinarily greater than that of our air aa * »
inch or two in thicknefs, reflecting in a darkened niom^JlS^^^

the light of the Sun beams let in by an hole of the
"
window-fliut. *~ <\frA*** c* %v*JU. "
"SHa we may pretty nearly determine the time (pent f~

l
during the afcent oTthe vapour from the Comet's head to ~ wfc'iTL
the extremity of the tail, by drawing a right line from
the extremity of the tail to the Sun, and marking the
place where that right line imerfe&s the Comet's orbic.
For the vapour that is now in the extremity of the
tail,
Digitized by Google
36S Mathematical Trinciples Book III.
tail, if ic has afcended in a right line from the Sun,

muft have begun to rifefrom the head, at the time
vhen the head was in the point of interferon. It is
true, the vapour does not rife in a right line from the
Sun, but retaining the motion which ic had from the
Comet before its afcent, and compounding that mo-
tion with its motion of afcent, arifes obliquely. And
therefore, the folution of the problem will be more
exaft, if we draw the line which interfe&s the orbit
parallel to the length of the tail; orj^dier (becaufe of
\n\l|jW
t jje curv j|j near motion of the Comet,) diverging a lir-
tie from the line or length of the taih And by means

of this principle I found, that the vapour which Jan.
25. was in the extremity of the tail, had begun to rife
*
Jtflfrv
.,
from the head before Dec. 11. and therefore had /pent
t
in its whole afcent 4? days; but that 'the whole tail

which appear'd on Dec. 10. had finiih'd its afcent in
%
fp ace °f tne two days then elags^d from the time of
v
%M iM» lt 4?Jfc
the Comet's being in its perihelion. The vapour there-
J ôre>
aljout *ke beginning and in the neighbourhood of
r vijt^ v
Mjw
t h c $un, rofewith the greateft velocity, and afterwards
"v 'u.^.. continu'd to afcend with a motion conftantly retarded
by its own gravity ; and the higher it afcended, the
A \ more lt acLdcd 10 tne length of the tail. And whilethe
r, v nvâ k
^.j cont j nu »j to jj e j-een> j c was macj e U
p 0 f aimoft a ]|
that vapour, which had rifen fince the time of the Co-
met's being in its perihelion; nor did that part of the
vapour which had rifen firft, and which form'd the
extremity of the tail, ceafe to appear, till its too great
diftance, as well from the Sun from which it receiv'd
its light, as from our eyes, render'd itinvifible. Whence
alfo it is, that the tails of other Comets which are
'
x
v'- ;
, fliorr, do not rife from their heads with a fwift and
continual motion, and( foon after) difappearl But are
permanent and lading columns of vapours and exhalari-
'fjfc*.^ ^ *'ons; which afcending from the heads with a flow mo-
tion of many days, and partaking of the motion of
y.«c-ftu'\)\«v>/vXo the
ogle
Book III. of Natural $>hilo[ophy\ 169
the heads which they had from the beginning, conti-
nue to go along together with them through the hea-
vens. From whence again we have another argument t^J^Û
?
proving the celeftiaf fpaces to be free and without re*
Mtihce, iince in them not only the folid bodies of
the Planets and Comets, but alfo the extremely rare
vapours of Comets tails, maintain their rapid motions
with great freedom , and for an exceeding long time. IaWTÂ
Krpler afcribts the afcent of the tails of the Comets
to the atmofpheres of their heads; and their dire&ion
towards the parts oppofite to the Sun, to the aftion
of the rays of light carrying along with them the
matter of the Comet's tails. And without any great
incongruity we may ftippofe, that in fo free fpaces*
fo fine a matter as that of the aether may yield^to u ** A
the aftion of the rays of the Sun's light, though
thofe rays are not able fenfibly to move the grofs ^2?**
fubftances in our parts, which are clogg'd with fo.^^ tM : 0
palpable a refiftance. Another author thinks, that there
may be a fort of particles of matter endow'd with a' *Y**JUi
principle of levity, as well as others are with a power
of gravity; that the matter of the tails of Comets may
be of the former fort, and that its afcent from the
Sun, may be owing to its levity. But confidering
that the gravity of terreftrial bodies is as the matter
of the bodies, and therefore can be neither more nor
lefs in the fame quantity of matter, I am inclin'd to 4*y*>*™
believe that this afcent may ra ther proceed from the c>'«iy
rarelfa&ion of the matter of "the Comet's tails. The "^/' ^
afcent of fmoak in a chimney is owing to the im-
pulfe of the air, with which it is entangled. The [lM/%(
air rarefy'd by heat afcends, becaufe its Tpecific gra-
vity is diminilVd, ahd in its afcent carries along with
it the fmoak, with which it is engag'd. And why$ v *
may not the tail of a Comet rife from the Sun
after the fame manner ? For the Sun's rays do not aft
ppon the mediums which they pervade otherwife than
B b r 'w*v«o by
Digitized by Google
'370 Mathematical Trinciples Book III
{
I
by refle&ion and refraftion. And thofc refte&ing par-
\
tides heated by this a&ion, heat the matter of the aether
which is involv'd with them. That matter is rarefied
by the heat which it acquires; and becaufe by this rare-
1 fadion the fpecific gravity with which it tended to-
wards the Sun before is diminifti'd, it will afcend there-
from) and carry along with it the reflecting particles,
of which the tail of the Comet is compos'd. But the
afcentof the vapours is further promoted by their cir-
cumgyration about the Sun, in confequence whereof
^L^ they endeavour to recede from the Sun, while the Sun's
;<i
'
atmofphere and the other matter of the heavens are
either altogether quiefcent, or are only mov'd with a
"vw j
,
1
"
' *
flower circumgyration deriv'd from the rotation of the
Sun. And thefe are the caufes of the afcent of the
tails of the Comets in the neighbourhood of the Sun,
..re <*.n w
bcre their orbits are bent into a greater curvature, and
the Comets themfelves are plung'd into the denfer, and
.fuw*vyiT« therefore heavier parts of the Sun's atmofphere; upon
futsvtu.
which account they do then emit tails of anJiuge length.
For the tails which then arife, retaining their own pro-
per motion, and in the mean time gravitating towards
the Sun, muft be revolv'd in ellipfes about the Sun in
like manner as the heads are, and by that motion muft
always accompany the heads, and freely adhere to them.
For the gravitation of the vapours towards the Sun can
no more force the tails to abandon the heads, and de-
fcend to the Sun, than the gravitation of the heads can
oblige them to fall from the tails. They muft by their
common gravity, either fall together towards the Sun,
or be retarded together in their common afcent there-
U »<t .
/rom. And therefore, (whether from the caufes jkeadjL
y delcrib'd, or from any others) the tails and heads of
Comets may eafily acquire, and freely retain any pofi-
tion one to the other, without difturbance or impedi-
ment from that common gravitation.
>ogle
Book III. of Natural Thllofophf. 3 7
The tails therefore that rife in the perihelion pofitl-
oixs of the Comets
will go along with their heads into
far remote and together with the heads will either
parts,
return again from thence to us, afrer a long courfe of
years; or rather, will be there rarefied, and by degrees
quite vanifh away. For afterwards in the defcent of rj*1
the heads towards the Sun, new ftiort tails will be emit- r ^
ted from the heads with ajlow motion; and thofe tails 7^
by degrees will be augmented immenfly, efpecially in
fiich Comets as in their perihelion diftances defcend as
_ low as the Sun's atmofphere. For all vapour in thofe i><J Lv-
free fpaces is in a perpetual ftate of rarefadion and di-
latation. And from hence it is, that the tails of all
Comets are broader at their upper extremity, than near »^ N co I
their heads. And it is not unlikely, but that the V*»;**wt\lv»

pour, thus perpetually rarefy'd and dilated, may be ac
laft diflipated, and fcatter'd through the whole heavens, / L V <V ^
and by little and little be attra&ed towards the Planets * v h* v
by its gravity, and mixed with their atmofphere. For
as the feas are abfolutely neceflary to the conftitution of
our Earth, from them, the Sun, by its heat, may
that
exhale a fufficient quantity of vapours, which being ea* <{v**sv<U
. ther'd together into clouds, may drop dpwji in rainV
4
for watering of the earth, and for' trie procfu&ion and ^ m.v ;
nourTihment of vegetables; or being condens'd with cold^!^ c

on thTtops of mountains, (as fome philofophers with^^/
reafon judge) may run dqwp in fprings and rivers ; fa
for the confervation of the feaV, and Hulas of the Planets, £$}*' v
*
Comets feem to be requir'd, that from their exhalations y., \
and vapours condens'd, the waftes of the Planetary fluids,
%v,,v '
fpent upon vegetation and putrefaction, and convert-

cdmto dry earth, may be continually fupplied and made a J .
upj For all vegetables entirely derive their growths ^ v .;

Irom and afterwards in great meafure are turn'd
fluids,
into dry earthby putrefa&ion ; and a fort of flime is X*.
always found toXettle at the bottom of putrifiecf fluids. -

t-
And hence it isT^ tTiat the bulk of the folid earth is

~ *
B b"v ^^- continu-
Digitized by Googl
1
continually increafed, and the fluids, if they are not

fupplied from without, mud be in a continual de*
U(u
* -
c
^.
l ^ at
5|y efl y fr°
and quite fail at.laft. f I fufpeft mpreov ,
m
th c \ Comets that fbirrt comes,
tls
f
tf
p^'ry^which is inHeed the fmalleft,.>ut the molt fubtle andju|.(
/
yjii^V* P art °f our air^'Vnfl'IffTSuch required to fuftain ,
•^heJjfiLof all things with us. jmuuV

*^£jL
' The atmofpheres of Comets, in their defcent towards
the Sun, by running out into the tails are fpent and
diminift'd, and become narrower, at leaft on that fide
which regards the Sun; and in receding from the Sun,
when they lefs run out into the tails, they are again
HeveUus has juftly mark'd their appearances.

enlarg'd, if
But they are feen leaft of all juft after they have been
moft heated by the Sun, and on that account then emit
the longeft and moft refplendent tails ; and perhaps at
the fame time the nuclei are environ'd with a denfer
and blacker fmoak, in the lowermoft parts of their at-
mofphere. For fmoak that is rais'd by a great and in-
tend heat, is commonly the denfer and blacker. Thus
the head of that Comet which we have been deferr-
ing, at equal diftances both from the Sun and from the
Earth, appear'd darker after it had pafs'd by its perihe-
lion, than it did before. For in the month of De-
cember it was commonly compar'd with the Stars of
the third magnitude, but in November* with thofe of
the firft or fecond. And fuch as fawtboth appearances,
have defcrib'd the firft, as of another and greater Comet
than the fecond. For November 10. this Comet ap-
pear'd to a young man at Cambridge, though with a
pale and dull light, yet equal to Sriea Virginis ; and at
that time (hone with greater bnghtnefs than it did

it
afterwards. And Montenarh Nov. 20. ft. vet. obferved

it larger' than the Stars of the firft magnitude, its tail be-
ing then z deg. long. And Mr. Storer, (by letters
which have come into my hands) writes, that in the
month of Dec. when the tail appear'd of the greateft bulk
and
Digitized by Google
•
Book IIL of Natural Thilofophf. 371
and fplendor, the head was but fmall, and far lefs than
that which was feen in the month of November before
Sun-rifing ; and conje&uring at the caufe of the ap-
pearance, he judg'd it to proceed from there being a
greater quantity of matter in the head at firft, which
was afterwards gradually fpent.
And, which further makes for the fame purpofe, I
find, that the heads of other Comets, which did put
iorth tails of the greateft bulk and fplendor, have ap-
peared but obfcure and fmall. For in £rafile y March
5. 166%. 7 P. Af. St. JV. P. VaUntinus Eftancius faw
h
a Comet near the horizon, and towards the fouth weft,

with a headfo fmall as fcarcely to bedifcern'd, but with a
above meafure fplendid, fo that the refle&ion there-
tail
of from the fea was eafily feen by thofe who flood

upon the (hoar. And it look'd like a fiery beam ex-
tended 1 3 0 in length from weft to fouth, almoft parallel
to the horizon.
tinu'd only three days decreafing apace afterwards,- and
while the fplendor was decreafing, the bulk of the
tail increas'd. Whence in Portugal, it is faid to have
taken up one quarter of the heavens, that is, 45 degrees,
extending from weft to eaft with a very notable fplen-
dor, though the whole tail was not feen in thofe parts,
becaufe the head was always hid under the horizon*
And from the increafe of the bulk, and decrcafe of the
fplendor of the tail, it appears that the head was then
in its recefs from the Sun, and had been very near to
it in its perihelion, as the Comet of 1680 was. And
we read , Saxon chronicle, of a like Comet
in the
appearing in the year 1 iotf, the Star whereof was fmall ~~
and obfcure, (as that of 16 So.) but the Jblendour of its

tail was very bright, and like a huge fiery beam ftretch'd
out in a direction between the eaft and north, as Hevelius
has it alfo from Simeon the monk of Durham. This
Comet appear'd in the beginning of February about the
I veqing, and towards the fouth weft part of heaven
B b 3 Froqa
Digitized by Google
From whence, and from the pofition of the tail, we

infer, that the head was near the Sun. Matthew Paris
fays, It was diftant from the Sun by about a cubit, from
three of the clocks (rather fix) till nine^ jutting forth a long
tail. Such was that moft refplcndent Comet, de-
alfo
fcribed by AriftotU* lib. i. Meteor. 6. The head where"
cf could not be jtcn, becaufe it had fit before the Sun y or
nt haft was hid under the Sun's rajs ; but next day it was
feen as well as might be. For having left the Sun but
a very little way* it Jet immediately after it. And the
feat erd light of the heady obfeur*d by the too great Jplen-
dor (of the tail) did not yet appear. But afterwards (as
Anftoile lay ) when the fplendor (of the tail) was now
ebminiflfd (the head of) the Comet recover' d its native
bright nefs j and the fplcndour (of its tail ) reach* d now to a
third part of the heavens (that is, to 6o°.) This appear-
ance wasin the winter fiafen, (an. 4. olymp. 10 1.) and
rifing to Orion'* girdle* it there vaniflSd away. It is
true that the Comet of 161 8, which came out direftly
from under the Sun's rays, with a very large tail, feem'd
to equal, not to exceed, the Stars of the firft mag-
if
nitude. But then abundance of other Comets have
appear'd yet greater than this, that put forth (horter
tails ; fome of which are faid to have appear'd as big
as Jupiter ; others as big as Venus, or even as the Moon.

We have faid, that Comets are a fort of Planets, re- *
volv'd in very eccentric orbits about the Sun. And

as in the Planets which are without tails, thofe are com-
monly which are revolv'd in lefler orbits, and
lefs,
rearer to the Sun ; fo in Comets it is probable, that

thofe which in their perihelion approach nearer to the
Sun, are generally of lefs magnitude, that they may
not agitate the Sun too much by their attraftions. But
as to the tranfverfe diameters of their orbits, and the
periodic times of their revolutions,I leave them to be
,
determin'd by comparing Comets together which af-

ter long intervals of tiqw return again in the fame or*
bit,
Digitized by Google
Book III. of Natural Thilofophy: 375
bit. In the mean time, the following propofition. may
give fome light in that enquiry.
Proposition XLII. Problem XXII.

9
T0 correft a Comet s trajectory found as above.
Operation I. A5ume l ^ at pofition of the plane

of the traje&ory which was determin'd according
to the preceding propofition. And fcleft three places
of the Comet, deduc'd from very accurate obfervations,
and at great diftances one from the other. Then fup-
pofe A to rcprefent the time between the firft obfer-
vation and the fecond; and B the time between the
fecond and the third. But it will be convenient that
in one of thofe times the Comet be in its perigeon,
or at leaft not far from it. From thofe apparent pla-^wlwe-
ces fincTEy trigonometric operations the three true pla*
ces of the Comet in that afTum'd plane of the trajecto-
ry ; then through the places found, and about the cen-
ter of the Sun as the focus, defcribe a conic fe&ion
by arithmetical operations, according to prop. 21.
book 1. Let the areas of this figure which are ter-
minated by radij drawn from the Sun to the places
found, be D
and E, to wit, D
the area between the
firft obfervation and the fecond, and E the area between
the fecond and third. And let Treprefent the whole

time, in which the whole area D+E fliould be de-
fcribed with the velocity of the Comet found by prop.
16". book 1.
Retaining the inclination of the plane of^v^s*^

Oper. 2.
the trajeftory tcTtfce plane of the ecliptic, let the lon-
gitude of the nodes of the plane of the trajectory
be increas'd by the addition of 20 or 30 minutes,
which call P. Then from the forcfaid three obferv'd
JtWio B b ^JteÛcU^ places
Digitized by Google
$76 Mathematical Trinciples Book 111.
places of the Comet, let the three true places be found

(as before) in this new plane, as alfo the orbit pafling
through thofe places, and the two areas of the fame
defcnb'd between the two obfervations, which call d
and e; and let t be the whole time in which the whole
area d + e fliould be defcrib'd.
Oper.$. Retaining the longitudeof the nodes in the firft
operation, let of the plane of the trajectory

the inclination
to the plane of the ecliptic be increas'd by adding there-
to zo' or 30, which call Q; Then from the fore-
faid" three pbierv'd apparent places of the Comet, let
the three true places be found in this new plane, as well
as the orbit paffing through them, and the two areas
of the fame defcrib'd between the obfervation, which
call £ and s, and let t be the whole time in which the
whoIe
c
area <T+ e rtiould be defcnb'd.
Then taking C to 1, as A to B; and
to 1, as G
D to Ej and g to 1, as d
and y to I, as
to e;
to s; let S be the true time between the firft obfer-
vation and the third ; and obferving well the figns
f
and —, let fuch numbers m
and » be found out as will
—
make 2 G—2C, = /»G—
mg-\-nG n ; and 1 T
—
i 2 S =: 7»T —
mt-\-nT ni. —
And, if in the firft
operation I reprefents the inclination of the plane of
the trajectory to the plane of the ecliptic, and .K the
longitude of either node, then I -|-»Q. will be the true in-
clination of the plane of the traje&ory to the plane of the
ecliptic; and K-|-*»P the true longitude of the node.
And laftly, if in the firft, fecond, and third operations,
the quantities R, r, and reprefent the parameters of
the traje&ory, aSd the quantities ~- , — ,the tranC?
yerfe diameters of the fame; thenR-|-i»r — —»R >wR-|-»$
will be the true parameter,

r and<— —
L~\-ml — mL-\ n A — wL
: ^ :
will be the true tranfverfe diameter of the trajeftory
Digitized by Go<
mm, aS^&sk
To face Page 377
—
•om
y 20
The obferid Places
Lflffg". £l 7°. O I OO .
72* places com-
putedin the orb.
^: 7
0
. 01 .29
z . 10 £«*/. 5. 21 .
39 OO .
21 .
38 .50
z .
45 £w/g\ £21 6 .
1 5 . OO 6 . 16 .
05
z .
40 Lat. S. 22 . 24 . 00 22 . 24 . 00
8 . 00 Long, £3 3 . 00 . 00 £s 3 .07 . 33
5 . 40 L*/. 5. 25 . 22 . 00 25 .21 .40
- —
Z/0/r^. fc^ 2 . 5& 00 SI 2 . . 56 . OO
k . 30 Lat. S. 49 . 25 00 49 . . 25 . 00
1 -
SO xn 28 • 40 .
30 II 28 .
43 . 00
! . OO Z,dA 5. 45 . 48 . OO 45 . 46 . 00
1 . OO Long, xt 1 3 • 03 . 00 n 13 05 00 . .
. • OO Lat. S. 39 .
54 . 00 39 -53-00
• 25 XI 2 . I O . OO n 2 . 18 .
30
. 00 Lat. S. 33 . 41 . 00 4o|
33 •
39 •
1
. 00 Z^flfg'. O 24 . 24 . OO b 24 . 27 . 00
.
30 Lat. S. 27 45. . 00 27 . 46 . 00
. 00 ^ 9 . 00 . 00 9 . 02 . 28
—
.
w
00
00
Lat. S.
b
12
7 •
. 36
05
.
.
00
40
12
b 7.08.4S
.
34. 13
I 00 Lat. S. 10 . 23 . 00
— —
1 .
Digitized by Googl
which the Comet defcribes. And from the tranfverfe dia-
meter given the periodic rime of the Comet is alfo given.
Q. £. /. But the periodic times of the revolutions of
Comets, and the tranfverfe diameters of their orbits,
cannot be accurately enough determin'd, but by compar-
ing Comets together which appear at different times. If
after equal intervals of time, feveral Comets are found
to have defcrib'd the fame orbit, we may thence con-*
elude, that they are all but one and the fame Comet
revolv'd in the fame orbit. And then from the times
of of their or-
their revolutions, the tranfverfe diameters
bits will be given ; and from thofe diameters the ellip-
tic orbits themfelves will be determin'd.
To this purpofe, the trajeftories of many Comets
ought to be computed, fuppofing thofe trajectories to">ttce/n-K
~Ge parabolic. For fuch trajeftories will always nearly
agree with the phenomena, as appears not only from the
parabolic trajeftory of the Comet of the year 1680,
which Icompar'd above with the obfervations, but
likewife from that of the notable Comet, which ap-
pear'd in the years 1664, and \66<>, and was obferv'd
by Hevelins ; who, from his own obfervations, calcu-
iated the longitudes and latitudes thereof, though with
Jittle accuracy. But from the fame obfervations Dr.
//alley did again compute its places ; and from thofe new-
places determin'd its trajeftory; finding its afcending
node in H 21 0 . 13'. 55"; the inclination of the orbit
to the plane of the ecliptic 21 0 . 18'. 40"; the diftance
of its perihelion from the node, eftimated in the Co-
met's orbit 49°. 27'. 30". its perihelion in £1 8°. 40'. 30";
with heliocentric latitude fouth, 16 0 . 01 . 45"; the juw
Comet to have been in its perihelion Nov. iq. d 11K 52'; .
P. M. equal time at London, or ij h . 8', at DantzJck*

O. S. and that the latns rcftum of the parabola was
410280' fuch parts as the Sun's mean diftance from
the Earth is fuppos'd to contain 100000. And how
nearly the places of the Cornet computed in this orbit
agree with the obfervations, will appear from theaa-
gexe4 table calculated by Dr. Halkj.
?
Digitized by Google
37* Mathematical Principles Book III.
In FebrtMYj) the beginning of the year 1665. the ift
1 4. j Star of Aries, which I (hall hereafter call y9 was in ~Y
mU ,
H^»8«. jo'. 15", with 70. 8'. smiorth lar. The 2d

Star of Aries was in Y 29 0 . 17'. 18", with 8°. 28'. 16".
. 1 north lat. And another Star of the feyenth magni-
tude which j ca „ Aj was in r 2 go.qr-^ wkh
8°. 28'. 33", uorth lat. The Comet a h
7 .7 . 30', at
Paris (that is Feb. y A .S h . 37', at Dantzackj O. S. made
a triangle with thofe Stars y and A, which was
right-angled in y. And the diftance of the Comet
from the Star y was equal to the diftance of the
Stars y and A, that is i°. 19'. 46", of a great circle;
and therefore in the parallel of the latitude of the
Star y it was i°. 20'. 26". Therefore if from the lon-
gitude of the Star y there be fubdu&ed the longitude
x°. 20'. 26", there will remain the longitude of the Co-
met T
27®. 9. 49". M. AnzjiHty from this obfervation
A^ ^ of his, placed the Comet in Y 27 0 . o', nearly. And by the

fcheme in which Dr. Hooke delineated its motion,
it was then in T 26°. 59'. 24". I place it in T 27 0
.
4'. 46'', taking the middle between the two extremes*

From the fame obfervation, M. Ahz*om made the la-
titude of the Comet at that time, 7 0 and 4' or 5' to
the north. But he had done better to have made it
uJ r i
'
I
7 0 3'. 29", the difference of thelatitudes of the Comet
.
and the Star y being equal to the difference of the lon-

gitude of the Stars y and A.
Feb. 2,2 d 7 h . 30', at London* that is, Feb. 22 a . 8 h 4^,
. .
at Dantzdck^ the diftance of the Comet from the Star

A, according to Dr. Hookas obfervation, as was deli-
'Jl
rv\wi\*c neated by himfelf in a fcheme, and alfo by the obfer-
vations of M. Auzjout^ delineated in like manner by
M. Petit, was a 5th part of the diftance between the
Star A
and the firft Star of Aries, or 15'. 57"; and
the diftance of the Comet from a right line joining the
Star A
and the firft of Aries, was a fourth part of the
fame 5th parr, that is 4. And therefore the Comet
was in Y 2 8°. 29. 45", with 5*"> D on h lar *
Alar*
zed by Googl
Book III. of Natural Thilofophy *.
379
h r
Mar. i, 7 . o', at London, that is, iWiir. I. 8 h* i(5 ,
at DantzAckz the Comet was obferv'd near the 2d Star
in Aries, the difhnce between them being to the dif-
eance between the firft and lecond Stars in Aries, that
is, to i°. 33', as 4 to 4f according to Dr. Hook$ y or
as 2 to 23 according to M. Gottignics. And therefore
the difhnce of the Comet from the 2d Star in Aries
was 8'. 16", according to Dr. Hooke, or 8'. 5", accord-
ing to M. Gottigniesi or taking a mean between both
8'. 10". But according to M.
Gottignks, the Comet
had gone beyond of
or a 5th part of the fpace, that
the id Star Aries, about a
it commonly went
4*^7^7^
over in a day, to wit, about i\ 35"; (in which he
agrees very well with M. Auz,ota) or according to Du
Hookey not quite fo much, as perhaps only I • Where- tJl *t t.
fore if to the longitude of the lit Star in Aries, we
add 1', and 8'. 10", to its latitude, we ihall have the
longitude of the Comet Y 29 0 18', with 8°. 36'. z6\
.
north lat.
Mar. 7. yK 30', at Paris (that Mar. h
is, 7. 8 . 37V
at Dantztickj) from the obfervationsof M. Auz,om, the
difhnce of the Comet from the 2d Star in Aries, was
equal to the difhnce of that Star from the Star A, that
is, 52'. 29"; and the difference of the longitude of the
Comet and the 2d Star in Aries was 4f', or 4^, or

taking a mean quantity 45^ 30". And therefore the
Comet was in X5 o # . i. 48". From the fcheme of the
obfervations of M. Auôut^ conftrufted by M. Petit9
Hevelim colle&ed the latitude of the Comet 8°. 54'.
But the engraver did not rightly trace the curvature ;<v^*J-<>
of the Comet's way toward the end of the motion : and t<* yvv.
HevcltHf in the fcheme of M. Axiom's obfervations
which he conftrufted himfelf, correfted this irregular * (
t
^^ "
curvature, and fo made the latitude of the Comet

8°. 55'. 30". And by farther corredting this irregu-
larity the latitude may become 8°. 5<*'> or 8°. 57'.
Digitized by Google
i$o Mathematical Trinciples Book III.
This Comet was alio feen Mar. 9, and at that time
its place muft have been in O o°. 18' with 9 0 . 3' £
north lat. nearly.
^ vt/)
This Comet appeared three months together, in which
v
fpace of time it travell'd over almoft fix figns, and
C(
in one of the days thereof defcrib'd almoft 20 deg.
Its courfe did very much deviate from a great circle,
r ,
^^
bending towards the north, and its motion towards the
retrograde became direct. And notwith-
*?**^S(fC end from,
ftanding its courfe wasTfo uncommon, yet by the ta-
v
^ ble it appears that the theory, frofn beginning to end,
agrees with the obfervations no Iefs accurately than
the theories of the Planets ufually do with the obfer-
vations of them. But we are to fubduft about 2'. when
v*^*^ Comet was fwifte ft, which we may effeft by ta-
i va«h
king off 12" from the angle between the afcending
node and the perihelion, or by making that angle 49 0 .
27. 18". The annual parallax of both thefe Comets

(this and the preceding) was very confpicuous, and by
its quantity demonftrates the annual motion of the
Earth in the arbis maqnus.
This theory is like wife confirm'd by the motion
of that Comet, which in the year 1683 appear'd re-
trograde, in an orbit whofe plane contain'd almoft a
right angle with the plane of the ecliptic, and whofe
afcending node (by the computation of Dr. Halkj)
was in 0
23 . 23'; the inclination of its orbit to the
0
ecliptic 83 . n'j its perihelion in U 25 °. 29'. 30"; its
perihelion diftance from the Sun 56020 of fuch parts
as the radius of the orbis magnus contains 100000;
and the time of its perihelion July 2 d . 3 h . 50'.
And the places thereof computed by Dr. Hdley in this
orbit, are compar'd with the places of the fame ob-
ferv'd by Mr. Fltmfaed, in the following table.
Digitized by Googl
look III. of Natural Thibfipky. 38t
O O ^ OnN 1^ Qs O O NN W + moo O
O O w O w to O O
; In.
O O N N
• • •
£ i 6 »o 6 h o o o
+++ 1111 1 I I I 11 +
O iîJ-WW^-'O U^n M O N GO N ~ i*
O «o to O
* ^
to O rt-N to O W> m
• • • ••*•••••• O O to
6 ~ -
«,3
++++ 1 1 + 1 I I I I I I III
?0 O Ooo O Ôoo o\>aO - wh oo h o
o v s o6 -4-^6 tO N "4*r^N ONVO N rj- CTs ti so vd OO
° on 6\ o\o6 oo vo vo u^^n 6 ~ crv toco iôo \6
* N to O O Q ^"OOvO tr\ N tÔO to U-» N fN» O

tJ- rj- r}- «0 ^lAWir\N
0 N O Vr> O - - O
• •
xvo 6no6 i>» ** oo vo 6 i^vo «- on
o o
6 °.
to
• • •
O too
« N N N «* N ~ n ~
s WOO
i-
O N
to rj- rj-
N
to to -«
NO\OM^N
O
mvO to OO QN O
m « tJ- io O O r<*>
"oo n vo vo o r^vo n ^- « ^ vo rôo

° On On OnOO -4-vd v6 ^- N 6 « On ioOO uooo v6
x
x
N
^t*
OO VO
-rt" O N
N Wtf)NN O
O O to N
to |\CO
N «-o rf-
N to
O to
^-oo-
M M CO
XUM>.N 6 N to *i ON 00 N NO WN
OtoOi-iNU-kTi-N - "tO Mrf-u^ o o • •
o«o»- O totor^NtoeoOvO to O j
M W M N N N ~ N
5-
O N to m 00 M tOVO
% O *o N to N to ON oo o
o ^-N N N to ~
* N tn toOO
•
O t\ ••••••• tr» io
<*t-O to
nv6 6 no6 i>» • • •
I O tO^tOtoO N
»n N 46 NO8O0 6
>->
M »ONO N to lO
to to m
CO ON 6 to
d M m m m W M N N
3
00
l
lO
^ÔN O to
^ uvO
ts
iriu^
ON ONVO n O ^- ^- N N
• «
(O <ON tO tO M M
. r, ^SO ON tovO 0O N tovO
^~**,-itttttOtO W <S CN»
This theory by the motion

is yet further confirm'd
of Comet, which appear'd in the year
that retrograde
1 58 2. The afcending node of this (by Dr. Hallefs
computation) was in b i6'. 30"; the inclination of
its
Digitized by Google
3 82 Mathematical Trinciples Book III,
0
its orbit to the plane of the ecliptic 17 . 56'. 00"; its
perihelion in XZ 2 0 . 52'. 50"$ its perihelion diftance from
the Sun 58528 parti, of which the radius of theor-
bis magnus contains 100000; the equal time of the Co-
met's being in its perihelion Sept. 4 d . j . 39'. And its
h
places, colleded from Mr. FUm(lccd\ observations, are

compar'd with its places computed from our theory, in
the following table.
«- 10 N r<^ + ,r, « "*T O "V"
Diff. Latitude
>
•
'0*
•
,
• •
N»*«*">Q«*>'"
• • • •
,
00© • • •
J—— —— J
I J1 1 L. 1 (_ 1 (_
Diff.
Longit.
X ••••••••••
OOOOOO
•
«>- - 0 0
I + 1 1 +++++ 1
Nor.
ir\ ret •« O — ur» N
Lat.
obferv'd
Tt
o i^ô \© vo 06
*2
i^N cKoo
9 *r>
n9
*? *T **
N M N N h « m « -
W N^NO
Long.' -4-^0 OO (j OnOO -4-
*^ ^" N tr> rr> tJ- «-r»
obferv'd.
1 o 00 4" dsvo 6 »^»v6
M H tl N N On
ri 6
— N N N
Com.
1 £N N WNg<{| M OOVO ET
, N O O OO
»
. .........
C TO M l^vO m
.
mvQ O ro
Lat.Nor.
comp.
tovO NO NO 00 N N »-• Q\ 00
•J s I - ^vd cK r^vd d n 6
m "^T ^ r? tr>rr '?"9 1
06 4-
^n
>
1
U *
3 1 a*
, N T'Ô — ONOO OnOO On
O •'Vsd N OnNO O *^
M M M
..
fi fffl CO N £) 0
Sun's
Place.
c t^v r^.00 CNÔ

m
N
~
Q\ N
Ni-i
eo\d l\
N N N
*0O 00 m 00 O l^WN NvOvO

tn O *j fO N CO
"t- ~+ N
n |
-C NNN NN
--OOOOOOOOO
VO *^>00 00 00 fs
00 p+
•adNd'-^»0 > d^"4* On
- a. N « N N
>~> tr>
< ^ §.
This
Digitized by Google
Book III. of Natural Thilofophy. 3 8 3
This theory is alfo confirmed by the retrograde mo-

tion of the Comet that appeared in the year 172. 3.
The afcending node of this Comet (according to the
computation of Mr. Bradley, Savilian Profeflbr of
Aftronomy at Oxford) was in Y 14 0 . 16'. The incli-
nation of the orbit to the plane of the ecliptic 49 0 . 59'.
Its perihelion was in 15'. 20". Its perihelion
diftance from the Sun 9080*51 parts, of which the ra-
dius of the orbis magnas contains 1000000, and the
equal time of its perihelion September i6 d io* h . io'. The .
places of this Comet computed in this orbit by Mr.

Bradley, and compared with the places obferved by him-
felf, his uncle Mr. Pound,
feen in tHelollowing table.

and Dr. HaiUy, may be ^ »
1723. Comet's Lat. Nor. Comet's Lat. Nor. Lh£ Diff.

Eq. Time. Long. obf. obf. Lon. com. comp. Lon. Lat.
I
d h / //
on. 9.8. 5 7.22.15 5. 2. 0\*w 7.21.26 5. 2.47 +49 —47

10.6.21 6.41.12 7.44.13 6.41.42 7.43.18 —50
12.7.22 5.39.58 11.55. °i 5.40. 1
n-54-55— 21 + 5
14.8.57 4.59.49 14.43. 5d 5. 0 37 14.44. -48 —
1 'I I
15.6.35 4.47.41 15.40.51 4- 47-45 15.40.55 — 4,— 4

21.6.22 4* 2.32 19.41.49 4. 2.21 19.42. Hi—
3
22.6.24 3.59. 2 20. 8 12 3 59-io 8.17 — 8-
20. 5
24.8. 3-S5- 2 9 20.55.18 3.55.11 20.55. 9 + 18 9
29.8.56 3.56.17 22.20.27 3.56.42 22.20. 10 —25 -^-17
30.6.20 3.58. 9 22.32.28 3.58.17 22.32.1 — 8 4-i6i
Nov. 5.5 53 4.16.30 2 3-38-33 4.16.23 23.38. 7 + 7 -t-26
8.7. 4.29.36 24. 4.30 4*9-54 24. 4.40 —18 —10
14.6.20 5. 2.16 24.48.46 5. 2.51 24.48.16 —35 +30
20.7.45 5.42.20 25.24.45 5- 43 13 25.25.17 53 32
Dec. 7.6.45! 8. 4.13 26.54.18 8. 3.55 26.53.42 +18I-+ 36
From thefe examples it is abundantly evident, thac

the motions of Comets are no lefs accurately repre-
fented by our theory, than the motions of the Pla-
nets commonly are by the theories of them. And
therefore, by means ot this theory, we may enumerate
the orbits of Comets, and fodifcover the periodic time . v
of a Comet's revolution in any orbit ; whence at laft we ^

ihall
Digitized by Google
, 3«+ Mathematical Trinciples Book III.
fhall have the tranfverfe diameters of their elliptic or-
bits and their aphelion diftances.
That retrograde Comet which appear'd in the year
1607, defcrib'd an orbit whofe afcending node (accord-
ing to Dr. Halle]' s computation) was in b 20°. zi'
and the inclination of the plane of the orbit to the
plane of the ecliptic 17 0 . 2'; whofe perihelion was in
SS 2°. 16'; and its perihelion diftance from the Sun
58680 of fuch parts as the radius of the orbis magntts
contains 100000. And the Comet was in its perihe-
lion OB ober i6 . $ h jo'. Which orbit agrees very near-
<{
.
ly with the orbit of the Comet which was feen in

1682. If thefe were not two different Comets, but one
and the fame, that Comet will finifti one revolution in
the fpace of 75 years. And the greater axe of its orbic
w ill be to t he greater axe of the orbis magnus^ as
*^ : 77^ t0 Joo, nearly. And
75*75 t0 oras I
Comet from the Sun will

the aphelion diftance of this
be to the mean diftance of the Earth from the Sun
as about 5f to I. From which data it will be no
£«WvX- Jiaid matter to determine the elliptic orbit of this Co-
met. But thefe things are to be fuppofed, on con-
dition, that after the fpace of 75 years the fame Co-
met fhall return again in the fame orbit. The other
clW- Comets feem toafcend to greater bright?, and to re-
1 < idU l H u m
'
a on B er " me 10 perform their revolutions.

'
1
But becaufe of the great number of Comets, of the
great diftance of their aphelions from the Sun, and of
»
w
M i the flownefs of their motions in the aphelions, they
'
* will,T>y7Fieir mutual gravitations, difturb each other:
fo that their eccentricities and the times of their re-
volutions will be fometimes a little increafed, and fome-
v
times diminilhed. Therefore we are not to expeft that
C
)
(
*
' the fame Comet will return exa&ly in the fame orbit,
and in the fame periodic times. It will be fufficient if we
find the changes no greater, than may arife from the
caufes juft fpoken of. •
^-r*^
,
trn And
Digitized by Google
Book III. cf Natural Thilofophy. 385
And hence a reafon may be affign'd why Comets
are not comprehended within the limits of a zodiac
as the Planets are; but, being confined to no bounds, 1\,Ux\l/
are with various motions difpers'd
all over the heaven?;
namely, to thispurpofe, that in their aphelions, where ju\<C«^f

m
their motions are exceeding flaw, receding* to greater
diftances one from another they may fuffer Ids dif-
turbance from their mutual gravitations. And hence
it is, that the Comets which defcend the loweft, and
therefore move the floweft in their aphelions, ou gjit /vxiw'ttw
alfo to afcend the highefh > L \ w<u jv*m.«S>*
The Comet which was
appear'd in the year 16*80.
in its from the Sun than by a
perihelion lefs diftant
fixth part of the Sun's diameter: and becaufe of its
extreme velocity in that proximity to the Sun, and
fome denfity of the Sun's atmofphere, it muft have
fuffer'dfome refinance and retardation ; and therefore,
being attracted fomething nearer to the Sun in every
revolution will at lad fall down upon the body of to***-* *f
the Sun. Nay where it moves the vvo
in its aphelion,
floweft, it may fometimes happen to be yet farther
retarded by the attractions or other Comets, and in
confequence of this retardation defcend to the Sun.
So fixed Stars that have been gradually wafted by the
light and vapours emitted from them for a long time,
may be recruited by Comets that fall upon them; and*/*t&4
from this frefti fupply of new fewel, thofe old Stars, r_
acquiring ne\F fplendor, may j&fsfor new Stars. Of «.£f?o^««
this kind are fuch fixed Stars as appear on a fudd en ./uu,d
and Ihine with a WQnderjul brightnefs at firft, and rf-^^^g
terwards vanifli by little and little. Such was that
Star which appeared in Caffiopeias chair; which Corne-
km Gemma, did not fee upon the 8th of November
J
1572, though he was obferving that part of the hea-

vens upon that very night, and the skie was perfect- -
ly ferene 5 but the next night {Nov. 9.) he faw it

jfhining much brighter than any of the fixed Stars,
LxiAu&'y C c—
—— .
and -«
Digitized by Google
3 stf Mathematical Principles Book III.
*nd fcarccly inferiour to Venn* in fplendor. Tycbe

Sr*^ e âw * c u P on r 'ie 1 xt ^ °^ ame mont k w ien
eW^*^
U
^ !
c flionc with the greateft luftre; and from that

time
LU t&c
*
he ~obTerv'd it to decay by little and little; and in

i ttax j ^ mont hs time it entirely difappear'd. In the month
of November, whtn it firft appeared, its light was equal
to that of Venus. In the month of December its light
i was a little diminifhed, and was now become equal to
j<Mi*-
(hat of Jupiter. In January 1575. it was lefs than
Jupiter and greater than Sirius, and about the end of
February and the beginning of March became equal to
that Star. In the months of April and May it was
equal to a Star of the id magnitude. In June, July
and Mgufi to a Star of the }d magnitude. In Septem-
ber, Otlober and November to thofe of the 4th mag«
nitude, in December and January 1574. to thofe of
the 5 th, in February to tnofe or the 6th magnitude,
and in March it entirely vaniflied. Its colour at the
U«mA~s beginning was clear, bright and inclining to white, after-
wards it turned a little yellow, and in March 1575.
it became ruddy like Mars or Aldebaran ; in May it
1$*** cumKTto i^Tnd of>cJusty yjhitenjfs like that we ob-
ferve in Saturn, and that colour it retained ever after,
\^"AyhLj]but growing always more and more obfeure. Such
eVtut^«Kj]f0 was^H£ Star in the right foot of Scrpcntarius, which
_i Kepler's fcholars obferved September 50. O. S* 1604,
firfl:
with a light exceeding that of Jupiter, tho* the night

before it was not to be feen. And from that time it
decreased by little and little, and in 15 or 16 months
entirely difappeared. Such anew Star, appearing with
an unufual lplendor, is faid to have moved Hipparchus
to obferve, and make a catalogue of, the fixed Stars.
As and difappear by
to thofe fixed Stars that appear
.uUUvvA Wrns, and encreafe flowly and by degrees, and fcgtt
ever exceed the StarsTof the }d magnitude, they feem
to be of another kind, which revolve about their axes,
and having a light and a dark fide, fhew thofe two
1
different
Digitized by Google
Book III. of Natural Vhtlofophy. 3S-7
different fides by turns. The vapours which arite
from the Sun, the fixed Stars, and the tails of the
Comets, may meet at laft with, and fall into, the at-
mofpheres of the Planets by their gravity ; and there
be condenfed and turned inrA. water and humid fpi-A*wA»x^
rits, and from thence by a flow heat pafs~gradually
into the form of falts, and'fulphurs, and tin&ures, and ,
mud, and clay, ancTland, and ftones, and coral, and other
terreftial fubftancesf
lVt " c
V* ^ i
General Scholium;
The hypothefis of Vortices is prefs'd with many
difficulties. That every Planet by a radius drawn to
the Sun may defcribe areas proportional to the times
of defcription, the periodic times of the feveral parts
of the Vortices mould obferve the duplicate propor-
tion of their diftances from the Sun. But that the
periodic times of the Planets may obtain the fefqui-
plicate proportion of their diftances from the Sun,
the periodic times of the parts of the Vortex ought
to be in the fefquiplicate proportion of their diftan-
ces. That the fmaller Vortices may maintain their lcfTer
revolutions about Saturn^ Jupiter, and other Planets,
and fwim quietly and undifturb'd in the greater Vor-
tex of the 'Sun, the periodic times of the parts of
the Sun's Vortex (hould be equal. But the rotation
of the Sun and Planets about their axes, which ought
to correfpond with the motions of their Vortice?, re-
cede far from all thefe proportions. The motions of
the Comets are exceeding regular, are governed by the
fame laws with the motions of the Planets, and can
by no means be accounted for by the hypothefis of
Vortices. For Comets are carry'd with very ec-
centric motions through all parts of the heavens in-
with a freedom that
differently, is incompatible with
the notion of a Vortex.
m
' '
C
«
c z Bodies
Digitized by Google
3*s Mathematical "Principles Book ill.
Bodies, projected in our air, fuffer no refifhnce but

from the air. Withdraw the air, as is done in Mr.
Boyle's vacuum, and the refiftance ceafes. For in this
void a bit of fine down and a piece of folid gold de-
fcend with equal velocity. And the parity of reafon
mult take place in the celeftial fpaces above the Earth's
atmofphere; in which fpaces, where there is no air to
ulift their motions, all bodies will move with the
greateft f reedom ; and the Planets and Comets will
conftantly purfue their revolutions in orbits given in
kind and pofition, according to the laws above ex-
plain'd. But though thefe bodies may indeed perfe-
by the mere laws of gravity, yet
vere in their orbits
they could by no means have at firft deriv'd the re-
gular pofition of the orbits themfelves from thofc
laws.
The fix primary Planets are revolv'd about the Sun,
in circles concentric with the Sun, and with motions
direfted towards the fame parts and almoft in the fame
plane. Ten Moons are revolv'd about the Earth, Ju-
piter and Saturn, in circles concentric with them, with the
fame direftion of motion, and nearly in the planes of the
orbits of thofe Planets. But it is not to be conceived that
mere mechanical caufes could give birth to fo many
regular morions: fince the Comets range over all parts
of the heavens, in very eccentric orbits. For by
that kind of motion they pafs eafily through the orbs
of the Planets and with great rapidity ; and in their
aphelions, where they move the floweft, and are de-
tain'd the longeft, they recede to the greateft diftances
from e«ch other, and thence fufFer the leaft difturbance
from their mutual attractions. This xnoft beautiful
Syftem of the Sun, Planets and Comets, could only
proceed from the counfel and dominion of an intelligent
and powerful being. And if the fixed Stars are-the cen-
ters of other like fyftems, thefe being form'd by the
like wife counfel, muft be all fubieft to the dominion
2. - Of
Digitized by Google
Book III. of Natural Wilofophy. 3 S 9
of One; ofthe fixed Scars is of
efpecially, fince the light
the fame nature with the light of the Sun, 'and from
every fyftem light pafles into all the other fyftems.
And left thefyftemsof the fixed Stars Ihould, by their
gravity, fall on each other mutually, he hath placed
thofe Syftems at immenfediftances one from another.

This Being governs all things, not as the foul of
the world, but as Lord over all : And on account of
his dominion he is wont to be called Lord God ttocvto-
x£*V«£, or Vniverfal Ruler. For God is a relative word,
and has arefpeft tofervants; and Deity is the dominion
of God, not over his own body, as thofe imagine who
fancy God to be the foul of the world, but over fervants.
The fupreme God is a Being eternal, infinite, abfolutely
perfed; but a being, however perfeft, without domi-
nion, cannot be faid to be Lord God ; for we fay, my
God, your God, the God of ffrael, the God of Gods,
and Lord of Lords ; but we do not fay, my Eternal,
your Eternal, the Eternal of Ifrael, the Eternal of Gods
we do not fay, my Infinite, or my Perfed Thefe are :
titles which have no refpedt to (ervants. The word

God ufually a fignifies Lord ; but every lord is not a God.
It is the dominion of a fpiritual being which conftitutes
a God ; a true, fupreme or imaginary dominion makes
a true, fupreme or imaginary God. And from his true
dominion it follows, that the true God is a Living, Intel-
ligent and Powerful Being; and from his other perfecti-
ons, that he is Supreme or mod Perfect. He is Eter-
nal and Infinite, Omnipotent and Omnifcient ; that is,
his duration reaches from Eternity to Eternity; his
a
Dr. Pocock derives the Latin word Deus from the Arabic du9
fin the oblique cafe di9 ) which fignifies Lord, And in this fenfe
Princes are called Gods, rjal. lxxxii. ver. 6. and John x. ver. 35.
And Mofes is called a God to his brother Aaron, and a God to Pha-
raoh (Exod. iv. ver. 16. and vii. ver. 8. And in the fame fenfe
the fouls of dead Princes were formerly, by the Heathens, called
gods, but falfly, becaufe of their want of dominion.
Cc 5 prefeacc
Digitized by Google
390 Mathematical"Principles Book III.
prefence from Infinity to Infinity; hegovernsall things,
and knows all things that are or can be done. Fie isnoc
Eternity or Infinity, but Eternal and Infinite ; he is
not Duration or Space, but he endures and is prefenr.
He endures for ever, and is every where prefent ; and
by exifting always and every where, he conflitutes Du-
ration and Space. Since every particle of Space is 4/-
waySy and every indivifible moment of Duration is every
-where, certainly the Maker and Lord of all things can-
not be never and no where. Every foul tr>at has per-
ception is, though in different rimes and in different
organs of fenfe and motion, ftill the fame indivifible
perfon. There are given fucceflive parts in duration,
co-exiftent parts in fpace, but neither the one nor the
other in the perfon of a man, or his thinking principle;
and much lefs can they be found in the thinking fub-
ftancejof God. Every man,fo far as he is a thing that
has perception, one and the fame man during his
is
>whole life, in all and each of his organs of fenfe. God

is the fame God, always and every where. He is om*
niprefent, not virtually only, but alfo fubjimtially ; for
virtue cannot fubfift without fubftance. In him b are
all things contained and moved; yet neither affefts
the other : God fuffers nothing from the motion of
bodies; bodies find no refiftance from the omniprefence
of God. 'Tis allowed by all that the fupreme God
exifts neceflarily ; and by the fame neceffity he exifts
~
a 1 L _ I. II I
I .
b
This was the opinion of the Ancients. So Pythagoras in C*eer*
ie Nat. Deor. lib. i. Tbales, Anaxagoras, Virgil* Georg. lib. iv.
ver. 220. and yEneid. lib. vi. ver. 721. Pbilo Al/egor. at the be-
ginning of lib. i. Aratus in his Phaenorn. at the beginning. So
alfo the facred Writers, as St. Paul* A3s xvii. ver. 27, 28. St.
Jobffi Gofp. chap. xiv. ver. 2. M:fes '% Deut. iv. ver. 39. and
x. ver. 14. David* Pfal. exxxix. ver. 7, 8, 9. Solomon* 1 Kings viii.
ver. 27. Job xxii. ver. 12, 13, 14. Jeremiah xxiii. ver. 23, 24.
The Idolaters fuppofed the Sun, Moon and Stars, the Souls of
Men, and other parts of the world, to be parts of the fupreme Goi.
and therefore to be worOiipped : but erroncoufly.
Digitized by Google
always and every where. Whence alfo he is all fimilar,
all eye> all ear, all brain, all arm, allpower to perceive,
to underftand, and to aft ; but in a manner not at all
human, in a manner not at all corporeal, in manner ur-
a
terly unknown to us. As a blind man no idea of

has
colours, fo have we no idea of the manner by which the
all-wife God perceives and underftands all things. He
is utterly void of all body and bodily figure, and can
therefore neither be feen, nor heard, nor touched ; nor
ought he to be worfliipped under the reprefentation of
any corporeal thing. We
have ideas of his attributes,
but what the real fubftance of any thing is, we know
not. In bodies we fee only their figures and colours, we
hear only the founds, we touch only their outward
furfaces, we fmell only the fmells, and tafte the favours
but their inward fubftances are not to be known, either
by our fenfis, or by any reflex aft of our minds ; much
lefs then have we any idea of the fubftance of God.
We know him only by hismoft wife and excellent con-

trivances of things, and final caufes ; we admire him
for his perfeftions; but we reverence and adore him on
account of his dominion. For we adore him as his fer-
vants ; and a God without dominion, providence, and
final caufes, is nothing elfe but Fate and Nature. Blind
metaphyfical neceffity, which is certainly the fame al-
ways and every where, could produce no variety of
things. All that diverfity of natural things which we
find, fuited to different times and places,could arifc
from nothing but the ideas and will of a Being neceffa-
rily exifting. But by way of allegory, God is faid to
fee, to fpeak, to laugh, to love, to haxe, to defire, to
give, to receive, to rejoice, to be angry, to fighr, to
frame, to work, to build. For all our notions of God
are taken from the ways of mankind, by a certain fimi-
litude which, though not perfeft, has fome likenefs
however.
——— - .
And
—— - —
thus
-- -
much concerning God ; to dif-
Cc 4 co^rfc
Digitized
392 Mu thematical "Principles Boot III.
courfe of whom from the appearances of things, does
certainly belong to Natural Philofophy.
Hitherto wc have explain'd the phenomena of the
heavens and of our fea, by the power of Gravity, but
have not yet aflign'd the caufe of this power. This
is certain, that it rauft proceed from a caufe that pene-
trates to the very of the Sun and Planets,

centers
without fufferingthe diminution of its force; that
leaft
operates, not accoiding to the quantity of the furfaccs

of the particles upon which it a&s, (as mechanical
caufcs u(e to do,) but according to the quantity of the
folid matter which they contain, and propagates its
virtue on all fides, to immenfe diftances, decreafing al-
ways in the duplicate proportion of the diftances. Gra-
vitation towards the Sun, made up out of the gravi-
is
tations towards the feveral particles of which the body

of the Sun is compos'd; and in receding from the Sun,
decreafes accurately in the duplicate proportion of the
diftances, as far as the orb of Saturn, as evidently ap-
pears from the quiefcence of the aphelions of the Pla-
ners ; nay, and even to the remoteft aphelions of the Co-
mets, if thofe aphelions arealfoquicfcent. But hither-
to I have not been able to difcover the caufe of thofe
properties of gravity from phenomena, and I frame
no nyporhefes. For whatever is not dedue'd from the
phenomena, is to be called ar* hypothefis 5 and hypo-
thefes, whether metaphyfical or phyfical, whether of
occult qualities or mechanical, have no place in expe-
rimental philofophy. In this philofophy particular pro-
pofitions are inferr*d from the phenomena, and after-
wards render *d general by induction. Thus it was that
the impenetrability, the mobility, and the impulfive force
of bodies, and the laws of motion and of gravitation, were
difcovered. And to us it is enough, that gravity does
really exift, and aft according to the laws which we
Jiave explained, and abundantly ferves to account for all
the motions of the celeftial bodies, and of our fea.
And
zed by Google
Book III. of Natural Thibfophf. 39j
And now we might add fomething concerning a cer-

tain moft fubtle Spirit, which pervades and lies hid in
all grofs bodies; by the force and a&ion of which Spi-
rit, the particles of bodies mutually attraft one another
at near diftances, and cohere, if contiguous; and elec-
tric bodies operate to greater diftances, as well repelling
as attra&ing the neighbouring corpufcles ; and light is
emitted, refle&ed, refrafted, infle&ed, and heats bodies
and all fenfation is excited, and the members of animal
bodies move at the command of the will, namely, by
the vibrations of this Spirit, mutually propagated along
the folid filaments of the nerves, from the outward or-
gans of fenfe to the brain, and from the brain into the
raufcles. But thefe are things that cannot be explained
in few words, nor are wefumilh'd with that fufficiency
of experiments which is required to an accurate deter-
mination and demonftration of the laws by which this
eleftric and elaftic fpirit operates.
Digitized by Google
INDEX.
The firjl number denotes the Volume, the ft-
cond the; *Page 5 nnlefs where a fettion is
referred to.
A. Apfides, their motion fhewn I,
Sect. q. p. 177
Quinoxes, their prc- Areas whicn revolving bodies, by
ceffion radii drawn to the centre of
the caufe of that mo- force, defcribe,compared
tion fliewn II, 252 with the times of defcrip-
the quantity of that motion tion I, 57, 60, 62, 220,
computed from the caufes 231
II, 320 Attraction of all bodies demon-
Air, ftrated II, 225
its denfitv at any height, col- the certainty ot this demon-
lected by Prop. 22. Book. II. flration (hewn II, 203 ; the
and its denfity at the height caufe or manner thereof no
of one femidiameter of the where deiined by the Au-
Earth fhewn II, 366 thor II, 392
its elaftic force, what caufe it Js, the mathematical fignificati-
may be attributed to II, 77 on of this worot defined I,
its gravity compared with

that of water II, 366
its refiftance, collected by ex- C.
periments of pendulums II,
99; the fame more accu- Centre,
rately by experiments of the common center of gravi-
falling bodies, and a Theory ty of many bodies does not
II, 160 of motion or
alter its ftate
Angles of contact not all of the reft by the actions of the
fame kind, bur fome in£- bodies among themfdvcsl,
jii:cJy }efs than others I. 53
the
Digitized by Google
I N *D EX.
the common centre of gravi- more of themobfervedin trie
ty of the Earth, Sun, and hemifpherc towards the

all the Planets is at reft II, Sun, than in the oppoilte
232 ; confirmed by Cor. 2. hemifphere ; and how thii
Prop. 14. Book 3. comes to pafsll, 330
rhe common centre of gravi- fliineby the Sun's light re-
ty of the Earth and Moon flectedfrom them II, 330
goes round the orbis mag- furrounded with vaft auno-
nus II, 235 ; its diftance fpheresll, 327,331
from the Earth and from thofewhich come near eft to
the Moon II, 3 1 the Sun probably the lcaft,
Centre of the forces by which II, 374

revolving bodies are retain- why they are not compre-
ed in their orbits, how in- hended within a zodiack,
dicated by the defcription like the Planets, but move
of areas I, 63 ; how
found differently into all parts of
by the given velocities of the Heavens II„ 385
the revolving bodies I, 67 may fomctimes fail into the
Circle, bv what law of centri- Sun, and afford a new fup-
petal force tending to any ply of fire II, 38c
given point, its circumfe- the ufe of them hinted II,
rence may be defcribed I,
64, 70, 73 move in conic fcttions, having
Conic fections, by what law of their foci in the Sun's cen-
centripetal force tending to tre, and by radij drawn to>
any given point they may be the Sun defcribe areas pro-
defcribed by revolving bo- portional to the times.
dies I, 93 Move in ellipfes if they
the geometrical defcription of come round again in their
them when the foci are orbits, but thefe ellipfes
given I, Sect. 4. will be near to parabolas
when the foci are not given I, II, 332
Sea. 5. Comet's parabolic trajectory
when the centres or afymp- found from three obferva-
totcs are given 1, 132 tions given II, 340 1 cor-
Comets rected when found II, 375
of Planets, not meteors
a fort Comet's place in a parabola
11,331,360 found to a given time II,
higher than the Moon, and 333 j I, 143
in the planetary regions II, Comet's velocity compared witk
323 the velocity of the Planets
their diftance
very nearly bv
how collected A 332
Comets Tails
11,324 dircftcd from the Sun II, 364
brightcft
Digitized by Google
I NV E X.
fcrighteft and largeft immedi- Cylinder, the attraction of a
ately after their paffage thro' Cylinder compofed of at-
the neighbourhood of the tracting particles , whofe
Sun Ii. 361 forces are reciprocally as
their wonderful rarity II, 367 the fquare of the diilanccs

their origin e and nature II, I, 30*
327, 509
in what ipacc of time they al- D.
cend from the heads II, 367
Comet of the years 1 664 and Defcent of heavy bodies in
i66e vacuo, how much it is H,

the obfervations of its motion 240
compared with the theory Defcent or afcent rectilinear, the
U, 377 fpaces defcribed, the times
Comet of the years 1680 and of defcription, and the ve-
16S1 locities acquired in fuch af-
obfervations of its motion II, cent or defcent, compared,
on the fuppofition of any
.344.
its motion computed in a pa- kind of centripetal force I,
350 ; in an
rabolic orbit II, Sea. 7.
elliptic orbit II, 352 Defcent and afcent of bodies in
its trajectory, and its tail in refilling mediums II, 4, 22,
the fevcral parts of its orbit, 24> 47» 50, 145

delineated II,
358
Comet of the year 1682 E.
its motion compared with the
theory II, 382 Earth,
feems to have appeared in the its dimenfion by Norwood, by
year 1 607, and likely to re- Picart,and by Caffini II,
turn again after a period of 240
75 years II, 384 its figure difcovcred, with the
Comet of the year 1683 proportion of its diameters,
its motion compared with the and the meafure of the de-
theory II, 381 grees upon the meridian II,
Comet of the year 1723 *39> 2 45
its motion compared with the the eicefs of its height at the
theory II, 383 equator above its height at

Curves diilinguimed into geo- the poles II, 243, 2J1
metrically rational and geo- its greateft and leail lemidia-
metrically irrational I, 148 meter II, 243 ; its mean
Curvature of figures how efti- femidiameter ibid.
mated II, 32; II, 267 the globe of Earth more denfe
Cycloid or epicycloid, than if it was entirely water
its re&iflcation 1, 199, 200 II, 230
f
its evoluta I, 204 the nutation of its axis II, 252
Digitized by Google
1 N T> E X.
the annual motion thereof in the abfolute quantity of cen-
the orbis magnus demon- tripetal force defined I, 6
ftratedll, 380 the accclerative quantity of
the eccentricity thereof how the fame defined ik
much II, 299 the motive quantity of the
the motion of its aphelion fame defined I, 7
how much II, 237 the proportion thereof to any
Ellipiis, known force how collected
by what law of centripetal 1,66
force tending to the centre the invention of the centri-
of the figure it is defcribed petal forces, when a body
by a revolving body I, 75 is revolved in a non-refift-
by what law of centripetal fting fpace about an im-
force tending to the focus moveable centre, in any or-
of the figure it is defcribed bit I, Sea. 2. and 3.
by a revolving body 1, 79. the centripetal forces tending
to any point by which any
F. figure may be defcribed by
a revolving body, being gi-
Fluid, the definition thereof I, ven ; the centripetal forces
tending to any other point,
Fluids, the laws of their denfity by which the fame figure
and compreffion ftiewn II, may be defcribed in the
Sett. 5. fame periodic time, are alfo>
tkeir motion in running out given I, 72
at an hole in a veil el deter- the centripetal forces by which
mined II, 1
24 any figure is defcribed by
Forces a revolving body, being
their compofition and refolu- given ; there are given the
tion I, 22 forces by which a new
of fphaerical
attractive forces figure may be defcribed, if
bodies, compofed of parti- the ordinates are augment-
cles attracting according to ed or diminifhed in any
any law, determined I, Sect. given ratio, or the angle
12. of their inclination be any
attractive forces of bodies not how changed, the periodic
fphaerical compofed of par- time remaining the fame I,
ticles attracting according 77
to any law determined I, centripetal forces decreafing
Sea. 13. in the duplicate proportion
Force of thediftances, what figures
centrifugal force of bodies on may be defcribed by them
the Earth's scquator, how I, 8 c, 222
great II, 240 a centripetal force that is reci-
ccn&ipeul force defined 1, 4. procally a? the cube of the
ordinate
Digitized by Google
I N <D E X.
ordinate tending to a vaftly
remote centre of force will H.
caufc a body to move in
any given conic fe£Uon I, Heat, fin iron rod increafes in
length by heat II, 250
a centripetal force that is as of the Sun, how great at
the cube of the ordinate different diftances from the

tending to a vaftly remote Sun II, 360
centre of force will caufe a how great in Mercury II, 229
body to move in an hyper- how great in the Comet of
bola I, 310 1 680, when in its perihelion
36.
11,
G. Heavens
are void of any fenfible refin-
ir, 389 ance II, 231, 331, 369,
Gravity, and therefore of almoft any
of a different nature from corporeal fluid whatever
magnetical force II, 225 161, 162
ttutual between the Earth fufFer light to pafs through
and its parts I, 37 them without any retracti-
the caufe of it not afiigned H, on, II, 362

392 Hydroflaties, the principles
tends towards the Planets
all thereof delivered II, Secl.5.
If, 219; from the furfa- Hyperbola
ces of the Planets upwards by what law of centrifugal
decreafes in the duplicate force tending from the cen-
ratio of the diftances from tre of the figure it is de-
the centre II, 229 ; from fcribed by a revolving body
the fame downwards de- I. 77
,
creafes nearly in the Ample by what law of centrifugal
ratio of the fame II, 229 force tending from the fo-
fends towards all bodies, and cus of the figure it is de*
is proportional to the quan- fcribed by a revolving body
tity of matter in each II, 1,82
.22c by what law of centripetal
is the force by which the Moon force tending to the focui
is retained in its orbit II, of the figure it is defcrib-
ed by a revolving body I#
the fame proved by an accu- 8t
311,312.
rate calculus II, Hypothefes of what kind foever
is the force by which the rejected from this philoioj
primary Planets and the phy II, 39|
Satellites of Jupiter and
Saturn are retained in their
orbits 11,219
Digitized by Google
INDEX.
an incurvation of light about
the extremities of bodies
i.
obferved by experiments I,
Jupiter, 316
its periodic time TI, z o 1
its diftance from the Sun H, M.

21
Magnetic force I, 37 ; II, 79,
its apparent diameter II, 207
its true diameter II, 228
Mars,
its attractive force how great
its periodic time II, 210
II, 227
its diftance from the Sun II,
the weights of bodies on its
2(1
furface II, 228
the motion of its aphelion Efj
its denfity ib.
2 37
its quantity of matter to. XM
Matter,
its perturbation by Saturn
how much II,
quantity of matter defined
234
the proportion of its diame-
its vis infita defined L 2
ters exhibited by compu- .
its imprefled force defined I, j

tation II, 244; and compa-
its extenfion, hardnefs, impe-
red with obfervations ib.
netrability, mobility, vis
and 245
its rotation about its axis in
inerti<t> gravity, how difco-
vercdll, 203
what time performed II,
fubtlc matter of Dcs-Cartes
244 enquired into II, 1 07
the caufe of its belts hinted
Mechanical Powers explained
at 11,331
and deraonftrated I, 3S
Mercury,
its periodic time II, 210
its diftance from the Sun II,
Ught, 211
its propagation not inflanta- the motion of its aphelion II,
neous I, 316; not caufed
237
by the agitation of any ethe- Method
real medium II, 1 8 of firft and laft ratios I, Sect. 1
its velocity different in diffe- of transforming figures into
rent mediums I, 313 others of the fame analyti-
ft certain reflection it fome- cal order I, 1 2
times fufFers explained I, of fluxions II, 17
differential II, 333
its refraction explained I, 3 1 of finding the quadratures of
refraction is not made in the all curves very nearly true.
fingle point of incidence I,
3'7
Of
Digitized by Google
2 4
/ N <D E X.
$f converging feries applied revolves more flowly, in J
to the folution of difficult dilated orbit, when the
problems I, 187,189,302, node is in the fyzygieswith
II, 32, 286 the Sun ; and more fwifdy,
00 n in a contracted orbit, when
the figure of body collect-
its the node is in the quadra-
ed by calculation U, 3 1 tures II, 301
its Iterations explained II, 23 8 moves flower in its quadra-
its mean apparent diameter tures with the Sun, fwifter
in the fyzygies ; and by a
its true diameter, ibid. radius drawn to the Earth

weight of bodies on its fur- describes an area, in the
face ibid, firft cafe lefs in proportion
its denfity ibid. to the time, in the laft cafe
its quantity of matter ibid. greater II, 252 I the ine-

its mean diftance from the quality of thofe areas com-
Earth, how many greateft puted II, 263 i its orbit is
femidumeters of the Earth more curve, and goes far-

contained therein ibid, how ther from the Earth in the
many mean femidiamcters firft cafe ; in the laft cafe
.
n >3*3 its orbit is lefs curve, and
its force to move the Sea how comes nearer to the Earth
306 ; not percep-
great II, II, 252 ; the figure of this
tible inexperiments of pen- orbit and the proportion of

dulums or any ftatical or its diameters collected by
hydroftatical obfervationsll, computation II, 267 ; a me-
310 thod of finding the Moon's
itsperiodic time II, 3 1 diftance from the Earth by
the time of its fynodical revo- its horary motion ibid.
lution II, 266 its apogaeon moves mere flow-
its motions and the inequali- ly when the Earth is in its

ties of the fame derived aphelion, more fwiftly in
from their caofcs 11,252,298 the perihelion II, 253, 299
revolves more flowly, in a di- its apogaeon goes forward moll
lated orbit, when the Earth fwiftly when in the fyzy-
is in its perihelion ; and gies with the Su n ; and goes
more fwiftly in the aphelion backward in the quadra-
the fame, its orbit being tures II, 253, 301
contracted 11,252, 298, 299 its eccentricity great eft. when
revolves more flowly in a di- - the apogaeon is in the fy-
lated orbit when the apo- zygies with the Sun ; leitt
gaeon is in the fyzygies with when the lame is in the
the Sun ; and more fwiftly quadratures II, 253, 3d
in a contracted orbit when its ^nodes move more flowly
the apogaron i3 in the qua- when the JSarth in i«
dratures II, 300 aphelion
Digitized by Google
I N <D E X.
aphelion and more fwiftly the annual equation of the
in the perihelion II, 253, mean motion of its nodes
a 99 II, 290,
its nodes are at reft in their the femi-annual equation of
fyzygies with the Sun, and the fame II, 288
go back moft fwiftly in the the femi-annual equation of
quadratures II, 253 the inclination of the orbit
the motions of the nodes and to the ecliptic II, 298
the inequalities of its mo- the method of fixing the the-
tions computed from the - , ory of the Lunar motions
theory of gravity II, 273, from obfervations II, 304
278, 283, 287 ; the fame Motion, its quantity denned I, 2
from a different principle Motion abfolutc and relative I,
II, 2S9 10; ^the feparation of one
the inclination of its orbit to from the other poflible ; de-
the ecliptic greateft in the monflrated by an example
fyzygies of the node with
the Sun, and leaft in Motion, laws thereof 1, 19
the quadratures I, 245 Motions, compofition and refo-
the variations of the incline lution of them I, 22
tion computed from the Motion of concurring bodies
theory of gravity II, 293, after their reflexion, by
296 what experiments colletted
the equations of the Moon's l> 33
motions for aftronomical Motion of bodies.
ufes II, 299, cifr. in eccentric fettions Seel. 3.
the annual equation of the in moveable orbits Sett 9.
Moon's mean motion II, in given fuperficies, and of the
299 reciprocal motion of pen-
the firft femi-annual equation dulums Sett. 10.
of the fame II, 300 Motion of bodies tending to
the fecond femi-annual equa- each other with centripetal
tion of the fame II, 301 forces Sett. 1 1.
the Hrfl equation of the Moon's Motion of very fmall bodies a-

centre II, 302, I, 149, Esf**. gitated by centripetal for-
the fecond equation of the ces tending to each part of
Moon's centre II, 303 fome very great body Sett.
Moon's firft variation II, 27
the annual equation of the Motion of bodies refilled in the
mean motion of its apogee ratio of the velocities II,
II, 299 Sett. 1.
the femi-annual equation of in the duplicate ratio of the
the fame II, 301 velocity II, Sett- 2.
the femi-annual equation of
its eccentricity ibid, D& partly
Digitized
I N <D EX.
partly in the Ample, and part-
the fquare of the cttftanco
ly in the duplicate ratio of
and the abfolute quantity
the fame II, Sett. 3. of that force is known 1, 90
Motion of thofe which are defcribed
.
of bodies proceeding by their ,

by bodies when the cen-
alone in refitting tripetal force i3 recipro-

vis irtftta
cally as the cube of the
mediums II, 1, 2, 12, 15,
22 diftance 1,74, 174, 184
44» 4& \ , r
of bodies afcendmg or defen-
3.
of thofe which are defcribed
ding in right lines in re- by bodies agitated by any
whatever
filling mediums, and a&ed
centripetal forces
I, Sea. 8.
on bv an uniform force of
gravity II, 4, 22, 24, 47». 5°
P.
of bodies projected in refilling
mediums, and a&ed on by
an uniform force of gravi- Parabola, by what law of cen-
tripetal force tending to
ty n, 6, 28
refut- the focus of the figure the
of bodies revolving in
ing mediums II, Sett. 4. fame may be defcribed 1, 84
of funependulous bodies in Pendulums, their properties ex-
Se&.6.
refilling mediums II,
plained I, 803, 212 II, ,*
Morion and refinance of fluids Sea. 6*

II, Seft. 7. the diverfe lengths of ifochro-
Motion propagated through flu- nous pendulums indifferent
ids II, Sett. 8. latitudes compared among
Motion of fluids after the man- themfelvcs, both by obfer-
ner of a vortex, or circu- vations, and by the theory
lar II, Sea. 9. of gravity II, 24610251

Place defined, and dillinguifhed
into abfolute and relative
O. I, 10
Places of bodies moving in co-
Ovals for optic ufes, the me- nic feaions found to any
thod of finding them, which afligned time I, Sea. 6.
Cartefius concealed I, 317-; Planets,

a general folution of Car- not carried about by corpo-
tefiufs problem I, 319 real vortices II, 197.
Orbits, Planets primary,

the invention of thofe which furround the Sun II, 209
are defcribed by bodies go- move in ellipfes whofe focui
ing off from a given place is in the Sun's centre II,
with a given velocity, ac-
cording to a given right byâdij drawn to the Sun de-
line ; when the centripe- scribe areas proportional to
tal force is reciprocally as the times II, 211, 234
revolve
Digitized by Google
INDEX.
revolve in periodic times that Problem Keplerian, folved by
are in the fefquiplicate pro- the trochoid, and by ap-
portion of the diftanccs proximations I, 148 to
from the Sun II, 2 1 o
retained in their orbits by Problem of the ancients, of four
a force of gravity, which, lines, related by Pappus,
refpects the Sun, and is re- and attempted by Carteftus
ciprocally as the fquare of by an algebraic calculus,
the diftance from the Sun's folved by a geometrical
centre II, 214, 219 compofition I, 110
Planets fecondary, Projectilesmove in parabola's
move in ellipfes having their when the refinance of the
focus in the centre of the medium is taken away I, 32
primary II, 252 77, 310 II, 34
by radij drawn to their prima- Projectiles, their motions in re-
ry defer) be areas propoitio- filling mediums 28
II, 6,
nal to the times II, 206. Pulfes of the air, by which
208, 212 founds are propagated, their
revolve in periodic times intervals or breadths deter-
that are in the fefquiplicate mined II, 1 80, 1 83 ; thefe
proportion of their dis- intervals in founds made

tances from the primary by open pipes probablv e-
II, 206, 208 qual to twice the length of
Planets, the pipes II, 183
their periodic times II, 210
their diftances from the Sun
II, 211
the aphelia and nodes of their
orbits do almoft reft II, Quadratures general of oval fi-
236 gures not to be obtained
their orbits determined II, by finite terms I, 145.
237 Qualities of bodies how difco-
the wav of rinding their places vered, and when to be fup-
in their orbits II, 148 to pofed univerfal II, 203
their denfity fuited to the

heat they receive from the
Sun II, 229
their diurnal revolutions e- Refinance,
quablc II, 238 the quantity thereof in medi-
tjieir aX c3 lefs than the dia- ums not continued II, 1 20
meters that Hand upon in continued mediums llx
them at right angles II,
239 in mediums of any kind what-
ever II, 123
Dd 2 Refill-
Digitized by Google
1 N <D E X.
Rtfiliances, the theory thereof Refinance, what kind of folid it
confirmed by experiments is meets with the fat

that
of pendulums II, 95 to II, 120
108 Reft, true and relative I, 10
by experiments of falling bo- Rules of philofophy II, 202
dies II, 145 to 162
Refiftance of mediums, S.
is as their denfity ceteris pa- Satellites,
ribus II, 106, 107, 113, the greateft heliocentric clon-

121,143,160 gation of Jupiter's Satellites
is in the duplicate proportion II, 207
of the velocity of the bodies the greateft heliocentric elon-
<* ft J / ft
related, ceteris paribus II, gation of the Hugenian Sa-
It, 96, 113, III, 143, from Saturn's centre
tellit
227
II,
is in*the duplicate proportion the periodic times of Jupiter's
of the diameters of fphaerical Satellites, and their diftanccs
bodies refilled, ceteris pa- from his centre II, 206,
ribus II, 1 01, 103, 113, 207
143 the periodic times of Saturn's
Refiltonce of fluids threefold ; Satellites and their diftances
and arifes either from the from his centre II, 208,
inactivity of the fluid mat- 209
ter, or the tenacity of its the inequalities of the moti-
parts, or friction II, 54; ons of the Satellites of Ju-
the refinance found in fluids piter and Saturn derived
almoft all of the firft kind from the motions of the
1C9 and cannot be
II, 107, Moon II, 252
diminifhea by the fubtilty Saturn,
of the parts of the fluid, if its periodic time II, 2ro
the denfity remain II, 161 its diftance from the Sun IT,
Refinance of a globe what pro- 21
portion it bears to that of its apparent diameter II, 209
a cylinder, in mediums not its true diameter II, 228
continued II, 117 its attractive force how great
in comprefled mediums II, 227
II,
141 the weight of bodies on its
Refinance of a globe in medi- fur face II, 228
ums not continued II, 120; its denfity ib.
in comprefled mediums II, its quantity of matter ib.
143; how found by expe- its perturbation by the ap-
riments II, 145 to 1 60 proach of Jupiter how great
Refinance to a frullum of a 11,235
cone, how made the leall the apparent diameter of its
poflible II, 1 ring II, 209
19
Sefqui-
Digitized by Google
/
I N 2) EX.
Sefquiplicate proportion defined Space,
L 52 abfolute and relative L 9> icv
Shadow of the Earth to be aug- 11
mented in lunar eclipfes, be- not equally full II, 224
caufe of the refraction of Spharroid, the attraction of the
the atmofphere IT, 304 fame when the forces of its
San, particles are reciprocally as
moves round the common the fquares of the diftances
centre of gravity of all the
. ^ 303
Planets II, 231. Spiral cutting all its radij in a
the periodic time of its revo- given angle, by what law

lution about its axis II, 238 of centripetal force, tending
its mean apparent diameter to the centre thereof, it
n, 3 n may be defcribed by a re-
its true diameter II, 228 volving body L 24: » H»$6fc
its horizontal parallax ibid. 61
has a menilrual parallax II, Spirit, pervading all bodies and
215 concealed within them,

its attractive force how great hinted at as required to
227
II, folve a great many phaeno-
the weight of bodies on its mena of Nature II, 3^3
furface II, zz& Stars
its denfity ibid, the fixed Stars demonftrated
its quantity of matter ibid, to be at reft II, 236
its force to difturb the moti- their twinkling what to be
ons of the Moon II, 21c, afcribed to II, 363
262 new Stars, whence they may
its force to move the Sea II arife II, 38c
Subftances of allthings unknown
Sounds, H, 32i
their nature explained II,1 67,
*
173, 176, 178, 180, 181, T.
182
not propagated in direRum II, Tides of the Sea derived from
1 66caufed by the agita-
; their caufe II, 25c, 30c,
tion of the air II, iJLl 306
their velocitycomputedH, 181, Time abfolute and relative 1^
1 82 j fome what fwiftcr by IL
the theory in fummer than Time, the aftronomical equation
in winter II, 1 83 thereof proved by pen-
ccafe immediately, when the dulum-clocks and the eclip-
motion of the fonorous fesof Jupiter's fatcllites, I,
body ceafes II, 176 12
how augmented in fpeaking-
trumpets II, 1
83
Digitized by Google
1
INDEX.
v.
w.
A Vacuum proved, or that all
fpaces (if faid to be full) Waves, the velocity with which
are not equally full II, 224 they are propagated on the
Velocity, the greateft that a fupcrficiesof ftagnant wa-
globe falling in a refilling ter U, 1 7
medium can acquire II, 143 Weights of bodies towards the
Velocities of bodies moving in Sun, the Earth, or any Pla-
conic feetions where the net, are, at equal diftanccs
centripetal force tends to from the centre, as the
the focus I, 67, 88, 89 quantities of matter in the
Venus, bodies II, 220
its periodic time II, 210 they do not depend upon the
its diftancc from the Sun II, forms and textures of bo-
2ii • dies II, 223
the motion of its aphelion II, Weights of bodies in different
237 regions of the Eatth found
Vortices, their nature and con- out and compared together
lUtution exairined II, Sea. II,
24s
9. 387
A P p E N-
Digitized by Gock
APPENDIX.
Among the Explications, {given by a Friend,)
of fome Tropojitions in this Book, not de-
monftrated by the Author, the Editor
finding thefe following, has thought it pro-
per to annex them. Thus,
ToCor.i. Trop. pi. Book i. Tag 305.
O find the force whereby a fphere

(Ad Br,) on the diameter AB, at-
tracts the body P. (PL 19. Fig. 1 .)
Let SA = SB = r, PS = d, PE
= x,
PB = a = d-\-r, PA—
~d — r; = dd — rr
«.
Tberef. a* a-\-& — id, alio

a — * = ir Therefore *a — a* = ^dr
;
,*
And :
£E =d—x, AE =x — a, BE=a — x.
Now the force whereby the circle, whofe radius is
Ed, attrafts the body P, is as 1 — PE ( by Cor.
Prop, 90.) -x
a Aad
Digitized by Google
ii A? <P E NT> I X.
And Ed* = (AExEB -Y^ —TE =rr— 2 z
dd -\-% dx—-XX
=) A*-\-zdx xx. Alfo?/ — —
=(£d*-\-EP = idx act, xx-\~xx = ) zdx
2
— —
— a*: Th. — = j
= =F • Therefore
1
y/—a*-\idx
L
or x =====
——</—a*-\-zdx is the flu.
xion of the attra&ive force of the Iphere on the body

py or the ordinate of a curve whofe area reprefents that
force.
4
But the fluent of x is x; and the fluent of
— XX
^— a oc - i~
j
=r-
- zdx
is
$dd
— "h'^-V—
v 1
dx (by w
7*6. i. Form^. Cafiz. Qnadr. of Curv.)
Therefore x — — a#-\-zdx is the ge-
neral expreflion of the area of the curve*

-\- da '
' * '
i
Now let x=a, then area *J—a#-{-zcU
idd
Alfo let x=r#, theft area = (*— *^^v ~**+ k 2<
And the force whereby the fphere attrads the body
P is as B or as — j- =:)-==--
a 4 2. The
Digitized by Google
AT <P E N<D I X. iii
2. The force whereby the fpheroid-^ DBG % attra&s
the body />, may, in the fame manner, be found thus.
Let S C zr c,
The force of a circle whofe radius is ED, to attraft
P PE
——
y is as i , (by Cor. i. Prop. 90. ) Now
£D ==*5
F5 *AEB =TT X— zdx—*x*
SA rr
%% %
(by the Conies; ) and TD = (FT = ED ÊP
= — axe c 4-
—J
2 dc cx
•
— ccxx + XX ,
Z=Z )
'
rr 1
—— CCX XZ
4 XC C — I— 2 dc C X
5 — -4r< TT
Therefore (i —
PE ~ 1-
PD /a jl ll ?. a r r r r
V rr rr 1
XX
rr
XX
or) x — -===
/ axec .
j
zacc . rr — cc
is
V
1/
rr 1
X-V XX
rr rr 1
the fluxion of the attra&ive force of the fpheroid oft

the body />, or the ordinate of a curve whofe area is
che meafure of that force.
Now the fluent of a- is at; and(by Caf.i. Form 8. Tab. 2.
guad.Cur.) the fluent of-

xx
* ' % f i n 1 1
ii . a —
-/ axec zdec rr~-cc
V
y rr
A
.
1
rr
x-\ 1
xx
rr
8dcc +dcc +axcc
S -4
v
XV if
rr rr rr
is ( ~~~
Ac**cc ^ rr (re +ddc*
rr rr T4
— idrrs + drrxv — accrrv '
— ids + dxv — axv *
daXcc — rr ddec
~ — a — ddA-rr
,
- =>
Digitized by Google
iV AT T E N<D IX.
ids-~dxv4-axv dxv — a*vu — ids
K r
x+
|
n Therefore
+r—dd—rr
[
z=z\ •
' cc-\-dd— rr cc
is the general expreflion for the area of the curve.
***C zdec —— *x
cc rr
Butv = PD = ER=f/
t>tsirn */
V rr
,
1
x
rr
rr
isan ordinate to a conic fe&ion, whofe abfcifla is x;
and Sy r. rhe areas NMB, NKA
9 adjacent to
the ordi-
nates BAf> AK : Put D~s — <r.
= or PE = PB ~ BM thenv — d,orPD
Let x a, ;
ids d4Ar—oLd/t-~~
= PB = BM and the = * + y
j
area
Andlet*:=*, or PE = PA=AK; then v=*, orPD
^PA=AK, and thearea = * + «îJ-rr = 1
And the attraftive force of the fpheroid on P, is as
^X44 ax— — — idxs— MOCX* ol <r
v 1
\-dd — cc rr
- 2r +
zddr-\- ir* — zdD ~ zrcc-\~zdxzdr — D
CC -\-dd—rr — — ;
ce-\-Jd rr
But (*-[-«=) BM+AK* therefore zdr

trapezium ABMK; md P= ( s—<r= ) area
AKRMB D — zdr — therefore mixtilinear area

zdr—D— —
;
KRMLK— C; con fequently C; there-

zdxzdr — D= — zdC; therefore the attrac
fore
— zrec zdC
tivc force of the fpheroid on ?, is as
cc ^M—rr =
t*S^ % ~zPSx?RW Confcquen|ly , theat .
SC A- PS —AS
traaive force of the fpheroid upon the body P
will be
to the attractive foice of a fphere, whofe

diameter is
rcc — dC rJ
AB, upon the fame body P}
—PSxK RMK
as
f e _^_^
»
^ 01
=
—sc*-\-ps
M ASxlc* == ;— — to
'AS*
—=r-'
_
T»
—as IPS
Digitized by Googl
.
ATT E N<D I X.
To SchoL Trop. 34. Book 2. 1 1 9. /. 20.
For let it be propofed to find the vertex of the cone,

a fruftum of which has the defcrib'd property.
Let CFGB be the fruftum, and S the vertex re-
quired. (PL 19. Fig. 2.)
Now conceive the medium
to confift of particles
which of a body (moving in it) in a
ftrike the furface
direction oppofite to that of the motion ; then the re-
finance will be the force which is made up of the
efficacy of the forces of all the ftrokes.
In any line Pp, parallel to the axis of the cone, and
meeting its furface in p, take p m of a given length,
for the fpace 3efcrib*d by each point of the cone in a
given time : Draw mq perpendicular to the fide (CF)
of the cone, and q n perpendicular to pm.
Therefore the line p m willreprefent the velocity, or
force, with which a particle of the medium ftrikes the
furface of the cone obliquely in p
But the force mp is equivalent to two forces', the
one {mq) perpendicular, the other (pq) parallel to the
fide of the cone; which laft is therefore of no effefr.
And the perpendicular force mq is equivalent to two
forces, the one (jnn) parallel to the axis
of the cone,
the other (q») perpendicular to it; which alfo is de-
ftroy'd by the contrary a&ionof another particle on the
oppofite iide of the cone.
There remains only the force mn, which has any
effect in refilling or moving the cone in the direftion
of its axis.
Therefore the whole force of a fingle particle, or the

effeft of the perpendicular ftroke of a particle, upon the
bafe of a circumfpribing cylinder, is to the effed of
the oblique ftrpke upon the furface of the cone (in p)
$s mp to mn, pr a* mp to(mpxmn=)mq > or as
C** to CM* 2 • Now
Digitized by Google
vi
Now the
AT ¥ E N<D
number of particles ftriklng
U in a paral-
leldiredion on any furface, is as the area of a plane
figure perpendicular to that dire&ion, and that would
juft receive thofe ftrokes.
Therefore, the number of particles ftriking againft
the fruftum, that is, againft the furfaces defcrib'd by
the rotation of FD* and CF, each particle with the
forces mf> and mn refpe&ively, is as the circle de-
fcrib'd by (FD or) OH, and the annulus defcribed
by CH, that is, as to CO* OH 7)1?. —

But the whole force of the medium in refilling,
is the fum of the forces of the feveral particles.
Therefore, the refiftance of the medium, or the

whole efficacy of the force of all the^lrokes againft
the end FG of the fruftum, is to the refiftance againft
t he convex fur face thereof, as (mpxO H mn x to

x
2 %
C0 —0H\rzscf 0H x toCH xCO -ÔH
*
or as) OH to.
Theref. the whole refiftance of the mediu m againft th e
iruitum maybe reprelentedby(0// -\

C F;
_ CF xOH — CH x OH + CH xOC
=)
tffxOg'+^xOC' whkh ^ s .
CF
that ('putting OC=r, OD = zd, OS = y, then
—
is,
OCxFH
=) zar —
and OH— ^
, rj z*r .
C//= (
(jj— , ,)
r*j* — 44r*j + 44*r* =r**-|-7 a

* : Confequcntly
Digitized by Google
A<P <P E N<D I X.
w
vit
-
*r»jrj — +ar ) = 2
-\-)
2
*-\-r 2 li But «.
is a minimum ; therefore rry—z arr =z,y ; confe-
Hence /J — 2 *jr =rr; and making OjO = 0D

= <f; thenQ— 4=)^= Wrr-\-**^)QC.
To the fame Schol.p. 120. /. 10.
On the right-linei?C, (PL i^.Fig 3 .) fuppofe the paralle-

lograms BGyb, MNvm,
of the leaft breadth, tobeereft-
ed, whofehights BG, MN, their diftance Mb> and half
thefumof ±Mm + \B bz=z a, are given: Let
their bafes
half the difference of the bafes ±Mm — \Bb be called
x : Let G and N
be points in the curve ; and GND
producing b y> and m ¥ to g and », (fo that y£ =
*>) the points g and » may alfo be in the fame curve.
Now if the figure CDNGB, revolving about the
axis B C, generates a folid, and that folid moves forwards
in a rare and elaftic medium from C towards B> (thepofi-
tion of the right-line B C remaining the fame ; ) then
will the fum of the refiftances againft the furfaces ge-
nerated^ the lineols Gg, Nn, be the leaft poffible,
when Gg is to Nn as B G xBb to MNxMtn.
For the force of a particle on Gg and Nn, to move
them in the dire&ion BC y is as^rr-ând;^;

a and the
*G^ Nn
number of particles that ftrike in the fame time on the
furfaces generated by Gg and Nn, are as (the annuli
defcnb'd by
xnv, or as)
gy and nv, that
BGzndMN;
is, as BG xgy
therefore the refiftances
and MN
againft thofe furfaces are as t~ to that is (put-
Gg Nn
ting j for G~g\ and* forlvV,) as — to
J z
* But
Digitized by Google
viii AT PEK DIX. C C
But thcfumof thefe refiftances ( — + MN

BG
z
-) -
.
is a
-
t
mi-
•
J •
nimum. Therefore BGx^- — MNx — = o,or

«.
jy
• •
MNx — = — BGxl-: = CG^ = 2?V 4- But y

1
V/ — ) aa — iax + xx +M; and * = {Nn =

w + n =) ^-|-24a: + #x + M therefore^ ixx
v ;
— zaxy and = lax JL-zxx: conlcquently

.
r•
z,
MN x z x • .
1
z* z*
BG . ,MN
jy
XiWw =( X4—atztJ — x 2?£. Therefore
(77) Gi : (**) -AT/ : : BGxBb MNxMm. :
Conicquently, that the fum of the refiftances againft the

Jurfaces generated by thelineolae Gg zndNn, may be the
leaf* poffible, Gg* muft be to Wn as G B b to TV^*.
Wherefore, if yg be made equal to y G, fo that the
angle yGg may be 4f°, and the angle 15
0
BGg ;
4
alfo ~ 2 ^jr*, and #
Gg* r= 4 y£ > then 4 yg :
: : G££: NMm; and fince <j£ is parallel to
;Vw> and BG, BR parallel to »v, iVv; alfo »v —gy
— yG; follows that (»v~yG—) Bb: (Nv~)
it
B Gx Mm
Mm :: BG BR; therefore Bb = —g— : ;
alfo (n »=; yG\ Nn BG G R^ : Confequently
^4 J K
NMm * JlNxBR.
qBG* xBR is to G~R *

asG^to^/M
FINIS.
Digitized by Google
Digitized by Google
THE
LAWS
OF THE
MOON's
MOTION
According to
GRAVITY.
Digitized by Google
V
The Laws of the
MO O Ns
MOTION.
N juftice to the editor of
; this tranflation of Sir Ifaac
1
Newton's Principia, it is pro-
per to acquaint the reader,
^swwt it Was with my confent,
he publiftiedan advertifement, at the end
of a volume of mifcellanies* concerning a
fmall trad: which I intended to add to his
book by way of appendix ; my defign in
which was to deliver fome general ele-
mentary propofitions, ferving, as I
thought, to explain and demonstrate the
truth of the rules in Sir Ifaac Newtoris
Theory of the Moon.
A 2
1
^
f 4]
*The occafion of the undertaking was
merely accidental; for he (hewing me
a paper which I communicated to the
author, in the year 17 17, relating to
the motion of the nodes of die Moon's
orbit ; I recollected, that the method
made ufe of in fettling the Equation
for that Was equally appli-
motion,
cable to any other motion of revoluti-
on. And therefore I thought that it
would not be Unacceptable to a reader
of tfie Principia, to fee the ufes of the
fa id method explained in the other E-
quations of the Moons ihotion : Efpe-
cially fince the greateft part of the
Theory of the Moon is laid down with-
out any proof; and fince thofe propofi-
tions relating to the Moon's motion,
which are demonftrated in the Principiay
do generally depend upon calculations
very intricate and abftrufe, the truth of
which is not cafily examined, even by
thofe that are moft skilful ; and which
however might be eafily deduced from
other principles.
. But in my progrefe in this defign,
happening to findfeveral general propo-
rtions relating to the Moon's motions,
which ferve to determine many things,
which have hitherto been taken from
the obfervations of Aftronomers: And
having
Digitized by Google
m
Having reafon to think, that the Theory
of the Moon might by thefe means, be
made more perfect and compleat than
it is at prefent ; I retarded the publica-
tion of the book, 'till I could procure
due by examining obfervati-
fatisfa&ion
ons on places of the Moon. But find-
ing this to be a work requiring a con-
iiderable time, not only in procuring
fuch places as are proper, but alfo in
performing calculations, upon a new me-
thod, not yet accommodated to pra-
dtife by convenient rules, or aflifted by
tables ; I thought it therefore more con-
venient for the Bookfeller, not to ftop the
publication of his impreffion any lon-
ger upon this account. I may in
But that
fome meafure, fatisfy thofe who are well
converfant in Sir Ifaac Newtoris Prin-
cipia, (and I could wifh that none but
fuch would look over thele papers,) that
the faid advertifement was not without
fome foundation ; and that I may remove
any fufpicion that the defign is entirely laid
^lide, I have put together, altho' in no or-
der, as being done upon a fudden refoluti*.
on, fome of the Propofitions, among
many others, that I have by me, which
feem chiefly to be wanting in a The^
ory of the Moon, as it is a fpeculation
A 3 founded
[6]
founded on 3 phyfical caufe ; and thofe
are what relate to the ftating of the
mean motions. For altho' it be of litr
tie or no ufe in Aftronomy to know the I
rules for afcertaining the mean motions

of the Node or Apogee, fince the fadt is
all that is wanting, and that is other-
wife known by comparing the obferva-
tions of former ages with thofe of the
prefent; yet in matter of fpeculati-
on, this is the chief and moft necef-
fary thing required : fince there is no
other way to know that the caufe is
rightly afligned, but by (hewing that

the motions are fo much and no more
than what they ought to be.
But that it may not be altogether
without its ufe, I have added all the
rules for the equation of the Moon's
motion, except two ; one of which
is a monthly equation of the variation
depending on the Moons anomaly ; and

the other an equation arifing from the
Earth's being nQt in the focus of the
Moon's orbit, as it has been fuppofed tQ be,
in all the modern theories fince Horrox.
For not having had time to examine
over the obfervations which are necef-
fery, but being oblig'd inflead thereof,
to take Sir Ijaac Newton's theory for
my chief guide and direction, I cannot .
venture [
Digitized by Google
£7]
venture to depart from it too far, in
cftaWifliiftg equations entirely new ; ftnee
X am upon the beft au-
well allured,
thority, that never found to err
it is
rnore than feven or eight minutes.

And therefore, hoping that the rea-
der, who cQnfider^the fudden occafion
gpd neceflity of my publtfhing thefe Pro-
pofitiqns at this time, will make due
allowance for the want of order and me-
thod, and look upon them only as fo many
fjiftinft Rules and Propofitions not con-
fiedted : I ftiall begin, without any other
preface, with (hewing the origine of
that inequality, which is called the Va-
riation or Reflection of the Moon.
The variation or refle-

Thc
•
1 0*
ftion is monthly in-
that the Moon.*™
"
equality in the Moon's mo-

tion, wherein it more manifeftly differs
from the laws of the motion of a pla-
net in an elliptic orbit, fycho Brake
makes this inequality to arife from a
kind of libratory motion backwards and
forwards, whereby the Moon is accelerat-
ed and retarded by turns, moving fwifter
in the firft and third quarter, and flower
in the fecond and fourth, which inequali-
ty is principally obferved in the odtants.
Sir Ifaac NrMw accounts for the
A^ variation
Variation
m
from the different force of gra-
vity of the Moon and Earth to the
Sun, arifing from the different diftances
of the Moon in its feveral afpedts.
The mean gravity of the Moon to the
Sun, he fuppofes, is fatisfied by the an-
nual motion of the Moon round the
Sun; the gravity of the Moon to the
Earth, he fuppofes, is fatisfied by a re-
volution of the Moon about the Earth.
But the difference of the Moon's gravi-
ty to the Sun more or lefs than the
Earth's gravity, he fuppofes, produces
two effetfts 5 for as this difference of
force may be refolved into two forces,
one adting in the way, or contrary to
the way, of the Moon about the Earth,
^nd the other a&ing in the line to or
from the Earth the firft caufes the
:
Moon to defcribe a larger or fmaller

area in the fame time about the Earth,
according as it tends to accelerate or
retard it; the other changes the form of
the lunar orbit from what it ought to
be merely from the Moon's gravity to
the Earth, and both together make up
that inequality which is called the varia-
tion.
But fince the real motion of the Moon,
thp' a fimple motion, caufed by a con?
tinuaj defledlion from a ftreightline, by
the
Digitized by Googl*
[9l
the joint force of its gravity to the Sua
and Earth, thereby defcribing an orbit,
which inclofes not the Earth but the
Sun, is yet confidered as a compound
motion, made from two motions, one
about the Sun, and the other about
the Earth ; becaufe two fuch motions
are requifite to anfwer the two forces of
its gravity, if feparately confidered : For
the very fame reafon, the Moons mo-
tion ought to be refolved into a third
motion of revolution, fince there re-
mains a third force to be fatisfied, and
that is the force arifing from the alte^
ration of the Moon's gravity to the
Sun. And this when confidered, will
require a motion in a fmall ellipfis, in
the manner here defcribed.
The circle ADFH reprefents the Fig.
orbit of the Moon about the Earth in the
center 7*, as it would be at a mean
diftance, fuppofing the Moon had rfo
gravity to any other body but the
Earth. The diameter ATF divides
which is towards
that part of the orbit
,
the Sun, fuppofe ADF, from the part

oppofite to the Sun, fuppofe AHF.
The diameter at right angles H^D,
is the line of the Moons conjundtion
with or opposition to the Sun. The

figure PQJjK is an Ellipfis, whofe cen-
ter
ter is carried round the Earth in the orbit
4BDEFH, having its longer axis PL
in length double of the ftiorter axis $>^K,
and lying always parallel to TD, the line
joining the centers of the Earth ajnd Sun,
Whilft the faid figure is carried from A
to B, the Moon revolves the contrary way
from $>jro N, fo as to defcribe equal areas
in equal times about the centre of it;
and to perform its revolution in the
fame time as the center of the faid Elliptic
epicycle (if it may he fb called,) performs
its revolution; the Moon
being always
in the remoter extremity of its (horter
axis in ând K when
it is in the quarters,
and extremity of its longer

in the neareft
axis at the time of the new and full Moon.
The fhorter femiaxis of this Ellipfis
^^ is to the diftance of its center from
f
the Earth A^
in the duplicate propor-
tion of the Moon's periodical time about
the Earth to the Sijn's periodical time;
Which proportion, if there be 2 139 re-
volutions of the Moon to the Stars in
1 60 fydercal years, is that of 47 to 8400.
The figure which is defcribed by this
compound motion of the Moon in the El-
liptic epicycle, whilft the center of it is
carried round the Earth, very nearly re-
prefcnts the form of the Lunar orbit; fup-
poling it without eccentricity, and that
the
Digitized by Google
[ »
the plane was coincident with the plane of
the ecliptic, and that the Sun continu'd
in the fame place during the wjiole revo-
lution of the Moon about the Earth.
From the above conftru&ion i at*
pears, that the proportion between tfie
the
mean diftance of the Moon and its
greateft or leaft diftances, is eafily at

figned ; being fomething larger than that
which .is afligned by Sir Ifaac Newton in
the 8th propofition of his third book.
But as the computation there given, de-
pends upon the folution of a biquadratic
equation, affedted with numeral coeffici-
ents;which renders it impoflible to
compare the proportions with each other*
agreement or difagree-
fo as to fee their
ment, except in a particular application
to numbers $ I (hall therefore fet down a
rule, in general terms, derived from his
method, which will be exadt
enough,
unlefs the periods of the Sun and Moon
fhould be much nearer equal than they
are. LetZ, be the periodical time of the
Moon, S the period of the Sun, the M
fynodical period of the Moon to the Sun,
and D be the difference of the periods
of the Sun and Moon ; then, according
jto Sir Ifaac Newton's method, the dif-
ference of the two axes of the Moon's

elliptic orbit, as it is contracted by the
adlion
Digitized by Google
a£tion of the Sun, is to the fum of the faid
axes as %L >;
—
2
to 4DD SS. But
according to the conftruftion before laid

down, die £ud proportion is as 3ZX
to 2SS—LL.
B y Sir Newton's rule, the dif-
ference will be to the fum, nearly as
5 to 694 j and confequently the diame-
ters willbe nearly as 689 to 699, or 69
to 70 But by the latter rule, the diffe-
:
rence will be to the fum, nearly as 1 to

119; and the diameters or diftances of
the Moon, in its conjunction and qua-
drature with the Sun, will be as 59 to
60. Dr. Halky, (who in his remarks
upon the Lunar theory, at the end of
his catalogue of the Southern ftars, firft
took notice of this contraction of the
Lunar orbit in the Syzygies from the phe-
nomena of the Moon's motion) makes
die difference of the diameters to the fum,
as 1 to 90 y and confequently the greater
axis to the leiTer, as 457 to44j.
But the difference, inthefe propor-
tions of the extream diftances^ tho' it
may appear considerable, is not, how-

ever, to be diftingui/h'd by the obferva-
tions on die diameters of the Moon,
whilft die variations of the diameters,
from
Digitized by Google
t n )
from this caufe, are intermixt with the

other much greater variations, arifing
from the eccentricity of the orbit-
m •
The angle of the Moon's elongation

H*
from the center, defigned by TN> is B
properly the variation or reflection of the
Moon. The properties of which are
evident from the defcription;
First, of the double
It is as the fine
diftance of the Moon from
the quadra-
ture or conjunction with the Sun: For it
is the difference of the two angles BTA
and N'T^y whofe tangents, by the con*
ftrudtion, are in a given proportion.
Secondly, The variation is, cete-
ris pa?~ibusy the duplicate proportion
in
of the fynodical time of the Moons revo-
lution to the Sun. For the variation is
in proportion to the mean diameter of

the epicycle, and that is in the duplicate
proportion of the fynodical time of re-
volution.
The greateft variation is an angle,
whofe fine is to the radius, as the diffe-
rence of the greateft and leaft diftances
Tând 3X, that is 3 to their fum.
According to the proportion of the lines
before described, this rule makes the elon-
gation near 29 minutes which would
t *4 J
be the variation, fuppoling the Moon

perform'd its revolution to the Sun in
the time of its revolution round the
Earth. But if that elongation of 29
portion of the fynodical time to the perio-

dical time of revolution, it will pro-
duce near 34 minutes for the variation.
I T is to be noted, that what is faid of
the epicycle, is upon fuppofition, that
the Earths orbit round the Sun is a cir-
cle ; if the eccentricity of the annual
orbit be conlidered, the mean diame-
ter of the epicycle muft increafe or
diminilh reciprocally in the triplicate
proportion of the Sun's diftance*
»
The method of find- The tonftfudtion which

3utTo?.
UahtieS m ^ I communicated to Sir IJaac
Newton, for the annual mo-
tion of the nodes of the Moon's orbit,
(which is printed in the fcholium to the
33d propofition of his 3d book) is £
cafe of a general method, for (hewing
the inequality of any motion round a
center, when the hourly motion 6r ve-
locity of the objedt varies, according to
any rule, depending on its afpedt to fome
other object. For in any revolution,
the mean motion and inequality are to
be afiigned by means of a curvilinear
figure
Digitized by Google
t *s]
figure, wherein equal areas aredefcribed
•about the center in equal times $ the pro-
perty of which figure is, that theraysfrotn
the center, are always reciprocally in the
fobduplicatc proportion of the hourly
motion or velocity about thfe center.
Thus in the figure defer ibed in my
conftrudion, where TN
is the line af
the nodes, $ A
the line drawn to the
Sun, is fuppofed to revolve *oand the
<*nter ST, with the velocity of die Suns
motion from the node \ and the ray
7*2?, which is taken always in-thefub-
du plicate proportion of that velocity,
will defcribe equal areas in equal times
fo that the fedtor NT'S will be the
mean motion of the Sun ; the fe&ar
NTA the motion of the Sun from
the node and confequeritly thfe area
;
NAB the motion of the node;

which Will be a retrograde motion if
the area be within die cirote> and di-
re& if it falls without. From whence
it follows,
1. That the periodical time of^the
Sun's revolution to the node, will be to
the periodical time of the Sun's revolu-
tion, as the areaof the curvilinear figure,
to the area of the circle.
2. That if a circle be defcribed, whofe
area is equal to the area of the curvili-
near
[ 16 J
near figure, it will cut that figure in the'
place where the Sun has the mean mo-
tion from the node.
3. If an angle NTF be made, which
(hall comprehend an area in the faid
circle, equal to the fe£tbr NT B in the
figure, thatangle will be the mean mo-
tion of the Sun from the node. And
. confequendy,
4. The angle FTB y which is the
difference between the Sun's true mo-
tion froni the node, defigned by ATN>
and the Suns mean motion from the
node, defigned by y
FTN
will be the
equation for the Sun's motion from
the node, when the Suns pofition
to the node is defigned by the angle
ATN.
From all which it appears, that
what is of the Sun's motion from
faid
the node, will hold as to any other mo-
tion round a center ; as of the Sun from
the Moon, or the Moon from the node
or apogee. In any fuch revolution, a
curvilinear figure may be defcribed about
the center, by the areas of which, the
relation between the mean and true
motion may be fhewn; and confe-
quendy the inequality or equation of the
motion.
Thus
Digitized by Googl
C>7]
And as inevery revolution there is
a certain figure which is proper to fhew
this relation, fuch a figure may be calPd
an Equant for that motion or revolu-
tion.
And in every revolution where the
Equant is a figure of the fame property,
the inequalities or equations will alter
according to the fame rule.
Thus, if the Equant be an ellipfis
about the center, as in that for the mo*
tion of the Sun from the node,
Firfiy The mean motion in the whole
revolution, will be a geometrical mean
proportional, between the greateft mo-
tion in the extremity of the leflcr axis,
and the leaft motion in the extremity of
the longer axis For the radius ofthe cir-
:
cle, which is equal to an ellipfis, is a mean

proportional between the two femiaxes.
Secondly^ The tangents of the angles
of the mean and true motion, are in the
given proportion of the two axes "of the
ellipfis. Thus the tangents of the angles
of the true and mean motion of the Sun
from the node, viz. the tangents of the F £ z;
angles ATN and FTN y
are in propor-
tion as the ordinates BG and FG, that
is, as the femiaxes THand TN.
Thirdlyj The fine of the angle of
the greateft inequality in the o&ants is
B to
Digitized by Google
t.8]
to the radius, as half the film of the
axes to half their difference.
It is to be noted, that the equant is
an ellipfis about the center, in every
motion, where the excels of the veloci-
ty about the center above the leaft ve-
locity, is always in the duplicate pro-
portion of the fine of the angle of the
true motion, from the place where the
velocity about the center is leaft. From
which remark, upon examination it will
appear, that the following motions are
to be reduced to an Elliptic equant de-
fer bed about the center.
i
The monthly motion of the Moon

From the node.
The annual motion of the Sun from
the node.
The motion of the Moon from the
Sun, as it is accelerated or retarded, by
the alteration of the area defcrib'd about
the Earth', according to Sir Ifaac New-
ton's 2 6 th prop. 3 d book.
And the annual Motion of the Sun
from the apogee. How thefe fcveral
equants are determin'd will appear by
what follows.
The node is in its fwifteft retrograde

T h-
i nc mnf.
n
motion
r f.
ot the
motion,7
*
when the Sun and
K . n.
Nodes. Moon are in conjunction or
oppo-
Digitized by Go
[ »9 ]
oppofition, and in a quadrature with the
line of the nodes. According to Sir Ifaac
JSTewton's method, (explained at the end
of the thirtieth propofition of the third
book) the force of the Sun to produce
a motion in the node, at this time, is
equal to three times the mean Solar
force j that is, by the conftru&ion of
the elliptic epicycle, equal to a force,
which is- to the force of gravity, as
3 A 6^ to A or three times the letter jFig
iemiaxis of the ellipfis to the di-
ftance of its center from the center
of the Earth. But if the Moon re-
volve inthe elliptic epicycle as before
defcribed, the force to make a motion
in the node at the time mentioned, will
be to the force of gravity, as ifDL to
2)7*, or three times the longer femi-
axis to the diftance of the center;
which is the double of the former force.
But then, according to Sir IJaac's me-
thod, the motion of the node at this
time, is to the Moon's motion, as the
folar force to create a motion in the
node is to the force of gravity. But if
the Moon be conceived as revolving in
a circle, with the velocity of its motion
from the node at this time, when the
node m9ves fwifteft, and the plane of the
laid circle be fuppofed to have a rotation
B 2 upon
upon an axis perpendicular to the plane
of the ecliptic, and the contrary way to
the motion of the Moon, fo as to produce
the motion of the node, and leave the
Moon to move with its own motion
about the Earth ; the force to make a
motion in the node feems to be the
difference of the forces to retain it
with the velocity of its motion in the
moveable and immoveable planes But :
the velocities of bodies revolving in

circles are in the fubduplicate proportion
of the central forces. From whence it
follows, that
The motion of the Moon from the node
at this time, when the node moves
fwifteft, is to the motion of the Moon,
in the fubduplicate proportion of the
fnm of the forces to the force of
gravityy or as the fum of TD and
3DL to TD.
And would be the greateft mo-
this
tion of the node, upon fuppofition that
the plane of the Moon's orbit was al-
moft co-incident with the plane of the
ecliptic ; but if the inclination be
confidered, the motive force for the
node muft be diminifhed, in the pro-
portion of the fine- complement of the
inclination to the radius. How much
this
Digitized by Google
this motion is, will appear by the fol-
lowing fliort calculation.
The diftance TT> being as before
equal 8400, and ^DL being 281,
to
the inclination of the plane in this po-
0
fition is 4 . 59'. 35-"; the fine-comple.
ment of which isto the radius, as 5 2
5
to 5 2 7 nearly ; therefore the force of gra-
vity is to the motive force for the node
thus diminished, in the compound propor-
tion of 8400 to 282, and of 527 to 525,
that is, in the proportion of 4216 to 141.
So that the greateft motion of the Moon
from the node is to the motion of the
Moon, in the fubduplicate proportion of
4? 57 to 4 XI 6, that is, in the propor-
tion nearly of 61 } to 603. According
to which calculation, the greateft hour-
ly motion of the node ought to be 3 z".
47*\ By Sir Ifaac Newton's method,
it amounts to 33". io*j.
This is the fwifteft retrograde motion
of the node, when the line of the
nodes is in a quadrature with the Sun,
and the Moon is in its greateft latitude
in conjunftion or oppofition to the Sun.
But the equant for the motion of the
Moon from the node in this month,
when the line of the nodes is in qua-
drature with the Sun, is an ellipfis a-
bout the center; and therefore the
B 3 mean
t »
mean motion in this month will be
known by the following rule
The mean motion of the Moon from
the node> in that month when the line
of the nodes in a quadrature with
is
the Sun, is a geometrical mean fro-
portional, between the greatefl motion of
the Moon from the node and the motion
of the Moon.
And therefore this mean motion, will
be to the motion of the Moon, in the
fubduplicate proportion of 613 to 60 j,
that is, nearly in the proportion of 1221
to 1 2ii. So that the mean motion of
the node in this month, will be to the
motion of the Moon, as 10 to 12 11,
which makes the mean hourly motion
16 19"' ±of According to Sir Ifaac
Newton it amounts to 16". 35"'"; but, by
the corrections which he afterwards
/
ufes, reduced to i6
it is
16"' f.
.
But the equant for the annual mo-

tion of the Sun from the node being
alfo an ellipfis, it follows, that
The mean motion of the Sun from the
node y is a geometrical mean proportion
naly between the motion of the Sun and
the mean motion of the Sun from the
nodej in the month when the line of the
nodes is in quadrature with the Sun.
How
Digitized by Google
How near this rule agrees with the
obfervations, will appear by this cal-
culation.
Since the mean motion of the node
in that month, when the line of nodes
is in quadrature to the Sun, was before
fliewn to be to the Moon's mean motion,
as 10 to 121 1 ; and the motion of the
Sun is to the motion of the Moon, as
160 to 2139 it follows, that the mo-
:
tion of the node and the motion of

the Sun will be in the proportion of
154 and 1395 i anc* therefore, by
the rule, the Sun's mean motion
from the node, is to the Sun's mean
motion, in the fubduplicate proportion
of 1549 to I 395S that is, nearly as
98 to 95. Which corresponds with
the obfer rations there being 98 revo^
j
lutions of the Sun to the node in 95

revolutions of the Sun. The fubdu-
plicate proportion taken more nearly, is
as 941 to 893, which will produce 19°.

21'. 3", for the motion of the node
from the fix'd Stars, in a fydereal
year. The motion (as obferv'd) is
0 . 21'. 22".
19
Had the calculation from the rule,
been more exadly made in large num-
bers, the annual motion produced
would be 19?- 21'. 07' which is 14"%
B 4 lefs
( M )
lefs than the motion, as obferved by
the Aftronomers.
Which difference may very probably
arife from the Sun's parallax; and if
fo, it may perhaps furnifti the beft
and moft certain method of adjufting
and fixing the true diftance of the Sun.
For the Sun's force being fomething
more on that half of the orb which is
towards the Sun, than what it is on the
other half, the elliptic epicycle is ac-
cordingly larger in the firft cafe, than
in the latter. And by calculation, I
find that the mean motion of the node,
is had of this
arifing after conlideration
difference, more than the mean mo-
is
tion from the mean magnitude of the

epicycle, by near x" in the year, for
every minute in the paralla&ic angle of
the orbit of the Moon, or for every
feco nd of the Sun's parallax. And
by the beft computation I have yet
made, this difference of 14/', in the an-
nual motion of the node, will arife
from about 8" of parallax ; which will
make the Suns diftance above 25000
femi-diameters of the Earth.
In like manner as the equant for the
motion of the node, in that month when
the line of the nodes is in quadrature
with the Sun, is an ellipfis j fb in any
other
Digitized by Google
•
* "5 )
(
other month it is alfo an ellipfis the :
motion of the node being dired and re-

trograde by turns, in the Moon's paffing
from the quadrature to the Sun to the
place of its node, and from the place of
its node to the quadrature.
But thefe equants do not

elliptic
only fcrve to the ine-
fliew The inclination of
quality of the motion of the ^kneoftheMoon*
j t 1 /•
* .1 • • ~ orbit to the Plane of
.
node, but alio the inclination of the Ecliptic,

the plane of the Moon's orbit to the
plane of the ecliptic. Thus the rays
in the elliptic equants, for the motion of
the Moon from the node in each month,
defign the inclinations of the plane of
its orbit to the plane of the ecliptic, in
the feveral refpe&ive pofitions of the
Moon to the line of the nodes. And
the rays of the elliptic equant for the
annual motion of the Sun from the node,
in my Conftru&ion, (in the fchol. to .
prop. 3$. book $. of Sir Ifaac Newton's

Trincipd) defign the different mean
inclinations of the faid plane, to the
plane of the ecliptic in each month,
when the Sun is in each refpe&ive a£
pe& to the line of the nodes.
Thus if NT
(the femi-tranfverfe Fig. a.
axis of the elliptic equant for the mo-
tion of the Sun from the node,) defign
the
Digitized by Google
( »«
the mean of the plane, or,
inclination
which is the fame thing, if it reprefent
the mean diftance between the pole of
the ecliptic and the pole of the Moon's
orbit, in that month when the Sun is in
the line of the nodes ; y
TU
the femicon-
jugateaxis of the faid ellipfis, will defign
the mean inclination or mean diftance of
the poles in that month when the line of
nodes is in quadrature to the Sun ; and
TB, any other femidiametcr of the faid
ellipfis, will reprefent the mean diftance
between the faid poles, when the Sun is
in that alped: to the line of the nodes,
which is defigned by the angle A. NT
For example, if the leaft inclination,
defigned by the fhorter femiaxis TH
be 5 0 . oo'. oo" ; fince THis to as TK
the motion of the Sun to the mean mo-
tion of the Sun from the node, by
the property of this equant ; and fince
there are 98 revolutions of the Sun to
the node in 9 j revolutions of the Sun ;
it follows, that H the difference be-
tween the greateft and leaftof the mean
inclinations in thefeveral months of the
year, is to TH the leaft, as j to 95 ;
by which proportion, the faid difference
will amount to 16'. 10". According to
Sir Ifaac Newton's computation in the
55-th prop, of the third book, it is
16.
( »7 )
16'. 23"|. But if the faid number be
leffen'd in the proportion of 69 to 70,
according to the author's note at the
end of the 34th prop, the faid diffe-
rence will become 16'. 9".
And in like manner, the inclinations
of the plane of the Moon's orbit, in
that month when the motion of the
node is fwifteft, (being fituated in the
line of quadratures with the Sun,)
are determined by the equant for the
motion of the Moon from the node, in
that month.
Thus, let THbc to TN'm the fub- Fig.i.
duplicate proportion of the Moon's mo-

tion, to its greateft motion from the
node, when the Moon is in the con-
jun&ion in TH\ that is, (as was be-
fore determined) let THbe to T in
the proportion of 121 1 to 1221 ; and
the ellipfis defcribed on the femiaxes
TH and TNy will be the equant for
the motion of the Moon from the
node in that month. And the rays of
the faid equant will defign the in-
clinations of the plane in the feveral
afpe&s of the Moon to the line of the
nodes. That is, if TN
be the incli-
nation of the plane, or the diftance of
the pole of the ecliptic from the pole
of the Moon's orbit, when the Moon
» •
X *«
is in TN the line of the nodes, the
ray TB
will reprefent the diftance of
# the faid poles, or the inclination of the
plane, in that afpe& which is defigned by
the angle NTB.
Which being laid down, it follows
that the whole variation of the incli-
nation, in the time the Moon moves
from the line of the nodes to its
quadrature in THK, is to the leaft
inclination, as KH
to TH, that is,
as i o to 12 1 1. Wherefore if the leaft
inclination be 4*. 59'. 35", the whole
variation will be 2'. 29". This is upon
fuppofition that the Sun continued in
the fame pofition to the line of the
nodes, during the time that the Moon
moves from the node to its quadra-
ture. But the Sun's motion protract-
ing the time of the Moon's period to
the Sun, in the proportion of 1 3 to 1% ;
the variation muft beincreafed in the fame
proportion, and will therefore be 2'. 41".
According to Sir Ifaac Newton's compu-
tation, as delivered in the corollaries to
the j 4th prop, of the 3d book, for fta-
ting this greateft variation, (the inter-
mediate variations in this or any other
month not being computed or fiiewn
by any method) it amounts to 2'. 43''.
But if the faid quantity be diminifli'd in
the
Digitized by Google
.
C )
the proportion of 70 to 69, according
to his note at the end of the faid propo-
rtion^, it will become the fame precifely
as it is here dcriv'd from the equant.
The motion of the Moon from the

Sun, as it is accelerated or re- The Variation of
tarded by the increment of the *^ dcfcribcd b ^
00 about th *
area defcribed about the Earth, Ea^h. *
(according to the 26th prop, of the 3d
book) is alfo to be reduced to an ellip-
tic equant ; by taking the fliorter axis to
the longer axis, in the fubquadruplicate
proportion of the force of the Moon's
gravity to the Earth, to the faid force
added to three times the mean Solar
force, that is, as TA to the
of three firft Fig. 1.
mean proportionals between and TA

TA+3AQ And in the fame pro-
portion is the area delcribed by the
Moon about the Earth, when in qua-
drature with the Sun, to the mean area,
or as the mean area to the area defcribed
in the fyzygies So that the greateft
:
area in the fyzygies is to the leaft in the

quadratures, in the fubduplicate pro-
portion of TA +
3 AG) to TA, or as
</ 85*4.1 to V8400. This is upon luppo-
fition, that the Moon revolves to the
Sun in the fame time as it revolves about
the Earth ; which will be found to a-
gree
Digitized by Google
(3°).
gree very nearly with Sir Ifaac New-
totfs computation, in the before-cited
propofition.
The Motion of the And after the fame manner

Apogee. an elliptic equant might be
conftru&ed, which would very nearly
lhew the mean motion of the apogee,
according to the rules delivei'd by Sir
Ifaac Newton (in the corollaries of the
45 th prop, of the firft book) for Hating
the motion of the apogee, namely, by
taking the greateft retrograde motion of
the apogee, from the force of the Sun
upon the Moon in the quarters j and
the greateft direct motion, from the force
of the Sun upon the Moon when in
the conjunction or oppofitionj each ac-
cording to his rule, deliver'd in the fe-
cond corollary to the faid propofition.
And if an ellipfis be made whofe axes
are in the fubduplicate proportion of
the Moon's motion from the apogee,
when in the laid fwifteft direft and re-
trograde motions, the faid ellipfis will
be nearly the equant for the motion of
the Moon from the apogee, and will
be found to be nearly of the form of
that above for the increment of the area.
•
But the motion of the apogee, ac-
cording to this method, will be found
to
Digitized by Google
(3> )
to be no more than i°. 37'. 22', in
the revolution of the Moon from apo-
gee to apogee, which ( according to
the obfervations) ought to be 3 0 4'. .
2#
7
So that it feems there is more force
necelTary to account fof the motion of
the Moon's apogee, than what arifes
from the variation of the Moon's gravi-
ty to the Sun, in its revolution about
the Earth.
But if the caufe of this motion be
fuppofed to arife from the variation of
the Moon's gravity to the Earth, as it
revolves round in the elliptic epicycle,
this difference of force, which is near
double the former, will be found to be
fufficient to account for the motion ; but
not with that exa&nefs as ought to be
expefted. Neither is there any method
that I have ever yet met with upon the
commonly received principles, which is
pcrfe&ly fufficient to explain the mo-

tion of the Moon's apogee.
The rules which follow concerning
the motion of the apogee, and the alte-
ration of the eccentricity, are found-
ed upon other principles, which I may
have occafion hereafter to explain, it
being, as I apprehend, impoffible to
derive thefe, and many other fuch pro-
pofitions
( }* )
portions from the laws of centripetal
forces.
Let TC (in the above conftru&ion
of the Lunar orbit) be the mean dis-
tance of the Moon, or half the fum of
its gieateft and leaft diftances, viz. T^
and T L
; and let CL
be the mean fe-
midiameter of the elliptic epicycle,
or half the fum of the lemiaxes; and
take a diftance LM, on the other fide
towards the centre, equal to CL; then,
The mean motion of the Moon from
its apogee, is to the mean mot ion of the
Moon, in the fubduplkate proportion of
TM TC to
For example, Half the fliorter axis
or 2)C is 2 21 ; TC the mean
therefore
diftance is 83761; CM or %CL the y
fum of the femiaxes,is 141 ; fo \httTM

is 8x357. Wherefore the motion of the
Moon from the apogee is to the motion
of the Moon, in the fubduplicate pro-
portion of 8x3 5i to 83761, or of 16471
to 16753, that is, nearly as 117 to 118,
or more nearly, as 35^ to 355 or yet •
more nearly, as 1877 t0 l °9l 7 ^° t ^ laC

there ought to be about 16 revolutions
of the apogee in 1893 revolutions of
the Moon ; which agrees to great pre-
cifenefs with the moft modern numbers
of Aftronomy; according to which pro-
portion,
Digitized by Googl
[ M ]
portion, the mean motion ofthe apo- •
gee, in a lydereal year,

ought to be
4.00.4.0'. 40^ ". But by the numbers in
Sir Ifaac Newton's theory of the
Moon, the laid motion is 40 °. 40'. 4 3".
According to the numbers of Tycho
Brake, it ought to be 40 0. 40'. 47".
The mean motion of the apogee be-

ing ftated, I find the following
rule for the alteration of the ec-
ccntricity.
The leafl eccentricity is to the mean
eccentricity in the duplicate proportion
of the Sun's mean motion from the apo*
gee of the Moon's orbit , to the Sun's
mean motion. Or in the duplicate Pro-
portion of the periodical time of the oun's
revolution y to the mean Periodical time
of its revolution to the moon's apogee.
By the foregoing rule for the mean
motion of the apogee, there are 1 6 re-
volutions of the apogee in 1895 revo-
lutions of the Moon \ but there being
254 revolutions of the Moon in 19 re-
volutions of the Sun 5 there muft be
about 7 revolutions of the apogee in
about 62 revolutions of the Sun, or ra-
ther about 20 in 177. So that the pe-
riods of the Sun to the Stars, and of the
Sun to the Moon's apogee, arc in pro-
C portion
[ ?4]
portion nearly as the numbers 157 and
177. T he duplicate of which propor-
tion is that of 107 to 136; which, ac-
cording to the rule 5 ought to be the pro-
portion of the leaft eccentricity to the
mean eccentricity.
S o that by this rule, the mean eccen-
tricity, (or half the fum of the greateft
and leaft,) ought to be to the difference
of the mean from the leaft, (or half the
difference of the greateft and the leaft,)
as 1 36 to 29."
How near this agrees with the Ob-
jfcrvations, will appear from the num-
bers of Mr. Honox or Mr. Ilamfied,
and of Sir Ifaac Newton.
The mean eccentricity according to
Mr. Fiamfted or Mr. Horrox is 0.05 5 2 3 6,
half the difference between the greateft
and leaft is 0.0 6 1 7; which numbers arc
1 1
in the proportion of 1 3 5 \ to 2 8 2 nearly.

According to Sir Ifaac Newton,
the mean eccentricity is 0.05505, hall
the difference of the greateft and leaft
is 0.0 1 1 7 3 ; which numbers are in pro-
portion nearly as 1354s to 28${, each

of which proportions is very near that
above afligned.
But it is to be noted, that the rule,
which is here laid down, is true only up-

on iuppofition that the eccentricity i
exceeding
Digitized by CoOgl
[ 35 ]
exceeding fmall. There is another mle
derived from a different method, which
prefuppofes the knowledge of the quan-
tity of the mean eccentricity ; and
which will not only determine the vari-
ationof the eccentricity according to the
laws of gravity, with greater exa&nefs,
but ferve alfo to correct an hypothefis
in the modern theories of the Moon, in
which their greateft error leems to con-
lift; and that is, in placing the earth in
the focus of that ellipfis, which is defcri-
bed on the extreme diameters of the lunar
orbit j whereas it ought to be in a certain
point nearer the perigee, as I may have
occafion to explain more fully hereafter.
The greateft and leaft eccentricity

being determined ; the equant
T E tion d
for the motion of the Sun from
the apogee is an ellipfis, whole
thc ip 0 ^
greater and leffer axes are the greateft
and leaft eccentricities : and therefore,
by the property of fuch an equant as
before laid down,
The fine of the greateft equation of
the apogee will be to the radius ^ as the
difference of the axes of the equant is to
their fum j that is, as the difference of
the greateft and leaft eccentricities to
their fum.
G z Foj£
Digitized by Google
[ it ]
For example, fince the difference is
to the fum as 29 to 136, by what was

determined in the foregoing article, the
greateft equation of the apogee will
,
be about 1 0. 1 8'. 40". Sir Ifaac New-

ton has determined it from the obferva-
0
tions to be 12 . 1 8'.
The greateft and leaft eccentricities

being determined ; the eccentricity and
equation of the apogee, in any given af-
pe& of the Sun, are determined by the
equant, in the following manner.
Let 77V be the greateft eccentrici-
ty, 777 the leaft, the ellipfis on the
lemi-axes TN and 777, the equant
for the motion of the apogee.
Then if the angle NTF, be made
equal to the mean diftance or mean mo-
tion of the Sun from the apogee, the
angle NTB will be the true diftance
or motion of the Sun from the apogee;
the difference BTF
y
the equation of
the apogee ; and the ray 77?, the eccen-
tricity of the orbit, in that alpeft of the
Sun to the apogee defigned by the an-
gle NTB. Hence arifes this rule.
The tangent of the mean diftance,
viz. NTF, is to the tangent of the true
diftance NTB, in the given proportion of
Digitized by Google
[ i7 ]
the great eft eccentricity TN to the leaft
TH, that is y as 1 6 5 to 1 07.
From what has been laid down con-
cerning the general property of an e-
quant, that it is a curve line defcribed
about the center, whofe rays are reci-
procally in the fubduplicate proportion
of the velocity at the center, or the ve-
locity of revolution, it will not be dif-
ficult to delcribe the proper curve for
any motion that is propofed ; and where
the inequality of the motion throughout
the revolution is but finall, there is no
need of any nice or fcrupulous exa&nels
in the quadrature of the curve for fliew-
ing what the equation is. Thus all the
finall annual equations of the Moon's
motion arifing from the different diftan-
ccs of the Sun, at different times of the
year, may be reduced to one rule exad
enough for the purpofe.
For fince the Sun's force to create
thefe annual alterations, is reciprocally
in the triplicate proportion of the di-
ftance ;the rays of the equant for fuch
a motion, will be in the fclquiplicate pro-
portion of the diftance. From whence it
will not be difficult to prove, that if the
revolution of the motion to be equated,
were performed in the time of the Sun's
revolution, the equation would be to the
C 3 equation
Digitized by Google
[ J» ]
equation of the Sun's center, nearly as ?

to 2 : and ib if the force decreafed as
any other power of the Sun's diftance,
fuppole that whofe index is m, the e- i
quation would be to that of the Sun's

center as m to 2. But if the motion be
performed in any other period, the equa-
tion will be more or lefs, in the proporti-
on of the period of the revolution to
the Sun, to the period of the revolution
of the motion to be equated. Thus if
it were the node or apogee of the Moon's
orbit, the equation is to the former as
the period of the Sun to the node or
apogee, to the period of the node or apo-
gee. Which rule makes the greateft e-
quation for the node about 8'. 56 , be-
ing a fmall matter lefs than that in Sir
lfaac Newt oris theory ; and the greateft
equation for the apogee about 21. 5 i\
being fomcthing larger than that in the
fame theory.
The like rule will ferve for the an-
nual equation of the Moon's mean mo-
tion. If inftead of the equation for the
Sun's center, another fmall equation be
taken in proportion to it as the force, by
Sir lfaac Newton called the mean 1b-
lar force, to the force of the Moon's gra-

vity, or as 47 to 8400 •
the laid equa-
tion increafed in the proportion of the
Digitized by Google
Sun's period to the mean lynodical pe-
iiod of the Moon to the Sun, or of 99
to 8, will be the annual equation of the
Moons mean motion. According to this,
the equation, when greateft, will be
12'. 5".
What is faid may be fufficient for
the prelent purpofe, which is only to
lay down the principal laws and rules
of the feveral motions of the Moon,
according to gravity. Some other
propofitions, which feem no lcls necef.
lary than the former, for compleating
the theory of the Moon's motion, as to
itsaftronomical life, i refer ve to another
time.
But to make fome amends for the
fhortneis and confuiednefs of the pre-
ceeding propofitions, I fhall add one
example to fhew the ufe of the equant
more at large, in what is commonly cal-
led the folution of the Ktplerian pro-
blem ; that being one of the things
which I propofed to explain, when the
elements for the theory of the Moon
were advertifed.
An
[ 40 ]
v
An example of the ufe of the e quant in
fnding the equation of the center.
LET the figure AW be the orbit

in which a body revolves, de-
icribing equal areas in equal times by
lines S ; and
drawn from a given point
let be propos'd to find the equant for
it
the apparent motion of the iaid body,

about any other place within the orbit,
luppofe F.
Let there be a line FR indefinitely
produced, which revolves with the body
as it moves through the arch j and AR
in the faid line Fp y
take a diftance
which ftiall be to FR, the diftance of
the body from the given point F, in the
iubduplicate proportion of the perpen-
dicular let fall upon the tangent of the
orbit at R from the point 4?, to the per-
pendicular on the faid tangent let fall
from the given point F; and the curvi-
linear figure, delcrib'd by the point /, fo
taken every where, will be the equant
for the motion of the body about the
point F.
For fince the areas defcribed at the
diftances Fp and FR arc in the dupli-
cate
'
Digitized by Google
[ 4> ]
catc proportion of thofc lines, that is, by
the conftrudion, in the proportion of the
perpendiculars on the tangents let fall
from S and the areas which the
body defcribes, in moving through the
arch A R about the points S and jF, are
in the proportion of the fame per-
pendiculars. And therefore the area
deicribed by the revolution of the line
Fp in the figure, will be equal to that
which is defcribed by the revolution of
the line R
S in the orbit. So that the
areas defcribed in the figure will be
equal in equal times, as they are in the
orbit. And confequently the rays Fp
of the figure will conftantly be in the
lubduplicate proportion of the velocity
of the motion, as it appears at the center
Fy which is the property of the equant.
From which conftrudion, it will be
eafy to lhew, that in the cafe where a bo-
dy defcribes equal areas in equal times
about a fixed point, there may be a place
found out within the orbit, about which
the body will appear to revolve with a
motion more uniform than about any
other place.
Thus fuppofe the orbit A^Dl? was
a figure, wherein the remoteft and nea-
reft apfis A and <P were diametrically op-
pofite, in a line palling through the point
[4tJ
5*,viz* the point about which the equal
areas are delcribed ; then if the point F
be taken at the fame diftance from the
remoteft apfis A, as the point S is from
the neareft apfis c?, the faid center F
will be the place, about which the body
will appear to have the moft uniform
motion. For in this cafe the point F
will be in the middle of the figure LpD/ y
which the equant for the motion a-

is
bout that point. So that the body will

appear to move about the center F, as
fwift when it is in its floweft motion in
the remoter apfis A y
does when it
as it
is in its fwifteft motion in the neareft

C
apfis P.
Forby the conftru&ion, when the
body is at A y the ray of the equant F L
is a mean proportional between F and A
A Sj and when the body is at 3>, the
ray of the equant Fl is a mean propor-
tional between the two di fiances
and CP F, which are refpe&ively equal
to the former.
And in like manner in an orbit of
any other given form, a place may be
found about which the motion is moft
regular.
If what has been faid be applied to
the calc of a body revolving in an el-
liptic orbit, wd defcribing equal areas
in
Digitized by Google
[ 4J ]
in equal times about one of the foci,
as the cafe of a planet about the Sun,
is
and a fecondary planet about the pri-

mary one ; it willferve to fhew the foun-
dation of the feveral hypothefes and
rules which have been invented by the
modern Aftronomers, for the equating of
fuch motions; and likewife fhew how
far each of them are deficient or im-
perfect.
For if the ellipfis AW be the
orbit of a planet defcribing equal areas
about the Sun in the focus S\ the other
focus, fuppofe Fj will be the place a-
bout which the motion is moft regular,
from what has been already faid ; that
focus being at the lame diftance from
the aphelion A, as the Sun at S is from
the perihelion CP. And by the con-
ftrudlion, each ray (Fp) of the equant
will always be a mean proportional be-
tween FR and R 5,two diftances
the
of two foci in that
the planet from the
place where the ray Fp is taken. For the
rays SR and RF, making equal angles
with the tangent at R, by the property
of the ellipfis, are in the proportion of
the perpendiculars from S and F, let fall
on thofe tangents. And therefore Fp
being to FR in the iubduplicate pro-
[ 44 ]
portion of SR
to y
FR
it will be a mean
proportional between thofe diftances.

1. Hence when the planet is in the
aphelion A y
or perihelion the rays of
the cquant FL and tl are the fhorteft,
each being equal to CZ), the leffer femi-
axis of the orbit : For by the property
of the ellipfis, the reftangle of the cx-
tream diftances from the focus is equal
to the fquare of the leffer femi-axis.
2. When the planet is at its mean
diftance from the Sun in D or
the ex- </,
tremities of the leffer axis, the equant

cuts the orbit in the lame place j the rays
of the equant being then the Iongeft,
being each equal to the greater iemi-axis
CJ. For in thofe points of the orbit,
the diftances from the foci and the mean
proportional are the lame.
From which form of the cquantJt^
appears,
i. T
h a t the velocity of the revoluti-
on about the focus F diminishes, in the
motion of the planet from the apheli-
on or perihelion to the mean diftance
and increafes in parting from the mean
diftance to the perihelion or aphelion.
For the rays of the equant incrcafe in
the firft cafe, and diminilh in the latter
and the velocity of revolution increafes
in
Digitized by Google
[ 4J ]
in the duplicate proportion, as the rays
diminifh.
2. In any place of the orbit, luppofe
R, the velocity of the revolution about
the focus F, is in proportion to the mean
velocity, as the re&anglc of the femi-axes
of the orbit C*D and CJ, to the rectan-
gle of the focal diftances R F and R S.
For the equant and the orbit, being fi-
gures of the lame area, arc each equal
to a circle, whofe radius is a mean pro-
portional between the two femi-axes CD
and C
J. But the mean motion about
F
the focus y is in thofe places, where the
laid circle cuts the equant ; and in other
places, the velocity of the revolution is
reciprocally as the Iquare of the di-
ftance, that is, reciprocally as the rc&an-
gle of the focal diftances R F
and S. R
3. So that the planet is in its mean
velocity of revolution about the focus
F, in four places of the orbit, that is,,
where the re&angle of the focal difc
tances is equal to the redangle of the
femi-axes ; which places in orbits nearly
circular, fuch as thofe of the planets, arc
about 45 degrees from the aphelion or
. perihelion ; but may be afligned in general,
if need be, by taking a point in the orbit,
fuppofe R y
whofe neareft diftance from
the leffer axis of the orbit CD is to the
longer
[4<]
longer femi-axis CJ y
in the fubduplicate
proportion of the longer axis to the Turn of
the two axes ; as may be eafily proved.
What
has been laid, may be enough
to fhew the form of the equant, and
the manner of the motion about the
upper focus in general. But the pre-
cile determination of the inequality of
the motion, requires the knowledge of
the quadrature of the leveral fedors
of the equant, or at leaft y if any o-
ther method be taken, of that which
is equivalent to liich a quadrature.
There are divers methods for fhewing

the relation between the mean and true
motion of a planet round the Sun, or
round the other focus, ibme more exad
than others. But the following feems
the moft proper for exhibiting in one
view, all the feveral hypotheles, and
rules, which are in common ufc in the
modern Aftronomy, whereby it may
eafily appear, how far they agree or dif-
ferfrom each other, and how much each
of them errs from the precile determi-
nation of the motion, according to the
true law of an equal delcription of areas
about the Sun.
Upon the center F
defcribe the el-
lipfis L A/7, equal and fimilar to the el-
orbit JtT> Pi but having its axes
liptic
Digitized by Google
[ 47 ]
FN and FL contrarily pofited, that is$
the fhorter axis L F

lying in the lon-
ger axis of the orbit A
'P, and the lon-
ger axis FN parallel to the fhorter CD.
Let the focus of the laid ellipfis be in
f.
And fuppofe two other ellipfis I and LB
Lfly to be drawn upon the common
axis L/, one palling through the point
B y
where the perpendicular FN
inter-
feds the orbit, and the other through
the focus f. Let the line FR, revol-
ving with the planet in the orbit, be in-
definitely produced, till it interled the
firft ellipfis LNl (which was fimilar
to the orbit) in the equant in />, and
the ellipfis LB
I (drawn through the
interfeftion Z?,) in K< From the point K

let fall KH perpendicular to the line
of apfides qA P y and let it be produced
till it inter fed the firft ellipfis LNl in
O, and the ellipfis Lfl (palling through
the focus /) in E. And laftly, in the
ellipfis LN/y let GM be
an ordinate
equal and parallel to EH. In which
conftru&ion it is to be noted, that the
ellipfis Lfl and LBl are fuppoled as
drawn only to divide the line OKH

in given proportions, that KH may be
to O Hy as the latus re&um of the orbit to
the tranfverfe axis ; and that EH or G 9
the bafe of the elliptic fegment GLM,

[4« ]
may be to 0 f/, as the diftance of the foci
to the tranfverfe axis.
Which being prcmifed, it will be
eafy to prove, that the fe&or in the pFL

equant, or, which is the fame thing, the
fe&or KSA in the orbit, is equal to the
curvilinear area OKFMG, that is, equal
to the elliptic fe&or S^FL, deducting
the fegment LMG y
and adding or lub-
du&ing the fpacc §£0, ac-
trilinear
cording as the angle RFj4 is lefs or
greater than a right angle. Wherein it is
to be noted, that thefe figns of addition
and fubdu&ion are to be uied in gene-
ral, if the angle AFK
is taken from
the aphelion in the firft fcmi-circle, but

towards the aphelion in the latter iemi-
circle. But if the angle be taken AFK
the lame way throughout the whole re-
volution, as is the method in Aftronomi-
cal calculations, then the lcgment and
the trilinear ipace in the latter femi-cir-
i
cle muft be taken with the contrary

figns to what are laid down.
H e nce it appears, that the inequality
in the motion of a planet about the up-
per focus F y
confifts of three parts.
I. The firft and principal of which is
the inequality in the alteration of the an-

'!*) in making equal areas in the
gle QJ 1
ellipfis
digitized by Google
[ 45> ]
cllipfis L NL For
a circle equal to
if
the ellipfis be defcribed upon the cen-
ter F y fince the radius (being a mean
proportional between the two femi-axes)
will fall without the ellipfis about the
line of apfides, and within it about the
middle diftances, the angle QFLy
which proportional to the area de-
is
fcribed in the circle, will therefore in-
creale fafter about the line of apfides,
and flower about the middle diftances,
in defcribing equal areas in the ellipfis,
than it ought to do in the hypothefis of
Bifhop Wardy who makes the planet re-
volve uniformly about the focus. The
equation to rectify this inequality is de-
termined by the following rule.
The tangent of the angle gjF L, is
to the tangent of the angle in the circle
including the fame area, as the longer
axis of the ellipfis to the fhorter axis
j
and the difference of the angles, whole
tangents are in this proportion, is the e-
quation ; as is manifeft from what was be-
fore faid on the properties of an ellip-
tic equant. From the fame it alfo fol-
lows, that
I . The greateft equation is an angle 7
whofe fine is to the radius as the difference
of the axes to their fum, or, which is the
fame thing, as the fquare of the diftance
D of
[ 50 ]
of the foci, to the fquare of half the fiim
of the axes. So that in ellipfis nearly
circular, of different eccentricities, this
grcatcft equation will vary nearly in
the duplicate proportion of the eccentri-
city.
2. In ellipfis nearly circular, the
equation at any given angle {^jF L> is
to the greatcft equation, nearly as the
fine of the double of the given angle to the
radius ; which follows from hence, that the
equation is the difference of two angles,
whole tangents are in a given proporti-

on, and nearly equal.
3. This equation adds to the ean m
motion in the firft and third quadrant
of mean anomaly, and lubduds in the
lecond and fourth ; as will eafily appear
from that the line F, in defcribing
equal areas in the ellipfis, makes the an-
gle to the line of the apfides, lels acute
than it would be in an uniform revolution.
This is the equation which is ac-
counted for in the hypothefis of Bullial-
dus. For he fuppofes the motion of the
planet in its orbit to be lb regulated
about the upper focus, that the tangents

of the angles, from the lines of ap-
fides, fhall always be to the tangents
of the angles anfwering to the mean ano-
maly, ii\ the proportion of the ordinate
Digitized by Go
[ 5« ]
ih the the ordinates in the
ellipfis to
circle circumlcribed ; which in effeit is
the fame, as if he had made the true
equant for its motion about the focus F,
to be the ellipfis as above delcribed.
4
The lame equation is alio uled by

Sir Ifaac Newton, in his lblution of the
Keplerian problem, in the icholium to
the 31ft prop, of the 1 ft book, and is
thcjre defigned by the letter V.
. But equant L T> I co-
fince the true
incides with the elliptic equant in the
extremities of the fhorter axis at L and /,
and falls within the fame at its inter-
feron with the longer axis FN, it fol-
lows, that the motion of the planet in the
femi-circle about the aphelion, is fwift-
er than according to the hypothefis of
an equal defcription of areas in the el-
lipfis LN/
y
and for the lame realbn
flower in the other lemi-circlc about the
perihelion ; the velocity about the cen-
ter jF being always reciprocally in the
duplicate proportion of the diftance.
Which leads to the fecond part of the
inequality of the motion about the locus.
II. The equation to re&ify this ine-
quality, an angle anfwering to theleg-
rs
ment G LM\ which angle is to be ad-

ded to the mean anomaly, to make the
area of the elliptic fe&or <2FL.
0 i Tri*
[ Si ]
This angle or equation is determi-
ned by the following rule. Let R be an
angle fubtended by an arch equal in
length to the radius of the circle, viz,
57,29578 degrees ; and let A be an angle,
whole fine is to the radius as GM, the
bale of the fegment, to F N the femi-
tranlVerle axis ; alio let B be an arch
inproportion to R, as the fine of the
double of the angle to the radius A
Then the equation for the legment will
be equal to A—
\B.
This equation is at its maximum,
when the angle L FQ
is a right angle
the bale of the legment becoming equal

to Ffj half the diftance of the
foci, and
the angle J, being in this cale half the
angle PDS formed at the extremity of
the lelfer axis, and fubtended by FS,
the diftance of the foci ; which is com-
monly called the grcateft equation of the
center. And conlequently the arch B y
in this cale, is to 2?, as the fine of the

laid greateft equationof the center, is to
the" radius. So that according to this
rule,* for the mcafure of the fegment, it
will follow, That
A. This greateft equation is in
proportion to the greateft equa-
tion of Bullialdus, as found in the
preceding article for the elliptic eqnant,
nearly
Digitized by Google
[ 53 ]
nearly as three times the tranfverle axis,
to eight times the diftance of the foci.
Or, otherwile, the greateft equation is
to the angle defigned by as twice the

cube of the diftance between the foci, to
three times the cube of the tranfverle
axis. Either of which rules may be de-
rived from the true angle, as before de-
termined ; or by taking * of the re&an-
gle of GM
and L My the bale and
height of the legment, for the meafure
of that legment.
So that in elliptic orbits nearly cir-
cular, this greateft equation for the leg-
ment is in the triplicate proportion
of the eccentricity.
2. This equation at any given ^n-
gle QJF Ly
is to the greateft equation,
in the triplicate proportion of the ordi-
nate OHto the lemi-tranfverfe ; that
is, nearly as the cube of the fine of the
mean anomaly joined to the double of

Bullialdus's equation to the cube of the
radius. For the legment L, which GM
is proportional to the equation, is in the
triplicate proportion of its bafe nearly ;
and the bafe is proportional to the ordi-
nate OH y
by the conftru&ion.
But the ordinate OH (in a circle
delcribed upon theFN,) be- radius
comes the fine of an angle, whole tan-
D i gent
[14 1
gent is to the tangent of the arfgle
in the proportion of the tranlVerfe axis
to the conjugate ; but the tangent of the
fame angle £$FL, is to the tangent of the
mean motion, anfwering to the area of
the elliptic equant QFL
in the fame
proportion. So that the ordinate OH
is to the fine of that angle of mean mo-
tion, in the duplicate of the faid pro-

portion and confequently the ordinate
•
O//, on the radius FN, is

in the circle
the fine of an angle, nearly equal to the
mean anomaly joined to the double of
Bullialdus's equation.
3. This equation adds to the mean
motion in pafling from the aphelion to
the perihelion, and fubdu&s in pafling
from the perihelion to the aphelion ; as
is evident from the tranfit of the poinc
of interfe&ion E round the periphery of

the ellipfis Lf 1.
I n Sir Ifaac Newton's rule (in the

before-cited fcholium to the 31ft prop.
1 ft book,) the angle X
anfvvers to this
equation for the fegment ; excepting
that it is there taken in the triplicate
proportion of the fine of the mean a-
nomaly, inftead of the triplicate propor-
tion of the ordinate OH. The error
:
* rule makes
III. Thi
Digitized by Google
[ 55 ]
III. The third part of the inequali-

ty, anfvveringto the trilinear fpaceOA^,
being the difference of the elliptic fe&or
O FQ and the triangle O F K.
The fc&or OQF proportional to is
an angle, which is the difference of two

angles, whofe tangents are in the gi-
ven proportion of the femi-latus re&um
FB and the
t
femi-tranfvcrfe FN, or in
the duplicate proportion of the leffer
axis to the axis of the orbit. So that
this feSor, when at a maximum, is as an
angle, whole fine is to the radius, as
the difference of the latus re&um ancj
traniVerfe to their fum ; or as the diffe-
rence of the fquares of the femi-axes to
their liim.
The triangle OFK is proportional
to the re&angie of the .co-ordinates
OH and HF ; that is, as the re&an-
gle of the fine OH

and its cofine, in
the circle on the radius FiSTj or as the
fine of the double of that angle, whole
fine is ;OH
that is, the double of the
angle, whole tangent is to the tangent of
the angle QFL, in the given ratio of
the greater to the leffer axis ; or whofe
tangent is the tangent of the angle of
mean motion anlwering to the elliptic
fe&or QFL, in the duplicate of the laid
D 4 ratio.
;
[ 5< ]
ratio. But this triangle OFK y
when at
a maximum, makes an angle of mean
motion, which is to the angle called R,
as BN, half the difference between the
latus re&um and tranfverfe axis, is to
the double of the tranfverfe axis.

So that the fe&or or triangle in orbits
nearly circular, is always nearly equal
to the double of Bul/ia/aus's equation.
The triangle and fe£tor being thus
determined, the equation for the tri-
lincar fpace is accordingly determined, i
From what has been laid, it appears, that

i. This equation for the trilinear
fpace OKQ, is to that for the triangle
OKF, in a ratio compounded of BN> ,
the difference between the femi-tranC-

verfe and femi-latus rectum to the femi-
latus rectum, and of the duplicate pro-
portion of the fine O // to the radius
or QKg^ is to OKF y
in a proportion
compounded of the duplicate propor-
tion of the diftance of the foci to the
lquarc of the leffer axis, and the dupli-
cate proportion *of the fine O H to the
radius. For the trilinear figure OKQ
and the triangle y
OKF
are nearly as
OA" and KH, which are in that pro-
portion y and confequently it holds in
this proportion to the double of Built-
anus's equation.
a. This
Digitized by Google
[57]
2. This equation , in different angles,
is as the content under the fine comple-
ment and the cube of the fine. For the
triangle OKF, is as the re&angle of the
fine and the fine complement.
3. It is at a maximum, at an angle
whole fine complement is to the radius,
as the fquare of the greater axis is to the
fum of the fquares of the two axes
which in orbits nearly circular, is about
60 degrees of mean anomaly.
4. In orbits of different eccentricities,
it increafes in the quadruplicate propor-
tion of the eccentricity.
5. It obfcrves the contrary figns to
that for the elliptic cquant, called Bul-
lialdus's equation ; iubdu&ing from the
mean motion in the firft and third qua-
drants, and adding in the fecond and
fourth, if the motion is reckoned from
the aphelion.
The ule of thefe equations, in find-
ing the place of a planet from the upper
focus, will appear from the following
rules, which are eafily proved from
what has been faid.
Let t be equal to CA the lemi-
tranfverfe, c equal to FC the diftance of
the center from the focus, b equal to
CD the femi-conjugate, and an R
angle fubtended by an arch equal to
[ JS ]
thp radius, viz. 57°. 17'- 44". 4*'", or
57, 2957795 degrees. Take an angle
ztt %t lb
angle 7" be will the greateft e-
The
quation for the triangle ; the an- OFK
gle S will be the greateft equation for
the fegment LMG ; and the angle E
will be the greateft equation for the area
OKFL. Which greateft equatiqns be-
ing found, the equations at any angle
of mean anomaly, will be determined by
the following rules.
Let M be the mean anomaly
and let r be to 7* as the fine of the
angle z M to the radius : In which pro-
portion, as alfo in the following,
there is need of any great ex-
po
a&neft, it being lufficient to take the
proportions in round numbers.
E
Take e to as the fine of 2 M+ir to
the radius ; and s to S as the cube of the
fine of M±t
to the cube of the radius.
Then the angle gFL is equal to
JM+e+s, in the firft quadrant LN y
or
Mê+Sy in the fecond quadrant 2V7,
or M+e— s in the third quadrant, or
M— — s in the fourth quadrant.
Note, That the fmall equation r is al-
ways of the fame fign with the equation e y
an4
Digitized by Google
[ J?]
and in the cafe of the planets, always
near the double of that equation.
The angle RFA
at the upper focus
F being known, the angle at the RSA
Sun in the other focus, is found by the
common rule of Bifhop Ward \ viz. the
tangent of half the angle RSA, is to be to
the tangent of half the angle y al- RFA
ways in the given proportion of the pe-
rihelion diftance ST to the aphelion di-
ftance SA. How thefe equations are in
the ieveral eccentricities of the Moon's
orbit, will appear by the following
Table.
* *
Eccentr.
»
E.
» •
1
s.
t n
0.040 1.2 J 09
0.045 I.45 13
0.050 2. Op *7
0.055 2.36 23
0.060 3.06 3°
0.065 3.58 38
0.070 4.14 47
To add one example ;

fuppofe the ec-
centricity 0.060, the mean anomaly 30 0.
The fine of the double of the mean ano-
maly, that is, the fine of 60 is to the ra-
87 to 100; whence, if the
dius, nearly as
equation £=3 '.06 , be divided in that
/;
propor-
3
proportion, it will produce i'ô" near-

ly, for the equation e : the line of Afis,
in this cafe, equal to £ the radius, the
cube is i of the cube of the radius;
whence if the equation 5=30" be divi-
ded in the fame proportion, it will pro-
duce near 4" for the equation s. There-
fore the angle RFA which is M-\-e+s,
y
will be |G*.2'*4+" ; and the half is

1 jM'.ai* ; wherefore if the tangent of
this angle be diminilhed, in the proportion

of 1 ,06, the aphelion diftance, to 94 the
perihelion diftance,it will produce the tan-
gent of 1 0 2 3'. r 3
. the double of which
2 6°.46'. z 6", is the true anomaly or angle
at the Sun RSA. And confequently, the
equation of the center is 3°.i 3'. 3 4" to be
fubdu&ed, at 30 degrees mean anomaly.
When the place of a planet is found
by this, or any other method ; the place
may be corre&ed to any degree of ex-
actnefs by the common property of the
equant, viz. that the rays are recipro-
cally in the duplicate proportion of the
velocity about the center. For in this
cafe, if there be a difference between
the mean motion belonging to the angle
affumed at the upper focus, and the
given mean motion, the error of the an-
gle affumed is to the difference, as the
xcdangle of the femiraxes to the red-
angle
Digitized by Google
[ «' ]
angle of the diftances from the foci.
But in orbits like thole of the planets,
the rules as they are delivered above
are fufficient of themfelves without fur-
ther corre&ion.
POSTSCRIPT.
UPON reviewing thele few Iheets
they were printed off,
after
which happened a little fooner
than I expe&ed, I fear the apology I
have offered for delivering the proposi-
tions relating to the Moons motion, in
this rude manner, without giving any
• proof of them, or lb much as mention-
ing the fundamental principles of their
demonftration, will lcarcely pals as a la-
tisfaftory one ; elpecially fince there are
among thele propofitions, lome which, I
am apt to think, cannot eafily be proved
to be either true or falfe, by any methods
which are now in common ufe.
Wherefore to render fome fatisfa&i-
on in this article, I Ihall add a few words
concerning the principles from whence
thele propofitions, and others of the like
nature
Digitized by Google
[ «*I
nature are derived : and alfo take the op*
portunity to fubjoin a few remarks,
which ought to have been made in their
proper places.
Firft, There is a law of motion:,
which holds in the cafe where a body is
defle&cd by two forces, tending conftant-
Iy to two fixed points.
Which is, That the body, in fuch a
cafe, will defcribe, by lines drawn from
the tvjo fixt points, equal folids in equal
times, about the line joining the [aid
fxt points.
The law of Kepler, that bodies de-
fcribe equal areas in equal times, about
the center of their revolution, is the on-
ly general principle, in the modern do-
ftrine of centripetal forces.
But fince this law, as Sir lfadc New-
ton has proved, cannot hold, whenever •
a body has a gravity or force to any

other than one and the lame point
there feems to be wanting lome fuch
law as I have here laid down, that may
ferve to explain the motions of the Moon
and Satellites, which have a gravity to-
wards two different centers.
It follows as a corollary to the law
here laid down, that if a body, gravF-
tating towards two fixt centers, be fup-
pofed, for given lmall intervals of time,
as*
Digitized by Go
as moving in a plane paffing through
one of the fixt centers, the inclinati-
on of the laid plane, to the line join-
ing the centers, will vary according to
the area defcribed j that is, if the area
be greater, the inclination will be left
and if the area be left, the inclination
will be greater, in order to make the
lolids equal.
This corollary, when rightly applied,
will Jferve to explain the variation of the
inclination of the plane of the Moon's
orbit to the plane of the ecliptic.
And how extremely difficult it is to
compute the variation of the inclination
in any particular cafe, without the know-
ledge of fome fuch principle as this is, will
beft appear, if any one confider the in-
tricacy of the calculations, ufcd in the
corollaries to the 34 prop, of the third
book of the tPrincipia, in order to ftate
the greateft quantity of variation, in that
month, when the line of the nodes is in
quadrature with the Sun, and that only
in particular Numbers, whereby it is de-
termined to be 2 '.4 3".
Whereas, there is a plain and general
rule in this cafe, which follows from
what is laid down, though not immedi-
ately ; namely, that the greateft variation
in the faid pofition of the Moon's orbit, is
ft
[*]
to the mean inclination of the plane as
the difference of the greateft and leaft
areas deicribed in the lame time by the
Moon about the earth, when in the con-
junction and in the quarters to the mean
area.
Wherefore, if S be to Z,,as the Sun's
period to the Moon's period : The gre at-
eft area is to the leaft, as FSSTJTL to
Sy or as S+lL£. to S nearly, by what

islaid on this article in the 29 th page.
So that the difference of areas is to the
mean area, as \LL to SS+iLL ; and
in thefame proportion is the greateft vari-
ation of the inclination of the plane in this
month to the mean inclination, which a-
grees nearly with Sir Ifaac's computation.
Secondly, There is a general method
for affigning the laws of the motion of
a body to and from the center, abftra&ly
confider'd, from its motion about the
center.
The motion to and from the center is
called by Kepler a Libratory motion ; the
knowledge of which ieems ablblutely
requifite, to define the laws of the reven
lution of a body, in reipeft of the ap-
fides of its orbit.
For the revolution of a body, from
apfis to apfis, is performed in the time
of
Digitized by Google
ft g
C 6$ 3
m •
of the whole libratory motion ; the ap*

fides of the. orbit being the extreme
points, wherein the libratory motion
Ceafes.
So that, according to this method,
the mdtion of a body round the center,
is not confider'd as a continued defledtion
from a ftreight line ; but as a motion

compounded of a circulatory motion
round the center, and a redtilinear mo-
tion to or from the center.
Each of which motions Require a pro-
per Equant. Of the equant for the mo-
tion round the center, I hav£ already
given feveral examples. And in the cafe
of all motions, which are governed by
a gravity or force tending to a fixt point,
the real orbit in which the body moves,
is the equant for this motion. In all
other cafes it is a different figure.
*
The Equant for the libratory motion,
is a curve line figure, the areas of
which
ferve to fhew the time wherein the feve-
ral fpaces of the libration are performed.
Which figure is to be determined, by
knowing the law of the gravity to the
center: For the libratory force, to acce-
lerate or retard the motion to or from
the center, is the difference between
the gravity of the body to the center,
and the centrifugal force arifing from
E the
s
t 66 ]
the circulatory motion. But the latter
is always under one rule : For in all re-
volutions round a center, in any curve

line, whether defcribed by a centripetal
force or not, the centrifugal force is di-
rectly in the duplicate proportion of the
area defcribed in a given fmall time, and
reciprocally in the triplicate proportion
of tne diftance ; whicn is an immediate
confequence of a known propofition of
Mr. Ruygens. The like proportion alfo
holds as to the centripetal force in all
circular motions, from a known propo-
fition of Sir Ifaac Newton. But what is
true of the centripetal force in circles,
is univer&lly true of the other force in
orbits of any form.

So that by knowing the gravity of the
body, fince the other force is always
known, the difference , which is the ab-
folute force to move the body to or from
the cencer, will be known; and from
thence the velocity of the motion, and
the fpace defcribed in any given time,
may be found, and the equant defcribed.
Thefe hints may be fufficient to fliew
what the method is.
To add an example. If the gravity

be reciprocally as the fquare of the dis-
tance ; the equant for the libratory mo-
tion, will be found to be an ellipfis
fimilar
Digitized by Google
[67]
fimiiar to the orbit, whofe longer axis it
the double of the eccentricity ; the center
of the libratory motion, that is the place
where it is fwifteft, will be in the focus
the time of the libration, through the
ieveral foaces, is to be meafured by
fedtors ot the faid ellipfis, fimiiar to thofe
defcribedby the body round the focus
of the and the period of the li-
orbit
;
bratory motion will be the fame with

the period of the revolution.
In any other law of gravity, the e-
quant for the libratory motion, will either
be of a form different from the orbit, or
if it be of the fame form, it muft not
be fimilarly divided.
I may juft mention, that the equant
for the libratory motion, in the cafe of
the Moon, is a curve of the third kind,
or whofe equation is of four dimenfions
but is to be defcribed by an ellipfis, the
Center of the libration not being in the
focus.
From this method of refolving the
motion, it will not be difficult to (hew
the general caufes of the alteration of the
eccentricity and inequality in the motion
of the apogee. For when the line of
apfides is moving towards the Sun, it
may be eafily (hewn, that fince the ex-
ternal force in the apfides, is then centri-
E z fuga|
?
Digitized by Google
5 [68 ]
fug^l, it will contribute to
lengthen
the fpace and time of the libration ; by
lengthening the ipace, it increafes the
eccentricity ; and by lengthening the time
of the libratipn, it prptra&s the time of
the revolution to the apfis, and capfts
what is improperly called a motion of
the apfis forward. But when the line
of apfides is moving to the quadratures,
the external force in the apfides, is at

that time centripetal ; which will con-
tribute to fhorten the fpace and time of
libration; and by ftiortening the fpace
will thereby lefTen the eccentricity, and
by fhortening the time of libration, will
thereby contradt the time of the revolu-
tion to the apfis ; and caufe what is im-
properly called a retrograde motion of
the apfis.
I (hall only add a few remarks, which
Ought to have been made in their proper
places.
As to the motion of the Moon in thq
elliptic epicycle (page have
9.) it fliould
been mentioned, that there is no need
of any accurate apd perfedt defcription of
the curve called an ellipfis, it being only
to {hew the elongation of the Moon,
from the center of the epicycle; which
doth not require any fuch accurate def-
cription.
Digitized by Google
;
'
I 99 ]
If fliould have been faid, that when Fi 2-
the Mcx>n is in any place of its orbit,
fuppofe fomewhere at N, in that half
of the orbit which is next the Sun, it
then being nearer the Sun than the Earth,
has thereby a greater gravity to the Sun.
than the Earth which excefs of gravity*
;
9
according to Sir Ifaac Newton $ method,
confifts of two parts ; one adting in the
line NF, parallel to that which joins
the Earth and Sun ; and the other adting
in the line VB diredted to the Earth
and thefe two forces, being compounded
into one, make
a force directed in the
line NB
; which is in proportion to the
force of gravity, as that line is NB

to T'B nearly* Wherefore, as there is
a force conftantly impelling the Moon
fpmewhere towards the point B y this
force is fuppofed to infledi the motion
of the Moon into a curve line about
that point ; for the fame reafon as the
gravity of it to the Earth, is fuppofed
to infledt its motion into a curve line
about the Earth: not that the Moon

can adtually have fo many diftindt mo-
tions, but the one fimple motion of the
Moon round the Sun is fuppofed to arife
from a compofition of thefe feveral
rnotionso
In
I7°l
In the laft article on the fmaH annual
equations, (page 38.) thefe rules ought
to have been added.
Let M be
the equation of the Sun's
center; Pmean periodical time of
the
the node or apogee ; S the mean fynodi-
cal time of tne Sun's revolution tp the
node or apogee : Then will M be

the annual ec[uation of the node or apo-
gee, according as S and P
are ex-
pounded.
The like rule will ferve for the an-
nual equation of the Moon's mean mo-
tion. If S be put for the Sun's period
P for the mean fynodical period of the
L
Moon to the Sun ; and for the Moon's
period to the Stars : The annual equation
of the Moon's mean motion will be
According to thefe rules wlien ex-

pounded, the equation for the node will
be found to be always in proportion to
the equation of the Sun's center, nearly
as 1 to 13.
The
equation of the apogee to the
equation of the Sun's center, as 10 to 53.
And the equation of the Moon's mean
motion to the fame, as 8 to 77.
.-
it
Digitized by Google
Digitized by Google
igitized by Google
Digitized by Google
Digitized by Google
Digitized by Google
Digitized by Google
C 7* 3
It may be throughout obferved, that
t:l*e propositions are in general terms,
fo as to ferve, mutatis mutandisy for any
other fatellite, as well as the Moon.
There might have been feveral other*

obfervations and remarks made in many
other places, had there been fufficient
rime ror it. But perhaps what I have
already faid may be much,
too confider-
ing the manner in which it is delivered.
£ R R ATV At.
Page 11. 1. ii. for 8c h, read 28th.

» y 1
FINIS.
ft** i
' -
»
• * *»• • •
'
•
\
m
ERRATA.
a • • •
V OLUME I.
AGE 117. for drawing, read draw, p.* f. 2^2?,

r. JÂ' p. 1^4. 1. 7. 10, 20. p. 165. 1. 9. p. 171*
L27. f. right line wbofe power is the area &c r. right line
wbofe fcjuarc is equal to the area &C

p. 166. 1. 25, 19*. f.
right line wbofe power is the reftangle &C. r. right line vohofe
fc/uare is equal to the reftangle &c. p. 192. 1. 23, 24.
r. or A^~ h or 4*~ l%
or A*~~ h I 29. r.
JT*"*' p. 203. dele p. 229. 1. penult, dele is. p.

240. 1. 26. dele near. p. 243. 1. 21. f. when. r. becaufc.
u «f the fame ration - A
p. 272.
-
1. 3. r.
TDLUMfi If.
* *.
PAGE dele Fig.

6. Line 21.
2. p. 50.
for to* read ffce. p. 24, 1. 21.
1. 7. from the bottom, f. F*j.
5, 6, 7. r. Fg. 6, 7, 8. and fo in page following, p.
95. I. 4. from the bottom, and p. 100. 1. 5. f- Averdu-
pois % r. Troy. p. 130. 1. 28. r. and the water , &C p. 140.
r
1- 14. f. andand jchofe. p. 144. 1. «Jt. I but, r.

the, r.
this. p. 161. I. 2. f. way, r. »#7/. p. 169. I 6A.

leave for
time, would otherwife leave. 2 r. receding from
fome x. 1. 1 .
the parts of the body wfeer* it is prejfed, &c. p. 338- L 7-

f. Fg. 1. r. Fig. 2. p. 341. 1. 1. f. Bg. 2. r. Fig- 3. J*
352. J.
-1 * r//ipr/c.
Digitized by Googl
I
Digitized by Google
<
Digitized by Google
ed by Google

Mathematical: Principles

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mathematical: Principles

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mathematical: Principles

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

THE

Sir Isaac Newton

By Sir ISAAC NEWTON.

Of the Motion of Bodies that are re*

If a body is refifted in the ratio of its velocity y

which the body can defcribe in an infinite time. For

Quantities proportional to their differences are

Let Abe to A—B

Proposition II. Theorem II.

If a body is rejiftei in the ratio of its velocity

Case Let the time be divided into equal particles;

continually proportional. Therefore if out of an equal

number of particles there be compounded any equal

of the intermediate terms equally repeated ; and there-

times, will decreafe in the fame ratio.

Proposition III. Problem I.

To define the motion of a body which, in a

rLMs, sMNt, dec. are to the areas qk^lr, rims,

and fo to the fpaces defcribed. Take the fums of the

Corol. 1. Therefore the greateft velocity that the

perpetually a&s upon it, to the refitting force which

. Proposition IV. Problem II.

Sup'pojjrjg the force ofgravity in any fimilar me-

projeftile go from any place D in the di-

ning, to the force of gravity : or (which comes to the

let its fide cut GK in jO. AB

the time DRTG will arrive at the point r, defcri-

thence it will come to its greateft height a in the per-

the time be expounded

— AOov QJ to N, that is, as to C; and CP D

Cor. i. Therefore Rr is equal to

that RX may be equal to ^iat ^ ^ c P a" * s*

iallelogram ACPT be compleated, and D T cutting CP iti

Z be drawn, and RZfbc produced meets D Tin X; Xr till it

J>V % tGT DRxTt ^

and the lams

that i?, (becaufe jgfi and Ctf, and ^C are pro-

DPxDA to CPxAC; that is, as the refiftance to the

of the medium, at the beginning of the motion, be

beginning of the motion is given alfo. Then from

the parabola is augmented in the duplicate of that ra-

Cor. 7. Hence method of determining

DC, be known. Then taking any length for DP or

duft the fame ratio as found by experiment ; and let

the right line S MMM in X, and SX will be the

communicated to the fame quantity of the medium, in

quantity of the difturbed medium, a motion is com-

Of the Motion of Bodies that are refifled

Proposition V. Theorem III.

If a body the duplicate ratio of

For fince the r#fiftanceof the medium i$ proportional

as CKtoCA, and, by divifion, AB Kk^ to AT^ as —

are as their ; and therefore, fince the

and the fpace which any body can defcribe in the

the hyperbola, having CH, CD

To the re<5bmgu!ar afymptotes CD, CH defcribe any

Proposition VII. Theorem V-

motions proportional to the wholes, and will

For the parts of the motions loft are as the refiftancefc

will be $A 2 B- 2 — 2A 3